# Pasilobus Help Center: every article

> Guides for the 23 Pasilobus apps on the Shopify App Store, plus Store Care and the Pasilobus account. Pasilobus builds Shopify apps and, on Store Care, looks after the stores that use them. Every article is also plain Markdown: add .md to its URL.

Pasilobus apps install from the Shopify App Store and run in the Shopify admin. Store owners can also ask Shopify Sidekick about apps marked "Works with Shopify Sidekick"; it searches these guides. People answer support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support. There is no live chat.


# Installation

> Install the app and activate it on your theme

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/installation
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Announcer & Countdown shows announcement bars on your storefront through a Shopify app embed. Installation takes a couple of minutes: install the app, switch the app embed on in your theme, and check that a bar appears.

## Install from Shopify App Store

1. Find [Announcer & Countdown](https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer) on the Shopify App Store
2. Click **Add app**
3. Click **Install app** to confirm

After installation, the app opens and shows a setup guide.

## Switch on the app embed

The app uses a theme app embed to show announcement bars on your storefront. Without it, nothing appears.

**With the setup guide:**

1. Open the **Install on your theme** step
2. In **Select Theme**, pick the theme your customers see (it's marked **(current)**)
3. Click **Activate app on theme**. The theme editor opens with the app embed switched on
4. Click **Save** in the theme editor

Back in the app, the setup guide checks itself off once the embed is on. There's nothing else to confirm.

**Without the setup guide** (or to switch it on in a different theme):

1. Go to **Shopify Admin > Online Store > Themes**
2. Click **Customize** on the theme you want
3. Click the **App embeds** icon in the left sidebar
4. Find **Announcements Bar** (listed under Announcer & Countdown) and toggle it **ON**
5. Click **Save**

## Verify It Works

1. Create a test announcement from the app dashboard
2. Click **Activate** to make it live
3. Visit your storefront -- you should see the announcement bar

If your announcement does not appear, see [Announcements Not Showing](https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/not-showing).

---

# Plans and Pricing

> What Free, Pro and Max include, prices, and what happens on a downgrade

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/plans-and-pricing
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Announcer has three plans. Every plan includes **unlimited announcement bars** and no view limits.

| | Free | Pro | Max |
|---|---|---|---|
| Price | $0 | $4.99 / month | $9.99 / month |
| Announcement bars | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited |
| Countdown timers, rotating, running line and typed bars | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
| 40+ templates | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
| Start and end dates | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
| Storewide bars | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
| Customer account announcements | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
| Analytics totals (views, clicks, click rate) | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ |
| AI announcement generator | 10 per month | Unlimited | Unlimited |
| **Free shipping goal bar** (progress toward free shipping, per market and currency) | | ✓ | ✓ |
| Page targeting (home, product, collection, cart, specific products or collections) | | ✓ | ✓ |
| Recurring weekly schedules | | ✓ | ✓ |
| Per-bar analytics | | ✓ | ✓ |
| A/B testing | | | ✓ |
| Regional variants and translations | | | ✓ |
| Priority support | | | ✓ |

Prices are in USD and billed by Shopify with your Shopify invoice.

## Changing plans

Open **Settings > Plans** in the app (or the plan link on any locked feature) and pick a plan. Shopify asks you to approve the charge.

## What happens when you downgrade

Nothing is deleted. Bars that use a feature your new plan doesn't include (a free shipping goal, page targeting or a recurring schedule on Free; A/B tests and regional variants below Max) are **paused**: they stay in the app, marked *Paused*, and stop showing on your storefront. Upgrade again and they come back as they were.

---

# Using AI to Generate Announcements

> Ask Shopify Sidekick for an announcement bar in plain language

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/ai-generator
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-07-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

You can create and manage announcement bars by asking **Sidekick**, the AI assistant built into your Shopify admin, in plain language. Sidekick opens this app's bar form already filled in -- the message, the name, the colors, the background style and the link -- so you can adjust anything you like and save when you're happy. There is nothing to switch on: the connection ships with the app. **Settings > Sidekick** in the app lists what you can ask.

## Asking Sidekick

Open Sidekick from anywhere in your Shopify admin -- look for the assistant icon -- and describe what you want to announce. The more specific you are, the closer the result will be.

**Examples that work well:**

- "Create an announcement bar with a red background saying free shipping over $50"
- "Put up a Black Friday bar, 50% off everything, animated background"
- "Which of my announcement bars are running right now?"
- "How did my bars perform last week?"
- "Turn off the Black Friday bar"

**Useful details to include:**

- **What you're announcing** -- sale, free shipping, new product, event
- **Key details** -- discount amount, threshold dollar value
- **How it should look** -- a color, or words like animated, gradient, plain
- **Where it should appear** -- top or bottom of the page, all pages or just the home page

## What Sidekick Fills In

- **Message** -- what shoppers read, up to 64 characters
- **Name** -- admin-only, so you can find the bar in your list later
- **Bar type** -- simple, rotating, running line, typed or countdown
- **Background style and colors** -- solid, gradient, radial, striped, split, animated gradient or pulse, in a color you name. Text color is picked automatically for contrast unless you ask for one
- **Link** -- the call-to-action wording and where it points
- **Placement** -- top or bottom, alignment, sticky on scroll, and whether shoppers can dismiss it
- **Visibility** -- all pages, or just the home, product, collection, cart or blog pages

Scheduling, countdown timers, translations, regional variants and A/B tests are not set this way. Add those yourself on the form, or in the bar's settings after saving.

## Reviewing and Saving

Sidekick fills the form in -- it does not save anything. Nothing is on your storefront until you click **Save**, and a saved bar still needs activating before shoppers see it. Every field stays editable, so treat what Sidekick writes as a first draft.

While the form is open you can keep talking to Sidekick to reword the message, and it will rewrite it in place rather than starting over.

## Managing Bars You Already Have

Sidekick can also work with your existing bars:

- **Find a bar** -- ask which bars exist, which one is showing right now, or search by name. Each result comes with a link straight to the bar
- **Check performance** -- ask how your bars are doing and Sidekick reports views, clicks and click-through rate, over the last seven days unless you name a different period. Per-bar performance is part of Pro and Max, so on the Free plan Sidekick will tell you it is not available rather than report numbers
- **Switch a bar on or off** -- "pause the Black Friday bar" takes it down without deleting it; the bar and its content are kept and you can put it back live at any time

Two things it will refuse, and tell you why: activating a bar whose countdown has already run out (give it a new end date first), and activating a regional or A/B variant whose parent bar is switched off. Deleting a bar is something you do yourself in the app.

## Related

- [Using Templates](https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/templates) -- 40+ pre-designed bars if you'd rather start from a design
- [Understanding Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/understanding-analytics) -- the views and clicks Sidekick reports

---

# Using Templates

> Browse 40+ pre-designed announcement templates

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/templates
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-07-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Announcer & Countdown includes 40+ pre-designed announcement templates. Each template comes with message text, a color scheme, and styling that you can use as-is or customize to match your brand. Templates are available on all plans.

## Browse the Template Gallery

From the dashboard, click **Browse 40+ Templates** (or click **Create Announcement** and select **Choose Template**). The gallery shows templates organized by category:

- **Sales & Discounts** -- flash sales, percentage off, BOGO, clearance
- **Shipping** -- free shipping thresholds, express shipping, delivery guarantees
- **Holidays** -- Black Friday, Christmas, Valentine's Day, Mother's Day, Back to School
- **New Products** -- product launches, new collections, restocks, limited editions
- **Store Updates** -- store hours, policy changes, location announcements
- **Urgency** -- limited time offers, low stock warnings, countdown promotions

## Pick a Template

Scroll through the gallery or filter by category. Click a template to see a full preview with the colors and message text. When you find one you like, click **Use This Template**. The template loads into the announcement editor with all settings pre-filled.

## Customize It

Everything in the template can be changed:

- **Message text** -- replace the placeholder copy with your own
- **Link text and URL** -- point to the right page on your store
- **Colors** -- swap in your brand colors
- **Style, position, alignment** -- adjust any design setting
- **Visibility** -- choose which pages show the announcement

Templates are starting points, not locked designs.

## Save and Publish

1. Give the announcement a **name** (for your own reference -- the field starts empty)
2. Click **Save**
3. Click **Activate** in the action bar at the top of the page

If you find a template you want to reuse later, publish it once and then use the **Duplicate** feature to create variations quickly.

---

# Announcement Styles

> Choose how your announcement bar animates and displays messages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/announcement-styles
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every announcement bar has a style that controls how messages are presented and animated. When you have multiple messages in a single bar, the style determines how visitors transition between them. You can set this in the announcement editor under **Announcement Style**.

## Classic

Classic is a straightforward, static display. When you have a single message, it simply shows as-is with no animation. When you have multiple messages, left and right navigation arrows appear so visitors can browse between them at their own pace.

**Best for:**
- Stores that prefer a clean, no-distraction look
- Messages that visitors need time to read (like policy updates or detailed offers)
- Bars where you want the visitor to control the pace

## Fade

Fade automatically cross-fades between your messages every few seconds. One message smoothly fades out while the next fades in, using opacity transitions. Visitors don't need to click anything -- the rotation happens on its own.

**Best for:**
- Bars with 2-4 short messages that rotate in the background
- Keeping the bar visually interesting without being distracting
- Promotions where you want all messages to get equal screen time

## Running Line

Running Line is a ticker or marquee-style animation. All your messages scroll continuously from right to left across the bar. When you have multiple messages, they are separated by dot characters (the centered dot, also known as the interpunct). The scrolling pauses when a visitor hovers over the bar, so they can read the current text.

**Best for:**
- Displaying many messages or a long list of promotions
- Creating a news-ticker feel (flash sales, multiple offers)
- Stores that want continuous movement to draw the eye

## Typed

Typed gives your message a typewriter effect. Characters appear one at a time as if someone is typing them out in real time. Once a message finishes typing, it fades away and the next message begins typing. This creates a dynamic, attention-grabbing sequence.

**Best for:**
- Single, impactful messages you want to emphasize
- Creating a sense of anticipation (countdown to a launch, teaser text)
- Bars where you want the animation itself to draw attention

## Countdown Announcements and Style

When you create a **Countdown Timer** announcement, it always uses the Classic style regardless of what you select in the style dropdown. Countdown timers need a stable, static layout to display the timer digits clearly, so the other animation styles are not applied.

The Announcement Style option only controls how multi-message bars animate between messages. It does not affect other design settings like colors, background style, or positioning.

## Choosing the Right Style

Consider these factors when picking a style:

- **Number of messages** -- Classic works well for 1-2 messages. Fade and Typed work best with 2-5. Running Line shines when you have many messages to show at once.
- **Message length** -- Short, punchy messages suit Running Line and Typed. Longer messages are easier to read in Classic or Fade.
- **Store personality** -- Running Line feels energetic and urgent. Typed feels modern and engaging. Fade is smooth and subtle. Classic is reliable and universal.
- **Mobile visitors** -- All styles work on mobile. Running Line pauses on hover (desktop) but scrolls continuously on touch devices.

## Quick Comparison

| Style | Animation | Visitor Control | Works With Single Message |
|-------|-----------|-----------------|--------------------------|
| Classic | None (static) | Arrows to browse | Yes |
| Fade | Auto cross-fade | No (automatic) | Yes, but no visible animation |
| Running Line | Continuous scroll | Pause on hover | Yes, scrolls single message |
| Typed | Typewriter effect | No (automatic) | Yes |

---

# Background Styles

> Customize the background appearance of your announcement bar

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/background-styles
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-07-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Background styles let you control the visual appearance behind your announcement text. Instead of a plain single-color background, you can add gradients, stripes, animations, and other effects to make your bar stand out and match your brand.

## Color Fields

Before choosing a background style, it helps to understand the three color fields available in the editor:

- **Background** -- The primary color of your bar. Used by every background style as the base or dominant color.
- **Text** -- The color of your message text and any link text. Choose something with strong contrast against your background.
- **Secondary** -- Used alongside the background color for styles that blend or alternate two colors (gradients, stripes, split, etc.). Not visible when using the Solid style.

## The Seven Background Styles

Each background style uses these color fields differently. You can switch between styles at any time and the preview updates immediately.

## Solid

A single, flat background color. The entire bar is filled with your Background Color. This is the simplest and most readable option.

**When to use:** Clean, professional bars. When your message and colors speak for themselves. Works with any brand.

## Gradient

A linear gradient that blends from your Background Color on the left to your Secondary Color on the right. The transition is smooth and horizontal.

**When to use:** Modern, polished look. Great for sales and promotions where you want the bar to feel dynamic without animation.

## Radial

A circular gradient that starts with the Secondary Color at the center and radiates outward to the Background Color at the edges. This creates a spotlight or glow effect behind your text.

**When to use:** Drawing attention to the center of the bar where your message sits. Works well with bold, short messages.

## Striped

Diagonal repeating stripes at a 45-degree angle, alternating between the Background Color and Secondary Color. This creates a construction-tape or caution-stripe pattern.

**When to use:** Urgent messages, clearance sales, or limited-time offers. The stripes naturally convey "attention" and "action required."

## Split

The bar is divided in half -- the left side uses the Background Color and the right side uses the Secondary Color. A clean, hard divide with no blending.

**When to use:** Two-tone branding, contrast effects, or when you want a bold, graphic look that stands apart from typical announcement bars.

## Animated Gradient

Works like the standard Gradient (left-to-right blend of Background Color and Secondary Color), but the gradient slowly shifts and animates. The background size is set to 400%, so the colors appear to move across the bar continuously.

**When to use:** Catching the eye on landing pages. Effective for major sales, product launches, or any time you want the bar itself to feel alive and moving.

## Pulse

Alternates between your Background Color and Secondary Color with a glowing box-shadow effect. The bar gently pulses, creating a breathing or heartbeat-like animation.

**When to use:** Time-sensitive messages where urgency matters. Countdown-adjacent promotions, last-chance sales, or any announcement that benefits from a sense of urgency.

## Choosing Colors That Work

Some background styles require more thought about color pairing than others:

- **Solid** -- Focus on contrast between Background Color and Text Color. Secondary Color is not used.
- **Gradient and Radial** -- Choose two colors that blend well together. Colors close on the color wheel (blue and purple, orange and red) create smooth transitions. Opposite colors (red and green) can feel jarring.
- **Striped and Split** -- These show both colors side by side, so they should complement each other clearly. High contrast between the two colors makes the pattern more visible.
- **Animated Gradient and Pulse** -- Since these animate, test them on your store to make sure the movement is pleasant and your text stays readable throughout the cycle.

## Quick Reference

| Style | Colors Used | Animated | Best For |
|-------|------------|----------|----------|
| Solid | Background only | No | Professional, minimal bars |
| Gradient | Background + Secondary | No | Modern sales and promos |
| Radial | Background + Secondary | No | Centering attention on text |
| Striped | Background + Secondary | No | Urgent, clearance messages |
| Split | Background + Secondary | No | Bold, two-tone branding |
| Animated Gradient | Background + Secondary | Yes | Major launches, eye-catching bars |
| Pulse | Background + Secondary | Yes | Time-sensitive, urgency-driven |

---

# Free Shipping Goal Bar

> Show shoppers how much more to spend for free shipping, per market and currency

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/free-shipping-goal
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A free shipping goal bar tells each shopper how much more they need to spend to get free shipping, in their own currency, and updates as they add or remove items. Once the cart reaches the goal, the bar says so.

The free shipping goal bar is part of the **Pro** plan and up. On the Free plan you can set one up and save it; it stays paused on your storefront until you upgrade.

## What shoppers see

- **Empty cart:** "Free shipping on orders over $50"
- **Cart below the goal:** "Add $10 more to unlock free shipping", with a progress line along the bottom of the bar
- **Goal reached:** "🎉 You've unlocked free shipping!"

The bar updates when the cart changes, including in a cart drawer: when the shopper adds an item, changes a quantity or removes something, the amount and the progress line follow.

## Create one

1. Go to **Announcement Bars** and click **Create announcement bar**.
2. Under **Announcement type**, choose **Free shipping goal**.
3. The first message becomes the progress line. It is filled in for you: "Add {{remaining}} more to unlock free shipping". Edit the wording if you like.
4. In the **Free shipping goal** card, set:
   - **Free shipping:** *Over a minimum order amount*, or *On every order* if shipping is always free.
   - **Minimum order amount**, in your store's currency.
   - **Count toward the goal:** the cart total after discounts (what Shopify uses for most free shipping rates), or the item subtotal before discounts.
   - **Show a progress bar** on or off.
5. Adjust the other messages if you like, then click **Save** and **Activate**.

## Placeholders

Use these in any of the bar's messages:

| Placeholder | Becomes |
|---|---|
| `{{remaining}}` | The amount the shopper still needs to spend, in their currency |
| `{{goal}}` | The minimum order amount, in their currency |
| `{{country}}` | The shopper's country |

## Different goals per market or country

If your free shipping minimum differs by region, add rows under **Goals by market or country**:

- **Market handle:** the handle of a Shopify market (for example `eu` or `international`). The card lists your markets' handles.
- **Country code:** a two-letter code such as `DE` or `CA`.
- **Free shipping:** over a minimum, on every order, or *Not available*.
- **Minimum** and, optionally, **Currency**. Leave the currency empty to enter the amount in your store's currency (it is converted for shoppers paying in another currency). Enter a currency such as `EUR` to give an exact amount in that currency: a shopper paying in euros then sees exactly "€60".

A market row wins over a country row. Shoppers who match neither get the minimum from the top of the card.

Announcer uses the market and country Shopify picked for the shopper (the one checkout uses), not a guess from their IP address, so the bar and checkout agree.

### Where there is no free shipping

For a row set to *Not available*, the bar shows the **No free shipping message**, for example "Free shipping isn't available for {{country}} yet". Leave that message empty to hide the bar for those shoppers.

## Make sure it matches checkout

The bar shows the goal you enter; it does not read your shipping rates. Set the same minimum as your free shipping rate (Settings > Shipping and delivery) or your automatic free shipping discount, and update the bar if you change them.

## Coming from Free Shipping Bar

If you use Pasilobus **Free Shipping Bar** on the same store, Announcer offers to import it: on the Announcer home page, click **Import from Free Shipping Bar**. Announcer creates a draft free shipping goal bar with:

- your free shipping minimum, and a country row for every country whose goal differs (taken from the shipping zones and discounts Free Shipping Bar had detected, or from your manual goals);
- your bar wording;
- whether the goal counts the cart total or the subtotal, and whether the bar hides where free shipping isn't available.

Review the draft, then activate it. Nothing changes in Free Shipping Bar. Once the Announcer bar is live, turn off the Free Shipping Bar app embed in your theme (or uninstall Free Shipping Bar) so shoppers don't see two bars.

Not imported: the bar styling from your theme editor, the product page and cart page placements, milestones and custom CSS.

---

# Countdown Timers

> Add urgency with countdown timers in your announcements

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/countdown-timers
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-07-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Countdown timers add a live, ticking clock to your announcement bar that counts down to a specific date and time. They are one of the most effective tools for creating urgency around sales, product launches, and limited-time offers.

## Creating a Countdown Announcement

1. Open the announcement editor (create new or edit existing)
2. In the **Announcement Type** dropdown, select **Countdown Timer**
3. Set your **Target Date and Time** using the date picker -- this is the moment the countdown reaches zero
4. Write your message text (e.g., "Summer Sale ends in")
5. Choose a countdown visual style
6. Configure colors, positioning, and other settings as usual
7. Save and publish

The target date and time are displayed in your account's timezone, which is set in your Shopify admin under **Settings > General**.

## Countdown Visual Styles

You can choose from five visual styles that control how the countdown digits are rendered:

- **Flip Cards** (default) -- Each unit (days, hours, minutes, seconds) appears on a card with a flip animation as digits change. This is the most visually striking option and works well for major promotions.
- **Compact** -- Simple inline text showing the countdown as `2d 5h 30m 15s`. Takes up minimal space and blends naturally with your message text.
- **Boxes** -- Each time unit sits inside a bordered box. Clean and structured, good for stores that prefer a contained, organized look.
- **Circles** -- Circular progress indicators surround each time unit. The circles deplete as time passes, providing a strong visual cue of urgency.
- **Minimal** -- Just the numbers with no decoration, borders, or containers. The countdown integrates seamlessly into your message without drawing attention to itself as a separate element.

## Countdown Position

By default, the countdown timer appears **after your message text**. You can change this:

- **Before message** -- The countdown appears first, followed by your text. Example: `[02:15:30:45] Don't miss our biggest sale!`
- **After message** (default) -- Your text appears first, then the countdown. Example: `Sale ends in [02:15:30:45]`

## Inline Countdown with the {countdown} Placeholder

For more control over where the countdown appears within your message, use the `{countdown}` placeholder. Place it anywhere in your message text and the countdown timer will render at that exact position.

**Examples:**
- `Sale ends in {countdown} -- shop now!`
- `Only {countdown} left to save 40%`
- `{countdown} until our new collection drops`

When you use the `{countdown}` placeholder, the Before/After position setting is ignored since you are manually controlling placement.

## Expired Message

You can set an optional message that replaces the countdown once it reaches zero. This prevents visitors from seeing `00:00:00:00` on your bar.

**How to set it:**
1. In the countdown settings, find the **Expired Message** field
2. Enter your replacement text

**Examples:**
- `Sale has ended! Check back soon`
- `This offer has expired`
- `Thanks for shopping with us!`

If you leave the expired message blank, the message stops showing once the timer reaches zero -- a bar with nothing else on it disappears from your storefront, and the app marks it **Expired**. Set an expired message when you want the bar to stay up after the timer ends.

## Style and Design Notes

Countdown Timer announcements always use the **Classic** announcement style. Even if you select Fade, Running Line, or Typed in the style dropdown, the bar will render as Classic. This ensures the timer digits remain stable and readable without competing animations.

All other design options work normally with countdowns -- background styles, colors, positioning, sticky/inline display, dismissibility, and link settings all apply as expected.

---

# Links and Call-to-Action

> Add clickable links and buttons to drive traffic

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/links-and-ctas
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Adding a link to your announcement bar turns it from a passive message into an active driver of traffic. Whether you want visitors to shop a sale, view a new collection, or visit a specific page, links give them a clear next step.

## Three Link Styles

When you add a link to an announcement, you choose one of three styles that determines how the link appears in the bar.

## Button

A pill-shaped button that stands out from the message text. The colors are automatically inverted -- your Text Color becomes the button's background, and your Background Color becomes the button's text. This contrast makes the button visually distinct and easy to spot.

**Setup:**
- Set your **Link Text** (e.g., "Shop Now", "View Collection", "Get 20% Off")
- Set your **Link URL** (e.g., `/collections/sale`)

**Best for:** High-priority calls to action where you want the link to stand out. Sales, product launches, and promotions that need maximum click-through.

## Text Link

A traditional underlined text link that appears in the bar's Text Color. It blends more naturally with the message and feels less aggressive than a button.

**Setup:**
- Set your **Link Text** (e.g., "Learn More", "See Details", "Shop Sale")
- Set your **Link URL** (e.g., `/pages/sale-info`)

**Best for:** Informational links, secondary calls to action, or announcements where you want the message to be the focus with a subtle link option.

## Entire Bar Clickable

The whole announcement bar becomes one large clickable area. No separate button or link text is shown -- the visitor clicks anywhere on the bar to navigate to your URL. The cursor changes to a pointer on hover to signal that the bar is interactive.

**Setup:**
- Set your **Link URL** (e.g., `/collections/new-arrivals`)
- Link Text is not needed (the bar itself is the link)

**Best for:** Simple, clean bars where the message is the call to action. Works well with short, direct messages like "New arrivals are here" or "Shop our biggest sale ever."

## Positioning Links with the {link} Placeholder

By default, the link or button appears after your message text. If you want to control exactly where it shows up, use the `{link}` placeholder in your message.

**Examples:**
- `Big sale! {link} to save 20%` -- the button or link text appears between "Big sale!" and "to save 20%"
- `Free shipping on all orders. {link}` -- same as default, link at the end
- `{link} -- our biggest sale starts now` -- link appears at the very beginning

Without a `{link}` placeholder, the link or button is automatically appended after your message text.

The `{link}` placeholder works with both Button and Text Link styles. It has no effect when using Entire Bar Clickable, since the entire bar is the link.

> **Tip:** Use the **Button** style for your primary call-to-action (like "Shop Now" during a sale). Use **Text Link** for secondary or informational links where you want the message itself to be the focus.

---

# Multiple Messages

> Display multiple messages in a single announcement bar

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/multiple-messages
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Announcement bars are not limited to a single line of text. You can add
several messages to one bar and let visitors see all of them without
cluttering the page. This is useful when you have more than one promotion,
shipping notice, or update to share at the same time.

## Adding Messages

Open an announcement bar in the editor and click the **Add Message** button
below the existing message fields. A new message block appears with its own
body text, link settings, and countdown settings. You can add as many
messages as you need.

Each message is independent: it can link to a different URL, have its own
countdown timer, and carry its own set of translations.

## How Messages Rotate

The way visitors move between messages depends on the announcement style you
have selected:

- **Classic** -- Left and right navigation arrows appear on the bar.
  Visitors click to browse between messages at their own pace.
- **Fade** -- Messages cross-fade automatically on a timer. No manual
  navigation is needed.
- **Running Line** -- All messages scroll continuously from right to left,
  separated by a dot character ( · ). Every message is visible in the
  scrolling ticker.
- **Typed** -- Messages are typed out on screen one character at a time.
  When one message finishes, the next one begins automatically.

## Countdown Bars

Bars that use the **Countdown** style only support a single message. The
Add Message button is not available for this style because the countdown
timer occupies the full width of the bar.

## Removing a Message

When a bar has more than one message, each message block shows a **Remove**
button. Click it to delete that message. The button is hidden when only one
message remains, because every bar needs at least one message.

> **Tips:**
>
> - Keep each message concise. There is a **64-character limit** per message to make sure text displays well on all screen sizes.
> - Put the most important message first. In Classic and Fade styles it is the one visitors see on load.
> - Preview the bar after adding messages to make sure the rotation or scrolling feels right for your store.

---

# Positioning and Display

> Control where and how your announcement bar appears

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/positioning-and-display
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

These settings control where the announcement bar appears on the page and
how it looks. All of them update the live preview in real time, so you can
experiment without saving first.

## Position

Choose where the bar sits relative to the rest of the page:

- **Top** (default) -- The bar appears above the page content, typically
  above or just below the header.
- **Bottom** -- The bar appears below the page content, fixed to the bottom
  of the viewport.

Announcer keeps room for top bars while the page loads, so the page does not
jump down when they appear. If a top bar wraps onto two lines on a phone, the
page can still move by that extra line; one rotating bar with several
messages avoids that best.

Top positioning is the most common choice. Bottom positioning works well for
cookie notices, consent banners, or secondary promotions that should not
compete with the main header area.

## Display

Controls the visual width and shape of the bar:

- **Inline** -- The bar spans the full width of the page with square
  corners. It blends into the layout as a continuous strip.
- **Floating** -- The bar is narrower than the page, centered horizontally,
  and has rounded corners with a small margin around it. This gives it a
  card-like appearance that stands out from the page.

## Sticky

When **Sticky** is enabled, the bar stays visible as visitors scroll down
the page. It remains pinned to its position (top or bottom) instead of
scrolling away.

Enable this for important messages that visitors should always see, such as
a limited-time offer or a shipping deadline. Disable it for less critical
announcements so the bar scrolls out of view and does not take up permanent
screen space.

## Alignment

Controls the horizontal alignment of text inside the bar:

- **Left** -- Text is aligned to the left edge.
- **Center** (default) -- Text is centered in the bar.
- **Right** -- Text is aligned to the right edge.

Center alignment works best for short, single-line messages. Left alignment
can be more readable for longer text. Right alignment is uncommon but
available if your design calls for it.

## Dismissible

When **Dismissible** is enabled, a small **X** close button appears on the
bar. Visitors can click it to hide the announcement for the rest of their
session.

This is a good choice for non-critical announcements like welcome messages
or newsletter sign-up prompts. For time-sensitive promotions or important
shipping notices, you may want to leave it disabled so the bar stays visible
throughout the visit.

## Combining Settings

These settings work together. A few common combinations:

| Goal | Position | Display | Sticky | Dismissible |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Standard promo banner | Top | Inline | Off | Off |
| Persistent shipping notice | Top | Inline | On | Off |
| Floating sale alert | Top | Floating | On | Yes |
| Cookie/consent banner | Bottom | Inline | On | Yes |

Try different combinations in the preview to find what fits your store.

---

# Visibility and Page Targeting

> Control which pages show your announcement

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/visibility
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

By default an announcement bar appears on every page of your store. The
visibility setting lets you narrow that down so the bar only shows on the
pages where it is relevant. A shipping promotion might only make sense on
product pages, while a blog-specific announcement should only appear on
blog posts.

## Visibility Options

Open the announcement bar in the editor and look for the **Visibility**
dropdown. The following options are available:

### All Pages

Shows the bar on every page of your store. This is the default and is the
right choice for store-wide promotions, holiday announcements, or any
message that applies everywhere.

### Home Page

The bar only appears on the home (index) page. Use this for welcome
messages or hero-level promotions that should greet visitors when they
first land on your store.

### All Product Pages

The bar appears on every individual product page but not on collections,
the home page, or other pages. This is useful for product-level offers
like "Free engraving on all items" or "Ships within 24 hours."

### All Collection Pages

The bar appears only on collection listing pages. Good for collection-wide
sales such as "20% off the entire Summer collection."

### All Collection & Product Pages

Combines the two options above. The bar shows on both collection pages and
individual product pages. Use this when a promotion applies to browsing and
buying.

### Specific Products

Choose one or more individual products from a picker. The bar will only
appear on those product pages. Ideal for highlighting a deal on a single
bestseller or a small set of featured items.

### Specific Collections

Choose one or more individual collections from a picker. The bar will only
appear on those collection pages. Useful for targeted seasonal or category
promotions.

### Cart Page

The bar only appears on the cart page. This is a good spot for messages
like "You're $15 away from free shipping" or "Orders placed before 2 PM
ship today."

### Blog & Articles

The bar appears on the blog index and on individual blog article pages.
Use this for blog-specific calls to action such as "Subscribe to our
newsletter" or "New post every Friday."

### Theme Block (Custom)

This option lets you place the bar inside a specific theme section using a
custom block ID.

1. Select **Theme Block (Custom)** from the visibility dropdown.
2. Save the announcement bar.
3. After saving, a **Block ID** is generated and displayed in the editor.
4. Copy the Block ID.
5. In the Shopify theme editor, add a custom block to the section where you
   want the bar to appear and paste the Block ID.

This gives you full control over placement. You can put the bar inside a
product template, a custom landing page section, or anywhere else your
theme supports blocks.

> **Tips:**
>
> - You can create multiple announcement bars with different visibility settings. For example, one bar for the home page and a separate bar for product pages, each with its own message and style.
> - Preview the bar on different pages to confirm it appears where you expect.
> - If the bar does not show up, double-check that the visibility setting matches the page you are viewing.

---

# Customer Account Announcements

> Show an announcement inside your store's customer account pages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/customer-account-announcements
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

An announcement bar can appear in two places: on your storefront (the default)
or inside your store's **customer account** pages -- the screens a signed-in
shopper sees when they view their orders and profile. A customer-account
announcement is a simple, native-looking notice for logged-in customers, and it
is a good spot for order updates, loyalty perks, account-only offers, or a link
to a survey.

Each bar targets one place at a time. The **Where it shows** setting at the top
of the editor decides which.

## Where it Shows

At the top of the announcement editor, under **Status and display**, the
**Where it shows** dropdown has two options:

- **Storefront** (default) -- The bar appears on your online store, with all of
  the styling, targeting, and scheduling options.
- **Customer accounts** -- The bar appears inside customer account pages
  instead of the storefront.

Choosing **Customer accounts** simplifies the editor: the settings that only
make sense on the storefront are hidden, because customer-account announcements
use your store's native account styling.

## Adding the Extension

Customer-account announcements render through a Shopify **customer account
announcement extension**. This is an optional component that you add once to
your customer accounts.

When you select **Customer accounts**, the editor shows a short reminder with a
**Manage extensions** link. From there you can open the Extensions page to add
the customer account announcement component. Until the extension is added to
your customer accounts, the bar has nowhere to display.

## What Appears in Customer Accounts

Customer-account announcements are intentionally simple. A bar shows:

- **The first message** and its link, on a single row.
- **Your store's native customer-account styling**, so it matches the rest of
  the account pages automatically.
- **Alignment** -- left, center, or right, set in the **Design** section.

## What Does Not Apply

Because the announcement uses the native customer-account style, storefront-only
options do not apply and are hidden while **Customer accounts** is selected:

- Background and text colors, and background styles (gradient, striped, etc.)
- Animated countdown timers. A countdown bar shows the time left as plain text
  (for example 2d 4h 15m) where `{countdown}` sits, worked out when the page loads,
  and its fallback message once the countdown ends
- Animation styles (fade, running line, typed)
- Sticky and dismissible behavior
- Position and display mode
- Page targeting (customer-account announcements are not page-specific)
- Additional messages -- only the first message is shown

If you need any of those, use a **Storefront** bar instead.

## Setting One Up

1. Open or create an announcement bar.
2. Under **Status and display**, set **Where it shows** to **Customer
   accounts**.
3. If you have not already, use the **Manage extensions** link to add the
   customer account announcement extension to your customer accounts.
4. Write your **message** and, optionally, add a **link** with link text.
5. In **Design**, choose an **alignment** (left, center, or right).
6. Save. The preview shows how the notice will look in the account pages.

Switching **Where it shows** back to **Storefront** restores all of the
storefront styling and targeting options for that bar.

---

# Message Translations

> Provide announcement messages in multiple languages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/translations
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-07-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If your store serves customers in more than one language, you can provide
translated versions of each announcement message. When a visitor's browser
language or Shopify market language matches one of your translations, the
bar automatically shows the translated text instead of the default message.

## How It Works

Each message in an announcement bar can carry translations for multiple
languages. The translations are stored as JSON alongside the message and
are preserved even when you edit other settings on the bar.

When the bar loads on the storefront, it checks the visitor's language in
this order:

1. The Shopify market language for the current storefront context.
2. The visitor's browser language.

If a translation exists for that language, it replaces the default message
text. If no translation matches, the default message text is shown as-is.

## Adding Translations

Translations are generated for you. You don't enter each language by hand --
the app translates every message into the other languages your store is set
up for, and you review the result.

1. Add the languages you sell in on the **Translations** settings page. If
   only one language is configured, there is nothing to translate into and
   the page tells you so.
2. Open the announcement bar from your list to reach its detail page.
3. Under **Manage this bar**, click **Translations**.
4. The page lists the languages your messages will be translated into.
   Translations are generated the next time you save the bar.
5. Come back to the same page to review the generated text. Each message
   shows its original wording with an editable field per language.
6. Adjust anything that reads awkwardly, then click **Save translations**.

Translations live on their own page rather than in the bar editor, so the
main editing screen stays focused on design.

> Translations are available on the **Max** plan. On other
> plans the page is visible but the fields are disabled, so you can see how it
> works before upgrading.

## Per-Message Translations

Translations are tied to individual messages, not to the bar as a whole.
In a multi-message bar, each message can have its own set of translations.
This means:

- Message 1 could have French and Spanish translations.
- Message 2 could have only a French translation.
- Message 3 could have no translations at all.

Each message falls back to its own default text independently.

## What Gets Translated

Only the **message body text** is translated. Other parts of the bar such
as the countdown timer labels, close button, and navigation arrows use
their own localization and are not affected by message translations.

> **Tips:**
>
> - Keep translated messages within the same 64-character limit as the default text. Some languages are more verbose than others, so check that translations fit well in the bar.
> - Preview the bar with different languages active to confirm the translated text displays correctly.
> - If you remove a language from your Shopify markets, the stored translations for that language are kept but will no longer be shown. You can remove them manually if you want to clean up.
> - Translations work with all announcement styles: Classic, Fade, Running Line, and Typed.

---

# Scheduling Announcements

> Schedule announcements for specific dates and times

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/scheduling
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Advanced Features
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Scheduling lets you prepare announcement bars ahead of time and have them automatically go live and expire on specific dates. This is useful for planned promotions, holiday campaigns, or any time-sensitive message where you want hands-off control over when visitors see your bar.

## Announcement States

Every announcement bar is in one of four states:

- **Live** -- The bar is currently visible to visitors. The published date is in the past (or now) and it has not expired.
- **Scheduled** -- The bar has a published date set in the future. It will automatically go live when that date arrives.
- **Expired** -- The bar's expiry date has passed. It is no longer shown to visitors.
- **Draft** -- The bar has not been published. It stays hidden until you publish it.

The current state always shows in the **Status** card in the sidebar of the editor, along with the reason (for example, "Expired on Jun 9"), so you can tell at a glance whether a bar is showing.

## Publishing and Drafts

When you create a bar, clicking **Save** publishes it -- it goes live right away, subject to any start or end dates you set. If you are still building it and do not want it visible yet, click **Save as draft** instead: the bar stays hidden until you are ready.

**Duplicate** makes a copy as a draft, so you can edit it before it goes live.

Saving an existing bar never changes whether it is live -- publishing is a deliberate action:

- **Activate** (in the page header) publishes the bar. If its schedule has already ended, activating clears the old end date so the bar shows again.
- **Deactivate** (in the page header) moves a live bar back to Draft. Its schedule is kept, so you can reactivate it later without re-entering the dates.
- **Save** stores your changes and keeps you on the editor without touching the bar's live status. **Save as draft** stores your changes and unpublishes.

## Setting a Start Date

The **Published at** field controls when a published bar goes live. Leave it blank to go live as soon as the bar is published, or pick a future date and time -- the bar stays in the **Scheduled** state until that moment, then automatically switches to Live.

Pick the day in the date field and the time in the list just below it (every half hour).

## Setting an End Date

The **Expires at** field controls when the bar automatically deactivates.

- Set an expiry date to have the bar stop showing after a specific date and time.
- Leave it blank if you want the bar to stay live indefinitely (until you manually deactivate it).
- Once the expiry date passes, the bar moves to the Expired state and is no longer visible.

## Timezones

All dates and times are entered and displayed in your store's timezone, the one set in your Shopify admin under **Settings > General**. That holds for everyone on your team: a colleague working from another timezone sees and saves the same store times, and saving never moves a date.

## Combining Scheduling with Countdown Timers

If your announcement uses the **Countdown Timer** type, the countdown automatically uses the **Expires at** date as its target. This means:

- The countdown ticks down toward the expiry date.
- When the expiry date passes, the countdown reaches zero and the bar deactivates (or shows your expired message if configured).

This makes it easy to run a sale with a live countdown -- set the expiry to your sale end time and both the countdown and the bar's visibility are handled automatically.

## Recurring Schedules

If you need an announcement to appear on specific days or during certain hours each week, use a recurring schedule instead. See [Recurring Schedules](https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/recurring-schedules) for details.

> **Tip:** For time-sensitive promotions, combine a start/end date with a countdown timer. The countdown ticks down to your expiry date, and the bar disappears automatically when it reaches zero.

---

# Recurring Schedules

> Show announcements on specific days and times each week

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/recurring-schedules
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Advanced Features
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Recurring schedules let you show an announcement bar only on specific days of the week and optionally during certain hours. Instead of setting a single start and end date, the bar automatically turns on and off each week based on your schedule.

## When to Use Recurring Schedules

Recurring schedules are useful when your announcement applies to a repeating pattern rather than a one-time event:

- **Weekend sales** -- Show a bar every Friday through Sunday
- **Happy hour promotions** -- Display during specific hours on weekdays
- **Business hours** -- Show a "We're open" or "Live chat available" bar during store hours

## Setting Up a Recurring Schedule

1. Open the announcement editor.
2. In the **Schedule** section, select **Recurring days & times**.
3. Click the days you want the bar to appear (Sun through Sat). Selected days are highlighted.
4. Optionally set a **time window** by entering start and end times. If left blank, the bar shows all day on the selected days.
5. Save the announcement.

## How It Works

- The bar checks the current day and time against your schedule using your account timezone.
- On selected days (and within the time window if set), the bar is visible to visitors.
- Outside the schedule, the bar is hidden automatically.
- A time window can cross midnight. Monday 22:00 to 02:00 runs from Monday 22:00 until Tuesday 02:00.
- The schedule repeats every week until you change or remove it.

## Combining with Start and End Dates

You can use either a recurring schedule or start/end dates, but not both at the same time. If you need a recurring bar that only runs during a specific period (e.g., every weekend in December), set the recurring schedule and manually deactivate it when the period ends.

> **Tip:** Recurring schedules are available on the Pro plan and above.

---

# Regional Variants

> Show different announcements for different markets and languages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/regional-variants
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Advanced Features
Last updated: 2026-07-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Regional variants let you create different versions of an announcement bar for different Shopify markets and languages. A visitor in Japan sees a Japanese version, a visitor in France sees a French version, and everyone else sees your original. This feature is available on the **Max** plan.

## Why Use Regional Variants

A single message rarely works for every audience. Regional variants let you:

- Translate announcement text into different languages.
- Tailor promotions to specific markets (different sale dates, shipping terms, or product availability).
- Combine both -- show market-specific content in the visitor's language.

## Variant Types

There are three types of regional variants, listed from broadest to most specific:

| Type | Targets | Example |
|------|---------|---------|
| **Market-specific** | Visitors in a particular Shopify market | "Free shipping across Europe" for the EU market |
| **Language-specific** | Visitors browsing in a particular language | French translation for all French-speaking visitors |
| **Market + Language** | Visitors in a specific market AND language | French content specifically for the France market |

## How Precedence Works

When a visitor loads your store, Announcer picks the most specific matching variant:

1. **Market + Language** -- Checked first. If a variant matches both the visitor's market and language, it is shown.
2. **Language-only** -- Checked next. If a variant matches the visitor's language (regardless of market), it is shown.
3. **Market-only** -- Checked next. If a variant matches the visitor's market (regardless of language), it is shown.
4. **Original** -- If no variant matches, the original announcement is shown as a fallback.

**Example:** You have an announcement with these variants:
- Original: "Free shipping on orders over $50"
- France market variant: "Livraison gratuite en France"
- French language variant: "Livraison gratuite pour les commandes de plus de 50$"
- France + French variant: "Livraison gratuite en France pour toute commande"

A visitor in France browsing in French sees the France + French variant. A visitor in Canada browsing in French sees the French language variant. A visitor in France browsing in English sees the France market variant. Everyone else sees the original.

## Creating a Regional Variant

1. Open an existing announcement bar from your list to reach its detail page.
2. Under **Manage this bar**, click **Regional variants**.
3. Click **Add regional variant**.
4. Give the variant a name so you can recognise it later, such as "French Market".
5. Pick a **Target Market**, a **Language**, or both. Each one defaults to "All", so leaving a dropdown alone means the variant is not narrowed by that dimension -- that is how you get a market-only, language-only, or market-and-language variant. Markets that already have a variant are shown but not selectable.
6. Optionally copy messages from the original to use as a starting point.
7. Create the variant, then customize its messages, links, countdown settings, and styling.

## What Each Variant Controls

Each regional variant has its own independent settings for:

- Messages (text and rotating messages)
- Link URL and link style
- Countdown timer settings
- Expired message text

The variant inherits the visual style (colors, fonts, position) from the original announcement unless overridden.

> **Tips:**
>
> - **Start with your largest audiences.** Check your Shopify analytics to see which markets and languages drive the most traffic, then create variants for those first.
> - **Use the copy feature.** When creating a variant, copy from the original so you only need to translate or adjust rather than start from scratch.
> - **Test your variants.** Use Shopify's market and language preview tools to verify each variant displays correctly.

---

# A/B Testing

> Test different announcement versions to optimize performance

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/ab-testing
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Advanced Features
Last updated: 2026-07-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A/B testing lets you compare different versions of an announcement bar to see which one performs better. Show version A to some visitors and version B to others, then use the analytics to pick the winner. This feature is available on the **Max** plan.

## Why A/B Test

Small changes can have a big impact on clicks. A/B testing removes guesswork by giving you real data on what works. You might test:

- Different message wording ("Free Shipping" vs. "We Ship Free")
- Different call-to-action text ("Shop Now" vs. "See the Sale")
- Different colors or styles
- With or without a countdown timer

## How It Works

When you create an A/B test, visitors are randomly split between the original announcement and the test variant based on the traffic percentage you set. Each visitor consistently sees the same version during their session so the experience is not jarring.

Both versions track views and clicks independently so you can compare performance directly.

## Creating an A/B Test

1. Open an existing announcement bar from your list to reach its detail page.
2. Under **Manage this bar**, click **A/B test**.
3. Click **Create A/B test**.
4. Give the variant a name so you can tell the two versions apart in your results.
5. Set the **traffic percentage** to control how visitors are split. For example, 50 gives each version equal traffic. The maximum is whatever is left over from any variants you already created.
6. Leave **copy messages** checked to start from a copy of the current bar's messages, then edit what you want to test. Uncheck it to start from scratch.
7. Create the test, then edit the variant's messages, links, or styling.

The test only starts once the announcement bar itself is active. If the bar
is still a draft or scheduled for later, the A/B test page tells you when it
will begin.

## Setting Traffic Percentage

The traffic percentage determines how many visitors see the test variant versus the original.

- **50%** -- Even split. Best for a fair comparison when you want results quickly.
- **20-30%** -- Lower risk. Shows the test to a smaller group while most visitors see your proven original.
- **10%** -- Conservative. Useful when you want to test something experimental without affecting most visitors.

The remaining percentage automatically goes to the original.

## Reading the Results

Once your A/B test has been running and collecting data, compare these metrics:

| Metric | What It Tells You |
|--------|-------------------|
| **Views** | How many times each version was displayed |
| **Clicks** | How many times visitors clicked the link on each version |
| **Click Rate** | Clicks divided by views -- the key comparison metric |

Look at the click rate to determine the winner. A higher click rate means that version is more effective at driving visitor action.

## Applying the Winner

Once you have enough data to be confident in a winner:

1. Note the message, style, and settings of the winning variant.
2. Update the original announcement to match the winner (or keep it if the original won).
3. Remove the A/B test variant.

> **Tips:**
>
> - **Test one thing at a time.** If you change both the message and the color, you will not know which change caused the difference.
> - **Let tests run long enough.** A few hours of data is not reliable. Aim for at least several days or a meaningful number of views before drawing conclusions.
> - **Start with high-impact changes.** Test message wording and CTA text before testing small style tweaks.
> - **Use a 50/50 split** for the fastest, most reliable results.

---

# Shopify Flow Automations

> Automate your store when an announcement bar starts or stops

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/shopify-flow
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Advanced Features
Last updated: 2026-07-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Shopify Flow is Shopify's own automation tool. It makes your store do something automatically when an event happens -- post to Slack, email your team, add a tag -- without any code. Flow is a free app from Shopify; if you don't have it yet, install it from the Shopify App Store.

This app publishes two events to Flow, so you can build workflows around your announcement bars starting and ending. There is nothing to switch on: the connection ships with the app. You can see both events listed under **Settings > Integrations**, along with a button that opens Flow.

## The Two Triggers

These are called **triggers** in Flow. You pick one as the starting point of a workflow, and they appear in Flow's trigger list under this app's name.

- **Announcement bar activated** -- runs when you put a bar live. It passes the **bar name** (the name you gave it in the app), the **bar type** (simple, rotating, running line, typed or countdown) and the **bar message** (the first message on the bar, or empty if the bar has no message yet).
- **Announcement bar expired** -- runs when a bar's end date passes, or when a countdown timer runs out. It passes the **bar name**, the **bar type**, and the **total views** and **total clicks** the bar collected.

## When Each Trigger Fires

- **Activating a bar fires it straight away.** Publish a bar with no start date, or hit Activate on a draft, and the activated trigger runs immediately.
- **Scheduled bars fire when they go live, not when you save.** Set a bar to start next Friday at 9am and the activated trigger runs on Friday at 9am.
- **Reactivating fires it again.** Switch a bar off and back on, or move its start date, and the activated trigger runs again for the new run. The same applies to expiry: extend a bar's end date and the expired trigger fires at the new date instead.
- **Only a schedule or a countdown expires a bar.** Switching a bar off yourself, or deleting it, does not fire the expired trigger. It reports bars that ran out on their own.
- **Drafts fire nothing.** A bar that has never been published triggers neither event, and a bar created with an end date already in the past doesn't fire the expired trigger either.
- **Variants never fire on their own.** Regional, language and A/B test variants follow their parent bar's lifecycle, so a bar with five variants fires once, not six times.

## Countdown Bars

A countdown bar can carry both a scheduled end date and a timer, and whichever comes first is what fires the expired trigger.

The exception is the fallback **expired message**. If you set one, the bar keeps showing that message after the timer runs out instead of disappearing -- so the timer is no longer the end of the bar, and only the scheduled end date fires the trigger. A countdown bar with a fallback message and no end date never fires the expired trigger, because it never stops showing.

## Views and Clicks

The expired trigger reports the bar's **lifetime** totals -- every view and click it collected from the day it first went live, not the last day or the period you have selected on the Analytics page. A bar that ran three separate times reports the combined total.

Per-bar totals are part of Pro and Max, the same rule as the per-announcement table on the Analytics page: on the Free plan both come through as **0**. Everything else in the trigger works normally -- only the two numbers are withheld. Upgrade to Pro or Max and they start reporting real totals.

## Setting Up a Workflow

1. Open **Shopify Flow** from your Shopify admin. **Settings > Integrations** in this app has an **Open Shopify Flow** button that takes you there.
2. Create a new workflow.
3. For the trigger, search for this app's name. The two triggers above will appear.
4. Pick one, then add whatever actions you want -- send a Slack message, send an email, add a tag, and so on.
5. Where an action takes text, insert the values the trigger passed. Flow lists them for you, so the bar's name, type and message (or its view and click totals) can go straight into a Slack message or email.
6. Turn the workflow on.

That's it. There is nothing to switch on inside this app, and if you have no workflow using a trigger, the event is simply ignored -- nothing is stored and nothing is sent anywhere else.

## Things You Could Build

- Post to Slack when a bar goes live, so your team knows what customers are seeing.
- Email yourself the views and clicks when a sale bar ends, without opening the app.
- Send yourself a reminder when your free shipping bar expires, so you remember to replace it.
- Notify your marketing channel the moment a scheduled holiday bar starts.

## Related

- [Scheduling Announcements](https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/scheduling) -- the start and end dates these triggers fire on
- [Countdown Timers](https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/countdown-timers) -- timers and the fallback expired message
- [Understanding Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/understanding-analytics) -- the views and clicks the expired trigger reports

---

# Understanding Analytics

> Learn how Announcer tracks views, clicks, and performance

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/understanding-analytics
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Analytics
Last updated: 2026-07-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Announcer tracks how visitors interact with your announcement bars so you can measure their impact. Analytics are available on the **Dashboard** for a quick overview and on the **Analytics page** for detailed breakdowns.

## What Is Tracked

- **Views** -- Each time a visitor sees an announcement bar on your storefront.
- **Clicks** -- Each time a visitor clicks a link on an announcement bar.
- **Click Rate** -- Clicks divided by views, shown as a percentage.

## Trend Indicators

The **Views** and **Clicks** totals each carry a badge comparing them to the
period immediately before the one you're looking at, of the same length. Viewing
the last 7 days compares against the 7 days before that; viewing a single day
compares against the day before.

- **Green, with an upward arrow** -- higher than the previous period.
- **Red, with a downward arrow** -- lower than the previous period.
- **No badge** -- there is no earlier data to compare against yet, so any
  percentage would be misleading. New stores see this until a full period passes.

## Performance Badges

The **Performance** column of the announcement performance table rates each bar's
click rate at a glance:

- **Good** (above 2%) -- Your bars are performing well.
- **Average** (1% to 2%) -- There is room for improvement.
- **Low** (below 1%) -- Consider revising your message, design, or call-to-action.

## Plan Differences

- **Free** -- Total views, clicks and click rate, with the views and clicks charts.
- **Pro and Max** -- Everything above plus the per-announcement performance table and badges.

> **Tip:** If a bar has many views but few clicks, try making the call-to-action more prominent or updating the message copy.

---

# Announcements Not Showing

> Fix invisible announcement bars on your storefront

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/not-showing
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If your announcements are not appearing on your storefront, work through these checks in order. Most issues are resolved by step 1.

## 1. Check Theme Extension

This is the most common cause. Go to **Online Store > Themes**, click **Customize** on your active theme, then click the **App embeds** icon in the left sidebar. Find **Announcements Bar** (listed under Announcer & Countdown) and make sure the toggle is **ON**. Click **Save**. If you recently switched themes, you need to enable the app embed on the new theme as well.

## 2. Check Announcement is Active

Open the Announcer app and look at your announcement's status. It should say **Active**. If it says **Draft**, open the announcement, change the status to **Active**, and save. If it says **Scheduled**, the start date has not arrived yet -- change the status to **Active** and save to publish immediately.

## 3. Check Visibility Settings

Open your announcement and look at the **Visibility** section. If set to **Storewide**, it will show on all pages. If set to **Page-specific**, make sure you have actually entered the pages you want. A common mistake is selecting page-specific visibility but leaving the page list empty.

## 4. Clear Browser Cache

Your browser may be showing a cached version of your store. Hard refresh the page (**Cmd+Shift+R** on Mac, **Ctrl+Shift+R** on Windows) or open your store in an incognito/private window.

## 5. Check Scheduled Dates

Open your announcement and check the **Published At** and **Expires At** fields. **Published At** should be in the past or blank. **Expires At** should be in the future or blank. If the announcement has already expired, remove the expiration date and re-activate it.

## 6. Theme Compatibility

Announcer requires an **Online Store 2.0** theme. Older themes do not support app embeds. If your theme does not show app embeds in the theme editor, you need to upgrade to a 2.0-compatible theme.

## Still Not Working?

Contact **support@pasilobus.com** and include your theme name, announcement status, and a screenshot of your storefront so we can help quickly.

---

# Scheduling Not Working

> Fix scheduling problems with start and end dates

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/scheduling-issues
App: Announcer & Countdown
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-announcer
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If your scheduled announcements are not going live at the expected time, or if they expire earlier or later than planned, the issue is almost always related to timezones or date settings. This guide covers the most common causes and fixes.

## Check Your Account Timezone

Announcer uses your account timezone for all scheduling. If the timezone is wrong, bars will activate and expire at unexpected times.

1. Open the Announcer app.
2. Go to **Settings**.
3. Check the **Timezone** field.
4. Make sure it matches your local timezone (or the timezone you intend to schedule in).

If you change the timezone, existing scheduled dates remain as they were entered. Only new dates you set going forward will use the updated timezone.

## Verify the Announcement Status

Open the announcement and check its status:

| Status | Meaning |
|--------|---------|
| **Live** | Currently visible on your store |
| **Scheduled** | Has a future Published at date -- will go live automatically |
| **Expired** | The Expires at date has passed -- no longer visible |
| **Draft** | Not published -- will not go live until activated |

If the status is **Draft**, the bar will never go live on its own regardless of the Published at date. You need to activate it first.

## Common Issues

### Bar Did Not Go Live on Time

**Cause:** The Published at date may be set in a different timezone than you expected.

**Fix:**
1. Open the announcement.
2. Check the Published at date and the timezone shown below the date field.
3. Make sure the date and time are correct for that timezone.
4. If the time has already passed, change the status to **Active** and save to publish immediately.

### Bar Expired Too Early or Too Late

**Cause:** The Expires at time is interpreted in your account timezone. If your account timezone differs from your local time, the expiry will appear off.

**Fix:**
1. Open the announcement.
2. Check the Expires at date and the timezone shown below the field.
3. Adjust the time if needed, accounting for the displayed timezone.

### Countdown Timer Shows Wrong Time

The countdown timer counts down to the Expires at date. If the countdown looks wrong:

1. Verify the Expires at date is set correctly.
2. Check that the account timezone matches your intent.
3. The countdown is calculated client-side in the visitor's browser, so it always shows the correct remaining time regardless of timezone -- but if the target date itself is wrong, the countdown will be wrong too.

### Scheduling Works But Bar Does Not Show

If the status says **Live** but the bar is not visible:

- The issue is not with scheduling. See [Announcements Not Showing](https://help.pasilobus.com/announcer/not-showing) for display troubleshooting.

> **Tip:** If you need a bar live immediately rather than waiting for a scheduled time, change the status to **Active** and save.

---

# Installation

> Install Confetti & Holiday Decor and activate it on your theme

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/confetti/installation
App: Confetti & Holiday Decor
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-confetti
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/confetti
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Confetti & Holiday Decor adds celebratory effects to your storefront — a burst of confetti when a shopper lands on your store or adds something to their cart — and festive decorations such as snow and string lights for each season. Installation takes a couple of minutes and everything is configured from the app itself.

## Install the app

- Open the Confetti & Holiday Decor listing in the Shopify App Store and click **Install**
- Approve the installation in your Shopify admin

## Activate on your theme

When you first open the app, a short setup guide walks you through activating Confetti & Holiday Decor on your published theme. Pick your theme, click **Activate app on theme**, and save in the theme editor when it opens. That is the only thing that ever happens in the theme editor — it just switches the app on.

## Configure in the dashboard

All settings live in the app dashboard. Open the app from your Shopify admin to turn effects on or off, choose styles, and preview each one with the **Test** button. Changes apply to your storefront as soon as you save.

## Plans

- **Starter ($1/month)** - Welcome and add-to-cart confetti with every style, intensity and duration, the Purchase Celebration block for the Thank You and Order Status pages, and festive decorations (snow, string lights, an edge glow, corner art and cursor trails)
- **Pro ($4.99/month)** - Everything in Starter plus custom triggers on any page, button, form or scroll position, and your own decoration emoji and glow colour
- **Max ($9.99/month)** - Everything in Pro plus Seasonal Autopilot and the premium-item celebration

Stores that installed the app before the Starter plan existed and use the Free plan keep it: welcome and add-to-cart confetti, every style, and the Purchase Celebration block.

Paid plans start with a 7-day free trial. You can change plan at any time from **Settings > Billing** in the app.

---

# Confetti Effects

> Turn on welcome and add-to-cart effects and pick their styles

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/confetti/confetti-effects
App: Confetti & Holiday Decor
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-confetti
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/confetti
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Confetti & Holiday Decor ships with two built-in celebration moments, both managed from the app dashboard. There is nothing to configure in the theme editor — save your choices in the app and your storefront updates automatically.

## Welcome confetti

Fires once per browser session when a shopper lands on your home page. It does not play in the theme editor preview.

- **Enable welcome confetti** - Toggle the effect on or off
- **Style** - Choose from 27 styles, from Colorful Confetti, Fireworks and Gold Glitter to Hearts, Stars, Snow, Balloons, Money Rain and seasonal shapes such as pumpkins, ghosts and pine trees

## Add to cart confetti

Fires when a shopper adds an item to their cart on home, collection, or product pages.

- **Enable add to cart confetti** - Toggle the effect on or off
- **Style** - The same 27 styles are available

## Premium item celebration (Max plan)

Give pricier products their own moment: set a minimum price and a style, and any product at or above it fires that effect instead of the standard add-to-cart confetti. Works on product pages.

- **Minimum price** - The threshold in your store currency
- **Style** - Any of the 27 styles (Gold Fireworks by default)

## Seasonal Autopilot (Max plan)

Open **Seasonal Autopilot** from the dashboard to put your effects on a yearly calendar. Add any of thirteen ready-made presets with one click — from Lunar New Year and Valentine's Day through Halloween, Black Friday & Cyber Monday, the Winter Holidays and New Year — or create your own events with any name, start and end date (pick a month and a day), and styles (an anniversary sale, a local holiday). Windows repeat every year, can wrap the year end, and your regular styles return automatically when each window closes. Every event can be edited, disabled, or deleted at any time.

Lunar New Year, Easter, Mother's Day and Father's Day fall on a different date each year, so their presets follow the holiday: the page shows the dates for the coming one. If you change a preset's dates yourself, it keeps the dates you chose every year.

If your store moves to a plan below Max, your events are kept but stop running; the page marks them **Not running on your plan** until you upgrade again.

## Purchase Celebration (Thank You and Order Status pages)

Bring the celebration to the moment that matters most: add the **Purchase Celebration** block to your Thank You page (in the checkout editor) and Order Status page (in customer account settings). It shows an animated confetti image. There is no message or setting to fill in: place the block where you want it and save. The block is available on every plan.

## Previewing styles

Every effect has a **Test** button next to its style picker. Click it to see the effect right in the dashboard before shoppers do.

## Playback

- **Intensity** - How much confetti each effect uses
- **Duration** - How long the continuous effects (snow, streams, fireworks) run: Short (3s), Normal (8s, the default for new stores) or Long (15s)

## Saving

Changing any toggle or style shows a save bar at the top of the page. Click **Save** to apply — your storefront reflects the change within moments.

## Accessibility

All effects automatically respect the visitor's "reduced motion" system preference, so shoppers who opt out of animations never see them.

---

# Custom Triggers

> Fire confetti on specific pages, buttons, forms, or scroll positions

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/confetti/custom-triggers
App: Confetti & Holiday Decor
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-confetti
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/confetti
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Custom triggers are available on the Pro plan ($4.99/month) and above. They fire confetti beyond the built-in welcome and add-to-cart moments — on any page, button, form, or scroll position. Popular uses include newsletter signups, back-in-stock alerts, and landing pages.

## Creating a trigger

Open **Custom Triggers** from the app menu or the dashboard and click **Create Trigger**. Each trigger has:

- **Trigger Name** - A label so you can recognize it later
- **Page (optional)** - Leave blank to run on every page, or enter a path such as /pages/vip (a full page link works too; only its path is used, so the trigger fires on every domain and language of your store)
- **When should confetti fire?** - The shopper action that fires the effect
- **Where should it run?** - Limit the trigger to a page type: all pages, home, product pages, collection pages, cart, search, content pages, or blog articles
- **CSS selector** - Which element to watch (required for clicks, submits, and scroll triggers). Use the id or class of the button, form or element in your theme, for example `#newsletter-form` or `.newsletter button`
- **Confetti effect** - Any of the 27 styles

## Trigger types

- **Page Visit** - Fires as soon as the page loads
- **Button Click** - Fires when the shopper clicks a matching button
- **Element Click** - Fires when any matching element is clicked
- **Form Submit** - Fires when a matching form is submitted
- **Scroll to Element** - Fires the first time a matching element scrolls into view

## Assigning effects per page type

To show a different effect on different parts of your store, create one trigger per page type — for example a **Page Visit** trigger on collection pages with Gold Glitter and another on product pages with Stars Shoot. Page-type, URL, and selector targeting combine, so a trigger can be as broad or as narrow as you need.

## Managing your triggers

The **Custom Triggers** page lists every trigger with its action, effect, where it runs and its status. Search by name or show only active or inactive triggers with the filters above the list. Click a trigger's name to edit it; the **⋯** button at the end of each row turns it on or off or deletes it.

Only active triggers run on your storefront. If your store moves to the Free plan, your triggers are kept but stop running; the page marks them **Not running on your plan** until you upgrade again.

---

# Festive Decorations

> Snow, string lights, a glow and more that switch on for each season, Black Friday included

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/confetti/festive-decorations
App: Confetti & Holiday Decor
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-confetti
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/confetti
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Festive decorations dress your storefront for the season: snow drifting down the page, string lights along the edges, a soft glow around the screen, art in the corners and a trail behind the shopper's cursor. Each decoration is a ready-made scene that switches itself on and off on its dates, so your store can be ready for Black Friday, Christmas or Halloween without touching your theme. Decorations are included from the Starter plan.

## Adding a decoration

Open **Festive decorations** from the app menu or the dashboard. The scene gallery lists every occasion, the next one first, with its dates and how many days until it starts. Click **Add** on a scene and it is scheduled for its next window: added in December, Halloween waits for next October.

The **Black Friday** decoration dresses up your storefront and is included from the Starter plan. It is not the same as Seasonal Autopilot's Black Friday (Max plan), which switches your confetti effects for the same dates; the two can run together.

A scene that is running today (Diwali in early November, for example) says **Running now** and is added for its current dates.

Civic holidays (Fourth of July, Canada Day, Bastille Day) are suggested in their own country only. Click **Show more occasions from other countries** to see them all.

## Editing a decoration

Click **Edit** on a decoration to change:

- **Name and dates** - When it runs. Leave both dates empty to keep it on all year
- **Falling effect** - Snow, snow that settles, leaves, hearts, gifts, sparkles, fireworks and more
- **String lights** - Strands of lights down the left and right edges, clear of your logo and menu
- **Edge glow** - A soft tint around the edges of the screen
- **Corner art** - A small cluster in the bottom corners
- **Cursor trail** - Follows the shopper's mouse; off by default
- **Where it shows** - All pages, or only the page types you pick (home, product, collection, cart and more)

Switch any part off with its toggle, and use **Pause** or **Resume** on the decorations page to stop or restart a whole scene. When two decorations overlap, each part is taken from one of them only, so shoppers never see two snowfalls at once.

## Previewing a decoration

Click **Preview** on a decoration, or on any scene in the gallery, then **Preview** again in the note that appears. Your storefront opens with that scene on, whatever its dates. The link works for 10 minutes and only for you: every other visitor sees your store as it is. If the note says the app isn't on in your theme yet, click **Finish setup** to turn on the Confetti & Holiday Decor app embed first.

## Your own emoji and glow colour (Pro)

On the Pro plan, choose **Custom emoji** as the falling effect and type up to three emoji, or **Custom colour** for the edge glow and enter a hex colour such as #7B2FF7. The emoji or colour field appears once you pick the custom option. On a lower plan these show the nearest preset instead.

## What shoppers see

Decorations never cover buttons or links. A small pause button in the bottom-left corner lets any shopper switch them off, and the choice is remembered on later pages. If another app's popup covers it, move it: in your theme editor open **App embeds**, select **Confetti**, and set **Decorations pause button** to **Bottom right** or **Bottom left, raised**. The first time, a short note at the bottom of the page says seasonal decorations are showing and offers **Keep** or **Turn off**. Shoppers who ask their device for reduced motion see a still version.

## Moving from Pasilobus Seasons

If you used the Pasilobus Seasons (Holiday Decorations) app, the same scenes are here, and your own scenes can come with you. Open **Festive decorations**: when your store has scenes in Pasilobus Seasons, a note offers **Import scenes**. One click copies each scene with its name, dates, parts and pages; a scene whose dates have passed is moved to the same dates next year, and a scene you already have is skipped.

Then turn off the Pasilobus Seasons app embed in your theme editor (or uninstall Pasilobus Seasons), so your store doesn't show two sets of decorations.

---

# Confetti not showing on my store

> Checks when effects don't appear on the storefront

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/confetti/confetti-not-showing
App: Confetti & Holiday Decor
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-confetti
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/confetti
Section: Troubleshooting
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If effects aren't appearing on your storefront, one of these checks resolves it in almost every case.

## Check the app embed is active

Confetti & Holiday Decor runs through an app embed on your published theme. In your Shopify admin go to **Online Store > Themes**, click **Customize** on the published theme, open **App embeds** (the puzzle-piece icon) and check that **Confetti** is switched on, then click **Save**. The setup guide at the top of the app dashboard has an **Activate app on theme** button that opens this screen with the embed already switched on.

## Check your settings are saved

Effects are controlled from the app dashboard. Make sure the effect you expect is toggled on and that you clicked **Save** after changing it.

## Check your plan

Festive decorations run on the Starter plan and above; custom triggers on Pro and above; Seasonal Autopilot and the premium-item celebration on Max. On a lower plan they are kept but do not play, and their pages say **Not running on your plan**.

## Welcome confetti only fires on the home page

The welcome effect plays on the home page, once per browser session: reloading the page in the same session does not play it again. Open the store in a new private window to see it again. For other pages, use a custom trigger with a **Page visit** action.

## Reduced motion

Effects respect the visitor's "reduced motion" accessibility preference. If your device or browser has reduced motion enabled, confetti will not play for you, decorations show as a still version — but they still play for shoppers who haven't opted out.

## Decorations paused by the shopper

Decorations show a small pause button in the bottom-left corner. Once a shopper pauses them, they stay paused in that browser until the same button is pressed again. If you paused them while testing, press it to bring them back.

## A recently changed theme

If you published a new theme, the app embed needs to be activated on it. Run through the setup guide again for the new theme.

---

# How customers receive what they bought

> Choose one link per order, a link for each item, or a licence key

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/digital-products/delivery-methods
App: Digital Products (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Digital Products")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-digital-downloads
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/digital-products
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Most digital products are delivered the same way: someone buys, and they get a link to their file. But if you sell seats, site licences or anything where buying five means five separate things to hand out, one shared link is the wrong shape. The delivery method decides which of those you get, and it is set per variant so one product can work both ways.

You will find it on the product page, on each variant card. The badge on the card always shows the current method, and the button beside the files opens the setting.

## The four methods

- **One link for the whole order** — the default, and right for most products. Everything on the order is delivered together. If someone buys three copies of a PDF, they get one link with three times the download allowance, because what they want is the file.
- **A separate link for each item bought** — someone buying five gets five distinct links, each with its own allowance and each able to be withdrawn on its own. Use this when the buyer is going to pass one to each person.
- **A separate link and key for each item** — as above, and each link also carries a licence key from that variant's stock.
- **A key only, with no file** — for products that are just a key. Nothing is downloaded.

## When more than one is bought

With the default method, quantity raises the allowance. Buy two, and every file on that product allows twice as many downloads.

With either per-item method, quantity creates separate items instead. Your customer still gets the same delivery email they always would — it just links to a page listing everything they bought, each row with its own key, its own download link and its own remaining allowance, and a copy button for each.

If they bought those items for other people, they pass one row to each. Whoever opens a row sees only that one, with its own allowance, and you can withdraw a single row without touching the rest.

One thing to be aware of if you sell seats: the app emails the person who placed the order, because that is the only address Shopify gives us. If you need every seat holder emailed directly, collect their addresses yourself and forward their links.

## Changing it later

Changing the method affects orders placed from that point on. Orders already delivered keep working exactly as they were.

If a product has already had orders where someone bought more than one, the product page will say so and offer to switch. That prompt is based on your own order history, not a guess.

---

# Selling licence keys

> Import your own keys or have them generated, and never oversell

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/digital-products/license-keys
App: Digital Products (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Digital Products")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-digital-downloads
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/digital-products
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If your product needs a licence key — software, a plugin, anything the buyer activates — the app can issue one with every item sold. Keys are held per variant, so a five-seat licence and a single seat can draw on different stock.

Set the variant's delivery method to **A separate link and key for each item**, or **A key only** if there is no file to download. Then load the keys.

## Importing keys you already have

This is the usual case. If your own system already produces keys, paste them into the **Manage keys** screen, one per line. They are matched to buyers in the order you added them.

Imported keys work with whatever already validates them — there is nothing to integrate. Duplicates are skipped, both within what you paste and against keys already loaded, and the screen tells you how many of each.

## Having the app generate keys

You can also generate a batch. Generated keys use an unambiguous character set, so nothing is lost when someone reads one over the phone.

Worth knowing before you choose this: a generated key only means something if your own software asks us whether it is valid. On its own it is a string in an email. If you do not have software that can check a key, import the keys your existing system produces instead.

## Running out

Shopify stock for the variant follows your unclaimed keys, so the variant stops selling on its own when they run out — no overselling, and no order arriving with nothing to give it.

You can hold a few back with the buffer setting, which keeps that number in reserve rather than selling down to the last key.

If an order does arrive short — which can happen if stock was changed elsewhere — the buyer still gets their download links immediately, and only the key is withheld. The order is flagged in your admin and you get an email. Import more keys and those waiting items are given keys automatically, with no need to find the order yourself.

## Checking a key from your own software

Your application can ask whether a key is valid, and record an activation against it. You can cap how many times a single key may be activated, so a one-seat licence cannot be installed on twenty machines.

Keys are stored encrypted, and are shown to you shortened in lists so a full key is never sitting on a screen you might be sharing.

---

# Installation

> Install Discounts & Bundles, pick a plan and get your first offer on the storefront

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/installation
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Discounts & Bundles runs automatic discount offers on your store: quantity breaks, exact-quantity packs, buy X get Y, spend thresholds, mix & match, bundles and gifts with purchase. Shopify applies them at checkout, and the app shows each offer on your product pages so shoppers see the deal before they add to cart.

## Install the app

- Install Discounts & Bundles from the [Shopify App Store](https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes) and approve the permissions.
- Choose a plan. Free includes one active offer; paid plans start with a 14-day trial. See **Plans and limits**.
- The app opens on its dashboard with a setup guide.

## Add the app to your theme

The setup guide links straight into your theme editor for each piece:

- **Turn on the app embed** - this loads your offers on the storefront. Without it nothing shows to shoppers.
- **Add the offer block** to your product page - this is the tier picker or deal card shoppers see. In the theme editor, drag it up so it sits above the Add to cart button.
- **Add the badge block** (optional) - a discount badge on the product page.
- **Add the bundle block** (optional) - shows the products of a bundle and upsells.
- **Add the cart estimate** (optional) - a message on the cart page about the discount shoppers have unlocked or are close to.

Press **Save** in the theme editor after each one.

If you are setting up on a draft theme, choose it in the guide's theme list first. In the theme editor, press **Save**, not **Publish**, which sits beside it: **Publish** makes that draft your live theme.

## Speed and your theme

A slow store loses sales, so here is how Discounts & Bundles keeps its performance cost small. The discounts themselves need no script in your store: Shopify applies every offer in the cart and at checkout with Shopify Functions, which run on Shopify's own servers and work from the cart's contents alone. What loads on your storefront only shows the offers to shoppers.

- **Nothing in your theme code** - everything runs from the app embed and blocks, and the files are served from Shopify's own CDN.
- **Loads after the page** - the scripts are deferred: they run once the page itself is in place, so they don't hold up your products, images or Add to cart button.
- **Only where needed** - the offer block's script, the largest at about 10 KB compressed, loads only on pages where you've added the offer or badge block. The bundle block's loads only on product pages with that block, and the cart estimate's only on the cart page. **Product card badges**, if you switch them on in **App embeds**, add a script under 3 KB compressed to every page. The script that puts free gifts in the cart loads only when **Add free gifts to the cart automatically** is on and a gift offer is live.
- **No calls to our servers** - offer details are published to your store ahead of time and arrive with the page, so showing an offer never waits on us.

## Create your first offer

- Click **Add discount** on the dashboard or the **Discount Rules** page.
- Pick an offer type, fill in the name, the discount and the products, then click **Create Discount**.
- Open a product the offer covers on your storefront to check the offer block, then add it to the cart to see the discount applied.

---

# Plans and limits

> What each plan includes and how the active-offer limit works

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/plans-and-limits
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Each plan sets how many offers can be active at once and which offer types and options you can use. Drafts never count, so you can prepare as many offers as you like and switch them on when you need them.

## Plans

- **Free ($0)** - 1 active offer. Quantity breaks, exact-quantity packs, buy X get Y, mix & match and spend thresholds, with storefront translations.
- **Pro ($9.99/month)** - 10 active offers. Everything in Free, plus scheduling: start and end dates, and recurring days and hours.
- **Max ($24.99/month)** - 30 active offers. Everything in Pro, plus product bundles and gifts with purchase.
- **Ultra ($49.99/month)** - unlimited active offers. Everything in Max, plus claim limits per offer and customer eligibility by customer tag.

Paid plans start with a 14-day free trial. Discount badges, card badges, Reports, Sidekick and Shopify Flow are on every plan.

## How the limit counts

- Only **active** offers count. An offer saved as a draft does not.
- An offer that is active but scheduled for later, or past its end date, still counts until you switch it off.
- When you reach the limit you cannot add or activate another offer. Switch an offer off, or upgrade, to make room.
- If you move to a smaller plan, offers that are already active keep running. You just cannot add more until you are under the new limit.

## Locked options

Offer types and options that need a higher plan are shown with the plan they need, for example **Max** next to Product Bundle, so you can see what an upgrade adds.

## Changing plan

Open **Settings > Billing**, or click **Upgrade** on a plan prompt. Plans are managed by Shopify, and the change applies as soon as you approve it.

---

# Quantity breaks

> Buy more, save more: tiered discounts by quantity

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/quantity-breaks
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Quantity breaks give a bigger discount the more of a product the shopper buys, for example 10% off 2 or more and 20% off 5 or more. They raise order value without a code, and the offer block shows every tier on the product page.

## Create a quantity break offer

- Click **Add discount** and choose **Quantity Breaks**.
- Enter a **Discount name**. Shoppers see it on the discount line in the cart and at checkout.
- Under **Quantity Tiers**, set the quantity each tier starts at and its discount: a percentage, a fixed amount off each item, or a fixed price. Each tier runs until the next one starts; the last can be capped with **Up to**.
- Under **Applies to**, choose all products, specific products, specific variants or collections.
- Click **Create Discount**.

## Quantity counting

When an offer covers several products, **Quantity counting** decides whether the quantities are added together (2 shirts + 1 cap = 3) or counted per product.

## On the storefront

The offer block lists the tiers with the price per item. The shopper picks a tier and adds to cart; the discount is applied in the cart and at checkout.

---

# Exact quantity deals

> Packs: a discount for buying an exact number of a product

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/exact-quantity-deals
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

An exact quantity deal discounts a set pack size only, for example "Buy exactly 6, get 20% off". A shopper buying 5 or 7 pays full price. Use it for multipacks and boxes.

## Create an exact quantity deal

- Click **Add discount** and choose **Exact Quantity Deal**.
- Under **Exact quantities**, add each pack size and its discount (for example 3 at 10% and 6 at 20%).
- Choose the products or collections it applies to, then click **Create Discount**.

## Things to know

- Each pack size is matched exactly. A cart with 7 items does not get the 6-pack price on six of them.
- On the product page the offer block shows the packs to choose from.

---

# Buy X get Y (BOGO)

> Buy one, get one free or discounted

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/buy-x-get-y
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Buy X get Y rewards shoppers with free or discounted items when they buy a set quantity, for example "Buy 2, get 1 free". It is a classic way to move stock.

## Create a buy X get Y offer

- Click **Add discount** and choose **BOGO**.
- Under **Buy X Get Y**, set **Buy Qty** and **Get Qty**, then the **Discount Type**: **Free**, **Percentage Off** or **Fixed Amount**, with its **Discount Value**.
- Under **Buy Products**, choose the products the shopper buys. Under **Get Products**, choose the products they receive at the discount. These can be the same products.
- Click **Create Discount**.

## How it applies

- The shopper adds the buy quantity and the get quantity to the cart, and the get items are discounted in the cart and at checkout.
- The reward is not added to the cart for the shopper. The offer block tells them what to add.

---

# Spend thresholds

> A discount when the cart reaches a minimum amount

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/spend-thresholds
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A spend threshold gives a discount once the cart reaches an amount, for example "Spend $100, get 15% off". It lifts order value across your whole catalogue.

## Create a spend threshold offer

- Click **Add discount** and choose **Spend Threshold**.
- Under **Spend Threshold**, enter **Spend at least**, then the **Discount Type** and **Discount Value**.
- **Discount applies to**: **The whole order** takes the discount off the order subtotal; **The qualifying products** takes it off the products the offer covers.
- For the whole order, set **Applies to** to the order. For qualifying products, choose the products or collections.
- Click **Create Discount**.

## What counts toward the minimum

The minimum counts the cart's full price, before any discounts, as Shopify's own minimums do. For example, with "Spend $2,700, get 10% off", three items at $1,200 come to $3,600 and clear it.

- Only the products the offer covers count, unless it applies to the whole order.
- A free gift from a gift with purchase offer does not count toward a gift's own minimum.

## When the cart also qualifies for another offer

By default the shopper gets one offer: whichever saves them more. If the same cart also gets a buy X get Y offer, Shopify compares the two and applies the bigger saving. To let this threshold apply on top of other offers, turn on **Can combine with other offers** on both offers. See **How offers combine**.

## On the storefront

Add the cart estimate block to your cart page to tell shoppers how close they are to the threshold and what they have unlocked.

---

# Mix & match

> Any X products from a group for a discount

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/mix-and-match
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Mix & match lets shoppers combine different products from a group to reach a quantity, for example "Buy any 3 from the summer collection, get 20% off". Shoppers choose the mix, so it suits ranges like socks, candles or snacks.

## Create a mix & match offer

- Click **Add discount** and choose **Mix & Match**.
- Under **Mix & Match Tiers**, set the total quantity each tier needs and its discount.
- Choose the products or collections in the group.
- Click **Create Discount**.

## How it applies

**Quantity counting** decides how the group is counted: added together, so three different products reach a tier of 3 just like three of one product, or per product.

---

# Product bundles

> A discount for buying specific products together

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/product-bundles
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A bundle discounts a set of specific products bought together, for example "Buy the shampoo and conditioner together, save 20%". Product bundles are on the Max and Ultra plans.

## Create a bundle

- Click **Add discount** and choose **Product Bundle**.
- Under **Bundle Products**, add at least two products (or variants) and the quantity of each.
- Under **Bundle Discount**, set the **Discount Type** and **Discount Value**.
- Click **Create Discount**.

## On the storefront

- Add the **Bundle & Upsell** block to your product page to show the bundle's products together.
- The discount applies only when every product in the bundle is in the cart in its quantity.

---

# Gift with purchase

> Give a free product for buying certain items or spending an amount

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/gift-with-purchase
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A gift with purchase makes a product free when the shopper qualifies, for example "Free tote bag over $75". Gifts with purchase are on the Max and Ultra plans.

## Create a gift offer

- Click **Add discount** and choose **Gift with Purchase**.
- Under **Trigger**, choose **Specific products** (with a **Minimum quantity**) or **Minimum spend** (with a **Minimum spend amount**).
- Under **Gift product**, click **Select gift product** and set the **Gift quantity**.
- Click **Create Discount**.

## Things to know

- The discount makes the gift free once it is in the cart. To add it for shoppers, open your theme editor, go to **App embeds**, open **Discounts & Bundles** and turn on **Add free gifts to the cart automatically**. It is added once when the cart qualifies, removed again if the cart stops qualifying, and not added back if the shopper removes it during that visit.
- With that setting off, shoppers add the gift themselves. Tell them about it in your offer heading or on the product page.
- **Minimum spend** counts the cart's full price, before any discounts, as Shopify's own minimums do. The gift itself never counts toward the amount that earns it.
- If the cart also qualifies for another offer, the shopper gets whichever saves them more, unless both offers have **Can combine with other offers** turned on. See **How offers combine**.
- Choose a physical product as the gift. Gift cards cannot be discounted by Shopify.

---

# How offers combine

> What a shopper gets when a cart qualifies for more than one offer

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/how-offers-combine
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

When a cart qualifies for more than one of your offers, the shopper gets the one that saves them more. Offers do not stack unless you allow it.

## The default: the best single offer

Each offer is set up in Shopify so that it does not combine with your other offers. If a cart qualifies for, say, a buy X get Y offer and a spend threshold, Shopify works out which one saves the shopper more and applies that one. The shopper never pays more than they would with either offer alone.

## Let an offer combine

- Open the offer and find **Combining with other offers**.
- Turn on **Can combine with other offers**.
- Click **Save**.

Do the same on every offer that should stack. Two offers apply together only when both have it turned on.

## Things to know

- A product gets at most one product discount, even when offers combine. If two offers discount the same product, the shopper gets the one that saves more on it.
- Offers of the same kind, for example two volume discounts on different products, can both apply in the same cart. On the same product, the offer with the higher priority wins.
- Spend thresholds and gifts with a minimum spend count the cart's full price, before other discounts, as Shopify's own minimums do. A shopper who also gets a buy X get Y offer still counts the free item at its full price toward the minimum.
- The setting also decides whether an offer combines with your other Shopify discounts, such as discount codes. An offer with it off does not combine with other product or order discounts. Free shipping discounts always combine.

---

# Scheduling, claim limits and customer eligibility

> Run offers on dates or hours, cap them, and target customers

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/scheduling-and-limits
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every offer can be switched on and left running, or scheduled, capped and targeted. Scheduling is on Pro and above; claim limits and customer eligibility are on Ultra.

## Schedule

Under **Schedule** on the offer:

- **Always on** - runs while the offer is active.
- **Start & end dates** - starts and ends on its own. Times are in your store's time zone, shown under the dates.
- **Recurring days & times** - runs on chosen days, optionally during set hours, for example weekends only or a happy hour.

An active offer whose start date has not come yet shows **Scheduled**; one past its end date shows **Expired**.

## Claim limit

Under **Usage limits**, **Claim limit** stops the offer after that many orders have used it, for example "first 100 orders". Leave it empty for no limit. Claims never reset, and the offer shows **Limit reached** when it is used up. A few orders placed in the moments around the last claim may still get the discount.

## Customer eligibility

Under **Customer Eligibility**, limit an offer to customers with certain **Customer tags** (for example vip, wholesale). Shoppers must be logged in for their tags to count.

---

# Discount badges

> Show a discount badge on product pages and in product cards

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/card-badges
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A discount badge is a small pill that tells shoppers about an offer before they read the details, for example "UP TO 20% OFF" or "BUY 2 GET 1". It comes from the offer itself, so it always matches what the checkout gives.

## Badges on product cards: the Product card badges embed

To show the badge on every product card in collections, search results and the home page, use the **Product card badges** app embed. It works on any theme, and you do not place anything by hand.

- In the setup guide, click the button next to the badge embed. It opens your theme editor with **Product card badges** switched on under **App embeds**.
- Press **Save**.
- In the embed's settings, choose the position (top left, top right or below the price), the text colour and the badge text.

Each card shows the highest-priority offer for that product. Scheduled, ended and draft offers show no badge. If your theme already has its own Sale badge in that corner, the badge moves to the other corner so the two do not overlap.

## Badge on the product page: the Discount Badge block

- In the setup guide, click **Add to theme** next to the badge block, or open your theme editor and add the **Discount Badge** app block.
- Place it near the product title or price.
- Themes whose product cards accept app blocks (such as Horizon) also let you add this block inside the card by hand. You do not need that if the embed is on.
- Block settings: **Fallback colour**, **Alignment**, **Show claimed progress** (a "claimed" bar for offers with a claim limit) and **Vertical margin**.

## Choose what the badge says

Open the offer and go to **Appearance**:

- **Badge style** - **Discount only** (the pill), **Discount + countdown** (adds a timer to the end date) or **Hide badge**.
- **Badge** - an optional phrase next to the pill, such as "Limited Time Deal", or **Custom** text.
- **Badge colour** - the pill colour for this offer.

The pill states the best discount the offer gives. On a tiered offer it reads "UP TO", so shoppers are not promised the top tier at the first quantity.

## Things to know

- A countdown needs an end date. Set one under **Schedule**, or the countdown option is not offered.
- Phrases that promise a deadline ("Ends Soon") show a warning on offers without an end date.

---

# Offer not showing or not applying

> Why shoppers do not see an offer, or the discount is missing at checkout

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts/offer-not-showing
App: Discounts & Bundles (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Discounts & Bundles")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/bundles-volumes
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/discounts
Section: Troubleshooting
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Most offers that do not show are switched off, outside their dates, or missing from the theme. Work down this list; each check takes a minute.

## Check the offer

- **Status** - open the offer in **Discount Rules**. A draft never applies. Click **Activate**.
- **Scheduled or Expired** - an active offer only runs between its start and end dates, and during its days and hours if it repeats. The badge on the offer tells you which.
- **Limit reached** - an offer with a claim limit stops once it is used up.
- **Products** - check that the product you are testing is in **Applies to**, or in the buy, bundle or gift products for those types.
- **Customer tags** - an offer limited to tagged customers does not apply to guests or other customers.
- **Not applied** - when collection offers together cover more than 100 collections, lower-priority ones are left out and marked **Not applied**. Use fewer collections or product lists.

## Check the theme

- The **app embed** must be on: **Online Store > Themes > Customize > App embeds > Discounts & Bundles**. Without it nothing shows to shoppers.
- The **offer block** must be on the product template you are testing. If it sits below Add to cart, drag it above the buy buttons in the theme editor.
- Check the published theme. Adding the block to a draft theme does not change your live store.

## Check the cart

- The discount appears in the cart and at checkout, not on the product price.
- The cart must meet the offer: the tier quantity, the exact pack size, the spend amount, every bundle product, or the gift product added.
- Another offer may be applied instead. When a cart qualifies for two offers, the shopper gets the one that saves them more, unless both have **Can combine with other offers** turned on. A discount code can also replace an offer that does not combine; try the cart without discount codes. See **How offers combine**.

## Plan limits

Offers above your plan's active-offer limit cannot be activated, and bundles and gifts need Max or Ultra. See **Plans and limits**.

---

# Installation

> Install Free Shipping Bar, turn on the app embed in your theme, and check it on your storefront

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar/installation
App: Free Shipping Bar (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Free Shipping Bar")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sales-banners
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar
Section: Getting started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Free Shipping Bar shows shoppers how much more they need to add to their cart to get free shipping, using the goal that actually applies to their country. Setup is short: install the app and turn on one app embed in your theme. That single embed gives you an announcement-style bar at the top of the page, a compact progress bar in your cart drawer and cart page, and a nudge above the buy buttons on product pages. There is nothing to type in — the app reads your free shipping goals from your Shopify shipping settings.

## Install the App

Install [Free Shipping Bar](https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sales-banners) from the Shopify App Store. As soon as the app opens it reads your shipping zones and automatic free-shipping discounts and works out the free shipping goal for every country you ship to. You'll land on the dashboard, where the **Shipping goals** card already lists what was found — for example "United States: over $50", "Canada: always", "Rest of world: none".

If a goal looks wrong, don't worry about it yet. Finish the theme step first, then see [Shipping Goals](https://help.pasilobus.com/help) for what the app looks for and how to fix it in your shipping settings.

## Turn On the App Embed in Your Theme

Everything the app shows on your storefront comes from one theme app embed. It only appears once you switch it on, and the setup guide on the dashboard takes you straight there:

- **Choose your theme** — Select the theme your customers currently see. To test on an unpublished theme first, pick that one instead.
- **Enable the app embed** — Click the button in the setup guide. Your theme editor opens with the **Free Shipping Bar** embed ready to activate. Turn it on and click **Save**.

The app checks your theme automatically and ticks the step off. You now have, on every plan:

- **The top bar** — An announcement across the top of the page (or the bottom, if you prefer) while the cart is empty. Once the cart has items it slides in for a few seconds on each page and after each cart change with the updated progress, then hides again, so it never crowds the page. You can switch it to stay on screen permanently under **Settings > Bar behaviour > Top bar**.
- **The cart bar** — A compact progress bar inside your cart drawer and in the totals area of the cart page. Dawn, Horizon and the themes built on them are recognised automatically; other themes may need the **Custom CSS selector** setting described in [Top Bar, Product & Cart Bars](https://help.pasilobus.com/help).
- **The product page nudge** — A line above the buy buttons telling the shopper whether adding this item unlocks free shipping.

The cart and product bars can each be switched off in the embed's settings (**Show in the cart and cart drawer** and **Show on product pages** set to **Off**), so you can start with the top bar alone if you like.

## Add the Theme Blocks (Optional)

The embed places the cart and product bars where most themes expect them. If you want them somewhere specific — under a particular section, in a custom cart layout, above the product description — the app also ships two theme app blocks you position yourself:

- **Product page block** — Drop it into any product template section.
- **Cart block** — Drop it into the cart page or an app-block-capable cart drawer.

Open **Settings > Extensions** and click **Set up in Shopify** next to the block you want; the theme editor opens on the right template with the block ready to place. Position it and click **Save**. As soon as a block is on a page, the embed stops adding its own bar there, so you never see two.

## Check It on Your Storefront

Open your store in a private browser window so nothing is cached:

- **With an empty cart** — The top bar shows the announcement, for example "Free shipping on orders over $50". If you ship free everywhere it says "Free shipping on every order". If your theme has its own announcement bar switched on, the app's bar stays out of its way and you won't see it yet — that is the default **Skip the announcement when your theme already shows one** setting at work.
- **Open a product** — Above the buy buttons you'll see "Add this item to unlock free shipping" or how far away the shopper would be.
- **Add something to the cart** — The top bar slides in with "Add $X more to unlock free shipping" and hides again after a few seconds; the cart drawer shows the same progress and keeps it on screen.
- **Open another page** — With items in the cart, the top bar slides in again for a few seconds on each page with the current progress, then hides.
- **Pass the goal** — Every bar switches to "You've unlocked free shipping!" with a short celebration; the top bar slides in once more to say so.

The goal you see is the one for the country you are browsing from. Merchants outside their main shipping zone sometimes see a different amount than they expected, or a message that free shipping is not available for their country — that is the app doing its job. See [Country Detection & Currencies](https://help.pasilobus.com/help) for how to check another country.

## If Something Is Not Showing

- **Nothing at all** — Open the theme editor, click **App embeds** in the left sidebar and make sure **Free Shipping Bar** is switched on for the published theme. Then check the **Enabled** switch under **Settings > Bar behaviour** in the app.
- **The top bar doesn't show while the cart is empty** — That is dynamic mode with your theme's own announcement bar visible: the empty-cart announcement is skipped so the two don't stack. Once the cart has items, the bar still appears for a few seconds on each page and after each cart change. To show the empty-cart announcement too, turn off your theme's announcement bar, untick **Skip the announcement when your theme already shows one**, or set **When the top bar shows** to **Always** under **Settings > Bar behaviour > Top bar**.
- **The top bar disappears after a few seconds** — That is dynamic mode working as designed. Raise **Seconds to show on each page and after a cart change**, or choose **Always** if you want a fixed bar.
- **The top bar shows but not the cart or product bar** — In the embed's settings, check **Show in the cart and cart drawer** and **Show on product pages** are set to **Automatically**. If your theme isn't one the app recognises, set the **Custom CSS selector** for the cart, or use the theme blocks instead.
- **The shopper's country has no free shipping and the bar is set to hide** — Under **Settings > Bar behaviour**, **When free shipping isn't available** is set to hide the bar. Switch it to show a message if you'd rather always show something.
- **A schedule is active** — On Premium, a schedule window outside today hides everything. Check **Settings > Bar behaviour > Schedule**.
- **You're looking at a different theme** — In Shopify, go to **Online Store > Themes** and confirm the embed is enabled on the theme marked **Current theme**.

---

# How Free Shipping Bar Works

> What shoppers see, where the free shipping goal comes from, and how it changes by country

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar/how-it-works
App: Free Shipping Bar (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Free Shipping Bar")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sales-banners
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar
Section: Getting started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Most free shipping bars ask you to type in a number and show it to everyone. Free Shipping Bar works the other way round: it reads the free shipping goals you already set up in Shopify and shows each shopper the one that applies to their country. A shopper in the United States sees your domestic goal, a shopper in Germany sees your EU goal, and a shopper in a country you don't ship free to is told so rather than being promised a threshold that doesn't exist.

## What Shoppers See

- **Empty cart** — An announcement across the top of the page such as "Free shipping on orders over $50", so shoppers know the goal before they start.
- **Below the goal** — "Add $18 more to unlock free shipping" with a progress bar that fills as items are added. The cart and product bars update the moment the cart changes, without a page reload; the top bar slides in for a few seconds with the new figure — after each cart change and on every page the shopper opens — then gets out of the way again (or stays on screen, if you prefer).
- **Goal reached** — "You've unlocked free shipping!" with a short celebration.
- **Free shipping on every order** — When a country has an unconditional free rate, the bar simply says so.
- **No free shipping for their country** — An honest message: "Free shipping isn't available for Switzerland yet. Shipping is calculated at checkout." You can also choose to hide the bar in this case.

The same state drives all three placements — the top bar, the product page bar and the cart bar — so they never disagree with each other.

## Where the Goal Comes From

The app reads two things from your Shopify admin:

- **Shipping zones** — In **Settings > Shipping and delivery**, any zone with a $0 rate that has a condition like "order total is $50 and up" gives that zone's countries a $50 goal. A $0 rate with no condition means free shipping on every order for those countries.
- **Automatic free-shipping discounts** — An active automatic discount of the "Free shipping" type with a minimum purchase amount counts as a goal for the countries it applies to. With no minimum, it counts as free shipping on every order.

When both apply to a country, the shopper gets the better deal: the lowest threshold wins, and "free on every order" beats any threshold. Countries in your Rest of world zone use that zone's goal.

If your setup doesn't fit — for example you use code discounts, or you want to promote a goal that isn't a shipping rate — you can switch to manual goals or override individual countries on the Growth plan. See [Manual Goals & Country Overrides](https://help.pasilobus.com/help).

## How the Country Is Decided

By default the app asks Shopify where the visitor is browsing from and uses that country. Alternatively you can tie the bar to the country the shopper selected in your store's country or market picker. Either way, the threshold is shown in the shopper's market currency, converted at your Shopify Markets rate. See [Country Detection & Currencies](https://help.pasilobus.com/help).

## Keeping Goals Up to Date

- **Discounts** — Creating, editing or ending an automatic free-shipping discount reaches the bar within moments.
- **Shipping zones and rates** — Shopify doesn't notify apps about shipping rate changes, so the app re-reads them every 6 hours. After editing a rate, click **Sync now** on the **Shipping goals** page to pick it up straight away.
- **Currency** — If you change your store currency, goals are re-read automatically.

## What Is Not Treated as a Goal

- **Code discounts** — A free shipping discount that needs a code is not a goal, because the shopper hasn't got it yet.
- **Carrier-calculated rates** — Rates from a carrier are never free and are ignored.
- **Product-specific shipping profiles** — Only your general (default) profile is used. Custom profiles for specific products are listed in the app as ignored.
- **Weight-limited free rates** — A $0 rate that only applies below a certain weight is shown as free shipping, with a warning in the app, because the bar can't know the weight of the cart.

---

# Shipping Goals

> How the app detects your free shipping goals and how to read the Shipping goals page

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar/shipping-goals
App: Free Shipping Bar (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Free Shipping Bar")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sales-banners
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar
Section: Goals & countries
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The **Shipping goals** page is where you see exactly what the app found in your Shopify shipping settings and what each country's shoppers will be told. Because the goals are detected rather than typed in, this page is mostly for checking — but it is also where you sync, switch to manual goals (Growth and up), and read the warnings that tell you when your setup can't be represented as a simple "over $X".

## What Counts as a Free Shipping Goal

The app reads your default shipping profile in **Settings > Shipping and delivery** and looks at every zone in it:

- **A $0 rate with an order-total condition** — For example a rate named "Free shipping" priced at $0 with the condition "order price is $50 and up". Every country in that zone gets a $50 goal.
- **A $0 rate with no condition** — Free shipping on every order for that zone's countries. The bar shows "Free shipping on every order".
- **No $0 rate** — The zone's countries have no free shipping. The bar shows the honest message or hides, depending on your [behaviour settings](https://help.pasilobus.com/help).
- **Several $0 rates in one zone** — The lowest threshold wins, and an unconditional rate beats any threshold.

It then reads your active **automatic discounts** of the "Free shipping" type:

- **With a minimum purchase amount** — Counts as a goal for the countries the discount applies to. If that amount is lower than the zone's threshold, the discount wins, because that is the deal the shopper actually gets.
- **With no minimum** — Free shipping on every order for those countries.
- **Scheduled discounts** — Listed on the page with their start date, but not used until they become active.

A discount can only ever lower a country's goal; it never removes free shipping from a country that already has it through a zone.

## The Rest of World Fallback

If you have a **Rest of world** zone, its goal is used for every country not covered by another zone or discount. If you don't, countries you haven't set up have no free shipping and shoppers there see the "not available" message.

## Reading the Page

- **Goals by zone** — One row per zone: the zone name, its countries, and the goal ("Over $50", "Always", "None"). A badge shows whether the goal comes from a **zone** or a **discount**, or is **manual**.
- **Detected discounts** — Your automatic free-shipping discounts with their status, minimum, and the countries they apply to.
- **Last synced** — When the shipping settings were last read.

## Sync Now

Shopify tells the app immediately when a discount changes, but not when a shipping rate changes. Rates are re-read every 6 hours automatically. After editing a shipping rate or zone, click **Sync now** to update the goals straight away, then reload the page to confirm.

## Warnings

- **A free rate depends on weight** — A $0 rate that has a weight condition (for example "free under 5 kg") is shown to shoppers as free shipping, because the bar can't know how much a cart weighs. If heavy orders would not actually ship free, consider wording in [Translations](https://help.pasilobus.com/help) that mentions the limit, or a manual goal (Growth and up).
- **Product-specific shipping profiles are ignored** — Only the default profile is used. Custom profiles (for example one for oversized items) are listed as "product-specific, ignored". Shoppers with those products in their cart see the general goal.
- **No free shipping anywhere** — None of your zones or discounts offers free shipping. The bar will show the "not available" message everywhere, or hide. Check that the free rate is in your default shipping profile and priced at exactly $0, then click **Sync now**. If the offer genuinely lives outside your shipping rates, [manual goals](https://help.pasilobus.com/help) (Growth and up) let you state it.

## What Is Never Detected

- **Code discounts** — A free shipping discount that requires a code isn't a goal.
- **Carrier-calculated rates** — Rates quoted by a carrier are never free.
- **Rates in product-specific profiles** — See the warning above.
- **Draft order or checkout-only offers** — Anything that isn't a shipping rate or an automatic discount.

Where possible, express the offer as a $0 shipping rate or an automatic free-shipping discount so the app can read it. Otherwise, [manual goals and country overrides](https://help.pasilobus.com/help) (Growth and up) let you tell the app the goal yourself.

---

# Manual Goals & Country Overrides

> Set your own goal instead of the detected one, for every country or for specific ones

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar/manual-goals-and-overrides
App: Free Shipping Bar (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Free Shipping Bar")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sales-banners
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar
Section: Goals & countries
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Detected goals fit most stores, but not every free shipping offer lives in a shipping rate. You might advertise "free shipping over $75" but implement it at checkout another way, run a promotion the app can't see, or want one country to show a different amount from what Shopify would suggest. Manual goals and country overrides cover these cases. Both are Growth plan features and both are managed on the **Shipping goals** page. On the Free plan the bar always shows what your Shopify shipping settings say, so a wrong goal is fixed by correcting the rate in **Settings > Shipping and delivery** and clicking **Sync now**.

## Manual Mode

Manual mode replaces the detected goals with one goal of your own for every country.

- Open **Shipping goals** and switch **Goal source** from **Automatic** to **Manual**.
- Choose the default goal:
  - **Threshold** — Free shipping over an amount you enter, in your store currency. Shoppers in other markets see it converted to their currency.
  - **Always** — Free shipping on every order.
  - **None** — No free shipping. The bar shows the "not available" message or hides.
- Click **Save**.

The detected zones and discounts stay listed on the page for reference, so you can compare what you set against what Shopify would have shown. Switching back to **Automatic** restores the detected goals immediately.

> Manual goals are not connected to your checkout. If you tell shoppers "free shipping over $50" but your shipping rates charge for a $60 order, they will find out at checkout. Keep manual goals in step with what you actually charge.

## Country Overrides

An override sets the goal for one country. It wins over everything else — the detected goal in automatic mode and the default goal in manual mode — so it is the right tool when one country is the exception.

- On **Shipping goals**, find **Country overrides** and click **Add override**.
- Pick the country and its goal: threshold (in store currency), always, or none.
- Click **Save**. The country now shows this goal regardless of what your zones or discounts say.
- To go back to detection for that country, remove the override.

Like manual mode, country overrides are available on the Growth plan and up. On the Free plan the controls are shown but can't be edited.

## Typical Uses

- **A promotional goal** — You want to show "free shipping over $40" during a sale while your permanent rate stays at $50. Set a manual default or an override for the countries in the sale, and remember to remove it afterwards. On Premium, [scheduling](https://help.pasilobus.com/help) can turn the whole bar on and off around the sale for you.
- **A country with a special deal** — Your EU zone is free over €80 but you ship free to Ireland on every order through a checkout rule the app can't see. Add an Ireland override set to **Always**.
- **Hiding a country's goal** — A country is in your Rest of world zone, but you'd rather not promote free shipping there. Add an override set to **None**.
- **A free rate that depends on weight** — The app shows it as free shipping with a warning. If heavy orders don't ship free, set an override with the wording that fits, or use manual mode.

## Which Goal Wins

When several settings could apply to a country, the order is:

1. A **country override** for that country.
2. In manual mode, the **manual default** goal.
3. In automatic mode, the **detected** goal from zones and discounts (lowest threshold wins, "always" beats any threshold).
4. The **Rest of world** zone's goal, if there is one; otherwise no free shipping.

---

# Country Detection & Currencies

> How the app decides which country a shopper is in and which currency to show

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar/country-detection-and-currencies
App: Free Shipping Bar (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Free Shipping Bar")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sales-banners
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar
Section: Goals & countries
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The bar can only show the right goal if it knows which country the shopper is in. Free Shipping Bar offers two ways to decide that, converts the goal into the currency the shopper is browsing in, and lets you choose what happens when a country has no free shipping at all. All three settings live under **Settings > Bar behaviour**.

## Choosing the Country Source

- **Visitor location (default)** — The app asks Shopify where the visitor appears to be browsing from and uses that country. It works before the shopper has touched anything, so the very first page they see already shows the right goal. If the location can't be determined, the bar falls back to the store's selected country.
- **Selected market** — The bar uses the country the shopper has chosen in your store's country or market selector (or your store's default country when they haven't chosen). Pick this if you use Shopify Markets with a country selector and want the bar to always match what the shopper picked, or if many of your customers browse through VPNs or from abroad and you'd rather they set the country themselves.

If the two would disagree — a visitor in France who has switched your store to the United States market — **Visitor location** shows the French goal and **Selected market** shows the US goal. Choose whichever matches how your checkout will actually behave.

## Currency Conversion

Goals are stored in your store currency. When a shopper browses in another currency through Shopify Markets, the bar converts the goal using your store's current Markets rate and formats it in that currency, so a $50 goal appears as roughly €46 to a shopper paying in euros.

- **Converted amounts can look uneven** — $50 might show as €46.13. If you'd rather show a round number for a market, add a [country override](https://help.pasilobus.com/help) (Growth and up) for that country with the exact amount you want (entered in your store currency, so pick a value that converts cleanly, or accept the small difference).
- **Rounding at checkout** — If your Markets settings round converted prices, the bar's amount may differ from the checkout's by a few cents. Shoppers still unlock free shipping at the same point, because the comparison is done on the real cart total.

## When a Country Has No Free Shipping

Under **Settings > Bar behaviour**, **When free shipping isn't available** controls what shoppers in a country with no free shipping see:

- **Show a message** (default) — "Free shipping isn't available for Switzerland yet. Shipping is calculated at checkout." Honest, and it saves the shopper a surprise at checkout. The wording is editable under [Translations](https://help.pasilobus.com/help).
- **Hide the bar** — Nothing is shown. Choose this if you'd rather not draw attention to countries you don't ship free to.

## Testing Another Country

- **Selected market** — Use your store's country selector to switch, and the bar updates.
- **Visitor location** — Shopify decides the location, so you can't switch it from the page. Use a VPN set to the country you want to check, or temporarily switch the country source to **Selected market**, test with the selector, and switch back.
- **In the theme editor** — The editor shows the bar for your store's default country.

The detected country is remembered for the browsing session, so after changing settings open a new private window to see the result from scratch.

---

# Top Bar, Product & Cart Bars

> The three placements the app embed gives you, the optional theme blocks, and the design settings in the theme editor

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar/top-bar-and-blocks
App: Free Shipping Bar (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Free Shipping Bar")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sales-banners
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar
Section: Placements, design & plans
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Free Shipping Bar appears in three places on your storefront: an announcement-style bar across the top (or bottom) of the page, a compact progress bar in the cart drawer and on the cart page, and a nudge above the buy buttons on product pages. All three come from the single app embed you enabled during [installation](https://help.pasilobus.com/help), and all three share one cart state, so a shopper who adds an item sees every bar update at the same moment. How they look is set in the theme editor; how they behave is set in the app under [Bar Behaviour](https://help.pasilobus.com/help). Every placement is included on every plan.

## What the Embed Shows

Open **Online Store > Themes > Customize**, click **App embeds** in the left sidebar, and click **Free Shipping Bar** to see its settings.

- **Top bar** — On while the embed is enabled. By default it behaves like an announcement: it shows the goal while the cart is empty, then, once the cart has items, slides in for a few seconds on each page and after each cart change with the progress or the unlocked message, and hides again. Under **Settings > Bar behaviour > Top bar** you can keep it on screen permanently instead, set how many seconds it stays each time it appears, and choose whether to skip the empty-cart announcement when your theme already shows one. See [Bar Behaviour](https://help.pasilobus.com/help).
- **Show in the cart and cart drawer** (Automatically / Off) — On **Automatically**, the app looks for your theme's cart drawer and the totals area of the cart page and places a compact progress bar there. Dawn, Horizon and the many themes built on them are recognised out of the box. It refreshes every time the drawer opens or the cart changes.
- **Show on product pages** (Automatically / Off) — On **Automatically**, a one-line nudge appears above the buy buttons: "Add this item to unlock free shipping", or "$18 away from free shipping" counting the item on screen. It watches the variant selector, so the hint changes when the shopper picks a different size or colour.
- **Custom CSS selector (optional)** — If your theme isn't recognised and the cart bar doesn't appear, paste the CSS selector of the element inside your cart or cart drawer that the bar should be inserted into (it becomes the first thing in that element; your theme developer or the theme's support can tell you this, for example `.cart__footer` or `#CartDrawer .drawer__footer`). The product page has its own selector: the product form, or the element the bar should sit before. Leave both blank for recognised themes.

## Design Settings

The embed has two colour groups so the big top bar and the small inline bars can be styled separately:

- **Top bar** — Position (**Top** overlays the top of the page, **Bottom** sits at the bottom, **Inline top** pushes the page content down so the bar never covers your header), sticky, background, text, progress track and fill colours, font size and height. **Show progress bar** is off by default for the top bar: an announcement reads better as one line, and the cart and product bars carry the visual progress. Turn it on if you keep the top bar set to **Always**.
- **Inline bars** — Background, text, track and fill colours for the cart and product page bars, plus their size. **Show progress bar** is on by default here.
- **Progress style** — A full **bar** or a **slim** line, for whichever bars have the progress bar turned on.
- **Icon** — Shows a small shipping icon before the message.
- **Animation** — Whether the bars and their messages transition smoothly or change instantly.

Click **Save** in the theme editor. Changes are live immediately.

## The Theme Blocks (Optional)

Auto placement suits most themes. When you want a bar in an exact spot, the app also ships two theme app blocks that you position like any other block:

- **Product page block** — Place it anywhere in a product template: above the description, under the price, in a sidebar.
- **Cart block** — Place it in the cart page, or in a cart drawer that accepts app blocks.

Add them from **Settings > Extensions** in the app (**Set up in Shopify** opens the theme editor on the right template with the block ready to drop in), or in the theme editor by clicking **Add block** in a section and picking **Free Shipping Bar** under **Apps**. Each block has its own colours, size and progress style, independent of the embed.

Once a block is on a page, the embed stops placing its own bar on that page. You don't need to set **Show in the cart and cart drawer** or **Show on product pages** to **Off** — the block takes over automatically, and removing it hands the page back to auto placement.

## Turning Placements Off

- **Only the top bar** — Set **Show in the cart and cart drawer** and **Show on product pages** to **Off** in the embed. Consider **Always** under **Settings > Bar behaviour > Top bar** so the progress stays visible.
- **Only the cart and product bars** — Keep the embed on and use **Pages** under **Settings > Bar behaviour** (Growth and up) to limit the top bar to the pages you choose, or its **Devices** setting to hide it on mobile where the inline bars carry the message.
- **Nothing** — Switch off **Enabled** under **Settings > Bar behaviour**, or disable the embed in the theme editor.

## Which Placements to Use

- **All three, as installed** — Right for most stores. The product nudge catches shoppers before they add, the cart bar catches them while they review, and the top bar announces the goal to new visitors and pops in with progress after each change.
- **Top bar and cart only** — For stores whose product pages are already busy, or where a single item rarely crosses the goal.
- **Blocks instead of auto placement** — For heavily customised themes, or when the auto-placed bar lands somewhere you don't like.

---

# Bar Behaviour

> Settings that control when the bar shows and how it reacts, under Settings > Bar behaviour

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar/bar-behaviour
App: Free Shipping Bar (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Free Shipping Bar")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sales-banners
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar
Section: Placements, design & plans
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Two places control the bar. The theme editor decides how it looks — position, colours, size, progress style. The app decides how it behaves — when the top bar appears and for how long, which cart total it compares, whether shoppers can close it, and what happens when the goal is reached. Behaviour settings are under **Settings > Bar behaviour** and apply to every placement at once.

## Showing the Bar

- **Enabled** — The master switch. Turn it off to hide every placement without touching your theme. Useful while you set things up or if you pause free shipping.
- **Show on empty cart** — With nothing in the cart, show the teaser ("Free shipping on orders over $50"). Turn it off to show the bars only once the shopper has started a cart; in dynamic mode that means the top bar first appears after the first item is added.
- **Pages** (Growth and up) — Show the top bar on all pages, or only on the ones you tick: home, product, collection, cart, search, blog and page. The cart and product page bars belong to their own pages and aren't affected.
- **Devices** (Growth and up) — All devices, desktop only, or mobile only. Mobile screens are small, and some stores prefer to keep the bar off them and rely on the cart and product page bars instead.

## Top Bar

The top bar behaves like an announcement rather than a fixture. By default it is on screen while the cart is empty, so the goal is the first thing a visitor learns, and then gets out of the way: once the cart has items it slides in for a few seconds on each page the shopper opens and after each cart change, with the updated progress, and hides again. Three settings under **Settings > Bar behaviour > Top bar** control this:

- **When the top bar shows** — **Dynamically (default) — for a few seconds on each page and after each cart change, and as an announcement while the cart is empty** keeps the bar out of the way once shopping starts while still reminding shoppers of their progress as they browse. **Always** keeps it on screen on every page like a fixed announcement bar, updating in place as the cart changes.
- **Seconds to show on each page and after a cart change** — Dynamic mode only. How long the bar stays in view each time it slides in (on page load with items in the cart, and after a cart change), from 2 to 30 seconds (default 6). Give shoppers long enough to read the remaining amount; on a busy page 6 seconds is plenty.
- **Skip the announcement when your theme already shows one** — Dynamic mode only, on by default. If your theme's own announcement bar is visible, the empty-cart announcement is not shown, so two bars never stack at the top of the page. Once the cart has items, the bar still slides in on each page and after cart changes. Turn it off if you want the free shipping goal shown alongside your theme's announcement.

The cart and product page bars are unaffected: they stay in place on their pages and update live.

## Comparing the Cart

- **Cart total to compare** — **Total after discounts** (default) uses the amount the shopper will actually pay for the items, after automatic and code discounts. **Item subtotal** uses the amount before discounts. Match this to how your free shipping rate is evaluated: Shopify shipping rate conditions look at the cart total after discounts, so the default is right for detected goals. Pick **Item subtotal** if you use manual goals that you describe in terms of "spend $50 on products".

## Country and Availability

- **Country source** — Visitor location or selected market. See [Country Detection & Currencies](https://help.pasilobus.com/help).
- **When free shipping isn't available** — Show an honest message, or hide the bar. Also covered in that article.

## Reactions

- **Unlock celebration** — A brief pulse and highlight when the shopper crosses the goal. On by default. Turn it off for a quieter storefront.
- **Dismissible** (Growth and up) — Adds a close button to the top bar. A shopper who closes it doesn't see it again for the rest of their browsing session — including the slide-ins on each page and after cart changes — and it returns on their next visit. Most useful with **Always**; in dynamic mode the bar already hides itself. The cart and product page bars can't be dismissed.

## Custom CSS (Growth and Up)

A box for CSS that is added once to every page with the bar. Use it for anything the theme editor settings don't cover — a different font, a border, spacing tweaks, or hiding the icon on mobile. Target the bar's own classes so your rules don't affect the rest of the theme. The box holds up to 5,000 characters.

> After changing custom CSS, check the bar on a phone as well as on desktop. A rule that fits a wide bar can wrap or overflow on a narrow one.

## Premium Settings on This Page

- **Milestones** — Goals after free shipping, such as a free gift at $100. See [Plans & Premium Features](https://help.pasilobus.com/help).
- **Schedule** — Start and end dates outside which the bar doesn't show at all. Also in that article.

## Locked Settings

Settings your plan doesn't include are shown greyed out with a "Growth plan and up" or "Premium plan" note rather than hidden, so you can see what upgrading would give you. If you downgrade, those settings return to their defaults on the storefront but your stored values are kept, so upgrading again restores them.

---

# Translations

> Edit the wording shoppers see in any of your store's languages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar/translations
App: Free Shipping Bar (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Free Shipping Bar")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sales-banners
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar
Section: Placements, design & plans
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every message the bar shows is editable, and each of your store's languages has its own set. The defaults are neutral English; you can make them match your brand's voice, mention a delivery promise, or translate them for shoppers who browse in another language. Wording is managed in the app under **Settings > Translations** and applies to every placement.

## The Messages

- **Empty cart** — "Free shipping on orders over {{goal}}". Shown by the top bar when the cart is empty and the empty-cart teaser is on.
- **Progress** — "Add {{remaining}} more to unlock free shipping". The top bar while the cart is below the goal.
- **Unlocked** — "You've unlocked free shipping!". Any placement once the goal is reached.
- **Always free** — "Free shipping on every order". Countries with an unconditional free rate.
- **Not available** — "Free shipping isn't available for {{country}} yet. Shipping is calculated at checkout." Countries with no free shipping, when the bar is set to show a message.
- **Product page — would unlock** — "Add this item to unlock free shipping".
- **Product page — progress** — "{{remaining}} away from free shipping".
- **Cart — progress** — "You're {{remaining}} away from free shipping".
- **Cart — unlocked** — "🎉 You're getting free shipping!".
- **Milestone — progress** — "Add {{remaining}} more to get {{reward}}" (Premium).
- **Milestone — unlocked** — "You've unlocked {{reward}}!" (Premium).
- **Close** — The label of the close button on a dismissible bar, read by screen readers.

## Placeholders

The parts in double curly braces are filled in for each shopper. Keep them in your wording wherever you want the value to appear; you can move them or leave one out.

- **{{goal}}** — The free shipping threshold, formatted in the shopper's currency.
- **{{remaining}}** — How much more the shopper needs to add.
- **{{total}}** — The current cart total being compared.
- **{{country}}** — The name of the shopper's country.
- **{{reward}}** — The milestone reward you entered, for milestone messages.

## Editing Wording

Open **Settings > Translations**. Each language is listed with its messages; click a message to edit it and save. Changes reach your storefront within moments.

You don't need more than one language to use this page. Many stores keep only English and simply reword the defaults — "Spend {{remaining}} more and shipping's on us" reads very differently from the default.

## Adding a Language

Click **Add language** and choose from the list. The new language starts with a ready-made translation of every message, which you can adjust. The storefront picks the set that matches the language the shopper is browsing your store in, and falls back to your default language when there is no match. Translations are available on every plan, in 21 languages.

## Tips

- **Keep it short** — The top bar is one line. Long messages wrap on mobile and push the progress bar down.
- **Say what happens next** — Wording like "Add {{remaining}} more for free shipping — applied at checkout" answers the question shoppers actually have.
- **Be honest in the unavailable message** — It's the one message shoppers in a country without free shipping will see. "We're working on free shipping to {{country}}" is better than silence, and better than a goal they can't reach.

---

# Plans & Premium Features

> What Free, Growth and Premium include, plus milestones, analytics and scheduling

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar/plans-and-premium-features
App: Free Shipping Bar (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Free Shipping Bar")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sales-banners
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/free-shipping-bar
Section: Placements, design & plans
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Free Shipping Bar has three plans. Everything shoppers see is on the Free plan — all three placements, the detected goals, country detection, currencies, the honest "not available" message and the languages — with no view limit. The paid plans are about control and measurement: Growth lets you decide the goals and where the bar shows, Premium lets you measure it, add goals beyond free shipping, and schedule it. You can change plan at any time from **Settings > Billing**; both paid plans start with a 7-day free trial.

## What Each Plan Includes

- **Free — $0** — The top bar, the cart bar (drawer and cart page) and the product page bar; goals detected from your shipping zones and automatic free-shipping discounts; the right goal for each shopper's country, in their market currency; the honest "no free shipping to your country" message; the progress bar and the unlock celebration; 21 storefront languages; unlimited views.
- **Growth — $4.99/month, 7-day trial** — Everything in Free, plus manual goals and per-country overrides, page and device targeting, a dismissible bar, and custom CSS.
- **Premium — $9.99/month, 7-day trial** — Everything in Growth, plus milestone goals after free shipping, analytics, scheduling, and priority support.

Locked settings are always visible in the app, greyed out with a note saying which plan includes them, so you can see what you'd get before upgrading.

## Why Manual Goals Are a Growth Feature

On the Free plan the bar shows exactly what your Shopify shipping settings say. If a goal is wrong, the fix is in **Settings > Shipping and delivery** in Shopify — correct the rate, click **Sync now** on **Shipping goals**, and the bar follows. That keeps the bar and your checkout in agreement by construction. Growth is for stores that need the bar to say something the shipping settings can't express: a promotional goal, a country exception handled outside shipping rates, or a weight-limited rate that needs different wording. See [Manual Goals & Country Overrides](https://help.pasilobus.com/help).

## Milestones (Premium)

A milestone is a second goal shown once free shipping is unlocked: "Add $32 more to get a free tote bag", then "You've unlocked a free tote bag!". Use it to keep the bar useful after the first goal is met and lift the average order a step further.

- Open **Settings > Bar behaviour > Milestones** and click **Add milestone**.
- Enter the **threshold** in your store currency and the **reward** in words, exactly as it should appear in the message, for example "a free tote bag" or "10% off".
- Add up to three milestones. They are shown in ascending order, one at a time, after free shipping.
- Click **Save**.

The app shows the milestone; it doesn't create the reward. Set up the free gift, discount or whatever you promised as an automatic discount in Shopify so shoppers actually receive it at checkout. Thresholds convert to the shopper's market currency the same way free shipping goals do. Milestone wording is editable under [Translations](https://help.pasilobus.com/help).

## Analytics (Premium)

The dashboard's metrics card and the analytics section show how the bar is doing for the current billing cycle:

- **Impressions** — How many times a placement was shown.
- **Unlocks** — How many times a shopper crossed the free shipping goal while a bar was visible.
- **Unlock rate** — Unlocks as a share of impressions.
- **Top countries** — Where your impressions and unlocks come from, which is a quick way to spot a country whose goal is set too high to be reached.

Figures are counted per day and per placement, so you can compare the top bar against the cart bar. Counting starts when you move to Premium; earlier activity isn't back-filled.

## Scheduling (Premium)

A schedule shows the bar only between a start and an end date. Outside the window nothing renders — no top bar, no cart or product bars — so you don't need to switch the embed off and on around a campaign.

- Open **Settings > Bar behaviour > Schedule**.
- Set a **start** date and time and, optionally, an **end**. Leave either blank for open-ended.
- Click **Save**.

Schedules work well with a temporary [manual goal or override](https://help.pasilobus.com/help) for a sale: set the promotional goal, schedule the bar for the sale dates, and switch the goal back afterwards.

## Changing Plan

Open **Settings > Billing** and pick a plan. Shopify handles the charge on your regular Shopify bill, the trial starts straight away, and the new plan's features switch on immediately.

If you move to a lower plan, the storefront keeps working — every placement stays — but settings that belong to a higher plan stop applying: goals go back to the detected ones, overrides and targeting fall back to defaults, the close button disappears, custom CSS is no longer added, and milestones, analytics and schedules pause. Your values are kept, so upgrading again restores them.

---

# Installation

> Install the app and connect your GA4 account

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics/installation
App: GA4 Tracking (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Google Analytics")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-google-analytics
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-02-08
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Installing from the App Store

1. Visit the [Pasilobus Google Analytics](https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-google-analytics) app listing on the Shopify App Store
2. Click **Add app** to begin the installation
3. Follow the prompts to complete installation

## Connecting with Google

The quickest way to connect is **Connect with Google** on the app's home page (first setup step) or on **Settings > GA4 Credentials**:

1. Click **Connect with Google**. Google's sign-in page opens in the full browser window.
2. Sign in with the Google account that manages your GA4 property and allow access to Google Analytics.
3. Back in the app, choose your GA4 web data stream from the list. Streams are grouped by Google Analytics account and property, so pick the account, then the property, then its web stream.
4. Tick the box to accept Google's user data collection terms for that property (Google requires this before an API secret can be created).
5. Click **Use this data stream**.

The app fills in the Measurement ID and creates a Measurement Protocol API secret on that stream for you. It then gives up its access to your Google account: nothing else in Google Analytics is changed, and no Google login is kept.

If you prefer, or if your Google account cannot manage the property, enter the two values by hand as described below.

## Getting Your GA4 Credentials by Hand

Before the app can send data to Google Analytics, you need two pieces of information from your GA4 account:

### Finding Your Measurement ID

1. Go to [analytics.google.com](https://analytics.google.com)
2. Click the **Admin** gear icon in the bottom-left corner
3. Open **Data collection and modification > Data streams**
4. Select your web data stream
5. Your **Measurement ID** (starts with G-) is shown at the top—copy it

![Open Google Analytics Admin](https://pixels.pasilobus.com/docs/tutorial1.png)

![Open Data Streams](https://pixels.pasilobus.com/docs/tutorial2.png)

![Copy Measurement ID](https://pixels.pasilobus.com/docs/tutorial3.png)

### Creating an API Secret

1. In the same Data Stream details page, scroll down
2. Click **Measurement Protocol API secrets**
3. Click **Create** to generate a new secret
4. Give it a name (e.g., "Shopify Pasilobus Google Analytics")
5. Copy the **Secret value**

![Open Measurement Protocol secrets](https://pixels.pasilobus.com/docs/tutorial4.png)

![Create API Secret](https://pixels.pasilobus.com/docs/tutorial5.png)

![Copy the secret value](https://pixels.pasilobus.com/docs/tutorial6.png)

## Entering Credentials in the App

1. Open the Pasilobus Google Analytics app in your Shopify admin
2. Enter your **Measurement ID** in the first field
3. Enter your **API Secret** in the second field
4. Click **Save**

Once saved, the API Secret is hidden and never shown again. To change it, paste a new secret into the field and save. Leaving the field empty keeps the secret you already saved.

The app refuses a value that cannot be an API secret (for example the secret's nickname, or text with spaces). Google accepts events sent with any secret without reporting an error, so use **Send test event** (below) to confirm the secret belongs to your data stream.

![Enter credentials in app](https://pixels.pasilobus.com/docs/tutorial7.png)

## Verifying Tracking is Working

To check your credentials straight away, open **Settings > GA4 Credentials** and click **Send test event**. The app sends an event named `pasilobus_connection_test` in debug mode; open **Admin > DebugView** in Google Analytics and it should appear within a minute. If it does not, the API secret does not belong to that data stream.

To confirm everything is set up correctly:

1. Visit your store and browse a few pages
2. Add a product to cart
3. Wait 24-48 hours for data to appear in GA4 reports

For real-time verification, use GA4's **DebugView**:
1. In Google Analytics, go to Admin > DebugView
2. Browse your store in a separate tab
3. Watch for events appearing in real-time

If events aren't showing, check the [Events Not Showing](https://help.pasilobus.com/troubleshooting/events-not-showing) troubleshooting guide.

## Enabling the App Embed

After saving your credentials, enable the app on your theme:

1. Select your theme from the dropdown
2. Click **Open Theme Editor**
3. In the theme editor, find "Pasilobus Google Analytics" in the App Embeds section
4. Toggle it **On** and click **Save**

---

# How Tracking Works

> Understand what events are tracked automatically

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics/how-ga4-tracking-works
App: GA4 Tracking (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Google Analytics")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-google-analytics
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-02-08
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## What Gets Tracked

The app automatically tracks all standard GA4 ecommerce events:

| Event | When It Fires |
|-------|---------------|
| `page_view` | Customer views any page |
| `view_item` | Customer views a product page |
| `add_to_cart` | Customer adds a product to cart |
| `remove_from_cart` | Customer removes a product from cart |
| `begin_checkout` | Customer starts the checkout process |
| `add_shipping_info` | Customer enters shipping information |
| `add_payment_info` | Customer enters payment details |
| `purchase` | Customer completes a purchase |
| `search` | Customer performs a search |

Each event includes relevant data like product IDs, names, prices, quantities, and transaction values.

## Server-Side Tracking

The app uses server-side tracking for checkout and purchase events, making them resistant to ad blockers and privacy browsers. This means the events that matter most for revenue tracking are captured reliably.

## Data in GA4

After events are tracked, data typically appears in your GA4 reports within 24-48 hours. For real-time testing, use GA4's DebugView.

---

# Standard Events

> Configure which ecommerce events are tracked

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics/standard-events
App: GA4 Tracking (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Google Analytics")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-google-analytics
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-08
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Standard GA4 Ecommerce Events

The app tracks these events automatically:

| Event | Description | Data Included |
|-------|-------------|---------------|
| `page_view` | Any page is viewed | Page URL, title |
| `view_item` | Product page viewed | Product ID, name, price, brand |
| `search` | Search performed | Search query |
| `add_to_cart` | Product added to cart | Product ID, name, variant, unit price, quantity; value is the line total (price × quantity) |
| `remove_from_cart` | Product removed from cart | Product ID, name, variant, unit price, quantity; value is the line total |
| `begin_checkout` | Checkout started | Cart contents, total value |
| `add_shipping_info` | Shipping info submitted | Shipping method, cart value |
| `add_payment_info` | Payment info submitted | Payment method, cart value |

Checkout steps (`begin_checkout`, `add_contact_info`, `add_shipping_info`, `select_shipping_method`, `add_payment_info`) are sent once per checkout: reloading the checkout page or retrying a declined card does not send them again, so your GA4 funnel is not inflated.

Browser and server events share one GA4 client ID (the one Google's tag sets on your storefront, read with the shopper's analytics consent), so a shopper's browsing and their purchase appear as the same user in GA4. This holds from the first page: when a shopper accepts cookies on the page they landed on, their cart events on that page already use the same ID.
| `purchase` | Order completed | Transaction ID, revenue, tax, shipping, items |

## Enabling/Disabling Events (Pro)

On the **Pro** plan, you can toggle individual events on or off:

1. Open the Pasilobus Google Analytics app
2. Find the **Standard Events** section
3. Toggle events on (tracked) or off (not tracked)
4. Changes take effect immediately

This is useful if you:
- Only want to track conversion events (purchases) and want to reduce noise
- Have another system (like Google & YouTube) already tracking certain events
- Want to reduce data volume in GA4, especially on high-traffic stores

On the **Free** plan, all standard events are tracked automatically and cannot be disabled.

## Enhanced Data Tracking

Each event is sent to GA4 with detailed data—product names, prices, quantities, transaction values, tax, shipping, and more. This powers GA4's built-in ecommerce reports including product performance, shopping behavior analysis, checkout funnel visualization, and revenue attribution.

---

# Custom Events

> Create custom events to track specific interactions

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics/custom-events
App: GA4 Tracking (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Google Analytics")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-google-analytics
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-08
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Custom events are part of the **Max** plan. On other plans the Custom Events page shows the events you already have, and you can delete them, but adding or editing needs Max.

## What Are Custom Events?

While standard events track the buying journey (view, cart, purchase), custom events let you track other important interactions:

- Newsletter signup button clicks
- Video plays
- Download button clicks
- Social media link clicks
- Banner or promotion clicks
- FAQ accordion opens
- Size guide views

These events appear in GA4 alongside your standard ecommerce events.

## Creating a Custom Event

1. Open the Pasilobus Google Analytics app
2. Open **Custom Events** in the app menu
3. Click **Add Event**
4. Configure your event (see options below)
5. Click **Save**

The event is live on your storefront as soon as it is saved. Reload a storefront page to see it. Custom events are sent after Google's tag has loaded, so they reach GA4 like your page views do.

## Event Configuration Options

### Event Name

The name that appears in GA4 (e.g., `newsletter_signup`). Use lowercase with underscores.

### Event Type

Choose when the event should fire:

| Type | Use Case |
|------|----------|
| **Page Visit** | Track when customers visit specific pages |
| **Click** | Track button or link clicks |
| **Form Submission** | Track form completions |
| **Scroll Depth** | Track when a shopper scrolls past a share of the page. Set **Value** to the percentage (default 50) |

### Category, Action, Label and Value (Optional)

GA4 only needs the event name. Category, Action and Label are sent as event parameters when you fill them in; leave them blank if your reports do not use them. Value is sent as the event's `value` (for Scroll Depth it is the percentage).

### Page Path (Optional)

Limit the event to specific pages. Leave blank to track on all pages.

**Wildcard support**: Use `*` to match any characters in the URL path.

| Pattern | Matches |
|---------|---------|
| `/collections/*` | Any collection page |
| `/products/*` | Any product page |
| `/pages/faq` | Only the FAQ page |
| `/blogs/*/tagged/*` | Blog posts with specific tags |

### Element Selector (for Click and Form events)

Tell the app which element to track using CSS selectors:

| Selector Type | Example | Tracks |
|---------------|---------|--------|
| ID | `#newsletter-form` | Element with id="newsletter-form" |
| Class | `.signup-button` | Elements with class="signup-button" |
| Data attribute | `[data-action="subscribe"]` | Elements with that data attribute |
| Tag + class | `button.add-to-wishlist` | Button elements with that class |

**Tip**: Right-click an element in your browser, select "Inspect", and look for unique IDs or classes.

## Example: Track Newsletter Signups

1. **Event Name**: `newsletter_signup`
2. **Event Type**: Click
3. **Page Path**: Leave blank (track on all pages)
4. **Element Selector**: `.newsletter-submit-button`

## Example: Track Size Guide Views

1. **Event Name**: `size_guide_view`
2. **Event Type**: Click
3. **Page Path**: `/products/*` (only on product pages)
4. **Element Selector**: `[data-action="size-guide"]`

## Testing Custom Events

After creating a custom event:

1. Open your store in a new tab
2. Navigate to a page where the event should fire
3. Perform the action (click the button, visit the page, etc.)
4. Check GA4's **DebugView** (Admin > DebugView) to see the event in real-time

If the event doesn't fire, double-check your element selector and page path match the actual page.

## Event Naming Best Practices

- Use lowercase with underscores: `newsletter_signup` not `NewsletterSignup`
- Be descriptive: `video_play` is better than `click1`
- Be consistent: Use the same naming pattern across all custom events
- Avoid spaces and special characters

## Managing Custom Events

From the Custom Events page, you can:

- **Edit**: Update the configuration
- **Delete**: Remove events you no longer need. A deleted event stops firing on your storefront.

There's no limit to the number of custom events you can create.

---

# Tag Manager

> Send data to multiple GA4 properties

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics/tag-manager
App: GA4 Tracking (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Google Analytics")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-google-analytics
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-08
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Tag Manager is available on every plan, including Free.

## Why Use Multiple Tags?

Common scenarios for multiple tracking destinations:

- **Agencies**: Send data to both your GA4 and your client's GA4
- **Multi-brand stores**: Track data in separate properties per brand
- **Marketing teams**: Share conversion data with external partners
- **Google Ads**: Track conversions directly in your Google Ads account

## Adding Additional GA4 Tags

To send data to another GA4 property:

1. Open the Pasilobus Google Analytics app
2. Open **Tag Manager** in the app menu
3. Click **Add Tag**
4. Select **GA4 Property**
5. Enter the **Measurement ID** (G-XXXXXXXXXX)
6. Enter the **API Secret** for that property
7. Click **Save**

The app will now send all tracked events to both your primary GA4 property and any additional tags you've added.

### Getting Credentials for Additional Properties

Follow the same process as your primary GA4 setup:

1. Open the GA4 property you want to add
2. Go to Admin > Data collection and modification > Data streams > your web stream
3. Copy the Measurement ID
4. Create a new API Secret under Measurement Protocol API secrets
5. Copy the secret value

## Adding a Google Ads Tag

The Google Ads tag is a single field: your Google Ads tag ID, for example `AW-123456789`. The app loads it on every storefront page, which is what Google Ads needs for remarketing audiences and for conversions that happen on the storefront.

1. In Tag Manager, click **Add Tag**
2. Select **Google Ads**
3. Enter your tag ID (`AW-` followed by digits)
4. Click **Save**

Shopify's checkout does not run theme code, so the tag does not see purchases on its own. The tag's page shows a Custom Pixel snippet you can add under **Settings > Customer events** in Shopify for checkout conversions.

### Finding Your Google Ads Tag ID

1. Open [Google Ads](https://ads.google.com)
2. Go to Tools > Data manager > Google tag (or Tools & Settings > Conversions and open a conversion action's tag setup)
3. Copy the tag ID that starts with `AW-`

## Adding a Google Tag Manager Container

1. In Tag Manager, click **Add Tag**
2. Select **Google Tag Manager (GTM)**
3. Enter your container ID (`GTM-` followed by letters and digits)
4. Click **Save**

The container loads on every storefront page, after the app has set Google Consent Mode defaults, so your container's tags start with the shopper's consent choice. Shopify's checkout does not run theme code, so container tags do not fire in checkout; purchases still reach your main GA4 property through this app.

## Managing Tags

From the Tag Manager page, you can:

- **View**: See all configured tags
- **Edit**: Update credentials for a tag
- **Remove**: Delete tags you no longer need

Changes take effect immediately for new events.

## Data Sent to Additional Tags

Additional GA4 tags with an API secret receive the same events as your primary property:

- All standard ecommerce events, including checkout and purchase
- The same product and transaction data

A GA4 tag without an API secret receives storefront events only (page and product views).

This ensures consistent data across all your analytics properties.

---

# Refund Tracking

> Automatically track refunds in GA4

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics/refund-tracking
App: GA4 Tracking (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Google Analytics")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-google-analytics
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-08
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Why Track Refunds?

Without refund tracking, your GA4 reports show gross revenue—every purchase, even ones you later refunded. This makes your revenue data misleading and inflates your reported numbers.

Most GA4 setups on Shopify—including Google's own Google & YouTube sales channel—don't track refunds. This means any store processing returns has inaccurate revenue data in GA4 by default.

With refund tracking enabled:
- GA4 automatically calculates net revenue (purchases minus refunds)
- Your ecommerce reports reflect actual retained revenue
- You can analyze refund patterns and rates
- Revenue attribution becomes more accurate for marketing decisions

## Enabling Refund Tracking

1. Open the Pasilobus Google Analytics app
2. Find the **Refund Tracking** section
3. Click **Enable**
4. Refunds will now be sent to GA4 automatically

To disable, click **Disable** in the same section.

## What Gets Sent to GA4

When you process a refund in Shopify, a `refund` event is sent to GA4 with:

- Original order ID (links the refund to the original purchase)
- Refund amount
- Currency
- Refunded items and quantities (for partial refunds)

For partial refunds, only the refunded portion is sent. Full refunds include the complete order value.

## Viewing Refunds in GA4

Once enabled, refund data appears in:

- **Monetization > Ecommerce purchases**: Revenue adjusted for refunds
- **Explore reports**: Build custom reports including refund events

GA4 automatically subtracts refund amounts from your revenue totals, giving you a true picture of retained revenue.

## Limitations

- Refund tracking works for orders placed after you installed the app, since the app needs to have recorded the original purchase
- Refunds processed more than 60 days after the original order will not be sent to Google Analytics
- Orders placed by customers using strict ad blockers may not have full tracking data available for refund matching

---

# Cross-Device Tracking

> Track logged-in customers across multiple devices in GA4

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics/cross-device-tracking
App: GA4 Tracking (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Google Analytics")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-google-analytics
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-10
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## What is Cross-Device Tracking?

By default, GA4 treats each device as a separate user. A customer who browses on their phone and buys on their laptop looks like two different visitors in your reports. This inflates your user count and breaks the customer journey in your analytics.

Cross-device tracking solves this by sending a unique identifier (the Shopify customer ID) to GA4 when a customer is logged in. GA4 uses this to connect sessions from the same person across different devices, giving you a single, accurate view of each customer's journey.

## How It Works

When a logged-in customer triggers any event on your store (add to cart, checkout, purchase, etc.), the app sends their Shopify customer ID to GA4 as a `user_id`. GA4 then links all sessions with the same `user_id` together, regardless of which device or browser was used.

This only works for logged-in customers. Anonymous visitors are still tracked by device as usual.

## Enabling Cross-Device Tracking

1. Open the Pasilobus Google Analytics app
2. Find the **Cross-Device Tracking** section
3. Click **Enable**

Once enabled, all events from logged-in customers will include their user ID.

## Verifying in GA4

To confirm cross-device tracking is working:

1. In GA4, go to **Admin > Reporting Identity**
2. Set reporting identity to **Blended** (recommended) or **Observed**
3. Go to **Explore > User Explorer** to see users identified by their Shopify customer ID

With **Blended** reporting identity, GA4 uses the user ID to deduplicate users across devices, giving you a more accurate user count.

## Requirements

- **Pro plan** required
- Customers must be logged in to their account on your store
- Works for all events tracked by the app (add to cart, checkout, purchase, etc.)

---

# Using Both Apps Together

> How to use both apps together without duplicate tracking

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics/google-youtube-channel
App: GA4 Tracking (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Google Analytics")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-google-analytics
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics
Section: Guides
Last updated: 2026-02-10
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## What is the Google & YouTube Channel?

The [Google & YouTube](https://apps.shopify.com/google) app (developed by Google) connects your store to:

- **Google Merchant Center**: Sync your product catalog to Google
- **Google Shopping**: List products in Google Shopping results
- **YouTube Shopping**: Tag products in YouTube videos
- **Google Ads**: Run Shopping and Performance Max campaigns

If you're running Google Shopping ads or want your products to appear in Google search results, you need this app.

## Do I Need Both Apps?

**Yes, for most merchants.** The two apps serve different purposes and complement each other:

- **Google & YouTube** is for product feeds, Shopping ads, and YouTube integration
- **Pasilobus Google Analytics** is for accurate, customizable GA4 analytics

Think of it this way: Google & YouTube gets your products in front of customers. Pasilobus Google Analytics tells you exactly what those customers do on your store.

| Feature | Google & YouTube | Pasilobus Google Analytics |
|---------|------------------|---------------------------|
| Product feed to Google Merchant Center | Yes | — |
| Google Shopping campaigns | Yes | — |
| YouTube Shopping | Yes | — |
| GA4 ecommerce tracking | Yes | Enhanced |
| Choose which events to track | — | Yes (Pro) |
| Custom events (clicks, forms, page visits, scroll depth) | — | Yes (Max) |
| Multiple GA4 properties | — | Yes |
| Refund tracking in GA4 | — | Yes (Max) |
| Cross-device tracking | — | Yes (Pro) |

## What Pasilobus Google Analytics Adds

### Event Customization

With Google & YouTube, you get a fixed set of events with no control. Pasilobus Google Analytics lets Pro users choose exactly which events to send. This is useful if:

- You only care about conversion events and want to reduce noise
- Another system already tracks certain events
- You want to stay within GA4's event limits on high-traffic stores

### Custom Events

Google & YouTube doesn't offer custom event tracking. With Pasilobus Google Analytics, you can track interactions specific to your store—newsletter signups, video plays, size guide clicks, banner interactions—and see them in GA4 alongside your ecommerce data.

### Multiple GA4 Properties

Need to send data to more than one GA4 property? Common for agencies managing client analytics or stores with multiple brands. Pasilobus supports additional measurement IDs through the Tag Manager feature. Google & YouTube only supports one.

### Refund Tracking

When you process a refund in Shopify, Google & YouTube doesn't send that information to GA4. This means your GA4 revenue reports are always overstated. Pasilobus Google Analytics (Pro plan) automatically sends refund events to GA4, so your revenue numbers reflect actual retained revenue—not just gross sales.

### Cross-Device Tracking

GA4 treats each device as a separate user by default. A customer who browses on their phone and buys on their laptop appears as two different visitors. Pasilobus Google Analytics (Pro plan) sends the Shopify customer ID to GA4 for logged-in customers, allowing GA4 to connect sessions across devices and give you accurate user counts. Google & YouTube doesn't offer this.

## Avoiding Duplicate Tracking

Both apps can send data to GA4, which causes duplicate events. To prevent this, disable GA4 tracking in the Google & YouTube app.

### How to Disable GA4 in Google & YouTube

1. In Shopify Admin, go to **Sales Channels > Google & YouTube**
2. Look for the **Google Analytics** section
3. Click **Disconnect** next to your GA4 property

Or via settings:

1. Go to **Sales Channels > Google & YouTube > Settings**
2. Find **Google tag** and click **Manage**
3. Remove any Google Analytics connections

After disconnecting, Pasilobus Google Analytics handles all GA4 tracking while Google & YouTube continues to manage your product feeds and Shopping campaigns.

## Other Sources of Duplicate Tracking

If you're seeing duplicate events in GA4 after disabling tracking in Google & YouTube, check:

### Theme Code
1. Go to **Online Store > Themes > Edit code**
2. Search for `gtag` or `G-` in theme files
3. Remove any hardcoded GA4 scripts

### Google Tag Manager
If you use GTM, check for active GA4 Configuration tags and pause them.

### Checkout Scripts
Go to **Settings > Checkout** and check the **Additional scripts** section for any GA4 code.

## Verifying Your Setup

To confirm only one source is tracking:

1. Open GA4 **DebugView** (Admin > DebugView)
2. Browse your store and add a product to cart
3. Each event should appear only once

If you see events firing twice within 1-2 seconds, you still have duplicate tracking somewhere.

---

# Why GA4 Shows Less Data Than Shopify

> Understanding the difference between GA4 and Shopify reports

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics/ga4-vs-shopify-data
App: GA4 Tracking (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Google Analytics")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-google-analytics
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics
Section: Guides
Last updated: 2026-02-08
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Why GA4 Shows Less Data

Shopify tracks every order directly in its system. GA4 relies on tracking events that fire when customers complete checkout. Several things can prevent those events from being tracked:

### Ad Blockers and Privacy Tools
Some customers use browser extensions or privacy settings that block analytics tracking. While Pasilobus Google Analytics is designed to work around most blockers, some extreme privacy configurations can still prevent tracking.

### Orders Before App Installation
GA4 only tracks orders placed after you installed and configured the app. Historical orders won't appear in GA4.

### Manual and Draft Orders
Orders created manually in Shopify Admin (like phone orders) or draft orders converted to orders may not trigger tracking events.

### Payment Processing Issues
If a customer's payment fails and they retry, or if there's a delay in payment confirmation, the tracking event might not fire correctly.

### International Checkout Redirects
Some payment methods redirect customers to external sites (like certain local payment providers), which can interrupt tracking.

## What's Normal?

For most stores, GA4 captures **90-98%** of orders tracked by Shopify. The exact percentage depends on:

- Your customer base (tech-savvy audiences use more ad blockers)
- Payment methods offered
- Geographic regions you sell to

A 5-10% difference between GA4 and Shopify is typical and expected.

## Which Numbers Should I Trust?

**For revenue and order counts**: Always use Shopify's reports as your source of truth. Shopify captures every order regardless of tracking.

**For customer behavior analysis**: Use GA4. It shows you how customers browse, what they add to cart, where they drop off, and which marketing channels drive traffic.

**For conversion optimization**: Use GA4's funnel analysis to understand the customer journey, but remember the actual conversion numbers are slightly higher than reported.

## Comparing Data Correctly

When comparing GA4 to Shopify:

1. **Use the same date range**: Make sure both reports cover identical periods
2. **Account for time zones**: GA4 and Shopify may use different time zones
3. **Wait 48 hours**: GA4 data can take up to 48 hours to finalize
4. **Filter by currency**: If you sell in multiple currencies, compare the same currency in both systems

## Improving Tracking Accuracy

To maximize tracking accuracy:

- **Keep the app embed enabled**: Make sure Pasilobus Google Analytics is toggled on in your theme's App Embeds
- **Don't duplicate tracking**: Remove other GA4 tracking scripts to avoid conflicts
- **Keep credentials current**: If you regenerate your GA4 API secret, update it in the app

Even with perfect setup, some gap between Shopify and GA4 is unavoidable due to ad blockers and privacy tools. Focus on trends and relative changes rather than exact numbers matching.

---

# Events Not Showing in GA4

> Fix missing events in Google Analytics

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics/events-not-showing
App: GA4 Tracking (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Google Analytics")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-google-analytics
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/google-analytics
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-02-08
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Check Your Credentials

The most common issue is incorrect or missing credentials.

1. Open the Pasilobus Google Analytics app
2. Verify your **Measurement ID** starts with `G-` and matches your GA4 property
3. Check that an **API Secret** is saved. The app never shows a saved secret again, so if you're not sure it's the right one, create a new secret and paste it in (see below)
4. Click **Send test event** on **Settings > GA4 Credentials**, then open **Admin > DebugView** in GA4. An event named `pasilobus_connection_test` should appear within a minute. If it does not, the secret belongs to another data stream.

The simplest fix for wrong credentials is **Connect with Google** on the same page: choose your data stream and the app fills in the Measurement ID and creates a fresh API secret.

### Verify in GA4

1. Go to [analytics.google.com](https://analytics.google.com)
2. Select your property
3. Go to Admin > Data collection and modification > Data streams
4. Click your web stream
5. Confirm the Measurement ID matches what's in the app

### Create a New API Secret

If unsure about your API secret:

1. In GA4, go to Admin > Data collection and modification > Data streams > your stream
2. Click **Measurement Protocol API secrets**
3. Click **Create** to generate a new secret
4. Copy the new secret value
5. Paste it into the Pasilobus Google Analytics app and save

## Check App Embed is Enabled

The app embed must be enabled in your theme:

1. In Shopify Admin, go to **Online Store > Themes**
2. Click **Customize** on your active theme
3. Click **App embeds** (bottom left)
4. Find "Pasilobus Google Analytics" and ensure it's toggled **On**
5. Click **Save**

If you don't see the app in App embeds, try reinstalling the app.

## GA4 Reporting Delay

GA4 does not show data in real-time reports immediately. Standard reports can take **24-48 hours** to update.

### Use DebugView for Real-Time Testing

1. In GA4, go to Admin > DebugView
2. Open your store in another browser tab
3. Browse some pages and add a product to cart
4. Watch DebugView for events appearing in real-time

If events appear in DebugView but not in reports, just wait—data will appear within 48 hours.

## Common Configuration Mistakes

### Wrong Property Selected
Make sure you're checking the correct GA4 property. If you have multiple properties, verify the Measurement ID matches.

### Using Universal Analytics ID
Measurement IDs starting with `UA-` are for the old Universal Analytics, which is now deprecated. You need a GA4 property with a `G-` ID.

### API Secret from Wrong Stream
If you have multiple data streams (web, iOS, Android), make sure your API secret is from the **web** data stream.

### Tracking Blocked by Browser
While server-side tracking bypasses most ad blockers, some extreme privacy settings may interfere. Test in an incognito/private window with no extensions.

## Still Not Working?

If you've verified all the above and events still aren't appearing:

1. Try disabling and re-enabling the app embed
2. Clear your browser cache and test again
3. Contact support with your Measurement ID (don't share your API secret)

---

# Installation

> Install Image Gallery on your store

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/installation
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Image Gallery turns scattered product photos, lifestyle shots, and brand imagery into polished, on-page galleries you can drop onto any storefront page. It works through a single theme block, so there's nothing to embed across your whole theme — you decide exactly where each gallery shows up.

## Installing the App

Install Image Gallery the same way you install any other app:

- **From the Shopify App Store** - Visit the Image Gallery listing and click **Add app**.
- **Approve the install** - Shopify will ask you to confirm. After approval you're taken straight into the app inside your admin.
- **No theme setup wizard** - Image Gallery doesn't change anything in your theme by itself. You add a gallery to a page only when you're ready, page by page.

## What to Do Next

Once the app is open in your admin, the dashboard is where everything starts:

- **Create your first gallery** - Click **Create Gallery**, give it a title (for your reference, not the storefront), pick a layout, and drop your images straight into the create screen. They're attached as soon as the gallery is created.
- **Arrange it** - On the gallery page, everything sits on one canvas: layout, images per row for desktop and mobile, and the images themselves. Drag tiles to reorder, then Save.
- **Install it on a page** - From the gallery page, click **Install to Theme**. The app walks you through copying the Gallery ID and opening the theme editor with the block ready to add.

## Where to Find the App

After install, the app lives inside your Shopify admin under **Apps > Image Gallery**. You can pin it to your admin sidebar by clicking the pin icon next to the app name — handy if you publish galleries regularly.

You can install Image Gallery on as many development and live themes as you want; each gallery you create is available to every theme on your store.

---

# How Image Gallery Works

> Understand galleries, the image library, and the theme block

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/how-image-gallery-works
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Image Gallery is built around three pieces that work together: galleries, your image library, and the theme block. Once you understand how they fit, adding new galleries to your storefront takes a couple of minutes.

## The Three Building Blocks

- **Galleries** - A gallery is a named set of images with a layout (Grid, Masonry, Mosaic, Collage, or Carousel), an image order, and its own images-per-row counts for desktop and mobile. You build all of that on one page in the app. Each gallery has a unique **Gallery ID** (for example, `gal_abc123`).
- **Image Library** - Every image you upload is saved to a shared library. The same image can appear in many galleries without uploading it twice, which keeps your storage usage low and your titles and alt text consistent.
- **Theme Block** - The block is what renders a gallery on your storefront. You add it to any page through the Shopify theme editor and tell it which gallery to show by pasting in the Gallery ID. It adds page-level polish — spacing, captions, the lightbox — on top of the gallery's own layout.

## A Typical Workflow

Most merchants follow the same path the first time:

- **Create a gallery** - From the dashboard, click **Create Gallery**, give it a title, and drop your images straight into the create screen.
- **Arrange it** - On the gallery page, pick a layout and how many images sit in a row, drag images into the order you want, and watch the canvas re-flow as you go.
- **Save** - One Save commits the settings and any new images together.
- **Install to theme** - Click **Install to Theme**, copy the Gallery ID, and open the theme editor.
- **Add the block** - The theme editor opens with the Image Gallery block ready to drop in. Paste the Gallery ID into its settings and save.

## Why It's Designed This Way

The split between galleries (managed in the app) and blocks (placed in the theme) means your storefront doesn't have to change every time you swap an image. How the gallery looks is decided in the app, against your real images, so the preview you approve is what ships. Update the gallery — new images, a different layout, a new order — and every page using its Gallery ID picks up the change. Need the same gallery on five pages? Add the block five times; they all stay in sync.

---

# Creating a Gallery

> Create a gallery and set it up on one page

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/creating-a-gallery
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A gallery is the unit you install on a page — it groups a set of images, a layout, and a unique Gallery ID together so the theme block knows what to render. Everything about it lives on one page in the app: the title, the layout, how many images sit in a row, and the images themselves, all saved together. You can have as many galleries as your plan allows, and each one is independent.

## Creating a New Gallery

From the app dashboard:

- **Open Galleries** - Click **Galleries** in the sidebar (or the dashboard tile).
- **Click Create Gallery** - The button is in the top right of the galleries list.
- **Fill in the title** - The title is for your reference inside the app and doesn't appear on the storefront. Use something descriptive like "Spring Lookbook" or "Customer Photos".
- **Choose a layout and images per row** - The same controls you'll use later on the gallery page. You can change both at any time.
- **Add your images right away** - Drag files into the drop zone on the create screen. They upload while you fill in the rest and are attached the moment the gallery is created.
- **Click Create gallery** - You land on the gallery's page with your images already in place.

## The Gallery Page

The gallery page is a single canvas — settings at the top, images below, one Save for both:

- **Gallery settings card** - Title, **Layout**, and **Images per row**, plus a **Save** button. A short note under the settings explains how the chosen layout uses the images-per-row number.
- **Desktop and Mobile toggle** - In the top right of the settings card. **Desktop** sets the count used from 750 px wide upwards (2-6). **Mobile** narrows the canvas to phone width and swaps in a separate count for narrower screens (1-4). Both are stored on the gallery and both are honoured by your storefront.
- **Images card** - Your actual images, laid out in the layout you picked. It doubles as the preview: change the layout or the column count and the canvas re-flows immediately.
- **Toolbar buttons** - **Import from Collection**, **Select from Library**, and **Upload images**.
- **Install to Theme** - In the page header, for when you're ready to put the gallery on a page.

## Saving Your Changes

Everything on the page is one form:

- **Make your changes** - Edit the title, pick a layout, change images per row, drop in new images.
- **A save bar appears** at the top of the page as soon as anything is unsaved.
- **Click Save** - Either the save bar's Save or the button in the settings card. Both save the settings and any pending uploads together.
- **Click Discard** in the save bar to throw the changes away and return to the last saved state.

Two actions save on their own and don't wait for the Save button: dragging images into a new order, and setting a Mosaic tile size from the badge on a tile.

## Renaming a Gallery

Change the **Title** field in the gallery settings card and save. There is no separate edit page — the gallery page covers everything. The Gallery ID never changes when you rename, so blocks already using it keep working.

## The Gallery ID

Every gallery gets a permanent Gallery ID like `gal_abc123`. This is the value you paste into the theme block to link the block to a gallery. You'll find it in two places:

- **On the Install to Theme screen** for that gallery, with a one-click copy button.
- **On the Installation page**, which lists every gallery next to its ID.

---

# Uploading Images

> Add images to a gallery from your computer

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/uploading-images
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Uploading images is the fastest path from "I have photos" to "they're live on my store." Every gallery page takes drag-and-drop or file picker selections, and processes them in the background so you can keep working while large files finish. You can also pull images straight from a Shopify collection instead of uploading them at all.

## Uploading from Your Computer

You can add images while creating a gallery or at any time afterwards:

- **On a new gallery** - The create screen has a drop zone under the settings. Files start uploading immediately and are attached when you click **Create gallery**.
- **On an empty gallery** - The same drop zone fills the images card until the first image lands.
- **On a gallery that already has images** - Click **Upload images** in the images card toolbar to open a file picker. Hold Cmd or Ctrl to select several files at once.
- **Drag and drop onto the drop zone** - Drag files (one or many) from Finder, Explorer, or your desktop straight into it.
- **Watch the previews appear** - Each file shows a preview tile as it uploads, so you can see what's been added before saving.
- **Click Save** - The save bar at the top of the page (or the Save button in the settings card) commits the uploads along with any settings you changed. Until you save, the images aren't attached yet.

## Importing from a Shopify Collection

If the images you want are already on your products, you don't need to download and re-upload them:

- **Click Import from Collection** in the images card toolbar.
- **Pick a collection** from the Shopify picker.
- **The import runs in the background** - Every product image in that collection is fetched and added to the gallery.
- **Refresh the page after a moment** to see them appear. Large collections take longer.

Imported images join your shared library like any upload, and count towards your storage.

## Supported File Types

Image Gallery accepts the file types most stores use:

- **JPG / JPEG** - Best for photos.
- **PNG** - Best for graphics with transparency.
- **GIF** - Animated GIFs are supported.
- **WebP** - Modern format with smaller file sizes.
- **SVG** - For logos and vector artwork.

There's no fixed file size limit, but very large images take longer to upload and process. For best storefront performance, export photos at the dimensions you actually need (most gallery layouts look great at 1200-1600 px wide).

## Storage Usage

The drop zone shows how much storage you have left on your plan. Each upload counts toward your storage quota.

- **Free plan** - Storage is limited.
- **Paid plans** - More storage. Visit **Plans** in the app to see the exact amount included with each plan.
- **Removing images** frees up the storage they were using.

## What Happens After Upload

Uploaded images are saved to your **shared image library**, not just the gallery you uploaded them to. This means:

- **New images land at the end of the gallery** - Drag any tile to move it; the new order saves on its own, without waiting for the Save button.
- **You can reuse the same image** in other galleries without uploading it again.
- **Removing an image from one gallery** doesn't delete it from the library — it stays available for other galleries.
- **Editing the title, alt text, or description** on an image updates it everywhere the image appears.

---

# Image Library

> Reuse images across multiple galleries

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/image-library
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The image library is your shared pool of every image you've uploaded to the app. Instead of re-uploading the same product photo for every gallery, you upload it once and add it to as many galleries as you need. This keeps your storage usage low and means any edits — like updating alt text for SEO — propagate everywhere.

## How the Library Works

Every time you upload an image to any gallery, that image is also saved to your library:

- **One upload, many galleries** - Add the same image to a "New Arrivals" gallery, a "Featured Products" gallery, and a homepage gallery without re-uploading.
- **Editing applies everywhere** - Updating an image's title, description, or alt text updates it in every gallery it's used in.
- **Position and tile size stay per gallery** - Where an image sits in the order, and its Mosaic tile size, belong to each gallery separately. The same photo can lead one gallery and sit fifth in another.
- **Removing from a gallery keeps it in the library** - The image stays available; only its placement in that one gallery is removed.

## Adding Library Images to a Gallery

Open the gallery you want to add images to and look for the **Select from Library** button in the images card toolbar:

- **Click Select from Library** - A picker opens showing every image already in your library.
- **Pick multiple images** - Tap each image you want to add. Selected images get a highlight.
- **Confirm your selection** - The chosen images appear at the end of the gallery canvas with a "Library" badge so you can tell them apart from images already saved.
- **Click Save** - Use the save bar or the Save button in the settings card. Until you save, the picks aren't linked yet; the small x on a badged tile drops it again.

If the **Select from Library** button isn't showing, it means every image in your library is already in this gallery, or the library is empty.

## Editing an Image's Details

Hover over any image in a gallery and click the edit icon in its top-right corner. From there you can set:

- **Title** - Shown as the caption when **Image titles** is enabled in the block settings.
- **Alt text** - Important for accessibility and SEO. Describe what the image shows.
- **Description** - A longer line shown when **Image descriptions** is enabled in the block settings.

Edits save straight to the library, so every other gallery using the same image picks up the new text immediately.

## Removing vs Deleting

These two actions are different:

- **Remove from gallery** - The image stays in your library and in any other gallery that uses it. Use this when you just want to swap something out of one gallery.
- **Delete from library** - The image is gone everywhere, and storage is freed up. Use this only when you no longer need the file at all.

---

# Gallery Layouts

> Choose between Grid, Masonry, Mosaic, Collage, and Carousel

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/layouts
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Layout choice is what gives a gallery its personality. The same set of images can feel like a clean product grid, an editorial lookbook, a Pinterest-style mosaic, or a swipeable strip depending on which layout you pick. Image Gallery offers five layouts, all chosen in the app on the gallery's own page — so the canvas you arrange is what your visitors get — and none of them require you to resize your images first.

## The Five Layouts

- **Grid — uniform tiles** - Every tile the same shape. The most predictable layout, perfect for product catalogues and structured pages. The tile shape is set on the theme block with **Grid tile shape**: Square (1:1), Portrait (3:4), Landscape (4:3), or Original ratio if you'd rather not crop at all.
- **Masonry — original heights, no cropping** - Variable-height tiles that respect each image's proportions. Columns stay straight but rows don't line up, which is what gives it the editorial feel. Great when portrait, landscape, and square images mix together. Your images are never cropped.
- **Mosaic — mixed tile sizes** - A patchwork where tiles differ in size: some span two columns, some two rows, some both. Roughly half the tiles come out non-square, and you can override any individual tile yourself — see "Sizing Individual Tiles" below.
- **Collage — a hero tile every eight images** - Every 8th image (the 1st, 9th, 17th and so on) becomes a large tile spanning two columns and two rows, with the rest filling in around it. Good for long galleries that need a rhythm of focal points rather than a single hero at the top.
- **Carousel — a sliding strip** - Shows as many images at once as your **Images per row** setting, and each click of the arrows advances by one image. At the end it wraps back to the start. Set Images per row to 1 for a classic one-at-a-time slideshow, or 3 for a scrolling filmstrip.

## Choosing a Layout

The layout belongs to the gallery, and you set it in the app — there is no Layout setting in the theme editor:

- **Open the gallery** in the app.
- **Pick a layout** from the **Layout** dropdown in the **Gallery settings** card at the top of the page.
- **Watch the canvas below redraw** - The images card is a live preview: it re-lays your real images in the layout you just picked, so you can judge it before committing.
- **Click Save** - Use the **Save** button in the settings card, or the save bar that appears at the top of the page. Nothing reaches your storefront until you save.

Because the layout lives on the gallery, every page where that gallery is installed switches together. If you want two different looks, create a second gallery, pull the same pictures in from your library, and give it a different layout.

## Images per Row

**Images per row** sits next to the Layout dropdown, and each layout treats it slightly differently:

- **Grid** - An exact count. Every row holds that many tiles.
- **Masonry** - The column count. Rows won't line up evenly, because each image keeps its own height.
- **Mosaic** - A target. Rows containing a tile that spans two columns fit fewer images.
- **Collage** - A target, for the same reason: hero tiles take up two columns.
- **Carousel** - How many slides are visible at once.

The app shows a short note under the setting explaining this for whichever layout is selected. Desktop and mobile each have their own count — see "Creating a Gallery" for the Desktop and Mobile toggle.

## Sizing Individual Tiles (Mosaic)

The Mosaic layout lets you decide which images deserve more space:

- **Hover over any image** in the gallery canvas.
- **Click the size badge** in the top-left corner of the tile. It cycles through **auto → large → wide → tall**.
- **Large** spans two columns and two rows, **wide** spans two columns, **tall** spans two rows, and **auto** lets the app decide.
- **The change saves on the spot** and the canvas re-flows immediately — tile sizes don't wait for the Save button.

An **auto** tile follows the app's built-in mosaic pattern, which mixes large, wide, and tall tiles so the gallery reads as a mosaic rather than a grid. Setting a size by hand overrides that one tile; every other image keeps the automatic pattern.

Tile sizes apply **only** to the Mosaic layout. In Grid, Masonry, Collage, and Carousel the badge is hidden because the size would change nothing — but the value you set is remembered, so switching back to Mosaic restores it.

## Tips for Choosing a Layout

- **Lots of product photos you want easy to compare** - Grid with the Square tile shape.
- **A mix of portrait and landscape shots, no cropping** - Masonry.
- **A lively, editorial patchwork with visual hierarchy** - Mosaic, with your best shots set to Large.
- **A long gallery that needs regular focal points** - Collage.
- **A compact strip that doesn't take over the page** - Carousel with 3 or 4 images per row.

---

# Lightbox and Captions

> Open full-size images and show titles on your gallery

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/lightbox-and-captions
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The lightbox lets visitors click any image in your gallery to view it full-size on a dimmed overlay, then page through the rest of the gallery with previous and next arrows. Captions display each image's title and description, either on hover or below the image, depending on what fits your design.

## Turning the Lightbox On or Off

The lightbox is configured in the block's settings inside the theme editor, not in the app:

- **Open the theme editor** - Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize** and find the page with the Image Gallery block.
- **Click the block** - The block settings panel opens on the right.
- **Toggle Enable lightbox on click** - On by default. Turn off if you want clicks on images to do nothing (for example, if you're showing the gallery as decorative content).
- **Save** - The change is live on your storefront immediately.

## Lightbox Background

When the lightbox is on, you can choose how the overlay looks:

- **Dark** - A near-black overlay (~92% opacity). The default, and the right choice for most stores — it makes images pop and feels cinematic.
- **Light** - A near-white overlay (~95% opacity). Use this if your store has a light, airy aesthetic and dark overlays feel too heavy.

## Navigating the Lightbox

Visitors can move through your gallery without closing the lightbox:

- **Previous and next arrows** - On screen at the left and right edges.
- **Keyboard arrows** - Left and right arrow keys cycle through images.
- **Escape key** - Closes the lightbox.
- **Click outside the image** - Also closes the lightbox.

## Image Captions

The block has two caption settings — **Image titles** and **Image descriptions** — and each offers the same three choices, so you can show one, both, or neither:

- **Hidden** - No caption appears. The cleanest look — good when images speak for themselves.
- **Show on hover** - The text appears as an overlay when the visitor hovers (desktop) or after a tap (mobile). Keeps the gallery uncluttered but lets curious visitors see context.
- **Show below image** - The text sits as a small caption underneath each image. Always visible — good for lookbooks where you want to credit products, models, or locations.

Descriptions render smaller and slightly subdued next to the title, so a title plus a description reads as a heading and a line of detail rather than two competing captions.

## Where Captions Come From

Captions come from the **Title** and **Description** fields on each image. To edit them:

- **Open the gallery** in the app.
- **Hover the image** you want to update and click the edit icon in its top-right corner.
- **Edit the Title** - Shown wherever Image titles is set to hover or below.
- **Edit the Description** - Shown wherever Image descriptions is set to hover or below.
- **Edit Alt text** - Separate from the caption. Alt text is for accessibility and SEO and is read by screen readers and search engines.
- **Click Save** in the editor - The tile updates on the spot, and the change applies to every gallery using that image.

If an image has no title, no title caption is shown for that image even when captions are enabled — the same goes for descriptions.

---

# Shoppable Hotspots

> Link points on an image to the products in it

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/shoppable-hotspots
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A hotspot is a point you place on a gallery image that links to a product. Shoppers see a small marker on the image, tap it, and get a card with the product's photo, name and price that takes them straight to the product page. It turns a lookbook or styled photo into something people can buy from, without you having to describe which product is which.

Hotspots belong to the image itself, not to one gallery. Place them once and they follow that image into every gallery it appears in.

## Adding a hotspot

Open a gallery and hover the image you want to make shoppable. The tile's buttons appear in the top corner — click the cart icon to open the hotspot editor.

In the editor, click anywhere on the image to drop a hotspot at that point. The panel on the right is where you say what it links to:

- **Product** - Click **Browse** to search your catalogue and pick a product. The product's name fills in as the label automatically, and you can change it.
- **Custom URL** - Link anywhere instead: a collection, a size guide, another page on your store.
- **Label** - What the hotspot is called. Shoppers see it on the product card, and it's read out by screen readers.

Click **Save** to store it. A numbered marker stays on the image so you can see what you've placed.

## Moving and removing hotspots

Drag any marker to reposition it — the new position saves as soon as you let go. To change or delete one, click it and the panel on the right switches to that hotspot, where **Remove** deletes it.

Positions are stored as a percentage of the image rather than a fixed pixel, so a hotspot stays on the same part of the picture no matter what size the image is displayed at — grid, mosaic or full-screen.

## What shoppers see

Images with hotspots get a small **Shop** badge in the corner, so shoppers know there's something to tap. Opening the image full-size shows the markers, gently pulsing to draw the eye.

Tapping a marker opens a product card with the product's image, name and current price, and the whole card links to the product page. Prices come from your store live, so they are always correct and never need updating here. A hotspot pointing at a custom URL simply opens that link.

## Plan availability

Creating and editing hotspots is available on the **Advanced** and **Premium** plans. Hotspots you have already created keep working and stay visible to shoppers on any plan, and you can still remove them.

## Granting product access

The first time you link a hotspot to a product, the app may ask for permission to read your products. This is what lets the product search show your catalogue. Click **Grant access** and approve the prompt.

Until it is granted, the product search comes up empty. Custom URL hotspots work regardless, so you can always link to a product page by its address instead.

---

# Customizing the Block in Your Theme

> Adjust spacing, captions, and other display options

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/customizing-the-block
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A gallery brings its own layout, images per row, and image order with it — those live in the app. The theme block adds the settings that depend on where the gallery sits in your design: spacing, captions, the lightbox, and the shape of Grid tiles. That split lets the same gallery feel different on different pages without touching the gallery itself.

## Where the Settings Live

Block settings are in the Shopify theme editor, not the app:

- **Open Online Store > Themes > Customize**.
- **Navigate to the page** where you added the Image Gallery block (Home, a Product page, a custom page, etc.).
- **Click the Image Gallery block** in the sections list on the left.
- **Settings panel** opens on the right — every change previews live.

There is no Layout setting here. Layout, images per row on desktop and mobile, image order, and Mosaic tile sizes are all set on the gallery's page in the app, so the block can never disagree with the preview you approved there.

## Settings Reference

- **Gallery ID** - The unique ID of the gallery you want to show (for example, `gal_abc123`). Copy it from the **Install to Theme** screen, or from the Installation page in the app. Switching the ID swaps which gallery this block displays without touching anything else.
- **Grid tile shape** - Square (1:1), Portrait (3:4), Landscape (4:3), or Original ratio. Only applies when the gallery's layout is Grid.
- **Images per row** - Leave on **App setting (recommended)** so the block uses the desktop and mobile counts you set on the gallery. Picking a number here overrides the gallery for this block only, and that fixed number then applies on phones too — so use it only when one specific page needs a specific count.
- **Gap (px)** - The space between images, from 0 to 32 pixels. Lower for a tight magazine feel, higher for an airy look.
- **Carousel height** - **Adapt to image (recommended)** keeps each image's own proportions so nothing is cropped; the strip is as tall as the tallest slide. **Fixed height** crops or letterboxes every slide to one height instead. Only applies to the Carousel layout.
- **Carousel height (px)** - The height used when you choose Fixed height, from 200 to 800 pixels.
- **Image fit** - Also only for Fixed height. Choose **Fill (crop to fit)** so images fill the whole height (some cropping), or **Fit (original ratio)** so the whole image is visible with empty space around it.
- **Enable lightbox on click** - On by default. When on, visitors can click any image to open a full-screen lightbox.
- **Lightbox background** - Dark or Light. Only shows when the lightbox is enabled.
- **Image titles** - Choose **Hidden**, **Show on hover**, or **Show below image** to control how each image's title appears.
- **Image descriptions** - The same three options for the image's description. Titles and descriptions are written per image in the app, and each can be shown, hidden, or placed independently.

## Tips for Different Use Cases

- **Homepage hero** - Carousel, with the gallery set to 1 image per row and Carousel height left on Adapt to image.
- **Product gallery** - Grid, Square tile shape, small gap.
- **Editorial lookbook** - Masonry with titles shown below each image.
- **Featured collection** - Collage with a gap of 4-8 px, so the hero tiles read as one composition.

Block settings only affect the block you're editing, so adding the same gallery to another page lets you try different spacing or captions there without losing this one.

---

# Installing a Gallery on a Page

> Add a gallery to any page in your theme

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/installing-on-a-page
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Installing a gallery on a page is a two-step flow: copy the Gallery ID from the app, then open the theme editor where the Image Gallery block is ready to drop in. The whole thing usually takes under a minute, and you can put the same gallery on as many pages as you like. The look of the gallery travels with it — the block only needs the ID.

## The Two Steps

From any gallery's page in the app:

- **Click Install to Theme** - This opens the install screen.
- **Pick a theme and copy the Gallery ID** - Choose the theme you want to install into (your live theme is marked "current"), then click the copy icon next to the Gallery ID. The ID is copied to your clipboard.
- **Click Open theme editor** - The theme editor opens in a new tab with the Image Gallery block pre-loaded and ready to add.
- **Add the block to a section** - Drop it into the section where you want the gallery to appear (any page works — home, product, custom pages, collection pages).
- **Paste the Gallery ID** - In the block's settings panel, paste your copied ID into the **Gallery ID** field.
- **Save** - Click Save in the theme editor. The gallery is now live on your storefront.

You don't pick a layout here. The gallery renders with the layout and images-per-row you set on its page in the app; the block's own settings cover spacing, captions, the lightbox, and Grid tile shape.

## Adding the Same Gallery to Multiple Pages

You can use the same gallery on as many pages as you want:

- **Repeat the install flow** for each page, or
- **Add a second block** to a different page manually and paste the same Gallery ID into its settings.

Both blocks stay in sync — update the gallery in the app (add images, change layout, reorder, adjust images per row) and every page using that Gallery ID picks up the change automatically.

## Swapping One Gallery for Another

To change which gallery a block shows, you don't need to remove and re-add the block:

- **Open the theme editor** and click the Image Gallery block.
- **Replace the Gallery ID** in the settings field with a different gallery's ID (copy it from that gallery's Install to Theme screen, or from the Installation page in the app).
- **Save** - The block now shows the new gallery, in that gallery's own layout, with this block's spacing and caption settings unchanged.

## Tips

- **Install on a dev or unpublished theme first** if you want to preview before going live. The theme picker on the install screen lets you target any theme on your store.
- **Use the Installation page** in the app to see every gallery next to its ID in one list — handy when you're installing several at once.
- **Pin the app** to your admin sidebar so you can find a Gallery ID quickly when you need it again.

---

# Deleting Galleries and Images

> Remove galleries and clean up unused images

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/deleting-galleries-and-images
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Cleaning up galleries and images is straightforward, but because images are shared across galleries, it's worth understanding what stays and what goes. The app is conservative by default: deleting a gallery doesn't delete images that other galleries are using, so you can't accidentally break a different gallery.

## Deleting a Gallery

To remove a gallery you no longer need:

- **Open the gallery** from the **Galleries** list.
- **Click Delete** in the top right.
- **Confirm the action** - You'll see a confirmation dialog explaining what will happen.
- **Images shared with other galleries are kept** - Only images used solely in the deleted gallery are removed. Any image still in another gallery stays in your library.
- **Any pages using this gallery's ID will go empty** - The blocks remain in your theme, but they'll show nothing until you change the Gallery ID to a different gallery (or remove the blocks).

## Removing an Image from One Gallery

If you want to take an image out of a gallery without deleting it from your library:

- **Open the gallery**.
- **Hover over the image** - Two icons appear in the top-right corner of the tile: edit and remove.
- **Click the remove icon** - The image leaves this gallery straight away, no Save needed. It stays in your library and in any other gallery that uses it.

This is the right action when you're swapping content out of a gallery — for example, retiring a seasonal photo from your homepage gallery but keeping it available for a future "Throwback" gallery.

## Bulk Deleting Images from Your Library

To permanently delete one or more images from your entire library:

- **Open the image library** - Click the **Images** tile on the dashboard.
- **Select images** - Tap the images you want to delete (or use a select-all option if you're cleaning out a lot at once).
- **Click Delete** - The selected images are permanently removed from every gallery they appeared in.
- **Storage is freed up** immediately, so you can upload new images right away.

Use bulk delete when you're cleaning out old uploads — leftover test images, retired campaigns, products that are no longer in your catalogue.

## What Happens to Storefront Pages

When you delete images that are used on the storefront:

- **The block stays in your theme** but renders fewer images (or an empty gallery if you deleted them all).
- **Visitors won't see error messages** — the block simply skips images that no longer exist.
- **Hard-refresh your storefront** to confirm the change took effect (browsers often cache images aggressively).

If a gallery is empty after deletion, the block won't display anything on the storefront. You can either delete the block from your theme or add fresh images to the gallery in the app.

---

# Working with Sidekick

> Ask Shopify's assistant about your galleries

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/sidekick
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Sidekick is Shopify's built-in assistant, available from anywhere in your admin. Image Gallery connects to it, so you can ask how something in the app works, or ask about the galleries you've already built, without leaving the page you're on. There is nothing to switch on — the connection ships with the app and works as soon as it's installed.

## What You Can Ask

Sidekick can do two things with Image Gallery:

- **Answer how-to and troubleshooting questions** - It searches this help centre and answers from the article, citing it so you can read the rest. Try "How do I add a gallery to a product page?" or "Why isn't my gallery showing up on my storefront?"
- **Report what you've built** - How many galleries you have, how many images are in your library, and for any gallery its image count, layout, and images per row on desktop and mobile. Try "How many galleries do I have?" or "Which layout is my Lookbook gallery using?"

When you ask about a specific gallery, Sidekick can offer a link that opens that gallery's page in the app.

## Creating a Gallery

Ask Sidekick to create an image gallery — "create a lookbook gallery", "make me a spring campaign gallery" — and it opens the app's new-gallery form for you, pre-filled with a title, layout and images per row. Nothing is saved until you press **Create**, so you can change anything first.

## What It Cannot Do

Beyond starting a new gallery, Sidekick only reads. It can tell you that a gallery uses the Mosaic layout with 4 images per row, but it cannot change the layout, add images, reorder them, or delete anything. Those changes happen on the gallery page in the app, where you can see the result against your own images before saving.

If Sidekick offers to make a change for you, it's doing it through another part of Shopify, not through Image Gallery.

## Finding Sidekick

- **Look for the assistant icon** in your Shopify admin — it's available throughout the admin, not only inside the app.
- **Open the app's Sidekick page** at **Settings > Sidekick** for a reminder of what to ask, with example questions you can copy.
- **Ask in your own words** - You don't need special phrasing or command syntax.

## Privacy

Sidekick only ever sees the galleries and images belonging to the store you're logged into. Questions from one store can never return another store's data.

---

# Translations

> Translate the app interface into multiple languages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/translations
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Translations let you change the labels and text inside the Image Gallery admin to a language other than English. They apply to what you and your team see while managing galleries — they don't change anything on your storefront, because gallery images and the theme block use whatever language your Shopify theme is configured for.

## Where Translations Apply

- **Inside the app admin** - Buttons, labels, error messages, and help text in the merchant interface.
- **Not on your storefront** - The theme block uses your theme's locale. Image titles, alt text, and any storefront-facing text live in your theme's settings or are edited per-image in the app.

## Switching Your Admin Language

The app follows your Shopify admin's language preference automatically:

- **Open your Shopify admin language settings** - In Shopify admin, click your name in the top right, then **Manage account > Language**.
- **Pick a language** - Image Gallery will display in the chosen language the next time you reload the app.

If your language isn't listed yet, the app falls back to English. Get in touch if you'd like to see a language added.

## Translating Image Titles and Alt Text

Image titles and alt text are stored per image in your library. If you sell in multiple markets and want different text for different storefront languages, the best approach is:

- **Use Shopify Markets** to set up storefront localization.
- **Use the Translate & Adapt app** (or a similar Shopify-native translation tool) to translate image alt text and titles into market-specific languages.

Image Gallery doesn't currently offer per-language image text on the storefront — the title and alt text you save in the app are what's shown to all visitors.

## Plan Requirements

Admin translations are available on all paid plans. See the **Plans** page in the app for the latest details.

---

# Theme Block and Gallery ID Reference

> How the Image Gallery theme block works

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/theme-block-reference
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: For Developers
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Image Gallery ships as a single theme app block. It's installed automatically when the app is added to a store but doesn't render anywhere until you add the block to a section through the theme editor. This article covers the block's settings and how it connects to your galleries — useful when you're building custom theme sections or templates that include an Image Gallery.

## How the Block Renders

The block reads two pieces of metadata the app exposes on the storefront:

- **Image data** - The full list of images you've uploaded, with URLs, dimensions, titles, descriptions, and alt text.
- **Gallery order** - A mapping from Gallery ID to that gallery's image order, layout, desktop and mobile images-per-row, and per-image Mosaic tile sizes.

When a block renders, it looks up the gallery by its Gallery ID, takes the matching images in the stored order, and applies the gallery's layout. All CSS is scoped to the block instance (via a unique class derived from the block's ID), so adding multiple blocks to one page never causes style conflicts.

Very large galleries are served differently: past roughly half a megabyte of image data the block renders a stub and hydrates it from the app's JSON endpoint instead of the metafield, producing the same markup and the same layouts. This is automatic and needs no configuration.

## The Gallery ID

Every gallery has a unique Gallery ID in the format `gal_abc123`. You'll find it:

- **On the Install to Theme screen** for that gallery, with a one-click copy button.
- **On the Installation page** in the app, which lists every gallery next to its ID.

The Gallery ID is the only required block setting. Without it, the block renders nothing on the storefront and shows a placeholder in the theme editor. Pasted IDs are stripped of stray whitespace, including non-breaking and zero-width characters picked up from rich-text sources.

## What the Block Does Not Control

Layout, image order, images per row (desktop and mobile), and Mosaic tile sizes are properties of the gallery and are set in the app. There is no layout override in the theme editor, so the admin canvas and the storefront cannot disagree.

## Block Settings

- **Gallery ID** (text) - The prefixed ID of the gallery to render.
- **Grid tile shape** (select) - `Square (1:1)`, `Portrait (3:4)`, `Landscape (4:3)`, or `Original ratio`. Applies to the Grid layout only.
- **Images per row** (select) - `App setting (recommended)` or a fixed `2`-`6`. On the app setting, desktop uses the gallery's desktop count and viewports below 750 px use its mobile count. A fixed number applies at every width.
- **Gap (px)** (range, 0-32) - Spacing between images.
- **Carousel height** (select) - `Adapt to image (recommended)` leaves slides unconstrained so each keeps its natural ratio; `Fixed height` pins every slide to one height.
- **Carousel height (px)** (range, 200-800) - Shown only when Carousel height is `Fixed height`.
- **Image fit** (select) - `Fill (crop to fit)` or `Fit (original ratio)`. Shown only when Carousel height is `Fixed height`.
- **Enable lightbox on click** (checkbox) - Default on.
- **Lightbox background** (select) - `Dark` or `Light`. Shown only when the lightbox is enabled.
- **Image titles** (select) - `Hidden`, `Show on hover`, or `Show below image`.
- **Image descriptions** (select) - The same three options, applied to the image's description.

## Layout Behaviour on the Storefront

- **Grid** - `grid-template-columns: repeat(N, 1fr)` with the tile aspect ratio from Grid tile shape; `Original ratio` drops the ratio and doesn't crop.
- **Masonry** - The same column count, with row spans computed in JavaScript from each image's natural ratio once it loads.
- **Mosaic** - Dense grid flow with `large` (2x2), `wide` (2x1), and `tall` (1x2) spans. A tile uses its stored size when one is set; otherwise a built-in repeating pattern applies, keeping roughly half the tiles non-square and drifting the featured tiles across columns at any column count.
- **Collage** - Dense grid flow with every 8th tile (the 1st, 9th, 17th, …) promoted to a 2x2 hero.
- **Carousel** - A flex track showing N slides at once, translating by one slide per arrow click and wrapping at both ends.

Below 750 px, Grid, Masonry, Mosaic, Collage, and the Carousel track all switch to the gallery's mobile images-per-row.

## Adding the Block to a Custom Section or Template

The block has `"target": "section"`, so it can be added inside any section that accepts blocks:

- **Open the theme editor** and navigate to the page or template you're building.
- **Click Add block** inside any compatible section.
- **Choose Image Gallery from the Apps category**.
- **Paste a Gallery ID** in the block settings.

The deeplink format used by the **Install to Theme** button is:

```
/admin/themes/{theme_id}/editor?template=index&addAppBlockId={extension_uuid}/{block_handle}&target=mainSection
```

The app rewrites this with the merchant's selected theme ID and copies the Gallery ID to the clipboard so it can be pasted once the editor loads. You can construct the same URL manually to scaffold installs on specific theme templates.

## Multiple Blocks per Page

You can add the Image Gallery block to a page as many times as you like. Each instance reads its own Gallery ID, so you can show different galleries side by side, each with its own spacing and caption settings. Styles are scoped per block, so one block's settings never bleed into another. Two blocks pointed at the same gallery always render the same layout — it belongs to the gallery, not the block.

---

# Block Doesn't Show on Page

> Fix an empty or invisible gallery block

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/block-not-showing
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If you've added the Image Gallery block to a page but nothing appears on your storefront, the cause is almost always one of a handful of small mistakes. The block is designed to fail quietly on the storefront (no error banners or broken layouts) which is great for visitors but can make troubleshooting feel like guesswork. Here's a checklist to run through.

## Check the Gallery ID

By far the most common cause is a missing or mistyped Gallery ID:

- **Open the theme editor** and click the Image Gallery block.
- **Look at the Gallery ID setting** - It should look like `gal_abc123`. If it's empty, paste in your Gallery ID and save.
- **Copy fresh from the app** - Open the gallery, click **Install to Theme**, and use the copy button next to the Gallery ID (the Installation page lists every gallery's ID too). Pasting a fresh copy rules out typos.
- **Make sure the ID matches a real gallery** - If you've deleted the gallery, the block will show nothing.

## Check You Have Images in the Gallery

A gallery with no images won't render anything on the storefront:

- **Open the gallery in the app**.
- **Verify there's at least one image** - If the gallery is empty, upload a few images, pick them from your library, or import a collection.
- **Click Save** after adding images - Newly dropped or picked images sit on the canvas unsaved until you use the save bar or the Save button, and unsaved images never reach the storefront.

## Check the Block Was Saved in the Theme Editor

Adding a block isn't enough — the theme editor has to save the change:

- **Open the theme editor** and look at the top right for the **Save** button.
- **If it's highlighted**, you have unsaved changes. Click Save.
- **Reload your storefront** with a hard refresh (Cmd+Shift+R on Mac, Ctrl+Shift+R on Windows).

## Check the Right Theme

If you have multiple themes (live, drafts, previews), the block has to be in the live theme to appear on your public storefront:

- **Go to Online Store > Themes** in your admin.
- **Note which theme is marked "Current theme"** — that's your live theme.
- **Make sure the Image Gallery block is in that theme**, not in a draft.

When you click **Install to Theme** in the app, the theme picker shows which one is "current" so you can target the right one.

## Check the Theme Editor Preview

The theme editor itself shows a helpful placeholder when something is missing:

- **Empty gallery ID** - Shows "Enter a Gallery ID in the block settings."
- **No images found** - Shows "Add images in the app."

If you see either message in the editor, fix the issue there and save.

## Still Not Working

If everything above checks out and the gallery still doesn't show, try:

- **A hard refresh in an incognito window** - This rules out browser cache.
- **Checking another page** with the same block - Helps you tell if the issue is global or page-specific.
- **Removing and re-adding the block** - As a last resort, delete the block, save the theme, then add it back with a fresh Gallery ID.

---

# Images Aren't Loading

> Fix broken or missing images

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/images-not-loading
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If your gallery is rendering but the images themselves appear broken, slow, or missing, the issue is usually one of three things: a temporary processing delay, a browser cache, or a storage limit. Each one has a quick fix.

## Slow First Load

When you upload a new image, the app processes it in the background to generate optimized versions for the storefront. For a few seconds after upload, the image may take longer to appear:

- **Wait 10-30 seconds** after uploading before checking the storefront.
- **Refresh the page** - The processed image should now load quickly.
- **Subsequent loads are fast** - Once processed and cached, images load just as quickly as any other Shopify image.

## Browser Cache

If you replaced or re-uploaded an image but your browser is showing the old one:

- **Hard refresh your storefront** - Cmd+Shift+R on Mac, Ctrl+Shift+R on Windows. This bypasses your browser's cache.
- **Open the page in an incognito or private window** - No cache at all, so you see exactly what new visitors see.
- **Wait a few minutes** for CDN caching to refresh if a hard refresh doesn't help.

## Storage Limit Reached

If new uploads are failing or images are missing, check your storage:

- **Open any gallery in the app** - The storage remaining indicator is shown above the upload zone.
- **If you're at the limit**, delete unused images from your library to free up space, or upgrade your plan.
- **Compress large images** before uploading - Most photos look great at 1200-1600 px wide and use much less storage than full-resolution camera files.

## Images Deleted from the Library

If an image was deleted from your library (rather than just removed from a single gallery), it's gone everywhere it was used. The gallery will simply skip those images on the storefront:

- **Open the gallery** in the app to check whether the expected images are still there.
- **If images are missing**, re-upload them or pick replacements from the library.

## Image Doesn't Look Right (Cropping, Aspect Ratio)

If the image loads but looks cropped or stretched in a way you didn't expect:

- **Grid crops to the shape you chose** - Set **Grid tile shape** in the block settings to Square, Portrait, Landscape, or **Original ratio**. Original ratio is the one that doesn't crop at all.
- **Mosaic and Collage crop to fill their tiles** - Both use fixed tile shapes so the pattern holds together, so images are cropped to fit. This is by design.
- **Masonry preserves the natural aspect ratio** - No cropping. Switch the gallery to Masonry if you want every image's full proportions to show.
- **Carousel** - **Carousel height** is on **Adapt to image** by default, which never crops. If your carousel is cropping, the block is set to **Fixed height**: either switch back to Adapt to image, or set **Image fit** to `Fit (original ratio)`.

Layout is set on the gallery page in the app; Grid tile shape, Carousel height, and Image fit are block settings in the theme editor.

---

# Layout Looks Wrong

> Fix unexpected gallery appearance

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery/layout-looks-wrong
App: Image Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Image Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/image-gallery-1
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/image-gallery
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If your gallery looks different from what you expected — wrong layout, fewer images per row, odd heights — the cause is usually a setting sitting somewhere you didn't look, or a quirk of how a specific layout behaves by design. Here's what to check, and where each thing actually lives.

## The Layout Isn't the One You Picked

Layout is set on the gallery in the app, not in the theme editor, so the storefront should always match the canvas you see there:

- **Open the gallery** in the app and check the **Layout** dropdown in the gallery settings card.
- **Make sure it's saved** - If a save bar is still showing at the top of the page, the change hasn't been applied yet. Click Save.
- **Check you're looking at the right gallery** - Open the theme editor, click the block, and confirm the **Gallery ID** matches the gallery you edited. Two similar galleries are the most common cause of a "wrong" layout.
- **Hard-refresh the storefront** after saving (Cmd+Shift+R or Ctrl+Shift+R).

Older versions of the app had a Layout setting on the theme block. It has been removed — if you're following an old note or screenshot that mentions it, the gallery page in the app is where to go now.

## Fewer or More Images per Row Than Expected

Images per row is also a gallery setting, with separate desktop and mobile values:

- **Open the gallery** and use the **Desktop / Mobile** toggle in the top right of the settings card.
- **Desktop** covers screens 750 px and wider, and accepts 2 to 6.
- **Mobile** covers narrower screens, accepts 1 to 4, and previews on a phone-width canvas so you can judge it honestly.
- **Check the block isn't overriding it** - In the theme editor, **Images per row** should be on **App setting (recommended)**. A fixed number there wins for that block, and applies on phones as well as desktops.

## Rows Don't Line Up, or Some Tiles Are Bigger

This is by design in three of the layouts, and the app shows a note under Images per row explaining it for whichever layout you've selected:

- **Masonry** - Columns are straight, rows are not. Each image keeps its own height, so images per row is a column count.
- **Mosaic** - Tiles vary in size on purpose; roughly half come out non-square. Rows containing a tile that spans two columns fit fewer images. Hover any image and click the size badge to force that tile to auto, large, wide, or tall.
- **Collage** - Every 8th image becomes a large tile spanning two columns and two rows, so those rows fit fewer images.
- **If you want strictly uniform tiles**, use Grid, and set the tile shape with **Grid tile shape** in the block settings.

## Mosaic Tile Sizes Don't Do Anything

Tile sizes apply only to the Mosaic layout:

- **The size badge is hidden** on the canvas in Grid, Masonry, Collage, and Carousel, because the value would change nothing there.
- **Your sizes aren't lost** - Switch the gallery back to Mosaic and every size you set reappears.

## Masonry Looks Jumbled at First, Then Settles

The Masonry layout calculates each tile's height after the images load, so for the first half-second you may see tiles at default heights before they snap into position:

- **This is normal** - Once images finish loading, the layout settles automatically.
- **If it never settles**, hard-refresh the page (Cmd+Shift+R or Ctrl+Shift+R).
- **For galleries with very large images**, the wait can be a second or two on slow connections. Compress your images for faster load times.

## Carousel Height or Slide Count Looks Off

The carousel shows as many slides as the gallery's images-per-row setting, and each arrow click advances by one image:

- **For a classic one-at-a-time slideshow**, set the gallery's Images per row to 1.
- **Carousel height** in the block settings is **Adapt to image** by default, which keeps each image's own proportions and never crops. The strip is as tall as its tallest slide.
- **Switch to Fixed height** if you want every slide the same height, then set **Carousel height (px)** between 200 and 800 and choose **Image fit**: Fill crops to the height, Fit shows the whole image with space around it.

## Spacing Between Images Is Too Tight or Too Loose

- **Open the block in the theme editor** and find the **Gap (px)** setting.
- **Range is 0-32** - Larger values for an airy, magazine feel; smaller for a tight, modern look.
- **Save** and check on both desktop and mobile.

## Theme CSS Is Overriding the Gallery

Some themes apply aggressive styling to images and grids that can affect how the gallery renders:

- **All gallery styles are scoped to the block** so they shouldn't bleed into your theme — but the reverse can happen (your theme styling images globally).
- **If you suspect this**, open the gallery on your storefront, right-click an image, and **Inspect** to see what styles are applying.
- **Contact your theme developer or our support** if you find specific theme rules causing issues. Most can be resolved with a small tweak.

---

# Installation

> Install and activate Multi Ship on your Shopify store

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/installation
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Multi Ship lets your customers ship items to multiple addresses in a single checkout. After installing, you will enable the app on your storefront so customers can see the split shipping option on your cart page.

## Install from the Shopify App Store

Click "Add app" on the Multi Ship listing and approve the installation. You will be redirected to the app inside your Shopify admin.

## Setup guide

On first launch, the dashboard shows a short setup guide. Pick the theme you want the app on, then follow the activation step — it opens your theme editor with Multi Ship's app embed ready to enable. The app embed is what places the split shipping option on your cart page.

## Enable the app embed

In the theme editor, toggle Multi Ship on and click **Save**. Without this step, nothing will appear on your storefront.

## Setup completes automatically

There is no confirmation button to remember. The app checks your theme and marks setup complete on its own once the embed is active. If you want to finish later, you can dismiss the guide — it comes back after a while unless setup completed in the meantime, and the rest of the app works in the meantime: you can split existing orders and create MultiShip orders from the admin before the storefront piece is enabled.

## What happens next

With the embed enabled, customers shopping on your store will see a split shipping option on the cart page whenever they have two or more items. You can further customize the experience from **Settings** inside the app, including display mode, accent color, gift notes, and translations.

If you switch themes later, revisit the app to re-enable the embed on your new theme.

---

# How It Works

> Understand how Multi Ship splits orders into separate shipments

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/how-it-works
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Multi Ship adds a split shipping option to your cart page so customers can send items to different addresses in a single order. Everything happens in one checkout — no need for separate transactions.

## The Customer Experience

When a customer has two or more items in their cart, a **"Ship to Multiple Addresses"** checkbox appears above the checkout button. Checking it opens a guided 3-step flow. The customer's progress is saved as they go, so they can leave the cart and come back without losing their addresses or the tick in the box.

**Step 1 — Select Addresses**
The customer adds the shipping addresses they want to use. Logged-in customers see their saved addresses, guests can enter new ones, and anyone can import a list of addresses from a CSV file. You choose the maximum number of addresses per order in settings, up to 150.

**Step 2 — Assign Items**
The customer assigns each item in their cart to one of the selected addresses. They can split quantities across addresses — for example, sending 2 of an item to one address and 1 to another.

**Step 3 — Review & Ship**
The customer reviews each shipment, selects a shipping method per address, and can optionally add gift notes or delivery instructions. Shipping rates are calculated separately for each destination.

After clicking **Proceed to Checkout**, the customer completes payment through Shopify's standard checkout in a single transaction.

**Large orders.** When an order is too big for the standard cart checkout, Multi Ship prepares the whole order for the customer and takes them to a secure Shopify payment page for it. That happens above 20 checkout lines (one per address in bundle mode, one per item per address in individual mode) or above 30 addresses. The customer sees a progress bar while the order is prepared. Everything else is the same: one payment, and after it the order is split into one shipment per address.

## What Happens After Payment

Once the order is paid, Multi Ship automatically:

1. Confirms the order is fully paid, at the prices Multi Ship calculated for the checkout. If it isn't, the order is held for you to review instead of being split.
2. Splits the order into separate **child orders** — one per shipping address
3. Each child order contains only the items assigned to that address
4. Marks the original parent order fulfilled (it ships nothing itself) and archives it in Shopify once every child order exists

If Shopify is briefly unable to create a child order (for example on a very large order), Multi Ship keeps retrying it automatically. The order shows as **Needs attention** until every child order exists.

## What You See as a Merchant

- **Shopify Admin** — The child orders appear as regular orders that you can fulfill independently, each with its own shipping address
- **Multi Ship Dashboard** — Shows all split orders with fulfillment status, timeline events, and shipment details
- **Order Detail** — Click any order to see items, shipping address, gift notes, and a timeline tracking creation through fulfillment

You fulfill each child order just like any normal Shopify order — pick, pack, and ship.

---

# Plans & Pricing

> What each plan includes and how per-destination pricing works

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/plans-and-pricing
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Multi Ship charges per destination: every address an order ships to counts as one destination. Every plan includes the full multi-address checkout; plans differ by monthly price, how many destinations are included, and the price of each destination beyond that. Max and up also add three merchant tools.

## Plans

- **Free** — no monthly fee, 50¢ per destination.
- **Pro** — $4.99/month. 50 destinations included each month, then 30¢ per destination.
- **Max** — $14.99/month. 100 destinations included, then 15¢ per destination.
- **Max 3x** — $49.99/month. 300 destinations included, then 10¢ per destination.
- **Max 10x** — $99.99/month. 1,000 destinations included, then 5¢ per destination.
- **Ultra** — $249.99/month. 5,000 destinations included, then 2¢ per destination.

Not sure which fits? On the **Plans** page, type how many destinations you ship to in a month: every plan shows its estimated monthly cost, and the cheapest one for you is marked.

If you subscribed before November 2026 you may see the earlier names on your Shopify invoice: Pay As You Go is Free, Starter is Pro, Growth is Max, Advanced is Max 3x, Business is Max 10x and Enterprise is Ultra. Your price and plan don't change.

## Included on every plan

- **Multi-address checkout** — customers ship one order to many addresses in a single payment
- **Automated shipping rates** — live rates from your store's shipping settings, per destination
- **Automated tax calculation** — sales tax computed per destination address
- **Address autocomplete** — plus saved addresses for logged-in customers and CSV address import
- **Order builder and manual splits** — build an order for a customer, or split an existing order from its order page
- **Gift notes, delivery instructions and delivery dates**
- **Shopify Flow triggers and Sidekick**

## Included on Max and above

- **Per-shipment handling fee** — add a fee of your choosing to each destination's shipping cost
- **Shipping rules** — hide specific rates from split shipments, for example any rate whose name contains "Express" or any rate below a price you set, and block destinations you don't deliver to, with your own message to the customer
- **Delivery date pricing** — change the shipping price by the delivery date the customer picks

## How destinations are counted

Each per-address order Multi Ship creates is one destination, whichever way the order was split: at checkout, by a manual split in the app, or from the order builder (one combined invoice or one invoice per address). An order shipped to 3 addresses uses 3 destinations. Orders paid with Shopify's test gateway (Bogus Gateway or a test payment provider) are never counted. Included destinations reset at the start of each billing month, and usage charges appear on your regular Shopify bill. Every plan has a monthly usage limit, so charges can never run away unexpectedly. When you reach it, Multi Ship asks you to approve a higher one (see **Monthly usage limit**).

On the **Plans** page the estimate is each plan's full cost at your volume. A plan whose monthly usage limit your volume would go over is marked as such and is never recommended as cheapest.

## Changing plans

You can upgrade or downgrade anytime from the **Plans** page inside the app. If you downgrade below Max, the handling fee, shipping rules and delivery date pricing simply stop applying — nothing breaks, and your settings are kept in case you upgrade again.

---

# Monthly usage limit

> What happens when your destinations reach your plan's monthly usage limit, and how to raise it

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/usage-limit
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every plan's per-destination charges have a monthly usage limit: the most Multi Ship can bill for destinations in one 30-day billing cycle. It keeps charges from running away unexpectedly, and you can raise it whenever your volume grows. Raising it changes only that maximum: you're still billed per destination you ship to.

## Before you reach the limit

When this cycle's destination charges reach **80%** of your limit, the Multi Ship dashboard shows a warning and the store owner gets one email ("You've used $80.00 of your $100.00 monthly usage limit"). Nothing changes yet: orders keep splitting as usual.

## When you reach the limit

Once the next destination would go over the limit, Multi Ship asks Shopify for a higher one (usually twice your current limit, or more if this cycle's volume needs it) and shows **Approve new limit** on the dashboard, the Orders page and the split editor. The store owner also gets an email.

- **Approve new limit** opens Shopify's approval page. Approve it there and you're done.
- For the next **48 hours** orders keep splitting normally while you decide. The destinations shipped in that time are billed once you approve the new limit.

## If the new limit isn't approved in 48 hours

New splits pause until you approve:

- Paid multi-address checkout orders are **held, not lost**. They show **Needs attention** in Multi Ship, and each one's history says it's waiting for the new limit.
- Manual splits and the order builder show a message asking you to approve the new limit first.
- The store owner gets an email: "Approve the new limit to resume splitting".

As soon as you approve, Multi Ship splits every held order and bills the destinations that were waiting, all within the same billing cycle.

## A new billing cycle

The limit applies per 30-day billing cycle. A higher limit you approved stays on your subscription until you change plans, when the new plan starts from its own limit. You can see your plan's limits on the **Plans** page; see [Plans & Pricing](https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/plans-and-pricing).

---

# Shipping Settings

> Configure shipping calculation, free shipping rules, and the per-destination handling fee

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/shipping-settings
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Multi Ship calculates shipping rates separately for each address in a split order. You can configure how shipping costs are presented to customers and set up free shipping rules.

## How rates are fetched

When a customer assigns items to addresses, Multi Ship requests shipping rates from Shopify for each address individually. The rates shown are based on your existing Shopify shipping zones and profiles. You do not need to configure shipping separately in the app.

## Free shipping threshold

In **Settings > Shipping rates**, you can set a minimum cart total that qualifies for free shipping. When the customer's total meets or exceeds this amount, shipping is automatically free for all addresses. This works alongside any free shipping rules you already have in Shopify.

## Skip shipping step

When free shipping applies to all addresses in a split order, you can enable **Skip shipping step** to bypass the shipping rate selection entirely. This streamlines the checkout flow for customers who qualify for free shipping.

## Where rates come from

All shipping rates come from your store's own shipping settings — there is nothing to set up twice. The **Settings > Shipping rates** page links straight to your Shopify shipping settings, and any rate you add or change there applies to split shipments immediately. The page also lists your store's current rate names as a reference while you write rules.

## Shipping rules

Available on the **Max** plan and above. Rules only take options away: they never add a shipping rate or change a price. Prices come from your Shopify shipping settings, adjusted by delivery date pricing if you use it. Sometimes a rate that makes sense for a regular order doesn't suit a split shipment, or there are destinations you simply don't deliver to. Rules let you handle that without touching your Shopify shipping settings.

**Hide a shipping rate** from split shipments when:

- **Rate name contains** — a word you choose, like "Express"
- **Rate price is below** — an amount you set
- **Rate price is above** — an amount you set

**Block a destination** so customers can't ship there:

- **Address contains** — a word or phrase in the street address, like "PO Box"
- **City contains** — a city name

For a blocked destination, the customer sees a message explaining that you can't ship to that address. You can write your own message for each blocking rule, or leave it blank to use the standard one. If you create a split order yourself in the admin for an address that matches a blocking rule, you see a warning but can still go ahead.

You can add up to 20 rules. They apply at the moment rates are shown, so they always reflect your current store settings. If your hiding rules would remove every available rate for a destination, all rates are shown instead — a customer is never left without a shipping option.

## Multi-address-only rates

Some stores create shipping rates only for multi-address orders, for example a per-address delivery rate. List their names under **Multi-address-only rates** (one per line) and Multi Ship hides any rate whose name contains one of them in your regular single-address checkout. Multi-address orders still offer them. This uses a Shopify delivery customization, which needs one more permission: Multi Ship asks for it in an update, and your list starts working once you approve it.

## Delivery date pricing

Available on the **Max** plan and above. When the delivery date picker is on, you can make the shipping price follow the date the customer picks: add an amount on certain weekdays or dates, replace the Shopify rate with your own price, or close days entirely. It's set up on this page under **Delivery date pricing**. See **Delivery Date Pricing** for the full guide.

## Handling fee

The handling fee is available on the **Max** plan and above. On the same page, you can add a **handling fee** that applies to each destination in a split order. When enabled, the fee is added on top of the shipping rate shown for every address — for example, a $0.50 fee on an order shipping to 3 addresses adds $1.50 to shipping. Customers pay it as part of shipping, so it isn't listed as a separate line on the order.

- **Charge a handling fee** — turn the fee on, then set the amount charged per destination.
- **Waive the fee when shipping is free** — skip the fee for any destination that already qualifies for free shipping.

Once enabled, the fee is applied automatically every time an order is split — there's nothing else to set up.

## Important notes

Shipping rates depend on your Shopify shipping zones being properly configured. If a customer enters an address outside your shipping zones, no rates will be available for that address. Make sure your shipping zones cover all regions where you want to offer split shipping.

---

# Delivery Date Pricing

> Change the shipping price based on the delivery date the customer picks

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/delivery-date-pricing
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Delivery date pricing lets the shipping price follow the date the customer picks in the calendar: charge more for Saturday delivery, less on quiet days, a fixed price over the holidays, or close specific days entirely. It works on top of your existing Shopify shipping rates, so there's nothing to set up twice.

## Turning it on

Delivery date pricing is available on the **Max** plan and above.

1. Go to **Settings > Shipping rates** and find **Delivery date pricing**.
2. Tick **Price shipping by delivery date**.
3. Make sure the delivery date picker is on in **Settings > Orders & Checkout**. The rules only apply to dates customers choose in the calendar.

## Adding rules

Click **Add rule** and fill in:

- **Rule name** - names the rule in your list, for example "Saturday delivery". With the override on (see below), customers also see it at checkout as the shipping option's name.
- **Applies to** - **Days of the week** (tick the days) or **Specific dates** (a from and to date; leave **To** empty for a single day).
- **Price** - **Charge an amount**, then enter the amount, or **No delivery on these days** to close them.

Click **Done** to close the rule, then **Save**. Saved rules show as a list with each rule's days or dates and its price; click **Edit** to change one or the bin icon to remove it.

## Which rule applies

Each delivery date uses one rule:

- A rule for **specific dates** wins over a **weekday** rule, so a holiday price overrides your usual Monday price.
- If two rules of the same kind match, the one higher in your list wins.
- Saturdays and Sundays stay closed in the calendar unless a rule prices them.
- **No delivery on these days** closes a day, even a weekday.
- Days without a rule use your normal Shopify rates.

## Adding to your Shopify rates or replacing them

By default, a rule's amount is **added** to the Shopify rate for that address. With a standard Shopify rate of $4.99 and a Monday rule of $3.00, Monday delivery costs $7.99.

Tick **Override Shopify rates with these values** to make the amount the **whole** shipping price instead: Monday then costs $3.00. Two things stay the same:

- Days without a rule still use your Shopify rates.
- The address still needs a Shopify shipping rate to exist. The override replaces its price, but it can't create shipping where your Shopify settings have none.

## Free shipping

Which option you see depends on the override:

- **Override off: Don't add the extra charge when shipping is free.** When your Shopify rates make an address's shipping free (for example free shipping over a set amount), it stays free on priced dates. Paid rates still get the extra amount.
- **Override on: Free shipping when a destination's subtotal reaches.** An address whose items reach this amount ships free on priced dates. Each address is judged on its own items, before shipping and tax, after any discount code the customer applied. Leave it empty to always charge the rule's price.

The **handling fee**, if you use one, is still added on top, including its **Waive the fee when shipping is free** option.

## What customers see

The calendar shows each day's price under the date, for example **+$3** when the amount is added, **$12** with the override, or **Free** when the address qualifies for free shipping. After picking a date, the shipping options for that address update to the date's price. Multi Ship checks the price again when the customer goes to checkout, so what they pay always matches your rules.

To make customers choose a date for every delivery, turn on **Require a delivery date** in **Settings > Orders & Checkout**.

---

# Checkout Display Modes

> Choose how split shipments appear at checkout

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/checkout-display
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

When a customer splits their cart across multiple addresses, Multi Ship needs to present those items at Shopify's checkout. The checkout display mode controls how split shipments appear on the checkout page.

## Bundle mode

Items for each address are grouped into a single bundle line item at checkout. Instead of listing every product separately, the customer sees one entry per address, in address order (for example, "Shipment 1 of 2 to Jane Doe - Austin"), with that address's products named under it (for example, "Items: 2 × Snowboard, 1 × Hat"). This keeps the checkout page clean when orders have many items.

## Individual mode

Each product appears as its own line item at checkout, just like a normal order. Items are labeled with their destination address so the customer can verify which items go where. This mode is more transparent and works best when customers want to see every product listed.

## When to use each mode

Use **Bundle mode** if your customers tend to split large carts with many items, as it reduces visual clutter at checkout. Use **Individual mode** if your customers prefer to see each product listed separately, or if your products have variants that are important to verify before payment.

Very large orders use a secure Shopify payment page instead of the cart checkout (see **How It Works**). That switch counts checkout lines: one per address in bundle mode, but one per item per address in individual mode. So individual mode reaches it sooner.

## Where to configure

In both modes, every line at checkout shows the recipient's full address beneath it, so the customer can confirm where each item is going before paying. On very large orders the checkout may leave out product images to stay within Shopify's limits, but the addresses stay.

Go to **Settings > Checkout** to choose between Bundle and Individual mode. The change takes effect immediately for new split shipping sessions.

---

# Gift Notes & Delivery Instructions

> Let customers add gift messages and delivery instructions per shipment

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/gift-notes-and-delivery
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Multi Ship lets customers add personal messages and delivery preferences to each shipment in a split order. This is especially useful for gift purchases where different items go to different recipients.

## Gift notes

Enable gift notes in **Settings > Orders & Checkout** to let customers write a personal message for each shipment. During the review step of the split shipping modal, a text field appears for each address where customers can type their gift message.

## Delivery instructions

Enable delivery instructions to let customers provide specific directions for each shipment, such as "Leave at the back door" or "Ring doorbell on arrival." This field appears alongside the gift note during the review step.

## Delivery date

When enabled, customers pick a date for each shipment during the review step. This helps recipients plan for incoming packages, especially for time-sensitive gifts. The calendar only offers dates you can realistically meet: days that are too soon, weekends, and dates more than 60 days out are greyed out. If you use **delivery date pricing**, weekend days open when a rule prices them, days a rule closes are greyed out, and each day shows its shipping price under the date.

The earliest date a customer can choose is worked out from:

- **Your processing time** — the time you need to prepare an order, as set in your Shopify shipping settings
- **The shipping option's transit time** — when a shipping option's name states it (for example "Standard (3-5 days)"), the longer figure is used; otherwise the **Default transit days** you set in the app applies
- **Your order cut-off time** — orders placed after this time count as next-day orders, so processing starts the following business day

All of these settings live in **Settings > Orders & Checkout**, in the delivery date section:

- **What the customer picks** — choose between a **preferred delivery date** (the day the package should arrive) and a **ship date** (the day it should leave your warehouse). Ship date is the better fit when you can't promise delivery times, and it only needs your processing time.
- **Order cut-off time** — optional; leave it off if you don't have one.
- **Default transit days** — the transit time assumed for shipping options that don't state one.
- **Require a delivery date** - optional. When on, customers must choose a date for every shipment before they can check out.
- **Set the order's fulfillment deadline from the chosen date** — optional. When on, each shipment's order gets a **Fulfill by** date in Shopify. In delivery date mode that is the last day it can ship and still arrive on time; in ship date mode it is the chosen date itself. Orders past their deadline show as overdue in your Shopify orders list, so nothing slips.

The chosen date is saved on the shipment's order as **Delivery Date** or **Ship Date**, depending on the mode.

## Recipient notifications

When **Collect recipient email** is on, customers can enter an email address for each shipping address. What happens with it depends on **Add recipients as customers and send them shipping updates**:

- **On** - The recipient is saved as a customer in your store (tagged `multiship-recipient`) and their shipment's order is assigned to them, so Shopify sends the shipping confirmation and tracking updates directly to the recipient. The recipient email becomes required.
- **Off** - The email is stored on that shipment's order as a **Recipient Email** order attribute, alongside gift notes and delivery dates, for your own reference.

Both settings live in **Settings > Order Information > Recipient notifications**. Turning notifications on for the first time asks you to approve an additional customer permission for the app.

## Where notes appear

Gift notes, delivery instructions, and delivery or ship dates are attached to the corresponding child order in Shopify. You can see them on the order detail page in both the Multi Ship dashboard and your Shopify admin. This information is also visible when you prepare the shipment for fulfillment.

By default, each child order's note holds the split details and the customer's delivery instructions, and the gift message is stored as a **Gift Note** order attribute. Some shipping apps, such as ShippingEasy, print the order note on the packing slip as the gift message. If you use one, turn on **Use the gift note as the order note** in **Settings > Orders & Checkout**, under Order splitting. The note then contains only the customer's gift message, and the split details and delivery instructions are kept as order attributes, where you can still see them on the order.

## Enabling these features

All of these options are off by default. Toggle each one individually in **Settings > Orders & Checkout**. You can enable any combination depending on what makes sense for your store.

---

# Translations

> Customize text displayed to customers in any language

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/translations
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Multi Ship displays text on your storefront during the split shipping flow, including button labels, modal headings, instructions, and error messages. You can translate all of this text into any language your store supports.

## Adding a language

Go to **Settings > Translations** and click **Add language**. Select the language you want to add from the list. A new set of translation fields will appear for that language, pre-filled with the English defaults.

## Editing translations

Each translatable string has a text field where you can enter your custom text. Strings are grouped by where they appear in the split shipping flow: cart page, address step, item assignment step, review step, and general labels. Edit any field and save to update what customers see.

## What text is translatable

You can translate the checkbox label, button text, modal headings, step instructions, form labels (like "Gift note" and "Delivery instructions"), action buttons ("Next," "Back," "Continue to checkout"), error messages, and empty state text. Every piece of text that a customer sees during the split shipping flow can be customized.

## How it works

Multi Ship automatically detects the customer's language based on your Shopify store's locale settings. If a translation exists for that language, it is used. Otherwise, the default English text is shown.

---

# Order Management

> View and track split shipping orders in the app dashboard

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/order-management
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The Multi Ship dashboard gives you a central place to view and manage all split shipping orders. You can track each shipment's status from creation through fulfillment.

## Dashboard overview

The main dashboard shows key metrics at a glance, including the number of split orders, pending shipments, and recently completed orders.

## Order list

The orders page displays all split shipping orders with search and filters. You can search by order number or customer name, and filter by fulfillment status or date range. Each row shows the parent order number, customer name, number of shipments, and overall status.

## Parent orders vs child shipments

When a customer splits their cart, Multi Ship creates a parent order (the original Shopify order) and one or more child orders (one per shipping address). The order list shows parent orders, and clicking into one reveals all its child shipments.

Child orders show the billing address of the person who paid the original order. If you prefer each child order to show its recipient's shipping address as the billing address instead, turn on **Use each recipient's address as the billing address** in **Settings > Order splitting**. Taxes are not affected either way — sales tax is always calculated from the shipping address.

## Importing addresses from a CSV

When splitting an order with many destinations, you don't have to type every address. Choose **Import** in the split editor to upload a CSV file of recipient addresses — each row becomes one shipment, ready for you to assign items. A sample file with the expected columns is available for download on the import screen.

## Creating orders from the Shopify admin

You do not have to start from an existing order. **Create MultiShip order** appears in the **More actions** menu on both the **Orders** and **Draft orders** pages of your Shopify admin and opens the order builder, where you pick products, assign them to addresses with live shipping rates, and email the customer a payment link. On an existing order, the **Split order** action opens the manual split editor instead. If you have edited the order in Shopify, the editor shows it as it is now — items you removed are no longer offered for splitting.

The builder can send the customer one combined invoice for the whole order, or a separate invoice per address. Two options control discounts:

- **Apply automatic discounts** — on by default. Your store's automatic discounts are applied to each shipment when the order is priced, exactly as they would be at checkout. Turn it off to charge regular prices with no automatic discounts.
- **Allow discount codes at checkout** — for separate invoices only. Lets the customer enter a discount code when they pay each invoice.

Each address needs a shipping rate before you can review the order. When Shopify returns no rate for an address (check your shipping zones), choose **Custom rate** and enter the amount to charge — enter 0 for free shipping — or turn off shipping for that address.

If an address matches one of your shipping rules that block a destination, the editor shows a warning. You can still create the shipment; the rule only stops customers from choosing that destination themselves.

## Orders that need attention

An order shows as **Needs attention** in two situations:

- **Some shipment orders aren't in Shopify yet.** Shopify occasionally refuses to create an order for a moment (for example when many are created at once). Multi Ship retries automatically, usually within a few minutes, and the order page names the shipments still waiting. If one still can't be created after about two hours, the timeline says so and you can create it by hand from the shipment details.
- **The order was not split.** Before splitting, Multi Ship confirms the order is fully paid at the prices it calculated for the checkout. If it isn't, the order is held and the page shows the reason. Check the payment in Shopify, then split it manually if it's correct.

## Order detail page

The detail view shows the parent order at the top with its child shipments below. Each shipment displays the destination address, assigned items, shipping method, gift notes (if any), and fulfillment status. A timeline tracks key events like order creation, payment, and fulfillment updates.

A summary line above the shipments counts the per-address orders, their items and value, and how many are fulfilled. Large splits show 20 shipments per page, with **Previous** and **Next** below.

## Split view

Opening **Split order** on an order that was already split shows it as a tree: the original order at the top, with a line branching down to each per-address order, its status, recipient and total. Each order name opens it in Shopify. Opening it on one of the per-address orders shows the same tree with that order marked **This order**. An order can be split only once, and a per-address order can't be split again.

## On the Shopify order page

Add the **MultiShip shipments** block to your order page once: open any order in your Shopify admin, choose **More actions → Customize** (or the block menu at the bottom of the page), and pin **MultiShip shipments**. On an order Multi Ship split, it lists each per-address order with its status, recipient and place, and item count, each linked to that order. On a per-address order, it links back to the original order. Held orders show why they were not split.

## Shopify Flow

Multi Ship sends two Shopify Flow triggers, listed in **Settings > Integrations**:

- **Order split into shipments** — runs when a paid order becomes one order per address, at checkout, by a manual split, or when a combined invoice from the order builder is paid. It passes the original order, the number of orders it became, their names, and how it was split.
- **Multi-address order held for review** — runs when an order is held instead of split because its payment does not match what Multi Ship calculated. It passes the order and the reason.

For example, tag the original order, post the shipment orders' names to your team, or email yourself when an order is held.

## Fulfillment tracking

As you fulfill child orders in Shopify, Multi Ship automatically updates their status in the dashboard. You can see which shipments are unfulfilled, in progress, or completed at a glance. A paid shipment that has not shipped yet shows as **Unfulfilled**.

## Fulfilling orders

You fulfill each child order directly in your Shopify admin, just like any regular order. Multi Ship does not change your fulfillment workflow. It simply organizes split orders so you can track which shipments belong together.

The original order from a multi-address checkout (or a combined invoice from the order builder) holds only the **Multi-Address Delivery** lines and ships nothing itself. Multi Ship marks it fulfilled, without emailing the customer, and archives it once every per-address order exists, so it never waits among your unfulfilled orders. To leave it unfulfilled, turn off **Mark the original order fulfilled after it's split** in **Settings > Order splitting**. When you split an order yourself, its original is marked fulfilled the same way before it's archived, because every item now ships in the new orders. That way it can't be shipped twice. If you choose to cancel the original instead, it's cancelled and not marked fulfilled.

## Reports and bookkeeping

Because splitting creates new orders, your revenue reports can count the same payment twice unless adjusted. **Settings > Taxes & bookkeeping** explains what to adjust and provides a CSV export with the total to subtract — see the Taxes & Bookkeeping article for details.

---

# Subscriptions

> Split subscription orders across multiple addresses (requires the Pasilobus Subscriptions app)

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/subscriptions
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Multi Ship can split subscription orders across multiple addresses — for example, sending the same recurring box to yourself and to a family member. This works together with the **Pasilobus Subscriptions** app, which handles the recurring billing and delivery for each destination.

## What you need

- **Multi Ship** — lets the customer split their items across addresses at checkout, exactly the same way they do for a one-time order.
- **Pasilobus Subscriptions** — turns each destination into its own recurring delivery, so renewals continue to ship to every address on schedule.

Both apps must be installed on your store. Multi Ship still splits regular one-time orders on its own — the Subscriptions app is only required for splitting **subscription** orders.

## How it works

- The customer selects a subscription and assigns items to addresses at checkout, just like a normal split order.
- Each address is set up as its own recurring delivery, kept on the same billing and delivery schedule so shipments stay in sync.
- Shipping and tax are calculated per destination, the same as a one-time split order.

## Managing subscription splits

Each destination is managed as a recurring delivery in the Subscriptions app, where pauses, skips, frequency changes, and address updates are handled. Multi Ship's role is limited to capturing the split at checkout.

---

# Display Mode

> Choose between checkbox and button mode for the storefront

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/display-mode
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Multi Ship appears on your cart page in one of two display modes. The display mode controls how customers activate the split shipping flow.

## Checkbox mode

A checkbox appears above your theme's checkout button with a label like "Ship to multiple addresses." When a customer checks the box, the split shipping modal opens. The original checkout button remains visible, so customers who do not need split shipping can check out normally. This mode works well for most stores because it is unobtrusive and clearly optional.

## Button mode (default)

A dedicated split shipping button appears on the cart page. Clicking the button opens the split shipping modal. This mode is more prominent and draws attention to the split shipping feature, which can be useful if multi-address shipping is a key selling point for your store.

## When to use checkbox mode

Choose this if split shipping is a secondary feature for your store. The checkbox stays out of the way and lets customers opt in only when they need it.

## When to use button mode

Choose this if you want to highlight split shipping as a primary feature. The button is more visible and works well for stores where customers frequently ship to multiple addresses, such as gift shops or corporate gifting stores.

## Single-item carts

The split shipping option only appears when the cart has two or more items. When there's just one item, a small note under the checkout button lets customers know multi-address delivery becomes available with more items — a gentle way to make the feature discoverable. You can turn this note off under **Settings > Orders** if you prefer a completely clean cart.

## Where to configure

In your theme editor, open **App embeds**, expand **MultiShip**, and set **Display Mode** to **Button** or **Checkbox**. Save the theme to apply it to your storefront.

---

# CSV Address Import

> Import addresses from a spreadsheet — at checkout and in the admin

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/csv-import
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Typing dozens of addresses by hand is the slowest part of a large multi-address order. Both your customers and you can skip it by importing addresses from a spreadsheet saved as a CSV file.

## Customers can import at checkout

On the address step of the split shipping flow, customers will find an **Import addresses from CSV** link along with a **Download sample CSV** link. Uploading a file adds every address and selects them automatically, ready for item assignment. This is available on every plan.

- The sample file shows the expected columns: first name, last name, company, address, apartment, city, state, ZIP, country, and phone — plus two optional columns, **gift note** and **delivery instructions**, that fill in the matching fields for each shipment when you have those features enabled
- Column headers are accepted in your store's language — a customer can upload a file with headers like "Vorname" or "住所" and it will import correctly, and the sample file downloads with headers in the customer's language
- If a row leaves the country blank, the country your customer is shopping in is used
- Logged-in customers who import an address that exactly matches one already saved to their account get that saved address selected rather than a duplicate
- If someone uploads an Excel file by mistake, they see a friendly message asking them to save it as CSV first

## Importing in the admin

The same import is available to you when splitting an order or building a MultiShip order in the admin. In the split editor, choose **Import** to upload a CSV of recipient addresses — each row becomes one shipment, and you assign items afterwards. Gift note and delivery instruction columns are carried into each shipment, and a blank country defaults to your store's own country.

## Tips for clean imports

- Use the sample file as your starting point — its column names always work
- Two-letter country codes (US, CA, DE) are the most reliable way to fill the country column
- Rows missing a street address, city, or ZIP are skipped, so a partial list still imports the complete rows

---

# Taxes & Bookkeeping

> How split orders affect tax and revenue reports, with a CSV export for your accountant

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/taxes-and-bookkeeping
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Splitting an order creates new orders in Shopify, and that raises two fair questions: is tax handled correctly, and do the new orders distort your revenue reports? The short answers are yes and only if unadjusted — and the app gives you the export to adjust with. You can find these tools in **Settings > Taxes & bookkeeping**.

## Sales tax

Multi Ship calculates sales tax for each split order according to your store's tax settings, per destination address. Your Shopify sales tax reports work as usual and require no adjustment. Customers are never charged twice — the split orders record the payment that was already made.

## Where tax appears

The original order records the payment. The split orders record what went to each address, including that address's tax.

- **Original order** — may show no separate tax line. On orders created with the draft order tools, each address's tax is built into that address's line price, so the paid total includes the tax but the order shows only a subtotal. For example, 8 shipments of $100 with 5 to taxed addresses at $8 each are paid as $840, with no tax line.
- **Split orders** — each one shows its own price and tax for its destination (in the example, $100 + $8 tax = $108 for each taxed address).

For sales tax reporting, use the split orders rather than the original order.

## Discount codes

Multi Ship works out each address's price and tax while the customer sets up their addresses. Only discount codes already on the cart at that moment are included.

- **Codes applied in the cart** — included in each address's price, and tax is calculated on the discounted amount. The split orders match what the customer paid.
- **Codes entered later at Shopify checkout** — discount the payment on the original order. Each split order then carries that discount too, as the amount Shopify took off that address's line, named after the code, so the split orders still add up to what the customer paid. Their tax lines stay as worked out before the code, on the full price.

To keep tax on split orders exact:

- **Exclude the Multi-Address Delivery product** when you create a discount code, and keep your real products included. A code entered only at checkout can then no longer change the payment after the per-address amounts are set.
- **Ask customers to apply codes in the cart** before they choose multiple addresses.

## Revenue reports

If original orders are not cancelled after splitting, the original order and its split orders both appear in your revenue reports, counting the same payment twice.

- **If you keep original orders** — subtract the split orders' total from your revenue. The bookkeeping export provides this total. Most merchants keep originals, since a cancelled order can look confusing when the customer views it in their account, and the original remains the record of payment.
- **If you cancel original orders** — Shopify records a cancellation reversal, so your net sales figures require no adjustment. Gross sales still includes the original, so the export remains useful when reconciling gross figures.

## Bookkeeping export

In **Settings > Taxes & bookkeeping**, choose a year (and optionally a month) and click **Download CSV**. The file lists every Multi Ship split order for the period with amounts and destinations, and ends with the total to subtract — ready to hand to your accountant.

---

# Accent Color

> Customize the accent color to match your store's branding

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/accent-color
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Multi Ship uses an accent color for interactive elements in the split shipping modal. You can customize this color to match your store's branding so the experience feels seamless.

## What it affects

The accent color is applied to buttons, checkboxes, active step indicators, and other interactive elements within the split shipping modal. It ensures that the modal looks like a natural part of your store rather than a third-party overlay.

## Setting the accent color

Open the Shopify theme customizer by going to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**. In the left sidebar, find the Multi Ship app embed under **App Embeds**. Click on it to expand its settings, then use the color picker to choose your accent color. Click **Save** to apply.

## Tips for choosing a color

Use your store's primary brand color or a color that matches your theme's buttons for the most cohesive look. Make sure the color has enough contrast against a white background so buttons and interactive elements remain easy to read and click.

---

# Checkbox Not Showing

> The split shipping checkbox doesn't appear on the cart page

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/checkbox-not-showing
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If the split shipping checkbox (or button) is not appearing on your cart page, there are a few common causes to check.

## App embed not enabled

Multi Ship requires the app embed to be turned on in your theme. Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**, then open **App Embeds** in the left sidebar. Make sure Multi Ship is toggled on and click **Save**. If you recently switched themes, you will need to enable the embed again on the new theme.

## Cart has fewer than 2 items

The split shipping option only appears when there are at least two items in the cart. With a single item, there is nothing to split, so the checkbox is intentionally hidden. Add a second item to test.

## Theme compatibility

Multi Ship works with most Shopify themes, but some heavily customized themes may use non-standard cart page structures. If the embed is enabled and you have multiple items in the cart but still do not see the checkbox, your theme's cart page may need a small adjustment. Contact support with your theme name and we can help identify the issue.

## Check display mode

If you are looking for a checkbox but have switched to **Button** mode (or vice versa), the element may look different than expected. Verify your current display mode in **Settings > Display**.

## Browser cache

After enabling the app embed, try clearing your browser cache or opening your store in an incognito window. Cached pages may not reflect the latest changes.

---

# Orders Not Splitting

> Orders are placed but not being split into separate shipments

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/orders-not-splitting
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If customers complete checkout through the split shipping flow but the order is not being split into separate shipments, check the following.

## Virtual product missing

Multi Ship uses a virtual product ("Multi-Address Delivery") behind the scenes to manage split shipments at checkout. If it's deleted, set to draft or archived, or removed from your online store, Multi Ship restores or recreates it automatically, both when it's deleted and the next time a customer checks out. You don't need to do anything, and you can rename it freely.

## Order held for review

If an order shows **Needs attention** and says it was not split, Multi Ship couldn't confirm it was fully paid at the prices it calculated for the checkout. The reason is shown on the order page. Check the payment in Shopify, then split the order manually if it's correct.

## Some shipment orders are still being created

If an order shows **Needs attention** and lists shipment orders that aren't in Shopify yet, Shopify refused to create them for a moment (common on development and trial stores, which can only create a few orders per minute). Multi Ship retries automatically. They usually appear within a few minutes.

## Webhook not registered

After checkout, Multi Ship relies on Shopify webhooks to trigger the order splitting process. If webhooks are not properly registered, the app will not be notified when an order is placed. Reinstalling the app or visiting the app settings page usually re-registers webhooks automatically.

## Order was not a split order

Only orders that go through the Multi Ship modal are split. If a customer skipped the split shipping flow and checked out normally, the order will not be split. Check the order in the Multi Ship dashboard to see if it was processed as a split order.

## Payment not captured yet

Multi Ship splits an order when it is paid. If your store captures payments manually (**Settings > Payments > Payment capture method**), a new order is only **Authorized** and stays unsplit until you capture the payment. Click **Capture payment** on the order and the per-address orders appear within a few seconds.

## Processing delay

Order splitting happens shortly after checkout. In most cases it completes within a few seconds, but during high traffic periods there may be a brief delay. Wait a minute and refresh the order page.

## Contact support

If the virtual product exists, webhooks are registered, and the order went through the split shipping flow but still was not split, contact support with the order number so we can investigate.

---

# Shipping Rates Not Loading

> Shipping rates show as loading or fail to appear

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship/shipping-rates-not-loading
App: MultiShip Address Checkout
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/multi-ship-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/multi-ship
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If shipping rates are not loading during the split shipping flow, the issue is usually related to your Shopify shipping configuration or the address entered by the customer.

## Shipping zones not configured

Multi Ship fetches rates from your existing Shopify shipping zones. If a customer's address falls outside any of your defined shipping zones, no rates will be available. Go to **Settings > Shipping and delivery** in your Shopify admin and make sure your shipping zones cover all regions you want to ship to.

## Invalid address

Shipping rates cannot be calculated for incomplete or invalid addresses. Make sure the customer has entered a full address including city, state, province or prefecture where the country has them, postal code, and country. If the address is missing required fields, the rate lookup will fail.

## A shipping rule is hiding or blocking the destination

If you use shipping rules (Max and above), check **Settings > Shipping rates**. A hiding rule removes matching rates from split shipments, and a blocking rule stops customers from shipping to matching addresses, showing them a message instead of rates. If a rule is too broad, narrow it or remove it.

## Shipping profiles

If you use multiple shipping profiles in Shopify, make sure the products in the split shipment are assigned to a profile that covers the destination address. Products without a matching shipping profile will not return rates.

## Rate limits

If many customers are using split shipping simultaneously, rate lookups may occasionally be delayed. This is rare but can happen during flash sales or peak traffic. Rates should load after a brief wait.

## Third-party rate apps

If you use a third-party app for calculated shipping rates (like real-time carrier rates), make sure that app is working correctly. Multi Ship relies on whatever rates Shopify returns, so issues with rate providers will affect the split shipping flow as well.

## Test with a simple address

To isolate the problem, try a split shipment with a well-known domestic address. If rates load for that address but not others, the issue is likely with the specific address or shipping zone coverage.

---

# Installation

> Install Order Limits and activate it on your store

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/installation
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

After installing from the Shopify App Store, you need to activate the app on your theme so it can enforce quantity rules on your storefront and at checkout.

When you first open the app, a **theme setup wizard** walks you through activation:

- **Choose your theme** -- Select the theme you want to activate quantity limits on. If you have multiple themes, you can repeat this for each one.
- **Enable the app embed** -- The wizard opens your theme customizer to the **App Embeds** section. Toggle the Order Limits embed to **On** and click **Save**. This embed runs invisibly on every page -- it does not add any visible content to your store.
- **Click Complete** -- Back in the app, click **Complete** to verify the embed is active. The wizard checks that everything is connected properly.

Once the setup wizard shows a green checkmark, you are ready to create your first quantity rule.

## Verifying It Works

- Go to any product page on your storefront
- Add a quantity rule for that product in the app (see Product Quantity Rules)
- Refresh the product page -- you should see the quantity selector respect your new limits
- Try adding more than the maximum to the cart -- the app blocks it and shows an error message

If you use multiple themes (e.g., a staging theme), repeat the setup wizard for each theme from **Settings > Installation**.

## Plans

- **Starter** - $1.99/month. Up to 5 rules: product and variant limits (min, max, step, fixed and preset quantities), collection limits, cart item-count and order-value limits, custom and translated error messages, checkout validation
- **Pro** - $4.99/month. Unlimited rules, plus cart weight limits, customer-tag rules, scheduled start and end dates, and inventory-aware limits

Starter starts with a 7-day free trial, and development stores use the app for free.

If a store moves from Pro back to Starter, no rule is deleted: every rule keeps working, but no new rule can be added while there are more than 5. Weight limits and customer-tag rules are paused on Starter and work again after upgrading. The dashboard explains both.

Starter replaced the Free plan on November 9, 2026. Stores that installed Order Limits before then and haven't chosen a paid plan keep the Free plan, with the same limits as Starter, at no charge. Free isn't offered again once you leave it: after moving to Starter or Pro, you can't switch back to Free. While you're on Free, Settings and the dashboard's upgrade prompts remind you.

---

# Product Quantity Rules

> Set min, max, and step quantities for products

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/product-quantity-rules
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Product quantity rules let you control exactly how many units a customer can buy. You can set a minimum (they must buy at least X), a maximum (they can buy at most X), or a step increment (they buy in multiples of X).

## Creating a Rule

- Go to **Rules** and click **Create rule**
- Choose the products or variants you want the rule to apply to
- Set your limits:
  - **Minimum quantity** -- The smallest amount a customer can add to cart. Useful for wholesale or bulk-only products.
  - **Maximum quantity** -- The largest amount allowed per order. Useful for limited stock or fair-use policies.
  - **Step / increment** -- Forces purchases in multiples (e.g., step of 6 means customers can buy 6, 12, 18, etc.). Great for products sold by the case or pack.
- Save the rule

You can combine all three settings on the same rule. For example, minimum 2, maximum 20, step 2 means customers can buy 2, 4, 6, 8... up to 20.

## What the Customer Sees

- The quantity selector on the product page adjusts automatically -- the +/- buttons skip to valid amounts
- If a customer tries to enter an invalid quantity, they see an inline message explaining the limit
- At checkout, Shopify validates the quantity again so limits cannot be bypassed

## Plan

Available on all plans, including Starter (up to 5 rules). The Pro plan supports unlimited rules.

---

# Preset Quantities

> Replace the quantity input with a dropdown of fixed options

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/preset-quantities
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Preset quantities replace the standard +/- quantity input with a dropdown of fixed options. Instead of letting customers type any number, they choose from a predefined list like 500, 1000, 2500, or 5000.

This is ideal for products sold in specific lot sizes -- printing supplies, raw materials, labels, or anything where only certain quantities make sense.

## Setting Up Presets

- Go to **Rules** and create or edit a rule
- Enable **Preset quantities**
- Enter your values separated by commas (e.g., `500, 1000, 2500, 5000`)
- Save the rule

## When to Use Presets vs Range Limits

- **Presets** -- When only specific quantities are valid (e.g., you only sell in packs of 500, 1000, or 5000)
- **Min/max/step** -- When any quantity within a range works (e.g., buy between 1 and 100 in multiples of 5)

## What the Customer Sees

- A dropdown replaces the quantity input on the product page
- The dropdown lists your preset values in order
- Works across all Shopify themes -- the app detects and replaces the native quantity input automatically

## Presets and Inventory

If a preset value exceeds available stock, that option is automatically removed from the dropdown. For example, if you set presets of 10, 25, and 50 but only 30 units are in stock, the dropdown shows 10 and 25 only.

## Plan

Available on all plans, including Starter.

---

# Cart & Order Limits

> Control cart totals with item count, amount, and weight limits

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/cart-limits
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Cart and order limits control the overall cart rather than individual products. You can require a minimum or maximum number of items, a minimum or maximum order value, or weight-based limits before customers can check out.

## Setting Up Cart Limits

- Go to **Settings > Cart Limits**
- Configure any combination of limits:
  - **Minimum items** -- Require at least X items in the cart (e.g., minimum 3 items per order)
  - **Maximum items** -- Cap the total number of items (e.g., no more than 50 items per order)
  - **Minimum order value** -- Require a minimum dollar amount (e.g., orders must be at least $25)
  - **Maximum order value** -- Cap the order total (e.g., orders cannot exceed $500)
  - **Minimum weight** -- Require a minimum total weight
  - **Maximum weight** -- Cap total cart weight (useful for shipping constraints)
- Save your settings

## What the Customer Sees

- A banner appears above the checkout button on the cart page explaining what needs to change
- The checkout button is disabled until the cart meets all limits
- At checkout, Shopify validates the limits again -- even if a customer bypasses the storefront warning, the order is blocked

## Examples

- Minimum order of $50 for free shipping eligibility
- Maximum 2 items from a limited-edition drop
- Maximum 30 kg to stay within shipping carrier limits

## Plan

Item count and order value limits are available on all plans. Weight-based limits require the Pro plan. On Starter, weight limits in saved rules are paused (the dashboard says so) and work again after upgrading.

---

# Collection Limits

> Limit how many items customers can buy from a collection

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/collection-limits
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Collection limits let you cap how many items a customer can buy from a specific collection in a single order. This is useful when you want to restrict purchases across a group of products rather than setting limits on each product individually.

## Setting Up Collection Limits

- Go to **Rules** and click **Create rule**
- Choose **Collection limit** as the rule type
- Select the collection you want to limit
- Set the **maximum items** a customer can buy from that collection per order
- Save the rule

## Use Cases

- **Limited editions** -- Allow only 1 item per order from your "Limited Edition" collection
- **Sample packs** -- Let customers pick up to 5 samples from your "Samples" collection
- **Fair access** -- Limit high-demand product categories so more customers can purchase

## What the Customer Sees

- When a customer tries to add more items from the collection than allowed, they see an error message
- The error explains how many items from that collection are already in the cart and the maximum allowed
- At checkout, Shopify validates the limit again to prevent bypass

## How It Works With Other Rules

Collection limits work alongside product-level rules. If a product has both a product quantity rule and falls within a collection limit, both are enforced. The stricter limit wins.

## Plan

Available on all plans, including Starter (counts toward your rule limit). The Pro plan supports unlimited rules.

---

# Per-Customer Purchase Caps

> Limit how many of a product each customer can buy, for good or per number of days

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/purchase-caps
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Purchase caps limit how many of a product each customer can buy across all their orders, either for good or over a rolling number of days. Use them for limited releases, launch drops or anything you want to share fairly, such as "2 per customer" or "1 every 30 days". A per-order maximum (Product Quantity Rules) stops a large single order; a cap also stops the same customer from coming back for more.

## Setting Up a Cap

- Go to **Purchase caps** in the app menu and click **Add purchase cap**
- Give it a **Name** (only you see it)
- Set **Most a customer can buy**, for example 2
- Choose what the count covers in **Counted over**:
  - **Lifetime (all orders)** -- every order the customer places counts
  - **Every 7, 30, 90 or 365 days (rolling)** -- only orders from that many days back count, so the customer can buy again once older orders fall out of the window
- Click **Add products**, **Add variants** or **Add collections** to pick what the cap covers
- Save the cap

Each product, variant or collection you pick has its own count: a cap of 2 on two products lets a customer buy 2 of each. A collection counts all of its products together, so a cap of 3 on a collection means 3 items from that collection in total.

## Allow the App to Count Purchases

The first time you open **Purchase caps**, the app asks for permission to save each customer's purchase count on their customer record in Shopify. Click **Allow access** and approve. Only the number of units bought of each capped product is saved, nothing else about the customer or the order. Caps are not enforced until you allow it.

## Logged-In Customers Only

A store can only tell who is buying when the customer is logged in to their account. Caps therefore apply to logged-in customers. A guest is not capped, because the next guest checkout could be anyone.

To close that gap, turn on **Require login to buy capped products** on the cap. A guest with a capped product in their cart can still add to the cart, but checkout asks them to log in before they can pay. This needs customer accounts to be turned on in **Shopify Admin > Settings > Customer accounts**.

## What Customers See

- **Product page** -- next to the quantity field: "You can buy at most 2 of this product." A logged-in customer who already bought some sees how many they have left, and the quantity field stops at that number. (This needs the Order Limits app embed turned on in your theme.)
- **Cart and checkout** -- a customer who would go over the cap sees "Sneaker is limited to 2 per customer" and cannot complete the order until they lower the quantity. You can change the wording on the **Texts** page (key `product_max_per_customer`; it can use `{product}`, `{max}`, `{bought}` and `{remaining}`).

## What Counts

- Orders count from the moment a product is capped. Orders placed before you created the cap are not counted.
- Cancelled or refunded orders still count.
- Changing a cap's products, window or status recalculates every customer's count straight away.

## Plan

Purchase caps need the Pro plan. If your store moves to Starter, caps are paused: checkout and the product page skip them, and the caps list shows **Paused: needs Pro**. They are kept, and work again as soon as you upgrade.

---

# Customer-Specific Rules

> Apply different limits based on customer tags

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/customer-tag-rules
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Customer-specific rules let you apply different quantity limits based on customer tags. This means wholesale customers, VIPs, and retail shoppers can each have their own buying limits on the same products.

Shopify customer tags are labels you assign to customers in the **Customers** section of your admin. Common examples: `wholesale`, `vip`, `retail`, `employee`.

## Setting Up Customer Tag Rules

- Go to **Rules** and create or edit a rule
- In the **Customer tags** section, enter one or more tags
- Set the quantity limits for customers with those tags
- Save the rule

You can create multiple rules for the same product with different tags. For example:

- **Retail customers** (no tag) -- max 5 per product
- **Wholesale** (tag: `wholesale`) -- min 50, step 10, no maximum
- **VIP** (tag: `vip`) -- max 20 per product

## What Happens for Customers Without Matching Tags

- If a rule targets a specific tag and the customer does not have that tag, the rule does not apply to them
- If you also have a general rule (no tag filter) for the same product, that rule applies instead
- If no rules match, the product has no quantity restrictions

## What the Customer Sees

- Logged-in customers see limits based on their tags automatically
- Guest customers (not logged in) only see rules that have no tag filter
- Error messages at checkout reflect the limits that apply to the specific customer

## Plan

Requires the Pro plan. On Starter, rules limited to customer tags are paused rather than applied to everyone, and work again after upgrading.

---

# Scheduling Rules

> Set start and end dates for your quantity rules

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/scheduling
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Scheduling lets you set start and end dates on your quantity rules so they activate and expire automatically. This is useful for time-limited promotions, seasonal restrictions, or pre-order windows.

## Setting Up a Schedule

- Go to **Rules** and create or edit a rule
- In the **Schedule** section, set a **start date**, an **end date**, or both
  - **Start date only** -- The rule activates on that date and stays active indefinitely
  - **End date only** -- The rule is active now and automatically turns off on that date
  - **Both dates** -- The rule is only active during that window
- Save the rule

## Time Zone

Schedules use your store's time zone as configured in **Shopify Admin > Settings > General**. All start and end times are midnight in your store's time zone.

## Use Cases

- **Flash sales** -- Set a maximum quantity of 2 per order during a 24-hour sale event
- **Seasonal limits** -- Limit holiday items to 5 per order during November and December
- **Pre-orders** -- Set a minimum order quantity during the pre-order window, then remove it at launch
- **Wholesale windows** -- Open bulk ordering only during specific weeks

## What Happens at the Start and End Time

- The app switches the rule on at its start time and off at its end time, for the product page, the cart page and checkout. No action is needed from you
- The rule stays in your list with its status unchanged, so you can edit the dates and reuse it
- Products covered by a rule outside its window go back to their default behavior (or to any other active rule)

## Plan

Scheduling needs the Pro plan. If your store moves to Starter (or Free), every rule with a start or end date is paused: the product page, the cart and checkout skip it, and the rules list shows it as **Paused: needs Pro**. Its dates are kept. You can still edit the rule's other settings, but not its dates. Upgrade to Pro and the rule runs on its schedule again right away.

---

# Multilingual Error Messages

> Customize error messages in 21 languages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/translations
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

When quantity limits are enforced, customers see error messages like "Minimum quantity is 5" or "You can add at most 10 of this item." Translations let you customize these messages in multiple languages to match your store's locale.

The app supports 21 languages out of the box, and messages are shown automatically based on your customer's browser language or your store's language settings.

## Editing Error Messages

- Go to **Settings > Translations**
- Select the language you want to edit
- Each message type has a default text that you can customize:
  - **Minimum quantity message** -- Shown when a customer tries to buy fewer than the minimum
  - **Maximum quantity message** -- Shown when a customer tries to exceed the maximum
  - **Step quantity message** -- Shown when the quantity is not a valid multiple
  - **Cart limit messages** -- Shown on the cart page when cart-level limits are not met
- Edit the text and save

Messages support dynamic placeholders like `{min}`, `{max}`, and `{step}` that are replaced with the actual values from your rules.

## Where Messages Appear

- **Product page** -- Inline message near the quantity selector
- **Cart page** -- Banner above the checkout button
- **Checkout** -- Shopify's checkout validation error area

## Default Behavior

If you do not customize any messages, the app uses sensible defaults in English. If your store uses Shopify Markets with multiple languages, the app automatically picks the right translation.

## Plan

Available on all plans, including Starter.

---

# Inventory-Aware Limits

> Automatically cap quantities based on available stock

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/inventory-aware-limits
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Inventory-aware limits automatically adjust your maximum quantity based on available stock. This prevents customers from ordering more than you can fulfill, even when you have step increments that do not divide evenly into your inventory.

## How It Works

- You set a rule with a step of 5 (customers buy in multiples of 5)
- A product has 12 units in stock
- Without inventory awareness, the customer could select 15 -- exceeding stock
- With inventory awareness, the maximum is automatically capped at 10 (the highest valid multiple of 5 that does not exceed 12)

The app recalculates the limit in real time based on current inventory levels. As stock changes, the enforced maximum updates automatically.

## Enabling Inventory-Aware Limits

- Go to **Settings** and find **Rule Settings**
- Tick **Inventory-aware limits**
- Click **Save**

The setting applies to every rule. Your storefront picks it up within a minute of saving; you don't need to edit or save a rule.

## Variant-Specific Tracking

Inventory is tracked per variant. If a product has sizes S, M, L with different stock levels, each variant gets its own calculated maximum.

## What the Customer Sees

- The quantity selector stops at the inventory-adjusted maximum
- If stock is lower than the rule's minimum, the product shows as unavailable for the quantity required
- Works across all themes -- no theme customization needed

## Examples

- Step of 6, stock of 25 -- max becomes 24
- Step of 10, stock of 8 -- product cannot meet the minimum step, shown as limited availability
- Min 3, max 50, stock of 40 -- max becomes 40

## Plan

Requires the Pro plan. On Starter or Free the setting is locked and the storefront ignores it.

---

# Quantity Notice Block

> Customize where and how limit messages appear on product pages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/theme-notice-block
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The Quantity Notice block lets you display limit information directly on your product pages. It shows customers the active rules for a product -- like "Buy in multiples of 6" or "Maximum 10 per order" -- before they even interact with the quantity selector.

By default, the app shows notices near the Add to Cart button automatically. The theme block gives you full control over where the notice appears and how it looks.

## Adding the Block

- Open your theme customizer (**Online Store > Themes > Customize**)
- Navigate to a product page template
- Click **Add block** in the section where you want the notice to appear
- Select **Quantity Notice** from the app blocks list
- Drag it to your preferred position (e.g., above or below the Add to Cart button)
- Save

## Customizing Appearance

- **Message style** -- Choose between a banner (with background color) or text-only
- **Info color** -- Color for informational messages (e.g., "Buy in multiples of 6")
- **Warning color** -- Color for warnings (e.g., "Only 8 left in stock")
- **Error color** -- Color for errors (e.g., "Maximum 10 exceeded")
- **Border radius** -- Round the corners of banner-style messages
- **Font size** -- Match your theme's typography
- **Padding** -- Adjust spacing inside the banner

## Fallback Behavior

If you do not add the block to your theme, the app still displays notices using a default style positioned near the quantity selector. The block is optional -- it just gives you more control.

## Plan

Available on all plans, including Starter.

---

# Shopify Flow Automations

> Run a workflow when a scheduled rule starts or ends

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/shopify-flow
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Shopify Flow is Shopify's own automation tool: it makes your store do something automatically when an event happens, such as posting to Slack, emailing your team or adding a tag, without any code. Flow is a free app from Shopify; install it from the Shopify App Store if you don't have it yet.

Order Limits adds two triggers to Flow. There is nothing to switch on: they ship with the app, and **Settings > Integrations** has a button that opens Flow.

## Triggers

- **Order limit rule started** — Runs when an active rule with a start date reaches its start time and its limits begin to apply. It carries **Rule name** and **Rule type** (`product`, `collection` or `cart`). A customer-tag rule that your plan pauses doesn't start the workflow.
- **Order limit rule ended** — Runs when an active rule with an end date reaches its end time and its limits stop applying. It carries **Rule name** and **Rule type**.

Each runs once per rule and date. If you move a rule's start or end date, the new date runs the workflow again. Rules without dates, and Draft rules, never start a workflow.

## Example

Trigger **Order limit rule started**, then a Slack or email action with the message `{{ ruleName }} is now live on the store` so your team knows the holiday limits are on.

---

# Rules Not Working

> What to do when quantity limits aren't being enforced

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/rules-not-working
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If your quantity rules are not being enforced on the storefront, work through these checks in order. Most issues are resolved by the first two steps.

- **Check that the app embed is enabled** -- Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**, then open **App Embeds** (the puzzle piece icon in the left sidebar). Make sure the Order Limits embed is toggled **On** and click **Save**. Without this, the app cannot modify your product pages or cart.

- **Verify the rule is set to Active** -- Open the rule in the app and confirm its status is **Active**. If you are using scheduling, check that the current date falls within the start and end dates.

- **Confirm products are assigned** -- Open the rule and verify the correct products or variants are listed. If you recently added new variants to a product, you may need to update the rule to include them.

- **Check for scheduling dates** -- If the rule has a start date in the future, it will not activate until that date. If it has an end date in the past, it has already expired. Remove or update the dates as needed.

- **Check for conflicting rules** -- If multiple rules apply to the same product, the app uses the most specific match. A variant-level rule overrides a product-level rule. Review your rules list to make sure there are no conflicts.

- **Clear your browser cache** -- Theme assets can be cached by your browser. Try a hard refresh (Ctrl+Shift+R on Windows, Cmd+Shift+R on Mac) or open the page in an incognito/private window.

- **Test in a different browser** -- Browser extensions (especially ad blockers) can interfere with app scripts. Test in a clean browser or incognito window to rule this out.

If none of these resolve the issue, contact support with your store URL and the rule you are trying to enforce.

---

# Checkout Validation Errors

> Understanding error messages at checkout

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits/checkout-errors
App: Order Limits (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Order Limits")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/order-limits-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/order-limits
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-04-04
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Checkout validation is the final safety net that prevents orders from going through when quantity limits are not met. Even if a customer bypasses the storefront controls, Shopify blocks the order at checkout and shows an error message.

## Why Customers See Errors at Checkout

- They edited the cart URL or used a direct checkout link that skips the storefront
- They had items in their cart before a rule was created, and the cart now violates the new rule
- A browser extension or script modified the quantity after the storefront validation ran
- They are on a slow connection and the storefront script had not loaded yet

## Common Error Messages

- **"Minimum quantity for [product] is X"** -- The customer needs to increase the quantity to at least X
- **"Maximum quantity for [product] is X"** -- The customer needs to reduce the quantity to X or fewer
- **"[Product] must be purchased in multiples of X"** -- The quantity needs to be adjusted to a valid multiple
- **"Your cart must contain at least X items"** -- More items need to be added to the cart
- **"Your order cannot exceed $X"** -- The cart total is above the allowed maximum

## Storefront vs Checkout Enforcement

- **Storefront** -- The app adjusts the quantity selector and shows inline messages on the product and cart pages. This is the friendly, guided experience.
- **Checkout** -- Shopify runs a validation function that hard-blocks the order. The customer sees an error and must go back to fix their cart. This cannot be bypassed.

Both layers work together. The storefront prevents most issues before they reach checkout. The checkout validation catches anything that slips through.

## Draft Orders and Orders Created by Staff

Limits apply to orders customers place through your online store checkout. Draft orders your staff create in the Shopify admin are not checked, including ones marked as paid, so staff can make an exception for a customer when needed.

## Customizing Error Messages

You can change the exact wording of these messages in **Settings > Translations**. See the Multilingual Error Messages article for details.

---

# Installation

> Install the app and enable protection on your theme

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/installation
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Installing from the App Store

1. Visit the [Photolock](https://apps.shopify.com/photolock) app listing on the Shopify App Store
2. Click **Add app** to begin the installation
3. Review the permissions and click **Install app**

## Enabling the App Block

After installing, you need to enable Photolock on your theme:

1. In your Shopify admin, go to **Online Store** > **Themes**
2. Click **Customize** on your active theme
3. In the theme editor, click **App embeds** (the puzzle piece icon in the sidebar)
4. Find **Photolock** and toggle it **On**
5. Click **Save**

Alternatively, open the Photolock app and use the **Theme Setup** section on the Settings page to check your installation status and open the theme editor directly.

## Verifying Protection is Active

To confirm protection is working:

1. Open your store in a new browser tab (not the theme editor)
2. Try right-clicking on an image — the context menu should be blocked
3. Try dragging an image — it should not be draggable

If you're testing in the theme editor, protection is intentionally disabled so you can still use the editor normally. Always test on your live store or preview.

## Default Settings

New installs start with **Right-Click Lock** enabled by default. All other protections are off, letting you enable only the features you need.

To configure additional protections, go to **Settings** in the Photolock app and explore the protection categories: Content Protection, Image Protection, Screen Capture, Bots & Crawlers, and Warnings.

---

# How Protection Works

> Understand what Photolock protects and how

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/how-protection-works
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Protection Layers

Photolock uses multiple layers of protection to prevent image and content theft:

| Layer | What It Does | Example |
|-------|-------------|---------|
| **Input Blocking** | Intercepts keyboard and mouse actions | Blocks right-click, Ctrl+C, drag & drop |
| **Visual Shields** | Adds invisible barriers over images | Image Shield serves a blank file on "Save As" |
| **Watermarks** | Embeds marks on images | Invisible watermarks trace leaked screenshots |
| **Detection** | Identifies suspicious tools and behavior | Blocks spy extensions like PPSPY |
| **Warnings** | Deters theft with visible messages | Shows a short message at the bottom of the screen on right-click attempts |

## How Features Work Together

Each protection feature operates independently — you can enable any combination. For example:

- **Right-Click Lock** blocks the context menu, while **Image Shield** ensures that even if someone bypasses it, they download a blank image
- **Screenshot Lock** blocks keyboard shortcuts, while **Invisible Watermark** marks any screenshots that slip through
- **Smart Activation** keeps all your enabled protections dormant until suspicious behavior is detected, giving normal visitors an uninterrupted experience

## Your Store Always Keeps Working

Protection only ever applies to your product photos. Photolock never blurs, hides or covers the whole store, and never blocks scrolling, menus, the cart, links or form fields. When a protection reacts (a screenshot shortcut, developer tools, a spy extension), it blurs or hides the product photos only, and messages appear as a small bar at the bottom of the screen. If the protection script ever fails to load or run, your store simply shows normally, and visitors with JavaScript turned off see the store as usual.

## What Protection Can and Cannot Prevent

Photolock is highly effective at deterring casual image theft — the vast majority of attempts by store visitors. It blocks common actions like right-clicking, dragging, copying, and using keyboard shortcuts.

However, no client-side protection can fully prevent a technically determined user from capturing content. Photolock's goal is to make theft significantly harder and less convenient, discouraging most visitors from attempting it.

## Theme Editor Behavior

Protection is automatically disabled when you're editing your theme in the Shopify theme editor. This ensures you can customize your store without any interference. Protection only activates on your live store for real visitors.

---

# Content Protection

> Block right-clicks, copying, and file saving

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/content-protection
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Overview

Content Protection blocks common ways visitors copy text and save pages from your store. These features are available on all plans.

## Full Page Right-Click Lock

Disables the right-click context menu across your entire store — not just on images, but on all page content. This prevents visitors from accessing options like "Save As", "Copy", or "Inspect Element" through the context menu. Links and form fields keep their menu, so visitors can still open a page in a new tab or paste into the search box.

When disabled, right-click is only blocked on images (via Image Protection). Enable this for broader coverage across all page content.

## Copy & Paste Lock

Blocks keyboard shortcuts for copying page content:

- **Ctrl+C / Cmd+C** (Copy)
- **Ctrl+X / Cmd+X** (Cut)
- **Ctrl+A / Cmd+A** (Select All)

Typing, copying and pasting inside search boxes, newsletter and contact forms always works.

This prevents visitors from selecting and copying your product descriptions, pricing, or other text content.

## File Save Lock

Blocks the **Ctrl+S / Cmd+S** keyboard shortcut, preventing visitors from saving your page as an HTML file. Without this, a visitor could save the entire page — including images and text — to their computer.

## Enabling Content Protection

1. Open the Photolock app
2. Go to **Settings** > **Content Protection**
3. Toggle on the features you want
4. Click **Save**

Changes take effect immediately on your live store.

---

# Image Protection

> Protect images with shields and source hiding

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/image-protection
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Overview

Image Protection prevents visitors from downloading or saving your product images. The right-click and drag locks are on every plan, including Free. Image Shield, Invisible Watermark and Hide Images From Inspectors need the Pro plan or higher. Protection only ever touches your product photos: the rest of the store, its menus, cart and links keep working normally.

## Right-Click Lock

Blocks the right-click context menu specifically on images, preventing access to "Save Image As" and similar options. It also works when the theme lays a button or link over the photo (for example a zoom button on the product gallery or a product card link). Right-clicking text, links and buttons elsewhere is left alone. This is the most common protection feature and is enabled by default on new installs.

## Drag & Drop Lock

Prevents visitors from dragging images out of the browser window — a common way to quickly save an image to the desktop or into another application.

## Image Shield (Pro)

Places an invisible transparent overlay on top of your images. When a visitor tries to "Save Image As", they download the transparent overlay instead of the actual product image.

This works even if a visitor bypasses the right-click lock through browser developer tools, since the overlay sits on top of the real image in the page structure.

## Hide Images From Inspectors (Pro)

Hides your product photos while a visitor has the browser's developer tools open, which is where image links are usually copied from. The photos come back as soon as developer tools close, and the rest of the page stays visible the whole time. Image addresses can't be removed from a web page entirely, so this is a deterrent rather than a lock.

## Enabling Image Protection

1. Open the Photolock app
2. Go to **Settings** > **Image Protection**
3. Toggle on the features you want
4. Click **Save**

A section marked **Upgrade to Pro** needs the Pro plan or higher.

---

# Screen Capture Protection

> Block screenshots, printing, and detect focus loss

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/screen-capture
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Overview

Screen Capture Protection deters screenshots and printing and reacts when visitors switch away from your store. These features need the Pro plan or higher. When one of them fires, only your product photos are blurred: the rest of the page stays sharp, and visitors can keep scrolling, clicking and shopping.

## Screenshot Lock

Blocks common screenshot keyboard shortcuts on desktop computers:

| Shortcut | Platform |
|----------|----------|
| **Ctrl+Shift+S** | Windows/Linux |
| **Cmd+Shift+3/4/5** | macOS |
| **Print Screen** | Windows |

When a blocked shortcut is detected, the key combination is intercepted and your product photos blur for a moment, so a screenshot taken anyway doesn't show them clearly. A click brings them back straight away.

**Note**: Screenshot Lock works on desktop browsers only, and only for the keyboard shortcuts above. Phone screenshots (hardware buttons) and separate screen-capture apps can't be blocked by any website; a visible watermark is the better deterrent there.

## Focus Lock

Detects when the browser window loses focus — for example, when a visitor switches to another app or tab. This can indicate they're using screen capture tools or comparing your content with a competitor's store.

While the window is out of focus your product photos are blurred, and they sharpen again as soon as the visitor comes back. Clicking into an embedded video, chat or Shop Pay window doesn't count as leaving.

## Printing Lock

Blocks the browser's print function, preventing visitors from printing your pages or saving them as PDF files.

When a visitor attempts to print, the print shortcut is blocked and a printed page comes out blank.

## Enabling Screen Capture Protection

1. Open the Photolock app
2. Go to **Settings** > **Screen Capture**
3. Toggle on the features you want
4. Click **Save**

All Screen Capture features need the Pro plan or higher.

---

# Watermarks

> Add invisible and visible watermarks to images

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/watermarks
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Overview

Watermarks add an extra layer of protection by marking your images — either visibly to deter copying, or invisibly to trace the source of leaked images. The Invisible Watermark needs the Pro plan or higher; the Visible Watermark needs the Max plan or higher.

## Invisible Watermark

Adds a nearly invisible text overlay to your images containing a unique session identifier. The watermark is not noticeable during normal browsing, but it's captured in any screenshot or screen recording.

If a watermarked image appears on another site, you can trace it back to the specific visitor session that captured it. This is particularly useful for:

- Identifying which visitor leaked your product images
- Building evidence for copyright takedown requests
- Deterring theft when visitors know watermarks are present

## Visible Watermark

Overlays a customizable text watermark on your product images on the storefront. This is a visual deterrent — visitors can see the watermark and know the images are protected. The text gets a soft outline so it stays readable on light and dark photos, and it shrinks to fit small product cards.

The watermark is drawn over the image on the page; the image file itself isn't changed, so a copy fetched straight from its address has no mark. Pair it with the right-click lock and Image Shield.

### Customization Options

| Option | Description |
|--------|-------------|
| **Watermark Text** | The text displayed on images (e.g., your store name or "Do Not Copy") |
| **Position** | Where the watermark appears: Top Left, Top Right, Center, Center Diagonal, Bottom Left, Bottom Right |
| **Size** | Font size in pixels |
| **Color** | Hex color code for the watermark text |

**Center Diagonal** places the watermark at an angle across the image, making it harder to crop out.

## Enabling Watermarks

1. Open the Photolock app
2. For the Invisible Watermark, go to **Settings** > **Image Protection** and switch it on in the **Image Shields** section
3. For the Visible Watermark, go to **Settings** > **Watermark**, switch it on and set the text, position, size, color and opacity; the live preview shows the result
4. Click **Save**

---

# Warning Messages

> Show warnings when protection is triggered

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/warning-messages
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Overview

Warning Messages show alerts when visitors trigger protection features. Warnings act as a visible deterrent — letting visitors know the store is protected. Warning toggles are available on all plans.

## Right-Click Warning

Shows a short message at the bottom of the screen when a right-click on an image is blocked. The message informs them that content is protected; it disappears by itself and never stops the visitor from browsing. This pairs with the Right-Click Lock to both block the action and explain why.

## Console Warning

Displays a warning message in the browser's developer console. This targets technically inclined visitors who open developer tools to inspect or extract content. The message stays in the console: shoppers never see it on the page. When developer tools or a store-inspection extension hide your photos, the bar at the bottom of the page says only "Product photos are protected." in the shopper's language.

## Welcome Warning

Shows a small copyright notice along the bottom of the page. Visitors learn that store content is protected without being stopped: they can keep shopping, close it with one tap, and it returns at most once every 30 days. While it is open, other short messages (right-click, screenshot) appear just above it rather than on top of it.

## Screenshot Warning

Shows a short message at the bottom of the screen when a screenshot attempt is detected via keyboard shortcuts. This is independent of the Screenshot Lock — you can show the warning without blocking the keys, or block without showing the warning.

Requires the Screenshot Lock to be enabled (Pro plan) for the detection to work.

## Focus Warning

Merged into the Focus Lock in Screen Capture settings: while the visitor is away, product photos are blurred, and they sharpen when the visitor returns. Requires the Focus Lock (Pro plan).

## Customizing Warning Text

Warning messages can be customized in different languages through the Translations feature. See the [Translations](https://help.pasilobus.com/configuration/translations) article for details.

---

# Bots & Crawlers

> Block spy extensions and image crawlers

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/bots-crawlers
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Overview

Bots & Crawlers protection blocks automated tools and browser extensions that competitors use to spy on your store or scrape your images. These features require the Max plan.

## Hide Source Code

Blocks the **Ctrl+U / Cmd+U** (view source) and developer-tools shortcuts (**F12**, **Ctrl+Shift+I / Cmd+Option+I**), and hides your product photos while developer tools are open. The rest of the page stays visible, and the photos come back when developer tools close. This makes it harder to extract image URLs from your page markup.

## Block Spy Extensions

Detects and blocks popular competitor intelligence browser extensions:

- **PPSPY** — analyzes store traffic, revenue, and best-selling products
- **Koala Inspector** — inspects Shopify store themes, apps, and settings
- **ShopHunt** — tracks competitor product changes and pricing

When one of these extensions is detected, your product photos are blurred for that visitor and a short message explains why. The rest of the store keeps working. Ordinary extensions such as password managers, coupon finders and translators are not treated as spy tools.

## Crawler Blocking

Controls which search engine and social media crawlers can index your images. This is useful if you want to prevent your product images from appearing in image search results or social media previews.

| Crawler | What It Does |
|---------|-------------|
| **Google Image Crawler** | Prevents Google from indexing your images in Google Images |
| **Bing Image Crawler** | Prevents Bing from indexing your images |
| **Twitter Crawler** | Prevents Twitter/X from creating image previews when your URLs are shared |
| **Pinterest Crawler** | Prevents Pinterest from saving or pinning your images |

**Important**: Blocking crawlers affects your store's visibility in image search results and social previews. Only enable crawler blocking if preventing image indexing is more important than the traffic these sources provide.

## Enabling Bots & Crawlers Protection

1. Open the Photolock app
2. Go to **Settings** > **Bots & Crawlers**
3. Toggle on the features you want
4. Click **Save**

---

# Smart Activation

> Only activate protection when suspicious behavior is detected

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/smart-activation
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Configuration
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Overview

Smart Activation keeps all your protection features dormant until suspicious behavior is detected. Normal visitors browse your store without any restrictions — locks only activate when needed. This feature needs the Pro plan or higher.

## How It Works

With Smart Activation enabled, Photolock monitors for common theft indicators:

- Right-click attempts on images
- Copy/paste keyboard shortcuts
- Drag and drop attempts
- Other suspicious interactions

When any of these actions are detected, all your enabled protections activate immediately for that visitor's session. Until then, the visitor experiences no restrictions.

## When to Use Smart Activation

**Use Smart Activation when:**

- You want to minimize any impact on the browsing experience for legitimate customers
- Your store has accessibility requirements where always-on protection may interfere
- You prefer a less aggressive approach that only responds to actual theft attempts

**Use always-on protection (Smart Activation off) when:**

- You want maximum protection from the first page load
- Your images are high-value and you can't risk any unprotected window
- You prefer visible deterrence (visitors immediately see protection is active)

## Enabling Smart Activation

1. Open the Photolock app
2. On the dashboard, find the **Smart Activation** section
3. Toggle it **On**
4. Click **Save**

Smart Activation applies to all protection features you have enabled. You don't need to configure it per feature.

---

# Rules

> Exclude specific pages, markets, or customers from protection

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/rules
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Configuration
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Overview

Rules let you control where and for whom protection is active. You can exclude specific products, collections, markets, or customer groups from protection. Rules require the Ultra plan. On a lower plan the whole Rules page is shown but locked: the switches, pickers and the market and customer choices can't be changed, and rules saved on an earlier plan don't run.

## Page Filtering

Page filtering lets you exclude specific products or collections from protection. This is useful when you want certain pages to remain unprotected — for example, a product with images you want customers to share freely.

### Enabling Page Filtering

1. Go to **Settings** > **Rules**
2. Toggle on **Enable page filter**
3. Click **Save**

### Excluding Products

1. In the **Excluded Products** section, click **Add Products**
2. Use the Shopify product picker to select products
3. Selected products appear in the exclusion list

Protection will be completely disabled on these product pages.

### Excluding Collections

1. In the **Excluded Collections** section, click **Add Collections**
2. Select the collections to exclude

All products in excluded collections will be unprotected — both on the collection page and on individual product pages within that collection.

### Removing Exclusions

Click the **X** icon next to any product or collection to remove it from the exclusion list and restore protection.

## Market Filter

If your store serves multiple Shopify Markets (e.g., different countries or regions), you can limit protection to specific markets.

### Options

| Setting | Behavior |
|---------|----------|
| **All markets** | Protection is active in every market (default) |
| **Specific markets** | Protection only applies in the markets you select |

### Configuring Market Filtering

1. Go to **Settings** > **Rules**
2. Under **Market Filter**, select **Specific markets**
3. Click **Select markets** and choose the markets where protection should be active
4. Click **Save**

Visitors browsing from markets not in your list will not see any protection.

## Customer Rules

Control which customers are excluded from protection. This is helpful when you want to protect content from anonymous visitors but allow logged-in customers or wholesale buyers full access.

### Options

| Setting | Behavior |
|---------|----------|
| **All visitors** | Protection applies to everyone (default) |
| **Exclude logged-in customers** | Protection is disabled for any logged-in customer |
| **Exclude customers with specific tags** | Protection is disabled for customers with matching tags |

### Using Customer Tags

1. Go to **Settings** > **Rules**
2. Under **Customer Rules**, select **Exclude customers with specific tags**
3. Enter tags separated by commas (e.g., `wholesale, vip, partner`)
4. Click **Save**

Tags are case-insensitive — `Wholesale` and `wholesale` are treated the same.

---

# Translations

> Customize warning messages in different languages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/translations
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Configuration
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Overview

Translations let you customize warning messages in different languages for your store visitors. When a visitor's browser language or Shopify market language matches a configured language, they see warnings in their language. This feature is available on the Max plan and higher.

## Adding a Language

1. Open the Photolock app
2. Go to **Translations** in the navigation
3. Click **Add Language**
4. Select the language from the dropdown
5. Click **Save**

The new language appears in your translations list with default English text that you can customize.

## Editing Warning Messages

Each language has customizable text for every warning message the app displays:

| Warning | When It Shows |
|---------|---------------|
| **Right-Click Warning** | When a visitor right-clicks |
| **Console Warning** | In the browser developer console |
| **Welcome Warning** | When the page loads |
| **Screenshot Warning** | When a screenshot shortcut is detected |
| **Focus Warning** | When the browser window loses focus |
| **Printing Warning** | When a visitor tries to print |
| **Mobile Warning** | On mobile right-click (long press) attempts |

To edit:

1. Click on a language in the list
2. Update the message text for each warning type
3. Click **Save**

## How Language Matching Works

Photolock matches the visitor's language based on their Shopify market or browser language settings. If a matching translation exists, that language is used. Otherwise, the default English messages are shown.

## Managing Languages

From the Translations page, you can:

- **Edit** any language to update its messages
- **Delete** languages you no longer need
- Add as many languages as your store supports

---

# Temporarily Disabling Protection

> Pause protection without uninstalling the app

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/disable-protection
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

There are times when you need your store to behave normally without protection getting in the way — taking your own product screenshots, letting a designer or developer work on your theme, recording a demo, or testing how a page behaves. Photolock can be turned off temporarily without uninstalling the app, so all of your settings stay exactly as you left them and protection returns the moment you switch it back on.

## Turn Protection Off

Photolock runs through an app embed in your theme. Toggling that embed off pauses every protection feature at once:

1. Go to **Online Store** > **Themes** in your Shopify admin
2. Click **Customize** on your active theme
3. Click **App embeds** (the puzzle piece icon in the left sidebar)
4. Toggle **Photolock** **Off**
5. Click **Save**

Protection stops immediately across your entire storefront. Your feature settings, rules, and watermark configuration are untouched — nothing is deleted.

## Turn Protection Back On

When you're done, re-enable the embed:

1. Return to **Online Store** > **Themes** > **Customize**
2. Click **App embeds**
3. Toggle **Photolock** **On**
4. Click **Save**

All of your previous settings take effect again right away.

## Disable on a Single Page Instead

If you only need protection off for specific pages — rather than the whole store — leave the app embed on and use exclusion rules instead:

- **Page Filtering** - Exclude individual products or collections from protection
- **Customer Rules** - Skip protection for logged-in or tagged customers
- **Market Filter** - Limit protection to specific markets

This keeps the rest of your store protected while making an exception where you need it. Rules require the Ultra plan.

## A Few Things to Know

- **The theme editor already disables protection** - Photolock is automatically off inside the Shopify theme customizer, so you can edit your theme without turning the embed off
- **No need to uninstall** - Toggling the embed is faster than uninstalling and preserves all your settings
- **Changes are instant** - There's no delay; protection follows the embed toggle as soon as you save

---

# Protection Not Working

> Fix issues where protection isn't active on your store

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock/protection-not-working
App: Photolock
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/photolock
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/photolock
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-06-28
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Check the App Block

The most common reason protection isn't working is that the app block isn't enabled on your theme.

1. Go to **Online Store** > **Themes** in your Shopify admin
2. Click **Customize** on your active theme
3. Click **App embeds** (puzzle piece icon)
4. Make sure **Photolock** is toggled **On**
5. Click **Save**

You can also check your installation status from the Photolock app's **Settings** > **Installation** section.

## Theme Editor vs Live Store

Protection is automatically disabled in the Shopify theme editor. This is intentional — it allows you to customize your store without interference.

Always test protection on your live store or a theme preview, not in the editor. Attempts made in a theme preview are protected but not counted in your block totals. Only your published theme counts: attempts on a draft theme, or in its preview, are blocked but not counted, so a store testing on a draft sees 0 blocks. The dashboard says so under the block counts while they are 0.

## Check Feature Requirements

Some features require specific plans:

| Feature | Required Plan |
|---------|--------------|
| Content Protection (right-click, copy, save) | All plans |
| Image Protection (right-click, drag & drop) | All plans |
| Image Shield, Invisible Watermark, Hide Images From Inspectors | Pro |
| Screen Capture (screenshot, focus, printing) | Pro |
| Smart Activation | Pro |
| Visible Watermark | Max |
| Bots & Crawlers | Max |
| Rules (page, market, customer exclusions) | Ultra |

If a feature is grayed out with an **Upgrade to …** badge, the badge names the plan it needs.

The dashboard's **Protections** count shows **not live yet** while the Photolock app embed is off in your published theme: the switches are on, but nothing runs on the storefront until the embed is on.

## Exclusion Rules

If protection works on some pages but not others, check your Rules settings:

1. Go to **Settings** > **Rules**
2. Check if **Page Filtering** is enabled with excluded products or collections
3. Check if **Market Filter** is set to specific markets
4. Check if **Customer Rules** exclude logged-in or tagged customers

## Browser Extensions

Some browser extensions can interfere with protection features. Ad blockers, developer tool extensions, or privacy extensions may override Photolock's protections. This only affects the visitor using that specific extension — other visitors are still protected.

## Mobile Limitations

- **Screenshot Lock** works on desktop only — mobile screenshots use hardware buttons that web apps cannot intercept
- **Right-Click Lock** works on mobile as a long-press block
- All other protections work on both desktop and mobile

## Smart Activation

If you have Smart Activation enabled, protection is dormant until a suspicious action is detected. During normal browsing, it may appear as if protection isn't active. Try right-clicking on an image — protection should activate immediately after the first attempt.

---

# Installation

> Install the app and activate it on your theme

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/installation
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-08-10
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Getting Product Options running on your store takes just a few minutes. Install from the Shopify App Store, then follow the guided setup wizard to add the options block to your theme—no code required.

## Installing from the App Store

1. Visit the [Product Options](https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus) app listing on the Shopify App Store
2. Click **Add app** to begin the installation
3. Follow the prompts to complete installation

## Theme Setup Wizard

After installation, the theme setup wizard guides you through activating Product Options on your storefront:

1. **Choose theme** - Select which theme to install on
2. **Enable app embed** - Activates Product Options functionality
3. **Add options block** - Places the options form on product pages

The wizard handles all theme integration automatically.

## Adding the App Block

The Product Options block displays your custom options on product pages:

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**
2. Select **Products > Default product** from the page dropdown
3. In the product section, click **Add block**
4. Choose **Product Options** from the Apps list
5. Drag to position (typically below variant selector, above Add to Cart)
6. Click **Save**

## Verifying Installation

To confirm Product Options is properly installed:

1. Create an option group with at least one option
2. Assign a product to the option group
3. Open that product page in a new browser tab
4. Look for your custom options on the page

If you don't see the options, check the [Options Not Showing](https://help.pasilobus.com/troubleshooting/options-not-showing) troubleshooting guide.

---

# How Product Options Works

> Understand the key components of product customization

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/how-product-options-works
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-03-19
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Product Options lets you add custom fields to your products—from simple dropdowns to file uploads. Customers see these options on product pages and their selections carry through to cart and checkout. Understanding how the system works helps you create better customization experiences.

## The Product Options System

The app uses a simple hierarchy to organize customization:

- **Option Groups** contain one or more options
- **Product Options** are the individual fields customers interact with
- **Option Values** are the choices within multi-select options

This structure lets you create a set of options once and apply them to many products.

## Option Groups

Think of option groups as templates. Create a "Personalization" group with text input for engraving, then apply it to all products that offer engraving. Update the group once, and all assigned products reflect the change.

Groups can apply to:
- **All products** - Every product in your store shows these options
- **Specific products** - Only selected products show these options

## Product Options

Options are the actual form fields customers see. Each option has:

- **Name** - Internal identifier for your reference
- **Label** - What customers see on the storefront
- **Type** - Dropdown, text input, checkbox, swatches, and more
- **Values** - The available choices (for multi-select types)

## How Options Appear

On your storefront, options display as form fields on product pages. Customers make their selections before adding to cart. Their choices appear in the cart, checkout, and order confirmation—making fulfillment straightforward.

## Customer Journey

1. Customer visits a product page
2. Custom options appear as form fields
3. Customer makes selections (fills text, picks colors, uploads files)
4. Options are validated (required fields must be filled)
5. Customer adds to cart with selections attached
6. Selections appear in cart and checkout
7. Order includes all customization details for fulfillment

---

# Dashboard Overview

> Navigate the app and understand your metrics

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/dashboard-overview
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-08-09
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The Product Options dashboard is your command center. At a glance, see how many options you've created, access your option groups, and navigate to settings. Use the sidebar to manage all aspects of your product customization.

## Dashboard Metrics

The dashboard displays statistics about your Product Options setup:

- **Option Groups** - Total groups you've created
- **Product Options** - Total individual options across all groups
- **Products** - How many products have options assigned

## Quick Actions

From the dashboard, you can:

- **Create Option Group** - Start building a new set of options
- **View All Groups** - Browse and manage existing groups
- **Access Settings** - Configure translations, appearance, and more

## Navigating the App

The sidebar provides quick access to all sections:

- **Dashboard** - Overview and metrics
- **Option Groups** - Create and manage groups
- **Galleries** - Manage file galleries for upload options
- **Settings** - Configure storefront appearance, translations
- **Plans** - View and upgrade your subscription

## Understanding Plan Features

Your plan determines which features are available:

- **Free** - Every option type, unlimited options and option sets, and conditional logic
- **Pro** - Adds prices on options and quantity settings
- **Max** - Adds cart and checkout wording, file galleries, and customer and market visibility

Features locked by your plan appear with an upgrade prompt. You can still see and configure them, but they won't activate on your storefront until you upgrade. If you move to a smaller plan, your options and settings are kept, and the features it doesn't include stop on your storefront within a few minutes.

---

# Option Groups

> Organize options into reusable groups

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/option-groups
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-09
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Option groups are containers that hold your product options. Instead of adding options to each product individually, you create a group once and assign it to products. This makes managing options across your catalog efficient and consistent.

## Why Use Option Groups

Groups provide several benefits:

- **Efficiency** - Create once, apply to many products
- **Consistency** - All assigned products share the same options
- **Easy updates** - Change the group, all products update
- **Organization** - Keep related options together

For example, create a "Gift Options" group with gift wrapping and a message field, then apply it to all giftable products.

## Creating an Option Group

1. Go to **Option Groups** in the app
2. Click **Create** (or **Create Option Group** from empty state)
3. Enter a group name
4. Choose your application scope
5. Click **Save**

The group is created empty—you'll add options next.

## Application Scope

Choose which products receive the group's options under **Apply to**:

- **Specific products** - Only selected products show these options. Good for category-specific customization like engraving on jewelry or custom sizing on furniture.

- **Products not in other groups** - A default group that covers any product not assigned to another option group.

- **All products** - Every product in your store shows these options. Good for universal options like gift wrapping or rush shipping.

- **Products in a collection / with a tag / of a type / by vendor** - Target products by an attribute they share, matched live and case-insensitively on the storefront. See the Product Targeting article for details.

## Managing Products

For specific product targeting:

1. Open the option group
2. Click the **Products** link
3. Use the product picker to add products
4. Remove products by clicking the remove icon

You can search and filter to find products quickly.

## Organizing Groups

Keep your groups organized by using clear, descriptive names:

- "Personalization Options" for engraving and monograms
- "Gift Services" for wrapping and messages
- "Rush Shipping" for expedited delivery options
- "Custom Sizing" for made-to-order products

This makes it easy to find and manage groups as your catalog grows.

---

# Option Types

> Choose the right input type for each option

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/option-types
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-10
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Product Options supports over 20 option types organized into categories. Each type controls how customers interact with a particular customization field on your product page.

## Selection Options

These types let customers choose from predefined values you create:

- **Dropdown** - A collapsed list that expands when clicked. Best for many choices (5+) where you want to save space on the page.

- **Radio Button** - All choices visible at once, customer picks one. Best for 2-4 important choices you want customers to see immediately.

- **Checkbox** - Multiple checkboxes where customers can select one or more values. Best for add-ons like gift wrapping, insurance, or multiple toppings. You can limit how many choices customers pick — see Checkbox Selection Limits below.

- **Swatches** - Visual selection using colors or images. Best for color options, patterns, or materials where seeing is important.

- **Button** - Clickable buttons for each value. Best for sizes, styles, or any option where you want a clean, tappable selection.

- **Image Dropdown** - A dropdown with image thumbnails next to each option. Best for showing visual previews while keeping a compact layout.

- **Color Dropdown** - A dropdown with color swatches next to each option. Best for color selections where you want to combine a color preview with text labels.

- **Product Collection** - A picker that lists every product from a Shopify collection with thumbnails and titles. Customers pick a product, then pick a variant from a cascading dropdown. The chosen variant becomes a priced add-on in the cart at its real price. Best for "build your own bundle" or "pick from this catalog" flows where you don't want to maintain option values manually.

## Checkbox Selection Limits

Checkbox options can require a minimum number of selections, cap the maximum, or both. This is useful for offers like "pick exactly 3 toppings" or "choose up to 2 free samples".

When editing a checkbox option, open **Field Settings** and set:

- **Min Selections** - The fewest choices a customer must check. Leave blank for no minimum.
- **Max Selections** - The most choices a customer can check. Leave blank for no maximum.

On your storefront, the limits are enforced automatically:

- **At the maximum** - Once a customer checks the maximum number of choices, the remaining unchecked choices are disabled. Unchecking one re-enables them.
- **Below the minimum** - Add to cart is blocked and the customer sees a clear message, such as "Please select at least 2 options for 'Toppings'", shown both under the option and in the alert.
- **Optional options stay optional** - The minimum applies once the customer checks at least one choice. If the option is not required and the customer leaves it untouched, they can still add to cart. When the option is required, the minimum always applies.

## Text & Input Options

These types let customers enter their own values:

- **Text Input** - Single-line text field. Best for short entries like names, initials, or short messages.

- **Paragraph Text** - Multi-line text area. Best for longer entries like custom messages, special instructions, or dedications.

- **Size (W × H)** - Two measurement fields priced by the area they describe. The customer types a width and a height, and the app charges your rate for each square unit. Best for anything cut to order: panels, glass, fabric, signage, rugs.

- **Number** - Numeric input only. Best for quantities, dimensions, or other number-based entries.

- **Email** - Validates email format. Best when you need a recipient's email address.

- **Telephone** - Phone number input. Best for contact information or delivery coordination.

## Size Options

A Size option asks for a width and a height and charges by the area. Under **Field Settings** you set only what is particular to a size:

- **Unit** - What the customer measures in: inches, feet, centimetres or metres.
- **Smallest and largest size allowed** - Optional bounds. A size outside them can't be added to the cart, and the customer is told why.

The rate is the option value's price, set exactly the way every other option sets a price — so a Size option can be free, priced by hand, or priced from a product you already sell:

- **Leave the price empty** - nothing is charged. The customer measures, the size travels with the order, and you know how big to make it. Good when the size affects the work but not the price.
- **Type a price** - it is the price per square unit. At $4.00 with the unit set to feet, a 4 × 3 ft panel is $48.00.
- **Assign a product** - the app takes the rate from that product, covered below.

Customers see the maths before they add anything: **13 sq ft (rounded up from 12.6) × $4.00 = $52.00**. With no price they simply see **13 sq ft**.

**Areas round up to the next whole unit.** A Shopify variant's price is fixed, so a part-unit charge has nowhere to live — the area is charged in whole units and the customer sees the rounding stated. Choose your unit with that in mind: pricing per square foot charges a 12.6 sq ft panel as 13, while pricing the same panel per square inch is exact to within a square inch but shows a large number of units in the cart.

## Pricing a Size From a Product You Sell

If you already sell the material as a product, assign it to the option's value instead of typing a price. The app then takes the rate and the unit from Shopify, so you maintain them in one place and the cart line is your real product — with its own inventory, tax and reporting.

This needs the product to be **priced per unit** in Shopify, using the unit price fields on the variant:

- **Total amount** - how much is in the product you sell
- **Base measure** - the unit you want it compared against

The two must match for a Size option. A product whose total amount is 1 m² against a base measure of 1 m² *is* one square metre, so the app can sell thirteen of them as 13 m². A 5 m² roll shows the same "$27/m²" on your storefront but is a package: thirteen of those would be 65 m². The app refuses that one and tells you when you save.

Square feet and square metres are the only area units Shopify supports here. Pricing per square inch or centimetre works, but only by typing the price.

## Advanced Options

These types offer specialized input controls:

- **Color Picker** - A full color picker with hex value output. Best for custom color selections beyond predefined swatches.

- **Date** - Date picker calendar. Best for delivery dates, event dates, or scheduling.

- **Date & Time** - Date and time picker. Best when you need both a date and a specific time (e.g., pickup time).

- **Switch / Toggle** - An on/off toggle switch. Best for simple yes/no choices like "Add gift wrap?" or "Include batteries?".

- **Range Slider** - A slider that customers drag to select a value within a range. Best for dimensions, intensity levels, or any numeric range.

- **File Upload** - Lets customers attach files. Best for custom artwork, photos for printing, or documents.

- **File Upload with a gallery** - A File Upload option can carry a gallery of images you uploaded in advance, so the customer either picks one of yours or uploads their own — and the two can be priced differently. Galleries require the Max plan. See the Image Galleries article.

## Display Only Options

These types don't collect customer input — they help organize and format your option form:

- **Heading** - Adds a section heading to visually separate groups of options.

- **Paragraph** - Adds descriptive text or instructions between options.

- **Divider** - Adds a horizontal line to visually separate sections.

- **Spacing** - Adds vertical space between options.

- **HTML Content** - Renders custom HTML content within the option form.

## Other

- **Hidden** - Not visible to customers but included in orders. Best for internal tracking, metadata, or values set by conditional logic.

## Choosing the Right Type

- **Number of choices** - Few options? Use radio buttons or buttons. Many options? Use dropdown.
- **Visual importance** - Need to show colors/patterns? Use swatches. Need image previews? Use image gallery or image dropdown.
- **Free-form input** - Customer provides text? Use text input types.
- **Validation needs** - Need specific formats? Use email, telephone, or number.
- **File requirements** - Customer uploads their own file? Use file upload. Customer picks from your images? Use image gallery.
- **Simple yes/no** - Use switch/toggle or checkbox.

---

# Product Collection Option

> Let customers pick a product (and variant) from a Shopify collection as an option

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/product-collection
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-07-13
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The Product Collection option type lets customers pick any product from a Shopify collection as a customization choice — without you having to maintain option values manually. The collection's products and variants are pulled automatically, so when you add or remove products from the collection, the option updates with the next sync. This is ideal for "pick a complementary product" or "build your own bundle" flows.

## When to use it

Use Product Collection instead of a regular Dropdown when:

- The list of choices is long enough that maintaining option values by hand is painful
- The choices are real Shopify products and you want to use their actual prices, inventory, and variants
- You want customers to see a product image and title for each choice instead of just text
- The selection should appear in the cart as a real product line item, not a custom property

## Setting it up

When creating or editing an option, choose **Product Collection** as the type. The values editor disappears and a single setting appears:

- **Source collection** - click **Select collection** and pick the Shopify collection whose products should populate the picker. The picker uses the standard Shopify resource picker.

- **Hide out-of-stock products** - when on, products whose variants are all unavailable are filtered out of the picker entirely. When off (default), unavailable products show grayed out and can't be selected.

That's it. There are no manual option values, no per-value images, and no pricing fields. Prices come from each variant directly.

## How it looks on the storefront

Customers see a styled dropdown showing each product's thumbnail and title. Clicking opens a scrollable list of all products in the collection. After picking a product:

- If the product has one variant, it's auto-selected and the variant dropdown is hidden
- If the product has multiple variants (size, color, panel count, etc.), a second native dropdown appears for variant selection — pre-filled with the first available variant. Customer can change it.

The selected variant is treated as a priced add-on, exactly like any other priced option.

## Cart behavior

When the customer adds to cart, the selected variant becomes a separate line item — same as a Dropdown option with a priced value. All other configuration options on the page apply as line-item properties.

If you've enabled **Merge into main product** on the option, the variant line item is bundled with the main product in cart via the Cart Transform Function, so customers see one merged line.

The variant's price, inventory, and tax behavior come from Shopify directly — there's no separate pricing setup in the app.

## How it stays in sync

Collection contents change automatically. The product list refreshes when:

- A product's price, title, image, or inventory changes (via the existing `products/update` webhook)
- The collection's product membership changes (via the `collections/update` webhook)

You don't need to manually re-save the option after changing products in the collection.

## Limitations

- The picker fetches up to 250 products at a time. Collections larger than that will only show the first 250 — consider splitting into smaller curated collections.
- Each product can have up to 100 variants in the picker.
- Conditional logic that triggers on this option treats the variant title as the value (e.g., "Hat – Small").

---

# Option Values & Pricing

> Set up choices and additional pricing

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/option-values
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-10
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Option values are the choices within selection-type options. Each value can have its own price, image, and linked product. Setting up values correctly ensures customers see the right choices and pricing.

## Adding Option Values

For dropdown, radio button, checkbox, and swatch options:

1. Create or edit an option
2. In the **Option Values** section, click **Add value**
3. Enter the value name (what customers see)
4. Repeat for all choices

Values appear in the order you add them. Drag to reorder if needed.

## Setting Prices

Every value has a **Price** field that is always editable. To charge extra for a value, simply type the amount:

1. In the **Pricing Settings** section, find the value
2. Type the add-on amount in the **Price** field (for example, 5.00)
3. Click **Save**

The app handles the rest automatically:

- **Add-on variant created for you** - The app creates a purchasable variant on a hidden, app-managed product called "Add-ons" and assigns it to the value. The variant is titled after your value (for example, "Gift Wrap (+$5.00)") and uses the value's image, so customers see a presentable line in cart, checkout, and on their order — never an internal product name.
- **Edits update in place** - Change the price later and the app updates that same variant's price and title. No duplicate variants accumulate over time.
- **Type 0 to remove a price** - Entering 0 clears the price and detaches the assigned variant from the value.

After saving, you stay on the option form and a confirmation toast appears. The price displays next to the value name on the storefront, and when a customer selects the value, the add-on is charged automatically at checkout.

**Note:** Pricing features require the Pro plan or higher.

## Using Your Own Products

Instead of typing a price, you can link a value to a product or variant that already exists in your catalog:

1. Click **Select price** for the value
2. Use the product picker to find and select a product
3. Choose the specific variant if applicable
4. The product's price and image are linked to the value

This is useful when the add-on is a real product you also sell on its own, or when you want the value's price to stay in sync with your catalog.

**Editing the price of a linked product:** If you type a new amount in the **Price** field of a value that uses one of your own variants, the app updates that variant's price in your Shopify catalog — the change applies everywhere that variant is sold. Before applying it, an inline warning shows how many other option values share the same variant. Click **Update** to confirm the change, or **Cancel** to keep the current price.

## Value Images

Any value can carry an image, not just swatches. Click the dashed image square on the value and pick a file from your computer. Square images work best; the storefront crops to a square and shows them at 75 pixels by default.

Where the image appears depends on the option:

- **Swatches and colour or image dropdowns** - the image *is* the choice, shown in the picker itself
- **Checkbox and radio lists** - one image per row, at the right-hand edge of the option
- **Buttons** - no image; a button is already the thing being chosen, so a picture on it turns a row of buttons into something else
- **Everything else** - a single image in a column beside the option, which swaps as the customer changes their selection

In every case the image sits on the same line down the page, so a product page with several options reads as one column of choices and one column of pictures rather than pictures scattered at different widths.

## Showing Value Images on the Storefront

**Show the value's image** in the **What customers see** section controls whether those images reach the storefront. It is **on by default** — most stores that upload an image want it seen — and the row only appears once at least one value on the option has an image, since there is nothing to decide before that.

Turn it off when the image is for your reference rather than the customer's, or when the picker already shows it and a second copy beside the option is redundant. An option whose selected value has no image shows nothing and gives the space back to the field, so leaving it on costs nothing.

On a **File Upload** option this setting is worded differently — *Show the image you added* — because it governs the picture you attached to the value, not the customer's file. Their upload always previews, whatever this is set to.

## Default Value Selection

Pre-select a value for customers:

1. Scroll to **Default Selection** in the option form
2. Choose which value should be pre-selected
3. Customers can still change their selection

Leave empty to require customers to make an active choice.

## Prices That Follow a Measurement

If a value charges through one of your own products, and that product is priced per unit in Shopify, the option says so too. A value linked to acrylic sold at $27 per square metre shows **+$27.00/m²** on the storefront rather than a bare **+$27.00** — in the option, in the cart and everywhere else the price appears.

Nothing to set up here: it comes from the unit price fields on the variant, so it is yours to change in Shopify and it disappears from the option if you turn it off there. This is the same information EU, UK and German price-indication rules require you to show on goods sold by weight, volume, length or area.

## Hiding Prices

If you don't want customers to see additional charges:

1. In **Pricing Settings**, enable **Hide Prices from Customers**
2. Prices still apply at checkout, but aren't displayed on product pages

This is useful for psychological pricing or when price differences might discourage selection.

---

# Quantity Settings

> Control how option quantities work

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/quantity-settings
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-03-19
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Add-ons are charged for every item ordered. A $10 product with a $5 add-on costs $15 each, so a shopper who buys 2 pays $30. The product page, the cart and checkout always show the same total.

## Quantity Settings

By default an add-on goes with each item and no extra field is shown. Turn on **Enable quantity** on an option to change how many of the add-on go with each item:

- **Customer chooses how many** - A quantity picker appears with the option. A shopper who picks 3 gets 3 of the add-on with each item, so 2 items with 3 add-ons each is 6 add-ons.

- **Match the product's quantity** - One add-on per item, with no field shown. This is the same as leaving quantity off.

- **A fixed number** - The same number of add-ons with each item, for example 4 buttons per shirt. No field is shown.

## Splitting the Quantity Across Options

With **Customer chooses how many**, you can turn on **Counts toward the product quantity**. The pickers on those options then share out the order rather than multiplying it: 150 black and 100 red for an order of 250. Add to cart waits until they add up, and each add-on is charged for the number picked.

## Configuring Quantity

1. Edit an option
2. Find the **Quantity** card
3. Turn on **Enable quantity** and choose a mode
4. For a fixed number, enter it
5. Save the option

**Note:** Quantity settings and prices on options require the Pro plan or higher.

## Show the Picker on Values That Cost Nothing

With **Match the product's quantity** or **A fixed number**, you can choose whether the quantity picker shows on values that cost nothing. This is useful when you need the quantity for fulfillment even without a charge.

---

# Conditional Logic

> Show or hide options based on other selections

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/conditional-logic
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-03-19
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Conditional logic shows or hides options based on other selections. Create dynamic forms that adapt to customer choices — showing relevant options while hiding irrelevant ones for a cleaner, more intuitive experience.

## What is Conditional Display

Conditional display lets you set rules like:

- Show "Engraving Text" only when "Add Engraving" is checked
- Show "Gift Message" only when "Gift Wrap" is selected
- Show specific size options only for certain colors
- Show a date picker only when "Schedule Delivery" is toggled on

This keeps your forms focused and avoids overwhelming customers with irrelevant fields.

## Setting Up Conditions

1. Edit the option you want to conditionally show or hide
2. Scroll to **Conditional Display** and toggle **Add Conditions**
3. Click **Add Condition**
4. Select which option the condition depends on
5. Choose the operator
6. Enter or select the value to match (if applicable)
7. Set the **Visibility Action** — whether conditions should show or hide the option
8. Save

## Condition Types

Conditions can be based on two sources:

- **Other Option** - Trigger based on what a customer selects in another option within the same group
- **Shopify Variant** - Trigger based on the selected Shopify product variant (e.g., show different options depending on the Size or Color variant)

## Condition Operators

- **Is equal to** - Matches when the other option's value exactly equals your specified value
- **Is not equal to** - Matches when the value does NOT equal your specified value
- **Is filled** - Matches when the customer has entered any value (not empty)
- **Is empty** - Matches when no value has been entered
- **Is checked** - Matches when a checkbox or toggle is turned on
- **Is unchecked** - Matches when a checkbox or toggle is turned off
- **Is in list** - Matches when the value is one of several comma-separated values

## Visibility Action

Choose what happens when conditions are met:

- **Show when conditions are met** - The option starts hidden and appears only when the condition is satisfied
- **Hide when conditions are met** - The option starts visible and disappears when the condition is satisfied

## Multiple Conditions

Add multiple conditions and choose how they combine:

- **All conditions must be met (AND)** - Every condition must be true for the action to trigger
- **At least one condition must be met (OR)** - Any single condition being true triggers the action

## Example Workflows

**Engraving Options:**
1. Switch: "Add Engraving?"
2. Text Input: "Engraving Text" — shows when "Add Engraving" is checked
3. Dropdown: "Font Style" — shows when "Add Engraving" is checked

**Gift Services:**
1. Checkbox: "This is a gift"
2. Dropdown: "Gift Wrap Style" — shows when "This is a gift" is checked
3. Paragraph Text: "Gift Message" — shows when "This is a gift" is checked

**Variant-Based Options:**
1. When Shopify variant "Size" equals "Custom" → show "Custom Width" and "Custom Height" number fields

## Preview

The option group preview in the sidebar reflects conditional logic in real time. When you interact with options in the preview, dependent options appear and disappear just as they would on your storefront.

## Plan Requirements

Conditional logic is included on every plan, Free included.

---

# Cart & Checkout Display

> Configure how options appear in cart and checkout

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/cart-checkout-display
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-03-19
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Cart and checkout display settings control how customer selections appear after they add to cart. By default, all option selections are shown as line item properties in cart and checkout. You can customize this behavior per option.

## How It Works

By default, when a customer selects an option value (e.g., picks "Red" for a Color option), that selection appears in the cart and checkout as a line item property like "Color: Red". This helps customers verify their choices and helps your team fulfill orders accurately.

The selection appears in:
- Shopping cart
- Checkout page
- Order confirmation email
- Order details in Shopify admin

## Hiding Selections from Cart & Checkout

If you don't want a particular option's value to appear in cart and checkout:

1. Edit the option
2. Open **Cart & Checkout** and toggle **Customize**
3. Check **Hide in cart & checkout**
4. Save the option

This is useful for options that are purely visual (like dividers or headings) or for internal-use options where the selected value isn't meaningful to the customer.

## Custom Display Labels

Change how option names appear in cart and checkout:

1. Edit an option
2. Open **Cart & Checkout** and toggle **Customize**
3. Enter a label in **Cart/checkout label**
4. Leave empty to use the option name

Examples:
- Option name "engraving_text" → Cart label "Engraving"
- Option name "wrap_style" → Cart label "Gift Wrap"

This creates cleaner, customer-friendly display without changing your internal naming.

## Merge to Product

For priced options, choose whether they appear as separate line items or merge into the main product:

- **Enabled (default, recommended)** - Priced options merge into the main product. Customers see one line with the combined price and the choices they made, and can't remove a paid add-on on its own. Removing the line removes the product and its add-ons together.

- **Disabled** - Priced options appear as separate cart lines. Customers see the main product plus each add-on with its own price. With the checkout rule on (see below), a customer who removes the product but leaves its add-on is asked to remove the add-on before paying.

Merging is done by the app's cart transform, which the app switches on for your store by itself when you open it. To change it for an option, edit the option and use **Keep add-ons on the product's cart line** in the Display section. It's available on every plan.

## Checkout Rule for Required Options

Required options are checked on the product page. A customer can still skip them by adding the product another way, for example a quick add button on a collection page or an add-to-cart link. The checkout rule closes that gap: at checkout, it stops the order and asks the customer to choose the options on the product's page.

It applies to products you assigned to an option set yourself, when every option set on that product has a required option that's always shown. It also stops checkout when a paid add-on is left in the cart without its product.

To turn it on, go to **Settings > Checkout** in Shopify, find **Checkout rules**, add **Product Options required choices** and turn it on. The **Extensions** page in the app links there.

## Plan Requirements

Hiding options and renaming them for the cart and checkout needs the Max plan. Merging add-ons into the product line and the checkout rule are on every plan.

---

# Image Galleries

> Let customers choose from pre-uploaded images

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/file-galleries
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-10
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Image galleries let customers choose from images you've uploaded in advance. Instead of asking customers to upload their own files, you provide a curated set of images they can browse and select — perfect for clip art, monogram styles, design templates, or pattern selections.

## How Image Galleries Work

A gallery is a collection of images you manage in the app. You attach one to a **File Upload** option, and the shopper gets two buttons side by side: one to pick from your gallery, one to upload a file of their own. You can price the two differently — a gallery design included, their own artwork for a setup fee, for instance.

So a gallery isn't a separate option type. It's a setting on a File Upload option, which is what lets a shopper choose *your* image or *their* image in the same field.

## Managing Galleries

Galleries are managed from **Settings > Galleries**:

1. Go to **Settings** in the app sidebar
2. Click **Galleries**
3. Click **Create Gallery** and give it a name
4. Upload images by dragging or clicking to select
5. Optionally add tags to images for filtering

You can add, remove, or replace images at any time. Changes are reflected immediately on your storefront.

## Organizing with Tags

Add tags to gallery images for filtering:

- Click an image in the gallery
- Add one or more tags (e.g., "sports", "floral", "holiday")
- When attaching a gallery to an option, enter tags in the **Filter by Tags** field to show only matching images

This lets you reuse one large gallery across multiple options, showing only the relevant images for each.

## Attaching a Gallery to an Option

1. Create or edit an option and choose **File Upload** as the type
2. In the **File gallery** card, turn **Enable** on
3. Select the gallery to use
4. Optionally enter tags to show only part of it
5. Choose whether gallery picks should add cost
6. Save the option

On the product page the shopper sees your gallery button beside the upload button, and the picture they choose carries through to the cart and the order.

## Gallery Pricing

- **With pricing** - a gallery pick can add to the price, like any other option
- **No additional price** - check "No Additional Price for Gallery Images" so picking from your gallery is free even when uploading their own file is not. This is the usual setup: your designs included, their artwork charged.

## Plan Requirements

Image galleries require the Max plan.

---

# Product Targeting

> Control which products show your options

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/product-targeting
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-09
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Product targeting controls which products display your option groups. Apply options to your entire catalog or select specific products—giving you flexibility in how customization is offered across your store.

## Application Scope

When creating or editing an option group, choose a scope under **Apply to**:

- **Specific products** - Only products you select show these options
- **Products not in other groups** - A default group that applies to any product not covered by another option group
- **All products** - Every product in your store shows these options
- **Products in a collection** - Products in a Shopify collection you choose
- **Products with a tag** - Products carrying a tag you enter
- **Products of a type** - Products matching a product type you enter
- **Products by vendor** - Products from a vendor you enter

## Apply to All Products

Use this when options should appear universally:

- Gift wrapping available on everything
- Rush shipping for all orders
- Terms acceptance checkbox

All products automatically include the group's options. New products added to your store will also show these options.

## Specific Product Selection

Use this when options only apply to certain products:

- Engraving on jewelry only
- Custom sizing on furniture
- Personalization on gifts

You manually select which products receive the options.

## Targeting by Collection, Tag, Type, or Vendor

Instead of picking products one by one, target them by an attribute they already share:

- **Products in a collection** - Click **Select collection** and pick a collection with the collection picker. Every product in that collection shows the group's options.
- **Products with a tag** - Enter a tag in the **Tag** field. Any product carrying that tag matches.
- **Products of a type** - Enter a product type in the **Product type** field.
- **Products by vendor** - Enter a vendor name in the **Vendor** field.

Matching happens live on the storefront against the product being viewed, and it's case-insensitive — "Gifts" matches "gifts". If you add a tag to a product, change its type or vendor, or add it to the targeted collection, it starts showing the options immediately. No re-sync is needed, and removing the attribute stops the options just as quickly.

The option groups list shows the chosen criterion in the scope column (for example, the collection name or the tag), so you can see each group's targeting at a glance. When you export option groups, the targeting settings are included, and importing restores them.

## Using the Product Picker

For specific product targeting:

1. Open the option group
2. Click the **Products** link (or the product count)
3. Click **Add Products**
4. Search or browse to find products
5. Select products to add
6. Click **Add** to confirm

Products immediately start showing the group's options.

## Removing Products

To remove a product from an option group:

1. Open the option group's products list
2. Find the product to remove
3. Click the remove icon
4. Confirm removal

The product no longer shows those options.

## Best Practices

- **Start specific, expand later** - It's easier to add products than remove them. Start with specific targeting and expand if needed.

- **Use collections, tags, types, or vendors** - If your catalog is already organized in Shopify, target by that attribute instead of picking products manually. New products that match are covered automatically.

- **Combine groups** - A product can belong to multiple option groups. A jewelry item might have both "Engraving" and "Gift Services" groups.

---

# Translations

> Customize text and support multiple languages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/translations
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-10
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every store has its own voice. Whether you're localizing for international customers or simply prefer different terminology, translations let you customize every text string to match your brand and audience.

## Accessing Translations

1. Go to **Settings** in the app
2. Click **Translations**
3. Select your language from the dropdown
4. Edit any text strings
5. Click **Save**

Changes apply immediately to your storefront.

## Supported Languages

Product Options includes translations for:

- English (default)
- Spanish
- French
- German
- Italian
- Portuguese
- Dutch
- Japanese
- Korean
- Chinese (Simplified & Traditional)
- And many more...

Your store's primary language is detected automatically from Shopify settings.

## Custom Text Overrides

Even without multiple languages, you can customize text:

1. Select your primary language in translations
2. Find the string you want to change
3. Enter your custom text
4. Save

Examples:
- Change "Required" to "Must fill in"
- Change "Select an option" to "Choose one"
- Change "Add to Cart" to "Buy Now"

## Common Strings to Customize

- **Form labels** - "Required", "Optional"
- **Validation messages** - "Please select an option", "This field is required"
- **Button text** - Any add-to-cart or action button labels
- **Placeholder text** - Default text shown in empty fields

## Multi-Language Stores

For stores serving multiple regions:

1. Add each language in Shopify's language settings
2. Customize translations for each language in the app
3. Customers see translations based on their language selection

The app respects Shopify's language detection and serves the appropriate translations.

---

# Custom CSS

> Style option elements with CSS

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/custom-css
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-09
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Product Options inherits your theme's fonts and colours automatically, and its own look is driven by the block's settings. When you need more than those settings offer, CSS gives you the rest.

## Where to Put Your CSS

Shopify's theme editor has a **Custom CSS** box on every section, and one for the theme as a whole. Open the theme editor, select the section holding the Product Options block — or the theme, under **Theme settings** — and paste your rules there. They apply to the storefront without touching theme code, and they survive theme updates.

Anything you write there is scoped by Shopify to that section, so the selectors below are all you need.

## Settings First

Most of what merchants reach for CSS to change is a block setting, and a setting survives an app update where a selector may not. In the theme editor, click the Product Options block and you will find **Field background**, **Field hover background**, **Field max width**, **Field border width**, **Field border colour**, **Field corner radius**, **Dropdown chevron size** and **Value image size**. Those drive the app's own styling — the CSS below is for what they don't cover.

## Common Styling Examples

**Change label colour:**
```css
.product-options-wrapper .form__label {
  color: #333333;
  font-weight: bold;
}
```

**Style the dropdown:**
```css
select.product-option {
  border: 2px solid #000000;
  border-radius: 8px;
}
```

**Change the value image size:**
```css
.product-options-wrapper {
  --po-image-size: 100px;
}
```

**Change the spacing between an option's parts:**
```css
.product-options-wrapper {
  --po-gap: 14px;
}
```

**Style the help text under an option:**
```css
.product-options-inner-wrapper .description {
  font-size: 13px;
  opacity: 1;
}
```

## CSS Variables

These are the supported way to restyle the block, and are what the block settings themselves set. Declare them on `.product-options-wrapper` and everything inside picks them up:

- `--po-image-size` - How big value images are (default 75px)
- `--po-gap` - The spacing step used between an option's parts and between the rows of a list (default 10px)
- `--field-max-width` - How wide a field is allowed to get (default 360px)
- `--field-height` - Minimum field height, shared by inputs, dropdowns and the quantity stepper (default 45px)
- `--field-bg` / `--field-hover-bg` - Field background, at rest and on hover
- `--field-border-width` / `--field-border-color` / `--field-border-radius` - The field border
- `--field-chevron-size` - The dropdown caret

## CSS Class Reference

**Containers:**
- `.product-options-wrapper` - The whole block; where the variables above are declared
- `.product-options-inner-wrapper` - One option
- `.po-option-content` - Everything the customer reads and acts on within an option
- `.po-option-control` - An option's label and its field
- `.po-option-media` - The image column beside an option
- `.po-option-qty` - The quantity picker beside a field

**Fields:**
- `.product-option` - On every option's field or field wrapper, whatever the type
- `select.product-option` - Dropdowns
- `.field__input.normalized` - Text, email, phone, number and date inputs
- `.product-option .checkbox` / `.checkbox-item` - Checkbox lists and their rows
- `.product-option.radio-buttons` - Radio lists
- `.button-option` - Button tiles
- `.product-option__pick-file-btn` / `.product-option__pick-upload-btn` - The gallery and upload buttons

**Values:**
- `.po-value-main` - A row's checkbox or radio and its label
- `.po-value-media` - A row's image cell
- `.po-value-image` - The image itself
- `.po-value-description` - Per-choice description text

**Accordion layout:**
- `.accordion-item` - One collapsible option
- `.accordion-button` - The header; gains `.active` when open, `.completed` when confirmed, `.skipped` when skipped
- `.selected-value` - The chosen value shown in the header
- `.accordion-content` - The panel

## Theme-Specific Adjustments

The app already declines your theme's field decoration — Dawn and its descendants draw a border on the `.field` and `.select` wrappers, which would sit outside the app's own border — so a double outline is not something you need CSS for.

For anything else, inspect the element in your browser and target the classes above. They are stable; if you find yourself needing a selector that isn't listed here, tell support rather than relying on one you found by inspection.

---

# Orders & CSV Export

> Review orders with customizations and export them to a spreadsheet

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/orders-export
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-09
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every order that includes a product customization is collected in one place so you can see exactly what each customer asked for — and export it all to a spreadsheet. This is especially useful for production and fulfillment, where you need each option value broken out into its own column rather than buried in a line-item note.

## The Orders Page

Open **Orders** from the app navigation. Only orders that contain product option customizations appear here — plain orders without options are left out to keep the list focused. An order appears as soon as it's placed, including orders waiting for a manual payment capture. Revenue figures count it once it's paid.

## Choices on Shopify's Order Page

You can also see each item's choices without leaving Shopify's own order page. Open any order, select the apps icon above the order's cards and pin **Product options**. The card lists what the customer chose on every item, and uploaded files open from their links. It shows on every order from then on.

For each order you'll see:

- **Order** - The Shopify order number, linked to its details
- **Customer** - Who placed the order
- **Customizations** - How many option values were captured on that order
- **Date** - When the order was placed
- **Total** - Order value for the customized items

Use the search box to find an order by number or by a customization value.

## Exporting to CSV

The Orders page has an **Export** action in the top bar. It opens a dedicated export page that shows how many orders and line items are included, then a **Download CSV** button starts the download.

The file downloads directly to your computer, ready to open in Excel, Google Sheets, or Numbers.

## What's in the File

The export uses a **one row per ordered item** layout, which is what makes it useful for production sheets:

- Each customized product in each order becomes its own row
- Standard columns come first: order number, date, customer, shipping address, product, variant, SKU, quantity, and item price
- **Every option becomes its own column** - the option name is the column header and the customer's choice is the value

So if a customer ordered an engraved bracelet, you'll see the engraving text, font, and any other options each in their own column, right next to the product and shipping details.

## Shipping Address Columns

The export includes the shipping address for each order, split into separate columns for easy sorting and mail-merge:

- **Ship name**, **Address 1**, **Address 2**, **City**, **Province**, **Zip**, **Country**, **Phone**

Because address is order-level, every line-item row from the same order repeats that order's address. Orders placed before address capture was added may have blank address fields; new orders always include it.

## Why Not Just Use Shopify's Export

Shopify's built-in order export keeps line-item customizations as a single combined properties field, which is hard to read and impossible to sort or filter by a specific option. This export breaks each option out into its own column, so you can filter by font, sort by size, or hand a clean production sheet to your team.

## Common Uses

- **Production sheets** - Give your workshop a clear list of what to make, with every customization spelled out
- **Fulfillment** - Pack and ship with the shipping address and options side by side
- **Backups and analysis** - Keep a snapshot of customization data or analyze which options sell

---

# Shopify Flow

> Automate work on orders with customizations and uploads

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/shopify-flow
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Integrations
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Shopify Flow runs work for you when something happens in your store. Product Options gives Flow two triggers and one action, so orders with customizations can be tagged, routed to your production team or approved without opening the app.

## Triggers

- **Order with product options** - Starts when a paid order includes at least one customization. It gives the workflow the order itself, plus the order name, the customer's email, how many customizations were chosen and the value of the customized items.
- **Order has uploads** - Starts when a paid order includes files the customer uploaded, such as artwork or a photo. It gives the workflow the order, the number of files and a link to each one.

Each trigger runs once per order, when the order is paid. Orders placed with a manual payment capture start the workflow when you capture the payment.

## Tagging Orders

Both triggers hand the workflow the order, so Flow's own actions work on it. For example, to tag every order that has artwork:

1. In Shopify Flow, create a workflow and choose the **Order has uploads** trigger
2. Add the **Add order tags** action and enter a tag such as `artwork`
3. Turn the workflow on

You can use the same order in conditions (for example, only orders shipping to one country) and in other actions, such as sending an internal email with the file links.

## Approving Customizations

The **Approve product option customizations** action marks every customized item on an order as approved in Product Options, the same as approving each item on the app's order page. Use it at the end of a workflow, for example once a proof has been checked elsewhere.

## Plan Requirements

The triggers and the action work on every plan.

---

# Theme Integration

> Manual integration for custom themes

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/theme-integration
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: For Developers
Last updated: 2026-08-09
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

For most stores, the theme setup wizard handles everything. This guide is for developers building custom themes or needing manual control over option placement and behavior.

## App Embed vs App Block

Product Options uses two integration methods:

- **App Embed** - A global script that loads on every page. Handles form submission, validation, and cart integration. Enable in: Theme Editor > App embeds > Product Options

- **App Block** - Placed on product pages to render the options form. Add in: Theme Editor > Add block > Apps > Product Options

Both must be enabled for full functionality.

## Manual Block Placement

For custom product templates:

1. Open your theme code
2. Navigate to the product template (e.g., `sections/main-product.liquid`)
3. Ensure the template supports app blocks in the product form area
4. The block will be available for placement via the theme editor

For vintage themes without app block support, contact support for manual integration code.

## Block Settings

Click the placed block in the theme editor to configure it.

**Layout**

- **Form Elements** - every option rendered one after another, the way a normal form reads
- **Accordion Collapsible** - each option is a collapsible row showing the chosen value in its header, with **Add to Product** and **Skip** buttons in the panel. Skipping clears whatever was entered in that option, so a skipped option carries no value and no charge.

**Value image size** - how big value images are, from 40 to 240 pixels. Everything else positions itself from this, so images stay aligned whatever you choose.

**Title and Description** - optional text above the options.

**Colours** - accent (used for the selected state), border, card background, and the completed and skipped colours for accordion rows.

**Form Fields** - background, hover background, max width, border width, border colour, corner radius and dropdown chevron size. These apply to every field type at once: native dropdowns, text inputs, the colour and image dropdowns, the quantity picker, and the file-upload buttons.

**Button Text** - the wording of the accordion's Add and Skip buttons, and the title of the additional-options group.

**Layout & Spacing** - block border width, the gap below each option, and padding around the block.

**After Adding to Cart** - stay on the page, go to the cart, or go straight to checkout.

## Form Integration

Product Options integrates with the product form automatically. When customers submit the form:

1. Options are validated (required fields checked)
2. Selections are added to cart as line item properties
3. Priced options add additional line items or modify the product price

The app handles this integration through the app embed script.

## Customizing Option Display

For advanced styling beyond Custom CSS:

1. Identify the option's HTML structure using browser dev tools
2. Target elements with your theme's CSS
3. Use the CSS class reference from the Custom CSS article

Remember that the app generates HTML dynamically—avoid overly specific selectors that might break with updates.

## Cart and Checkout

Selected options appear in cart and checkout as line item properties. The property format is:

```
property_name: selected_value
```

Your theme's cart template should display line item properties. Most modern themes do this automatically. If not, add to your cart template:

```liquid
{% for property in item.properties %}
  {% unless property.last == blank %}
    <p>{{ property.first }}: {{ property.last }}</p>
  {% endunless %}
{% endfor %}
```

---

# Options Not Showing

> Fix invisible product options

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/options-not-showing
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-09
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If your product options aren't appearing on product pages, don't worry—it's usually a quick fix. Most issues come down to the app embed being disabled, the block not being added, or products not being assigned to an option group.

## Check the App Embed

The most common cause is the app embed being disabled:

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes**
2. Click **Customize** on your active theme
3. Click **App embeds** in the left sidebar
4. Look for **Product Options**
5. Make sure the toggle is **ON**
6. Click **Save**

If Product Options doesn't appear in app embeds, try reinstalling the app.

## Verify Block Placement

Even with the embed enabled, you need the app block on product pages:

1. In theme editor, select **Products > Default product** from the page dropdown
2. Look for the **Product Options** block in the product section
3. If missing, click **Add block > Apps > Product Options**
4. Position it where you want options to appear, above **Add to cart**. On Dawn and some other themes the setup button adds it at the bottom of the product section, below Add to cart and Share: drag it up above the buy buttons
5. Click **Save**

## Check Product Targeting

Options only appear on products assigned to an option group:

1. Open your option group in the app
2. Check the application scope:
   - If "All products" — options should appear everywhere
   - If "Specific products" — verify the product is in the list
   - If targeting a collection, tag, product type, or vendor — verify the product actually has that attribute (matching is case-insensitive, but the value must otherwise match, e.g. "t-shirt" won't match a "tshirt" type)
3. Add the product (or the matching tag/type/vendor/collection membership) if it's missing

## Verify Options Exist

An empty option group won't display anything:

1. Open the option group
2. Confirm it has at least one option
3. Check that options aren't all set to "Hidden" type
4. Ensure no conditions are hiding all options

## Theme Compatibility

Some themes may need adjustments:

- **Outdated themes** - May not support app blocks. Update to the latest version.
- **Custom themes** - Verify the theme uses Online Store 2.0 features and includes app block zones in product templates.
- **Third-party themes** - Check theme documentation for app compatibility.

## Cache Clearing

Browser or CDN cache can show old versions:

- **Browser cache** - Press Ctrl+Shift+R (Windows) or Cmd+Shift+R (Mac)
- **Shopify cache** - Make a small edit in theme code, save, then revert
- **CDN cache** - Purge cache in your CDN dashboard if using one

## Still Not Working?

If options still don't show:

1. Check browser console for JavaScript errors
2. Disable other apps temporarily to test for conflicts
3. Try a different browser or incognito mode
4. Contact our support with your store URL

---

# Pricing Issues

> Fix option pricing problems

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/pricing-issues
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-09
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If option prices aren't displaying correctly or calculations seem wrong, there are several things to check. Most pricing issues relate to plan requirements, configuration, or how prices are attached to values.

## Prices Not Appearing

If prices don't show next to option values:

1. **Check your plan** - Pricing features require the Pro plan or higher. Free plan users see options but cannot add prices.

2. **Verify prices are set** - Edit the option and check that each value's **Price** field is filled in under **Pricing Settings**. A price of 0 means no charge — entering 0 clears the price and detaches any assigned variant.

3. **Check "Hide Prices" setting** - If enabled, prices won't display to customers (but still apply at checkout).

4. **Confirm option type** - Single-value types like text input don't show prices the same way as dropdown or swatches.

## Incorrect Price Calculations

If the total seems wrong:

1. **Add-ons count per item** - An add-on is charged for every item ordered. A $10 product with a $5 add-on costs $15 each, so 2 of them cost $30. The product page, the cart and checkout all show the same total.

2. **Review attached products** - If a value is linked to one of your own products, it charges that variant's current catalog price — check the product in your Shopify admin. Values where you typed a price use an app-managed add-on variant that always matches the amount you entered.

3. **Multiple priced options** - Prices are additive. If selecting multiple options with prices, all are added together.

## "Something Went Wrong" When Adding a Priced Choice

Prices you type on a value are charged through a hidden **Add-ons** product the app creates in your store. It has to be on the Online Store sales channel, or the cart refuses it. The app publishes it by itself and checks again each time you save an option, so saving any option fixes it. If it still happens, open **Products**, find **Add-ons** (product type Pasilobus Product Options), and include it in the **Online Store** sales channel. Keep its status Unlisted so it stays out of your collections and search.

## Prices Not Applying at Checkout

If prices show on the product page but don't apply:

1. **Verify the selection** - Ensure the customer actually selected the priced option, not just viewed it.

2. **Check merge settings** - If "Merge to Product" is enabled, the price adds to the main product rather than appearing as a separate line.

3. **Conditional options** - If the priced option uses conditional display, ensure conditions were met when added to cart.

## Currency Display Issues

If prices show in the wrong format:

1. **Check Shopify currency settings** - The app uses your store's currency configuration.

2. **Multi-currency stores** - Prices convert based on Shopify's currency conversion rates.

## Plan Upgrade

If pricing features aren't working, you may need to upgrade:

1. Go to **Plans** in the app
2. Select Pro or higher
3. Pricing features activate immediately after upgrade

---

# Styling Issues

> Fix appearance problems

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/styling-issues
App: Product Options (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Options")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-options-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-10
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If Product Options doesn't look right on your store — wrong colours, sizes, or alignment — start with the block's own settings. Most of what looks wrong is something the app is meant to control for you.

## Start With the Block Settings

Open the theme editor and click the Product Options block. Under **Form Fields** you can set the field background, hover background, max width, border width, border colour, corner radius and dropdown chevron size; **Value image size** sets how big value images are. These drive every field type at once — a dropdown, a text input, the quantity picker and the file-upload buttons all follow them, so you get one consistent look without writing a line of CSS.

## Double Borders

You should not see two outlines around a field. Dawn and themes built from it draw a field's border on the wrapper, outside the app's own border, and the app suppresses that automatically for both fields and dropdowns.

If you still see a doubled outline, the second one is coming from somewhere else — a theme customisation or another app. Inspect the field in your browser, find which rule draws the outer line, and override it in the theme editor's **Custom CSS**.

## Options Look Too Wide or Too Narrow

Every field is capped at **Field max width** (360px by default) so a row of options shares one right edge rather than stretching to whatever the theme's container happens to be. Raise or lower that setting rather than setting widths in CSS — value images and the quantity picker are positioned from it, so changing it in one place keeps them aligned.

## Value Images Look Wrong

- **Different sizes** - the app crops every value image to a square at the **Value image size** setting. Upload square images so nothing important is cropped out.
- **Images not appearing** - check **Show the value's image** on the option, under *What customers see*. It only appears once a value has an image.
- **Images in different places down the page** - this is what the app aligns for you: a picture beside an option and a picture on a checkbox row land on the same line. If yours don't, your theme is likely constraining the block's width; check the section's own width settings first.

## Swatches

- **Blank squares** - a swatch value with neither a colour nor an image shows its name in a tile instead. If you wanted a picture there, add one to the value.
- **Colour swatches** - the value itself must be a hex code, including the `#` (for example `#FF0000`).
- **Selected state** - the chosen swatch is outlined in the block's **Accent colour**.

## Fonts Don't Match

Options inherit your theme's font. If they don't, your theme is probably setting a font on its own field classes that the app's fields don't carry:

```css
.product-options-wrapper .form__label,
.product-options-wrapper .product-option {
  font-family: inherit;
}
```

## Mobile Display

An option and its quantity picker sit side by side on a desktop and stack on a phone, below 600px wide. If something overflows on mobile, check that the theme's container isn't forcing a width on the block, and that **Field max width** isn't larger than the space available.

## Still Wrong

Inspect the element in your browser to see which stylesheet wins. The app's classes are listed in the Custom CSS article; write your override in the theme editor's **Custom CSS** box on the section holding the block, so it survives theme and app updates.

---

# Installing and setting up

> Add the app to your store and place review widgets on your theme

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/installation
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Getting reviews live takes three steps: install the app, add the review widget to your theme, and confirm the storefront. Most stores are collecting reviews within a few minutes — no theme code edits required.

## Install the app

Add the app from the Shopify App Store. It opens inside your Shopify admin alongside your other apps. The first time you open it, a setup wizard walks you through enabling the app embed and adding the widget.

## Enable the app embed

The app embed loads the small JavaScript and CSS needed by every widget. For stars under product cards on collection and search pages, add the **Product card stars** block to your collection template, or turn on your theme's own **Show product rating** setting. Use one of the two. See [Star ratings on collection and search pages](stars-on-product-cards).

- Click **Set up theme** in the setup wizard, or go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**
- In the theme editor, open **App embeds** in the left sidebar
- Toggle **Product Reviews** on and **Save**

## Add the review widget to product pages

- Open a **Product** template in the theme editor
- Click **Add block** in the product section and choose **Product Reviews** from the Apps list
- Drag it to where reviews should appear (typically below the product description)
- **Save**

You only need to do this once — the widget appears on every product.

## Add the star rating badge (optional)

For a compact star badge near the Add to Cart button:

- In the same product template, click **Add block** and choose **Star Rating Badge**
- Place it where it fits — often right under the product title or price
- **Save**

## Confirm it's working

Visit any product on your storefront. You should see the **Customer Reviews** section with an empty state ("Be the first to review this product") and a **Write a review** button. If you don't see it, open Troubleshooting → "The review widget isn't appearing on the product page."

---

# How reviews work

> Verified purchases, moderation, and where reviews show up

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/how-reviews-work
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Reviews collected by this app are stored on your Shopify store as native review records, so they survive even if you uninstall and reinstall. Each review has a status, a star rating, optional title and body, and optional photos. The app handles where they show, when they're published, and how customers are asked to submit them.

## Verified purchase vs. unverified

A review is **verified** when the email used to submit it matches an order on your store. Two paths get there:

- **Email request flow** — the customer clicks the secure link in the post-purchase email. The review is automatically tied to their order and marked verified.
- **Storefront form** — anyone can submit a review on a product page. If the email they enter matches an existing order, it's marked verified. Otherwise it shows without the badge.

The **Verified** badge appears next to the reviewer's name in the widget. It's one of the strongest social proof signals you can show shoppers.

## The moderation queue

Every submitted review starts as **pending** in your admin. You can:

- **Approve** — moves it to approved and publishes it to the storefront
- **Reject** — keeps it private and hidden
- **Edit** — fix typos or remove personal info before publishing
- **Reply** — write a public response that shows under the review

Turn on **Auto-publish** in settings if you want reviews above a certain rating to skip the queue.

## Where reviews show up

Reviews show in these places once approved and published:

- **Product page widget** — the full list, summary stars, rating breakdown
- **Star rating badge** — compact stars near the Add to Cart button
- **Stars on product cards** — on collection, search, and home pages, shown by your theme's product rating setting from the ratings the app keeps in sync in Shopify
- **Review carousel** — recent reviews on the homepage or any page (if you added the block)
- **Google search results** — star ratings show via SEO structured data

---

# The product reviews widget

> The main widget on product pages — review list, summary, and submission form

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/review-widget
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Storefront Widgets
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The product reviews widget is the main block you add to product pages. It shows every approved review for that product, the average rating, a star breakdown, and a form for shoppers to submit their own review. It's the workhorse of the app — the one widget most stores need.

## What customers see

The widget renders as a clean, bordered card with:

- **Heading + summary** at the top — the average rating, total count, and a **Write a review** button
- **Rating breakdown bars** showing how many reviews fell at each star (5★ through 1★)
- **Review list** with photos, author name, verified-purchase badge, date, and your reply (if any)
- **Pagination** at the bottom when there's more than a page of reviews
- **Empty state** when no reviews exist yet, with a CTA to be the first to review

The widget hides the submission form by default — shoppers click **Write a review** to expand it. This matches the pattern customers expect from major review apps.

## Adding the widget

In the theme editor:

- Open a **Product** template
- Click **Add block** in the product section
- Choose **Product Reviews** from the Apps list
- Drag it to the right spot (typically below the description, above related products)
- **Save**

## Photos in the list

If reviewers upload photos with their review, the photos show as small thumbnails under the review text. Click any thumbnail to open a full-size lightbox.

## SEO structured data

The widget can output JSON-LD structured data so Google can show your star ratings in search results. Leave **Include SEO structured data** on (default) unless you have another app doing the same — duplicate markup confuses search engines.

## Settings

All settings live in the theme editor on the block itself: heading text, reviews per page, default sort, whether to show the form, the rating breakdown, photos, and structured data. See [Customizing the widget appearance](customizing-appearance) for color and spacing options.

---

# Star rating badge

> Small star badge for product pages, typically near the title or Add to Cart

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/star-rating-badge
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Storefront Widgets
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The star rating badge is a small, compact star display you can add anywhere on the product page — most commonly right under the product title or next to the price. It's lighter than the full reviews widget and works well as a "tap to scroll to reviews" link.

## When to use the badge vs. the full widget

Use both together — they serve different jobs:

- **Star rating badge** — a quick visual signal at the top of the page, where shoppers first land. Shows the rating and total count, nothing else.
- **Product reviews widget** — the full list and form, lower on the page where shoppers go to dig in.

If the product has no reviews yet, the badge hides itself automatically so the page doesn't show empty stars.

## Adding the badge

- Open a **Product** template in the theme editor
- Click **Add block** in the product section and choose **Star Rating Badge** from the Apps list
- Drag it just under the title, next to the price, or wherever it fits your design
- **Save**

## How the rating is calculated

The badge reads from the **reviews.rating** and **reviews.rating_count** standard metafields on the product. The app maintains these automatically every time a review is approved, edited, unpublished, or deleted. The number you see matches the average of every approved, published review for that product.

## Settings

In the theme editor, you can adjust:

- **Star color** and **empty star color**
- **Star size** (12–24px)
- **Margins** above and below the badge

The badge uses inline SVG stars, so it loads instantly and never causes layout shift.

---

# Star ratings on collection and search pages

> Show stars under every product card, with or without your theme's own rating setting

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/stars-on-product-cards
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Storefront Widgets
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Collection pages, search results and product lists on your home page can show each product's star rating and review count under the product's name. There are two ways to turn this on. Use one of them, not both.

## Option 1: the "Product card stars" block

This block works with any theme, including themes without a product rating setting.

1. In the app, open **Settings > Storefront widgets** and click **Add to theme** next to **Product card stars**. The theme editor opens on your collection template.
2. Add the block anywhere in the template. It shows nothing where it sits.
3. Save. Every product card on that page now shows its stars and review count under the title.

Repeat for the **search** template and for your **home page** if it lists products. In the block's settings you can change the star colors and size, hide the review count, and choose whether to skip cards that already show your theme's own rating.

## Option 2: your theme's "Show product rating" setting

Dawn, Horizon and most Online Store 2.0 themes have a built-in rating on product cards. The app keeps every product's rating up to date in Shopify, so the theme can show it.

1. Open the theme editor on a collection page.
2. Select the **Product grid** section.
3. Turn on **Show product rating** (the name varies slightly between themes).

## Which one to choose

- Your theme has the setting and you like how it looks: use option 2.
- Your theme has no rating setting, or you want the app's star style: use option 1.
- The block skips cards that already show your theme's rating, so if both are on you will not see stars twice.

## Stars are not showing

- Only products with at least one approved, published review show stars.
- A new review can take a minute to appear on cards.
- If you use option 2, check that the setting is on in the template your collection actually uses (some stores have several collection templates).
- Reviews moderated as pending do not count until you approve them.

---

# Review carousel for the homepage

> A scrolling carousel of recent reviews — great social proof for the homepage

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/review-carousel
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Storefront Widgets
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The review carousel is a horizontally-scrolling row of review cards you can drop onto your homepage, a landing page, or any section. It's social proof at the first scroll — useful for stores where the homepage is the main entry point.

## What customers see

The carousel shows a configurable number of recent reviews as cards. Each card has:

- A review photo (if the review has one)
- Star rating
- Title and review body (truncated to a few lines)
- Author name and **Verified** badge

Shoppers can scroll horizontally with their finger or trackpad, or click the arrow buttons on the sides. On phones the arrows hide and shoppers swipe.

## Adding the carousel

- Open the page where you want it — homepage, a custom page, or a collection
- In the theme editor, click **Add section** (or **Add block** inside a section)
- Choose **Review Carousel** from the Apps list
- Place it where it fits — between the hero and the featured products, or near the bottom of the homepage
- **Save**

## Settings

- **Heading** and optional **subtitle**
- **Number of reviews to show** (3–20)
- **Show photos** — keep on for the most visual impact
- **Auto-scroll** — optional autoplay with a configurable interval. Pauses on hover so shoppers can read.
- **Star color** and **empty star color**

## What reviews appear

The carousel pulls the most recent approved, published reviews across all products. There's no per-product filtering — it's designed as a brand-wide social proof block. If you want product-specific reviews, use the product reviews widget on the product page.

---

# Happy customers page

> A dedicated /pages/reviews page that shows reviews across your whole catalog

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/happy-customers-page
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Storefront Widgets
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The happy customers page is a dedicated page on your store that shows every approved review across your whole catalog. It's a "wall of love" that you can link to from your nav menu, footer, or marketing campaigns. Strong stores use it as proof when running paid ads.

## Creating the page

In Shopify admin:

- Go to **Online Store > Pages > Add page**
- Title it something like **Reviews** or **What our customers say**
- Save the page (the body can stay empty)
- The page is now reachable at `/pages/reviews` (or whatever URL you picked)

## Adding the block

In the theme editor:

- Open the new page from the page dropdown at the top
- Click **Add section** and pick the page template (usually called "Page" or "Default page")
- Click **Add block** in that section and choose **Happy Customers** from the Apps list
- **Save**

## What customers see

- Every approved, published review across all products (newest first)
- Photos, ratings, author names, verified-purchase badges
- Pagination so the page stays fast

## Linking to the page

Add a link in your main nav:

- **Online Store > Navigation > Main menu**
- Add a menu item — name it something like **Reviews** and link to your new page
- **Save**

You can also link to the page from email campaigns, Instagram bio, paid ads, or product page descriptions to drive shoppers to social proof.

---

# Collection page star badges (app embed)

> Auto-inject star ratings under product cards on collection, search, and home pages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/app-embed-and-badges
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Storefront Widgets
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The app embed is a small JavaScript and CSS bundle that loads on every page of your storefront. It does two things: powers the interactive parts of the review widgets (form submission, AJAX loading) and auto-injects star rating badges under product cards on collection, search, and home pages — without any theme code edits.

## Enabling the app embed

- Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**
- Open **App embeds** in the left sidebar
- Toggle **Product Reviews** on
- **Save**

You only need to do this once per theme. If you switch themes, enable the embed on the new theme.

## Collection page badges

When the app embed is on, the widget automatically scans product cards on your collection, search, and home pages and adds a small star rating badge under each card. The badge only appears for products that have at least one approved review — products without reviews stay clean.

The settings on the app embed control this:

- **Show star ratings on collection pages** — turn the feature on or off entirely
- **Badge position** — below product title, below price, or above the title
- **Badge star size** — 10–20px

## When badges don't show

A few reasons a badge might not appear:

- The product has zero approved reviews yet
- Your theme's product card markup doesn't include the rating metafield reference (most modern themes do; older themes may need a small edit)
- The app embed itself isn't enabled — double-check **App embeds** in the theme editor

If you see one but not all of these, see Troubleshooting → "Star badges aren't showing on the collection page."

## What's NOT covered by the embed

The product page widget, star rating badge, review carousel, and happy customers page are all **separate blocks** you add individually in the theme editor. The app embed only powers the storefront JavaScript and the collection badge injection — it doesn't add visible blocks on its own.

---

# Customizing the widget appearance

> Match the widget to your brand — colors, borders, spacing, and form style

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/customizing-appearance
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Storefront Widgets
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The review widget is designed to match any storefront. Every visible color, the star style, the form behavior, and the spacing are configurable from the theme editor — no CSS edits needed.

## Where the settings live

In the theme editor, click on the **Product Reviews** block on a product page. The left panel shows all settings grouped by Colors, Spacing, and behavior options.

## Colors

The widget exposes five color settings:

- **Star color** — filled portion of every star (default gold `#FFB800`)
- **Empty star color** — unfilled portion (default light gray `#D4D4D4`)
- **Accent color** — buttons, the active page in pagination, focus rings on form inputs (default near-black `#111111`)
- **Accent text color** — text on accent buttons (default white)
- **Border color** — the widget card outline, dividers between reviews, form input borders (default `#E5E5E5`)
- **Widget background** — the card background (default white)
- **Form background** — the submission form's container background (default `#FAFAFA`)

Pick an accent that matches your brand's primary CTA color. The widget will use it everywhere a customer interacts (Write a review, Submit, page numbers).

## Spacing

- **Top margin** and **bottom margin** — space above and below the widget card, in pixels. Tune so the widget sits comfortably between the description and the related products.

## Form behavior

- **Show review submission form** — when off, the widget shows reviews but no Write a review button. Use this if you only collect reviews via post-purchase emails.
- **Require customer login** — when on, only logged-in customers see the form. Guests see a **Log in to review** link.
- **Reviews per page** — 3 to 25
- **Default sort** — newest first, highest rated, or lowest rated
- **Show photos** — toggle photo thumbnails in the list
- **Show rating breakdown bars** — the 5★/4★/3★/2★/1★ bar chart under the summary
- **Include SEO structured data** — adds JSON-LD markup so star ratings can appear in Google search results

## Responsive

The widget scales for mobile automatically — padding shrinks, photo thumbnails get smaller. There are no separate mobile settings to manage.

---

# Post-purchase email requests

> Automatically ask customers to review their purchase after delivery

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/email-review-requests
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Collecting Reviews
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Most reviews come from customers who've already received and used the product. The post-purchase email request is the single biggest lever you have to grow your review count — it goes out automatically a few days after delivery and asks the customer to share their experience.

## Turning email requests on

In the app, go to **Settings > Emails** and toggle **Send review request emails** on. You'll also pick how many days after order payment to send the email.

A good starting point is **10–14 days** — enough time for the order to arrive and the customer to actually use the product. For perishables or fast-delivery items, drop it to 5–7 days. For furniture or appliances that take time to evaluate, push it to 21+ days.

## What's in the email

The email is short on purpose. It shows:

- The product(s) the customer ordered, with a small image
- A row of stars the customer can click to start the review
- A single big **Leave a review** button that opens the review form on your storefront

Clicking any star or the button takes the customer to your storefront review form, pre-filled with their info. The review is automatically tied to their order and earns the **Verified Purchase** badge when submitted.

## How the link works

Every email contains a unique, secure link with a one-time token. Because the token identifies the customer and order, no login is required — they click once and they're at the form. This is one of the highest-converting flows in the app.

If they don't review by the time you've configured a follow-up reminder, the reminder uses the same link. See [Follow-up reminders](email-reminders) for that flow.

## Editing what the email says

To customize the subject line and body, see [Editing email subject and body](../customizing-emails/email-templates).

To send from your own address or domain, see [Sending from your own address or domain](../customizing-emails/branded-sender).

---

# Follow-up reminders

> Send a second email if the customer hasn't reviewed yet

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/email-reminders
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Collecting Reviews
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Most customers don't act on the first email. A polite reminder a few days later can roughly double your review submission rate — and is gentle enough that it rarely upsets anyone. The app handles the timing and skips reminders for customers who already reviewed.

## Turning reminders on

In the app, go to **Settings > Emails** and toggle **Send follow-up reminder** on. Pick how many days after the first email to send the reminder.

A common cadence is **7 days after the first email** — long enough that the first one isn't fresh, short enough that the purchase is still in the customer's memory. If your first email goes 14 days after the order, the reminder lands about three weeks after delivery.

## When the reminder fires

The reminder is automatically skipped if:

- The customer already submitted a review (we don't pester reviewers)
- The first email was never delivered (we don't pile reminders on bounces)
- The order was refunded (we don't ask for reviews on returned items)

If none of those apply, the reminder goes out on schedule using the same secure submit link from the first email.

## What's in the reminder

The reminder uses the same template style as the first email but with softer copy ("Just a friendly reminder…"). You can edit the wording in **Email templates** — see [Editing email subject and body](../customizing-emails/email-templates).

## How merchants typically use this

- One reminder is the sweet spot. Two reminders feel pushy and customers start unsubscribing.
- If you offer a [discount code for photo reviews](discount-incentives), mention it in the reminder body — it's a strong nudge.

---

# Photo reviews

> Let customers upload photos with their review

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/photo-reviews
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Collecting Reviews
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Photo reviews are the single most persuasive form of social proof. Stores that show photo reviews convert significantly better than stores that show text-only reviews. The app supports photo uploads in the review form by default.

## How customers add photos

When a customer fills out the review form, they see a photo upload field below the star rating. They can:

- Drag and drop image files directly
- Click to pick files from their device
- Add multiple photos in one review

Photos upload immediately after the review is submitted and are stored on your store. They appear as thumbnails under the review text in the widget once the review is approved.

## File limits

- **Image formats:** JPEG, PNG, GIF, WebP, HEIC
- **Max file size:** 10 MB per photo
- **Max photos per review:** 5

On paid plans customers can also attach one short video. See [Video reviews](video-reviews).

## Removing a photo

On a review's page in the app, click **Remove** under a photo to take it out of the review and keep the rest. The review updates everywhere it shows.

## How photos show on the storefront

In the **product reviews widget**, photo thumbnails appear in a row under the review body. Clicking any thumbnail opens a full-size lightbox overlay (click anywhere to close, or press Escape).

In the **review carousel**, the first photo is used as the card's hero image — pick reviews with strong photos to surface in the carousel.

## Encouraging more photo reviews

The most effective lever: turn on the [photo and video reward](discount-incentives) (paid plans). Customers who include a photo receive a unique discount code by email.

---

# Video reviews

> Let customers attach a short video to their review (paid plans)

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/video-reviews
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Collecting Reviews
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Customers can attach one short video to their review. Videos show in the reviews widget with a play button, next to the review's photos. Video reviews are on paid plans.

## Turning it on

In the app, go to **Settings > Reviews** and turn on **Let customers add a video** under **Photo and video reviews**. The video field then appears in the review form on your product pages and in the review page customers open from your review request emails.

## Limits

- **One video per review**
- **Up to 60 seconds** (the form checks the length before uploading)
- **Up to 50 MB**
- **Formats:** MP4, MOV (iPhone) and WebM

Videos recorded on a phone are usually well within these limits. A longer video is refused with a message asking the customer to trim it.

## Moderation

A review with a video always waits for your approval, even if you auto-publish reviews. Watch it from the review's page in **Reviews**, then approve or reject it.

You can also remove a single photo or the video from a review and keep the rest: on the review's page, click **Remove** under the photo or video. The review updates everywhere it shows.

## Where videos appear

- The product reviews widget, under the review text
- The review's page in the app (Watch video)

Videos are stored by the app, not in your Shopify Files.

---

# Discount codes for photo and video reviews

> Reward customers who add a photo or video with an automatic discount code (paid plans)

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/discount-incentives
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Collecting Reviews
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Reviews with photos and videos sell better than text-only reviews, and a small reward is the most reliable way to get more of them. The app can give every customer who adds a photo or video a unique discount code for their next order. The reward is on paid plans.

## Turning it on

In the app, go to **Settings > Reviews** and find **Photo and video reviews**. Turn on **Reward photo and video reviews with a discount code**, then choose:

- **Which reviews earn the code:** a photo or a video, or a video only
- **Discount:** the percent off the customer's next order (10 to 15% works well for most stores)
- **Code valid for:** how many days the code works
- **Code prefix:** the start of every code, so you can spot them in Shopify (for example `THANKYOU` gives codes like `THANKYOU-4K7Q2M9X`)

The review form then tells customers about the reward.

The first time you turn it on, Shopify may ask you to approve the app's access to discounts. Approve it so the app can create the codes.

## How the customer gets the code

1. The customer submits a review with a photo or video.
2. The app creates a single-use code in your store's **Discounts**.
3. The customer receives the code by email within a minute, with its value and expiry date.

Each code works once, for one customer, on any product. The reward never depends on the rating: a one-star review with a photo earns the same code as a five-star one.

## Google and the Shop app

- **Google:** reviews that earned a reward are marked as incentivized in your [Google product review feed](google-shopping), as Google requires.
- **Shop app:** the Shop app does not accept reviews given in exchange for a discount, so rewarded reviews are not sent to it. They still show on your store and still count in your star rating.

## When not to use it

- Brands that never discount
- Thin-margin products where any discount hurts

---

# Request a review from the order page

> Send or schedule one order's review request from Shopify admin

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/order-page-request
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Collecting Reviews
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

You can send a review request for a single order straight from the order's page in Shopify admin, without waiting for the automatic email. Use it for a customer who just told you they love their order, or for orders placed before you installed the app.

## Sending a request

1. In Shopify admin, open the order.
2. Click **More actions**, then **Request a review**.
3. Choose **Send now**, or **Schedule** to send it on your usual delay (the "days after purchase" setting in **Settings > Email requests**).

The customer gets your review request email with a link to review every product in the order. Reviews left through it are marked as verified purchases.

The action works even when automatic review requests are turned off.

## What the status means

When you open the action on an order that already has a request, it shows:

- **Scheduled:** the email will go out on its date. **Send now** sends it right away.
- **Sent / opened:** the customer received it. **Send again** sends it once more.
- **Completed:** the customer reviewed everything in the order, so there is nothing left to request.

**View in Product Reviews** opens the request in the app, with the products and any reviews it brought.

## When it can't send

- The order has no customer email.
- The order has no products that can be reviewed (for example, only gift cards or custom items).

---

# Who can leave a review

> Require login or accept guest reviews, and what pre-fills for logged-in customers

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/guest-vs-logged-in
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Collecting Reviews
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

There are two paths a customer can take to leave a review: log in to their store account first, or fill out the form as a guest. Both have trade-offs — guest reviews capture more total reviews, login-required reviews catch less spam. You can pick either approach from the widget settings.

## The "Require customer login" setting

Find this in the theme editor on the **Product Reviews** block (or in **Settings > Reviews** for the global default).

- **On (default):** only logged-in customers can submit reviews. Guests see a **Log in to review** link that takes them to the storefront login page and brings them back to the product after sign-in. Their name and email are pre-filled.
- **Off:** anyone can submit. Guests enter their name and email themselves. Logged-in customers still get pre-fill.

## How verified-purchase matching works

A review is **verified** when the email used to submit it matches an order on your store. This works whether or not login is required:

- Logged-in: the customer's account email is used → verified if it matches an order
- Guest: the email they typed is used → verified if it matches an order

So requiring login doesn't change the verification rate — it just changes whether anonymous shoppers can submit at all.

## Picking the right default

- **Require login on** — best for stores with mature customer accounts, premium brands where authenticity matters, or stores with a spam problem
- **Require login off** — best for stores where customer accounts are rare, mass-market products where review volume matters more than vetting, or international stores where customers don't always sign in

You can change this setting anytime. The change only affects new submissions.

## A note on pre-fill

When a logged-in customer opens the review form, the **Your name** field is pre-filled as "First L." (first name + last initial) to protect privacy on the public storefront. The email field is pre-filled with their account email (used only for verification — never shown publicly).

---

# The moderation queue

> Approve, reject, edit, or delete reviews from the admin

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/moderation-queue
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Moderation and Display
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every review submitted to your store starts as **pending** in the moderation queue. You decide what gets published, what gets fixed, and what gets rejected. The queue lives at the **Reviews** page in your app admin.

## Finding pending reviews

Open the **Reviews** page from the app's main nav. The default view shows all reviews; filter by status at the top to see only pending ones. You'll get an email when a new review arrives if **New review notifications** is on (see [Merchant notifications](../customizing-emails/merchant-notifications)).

## Available actions

Click any review to open its detail page. From there:

- **Approve** — publishes the review to the storefront immediately
- **Reject** — hides it from the storefront. The review stays in your records but customers never see it.
- **Unpublish** — for an already-approved review, removes it from the storefront without deleting it
- **Republish** — un-rejects or un-unpublishes
- **Edit** — fix typos, remove personal info, or tighten wording before publishing
- **Reply** — add a public response that shows under the review on the storefront. See [Replying to reviews](merchant-replies).
- **Delete** — permanently removes the review (use sparingly — once it's gone, it's gone)

## Bulk actions

On the **Reviews** index, select multiple reviews using the checkboxes and use **Approve**, **Reject**, or **Delete** to handle them in one go. Useful for catching up after a backlog or after importing a CSV.

## Filtering and search

The Reviews page supports:

- **Status** — pending / approved / rejected / unpublished
- **Rating** — 1 through 5 stars
- **With photos** — only show reviews that have at least one photo
- **Verified only** — only show reviews tied to a real order
- **Search** — by author name, email, review title, or review body

Combine these to spot specific reviews fast — for example, "pending + 1 star + with photos" to surface low-rating reviews that need extra attention.

---

# Auto-publishing reviews

> Skip manual approval for high-rated reviews

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/auto-publish-rules
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Moderation and Display
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Manually moderating every review is a chore once you're getting more than a few a week. Auto-publish lets reviews above a star rating you choose go live immediately, while keeping lower-rated reviews in the queue for you to handle personally.

## Turning auto-publish on

In the app, go to **Settings > Reviews** and toggle **Auto-publish reviews** on. Then pick the **Minimum rating to auto-publish** — the most common choice is **4 stars and above**.

With this setting:

- **5★ and 4★ reviews** → auto-approved, instantly visible on the storefront
- **3★, 2★, 1★ reviews** → queued for moderation as usual

## Why low-rated reviews stay queued

Not because you should hide them — keeping a mix of ratings actually builds trust. The queue is there so you can:

- Reply publicly to a low rating before it goes live (turns a negative into a save)
- Reach out privately to make it right (refund, replacement, apology)
- Verify the reviewer wasn't a competitor or a bot
- Spot a real product quality issue that needs fixing

A common workflow: get the alert email for negative reviews (see [Merchant notifications](../customizing-emails/merchant-notifications)), reply within a day, then approve.

## Picking the right threshold

- **5 stars only** — strictest. Only the rave reviews auto-publish; everything else waits.
- **4 and above** — recommended default. Most positive reviews go live fast; you still see anything that might need a response.
- **3 and above** — looser. Use this if you have a high-volume store and want minimal moderation.
- **All ratings** — same as turning auto-publish off entirely.

## Auto-publish doesn't override your decision

Once a review is auto-published, you can still **unpublish**, **edit**, or **delete** it like any other review. Auto-publish only changes whether it appears on the storefront immediately or waits for you.

---

# Replying to reviews

> Respond publicly to a customer's review from the admin

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/merchant-replies
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Moderation and Display
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Public replies from the store owner are one of the highest-trust signals on a review widget. A thoughtful reply to a negative review often converts the shopper reading it more than a perfect 5-star streak would. The app lets you reply to any review from the admin — the reply shows directly under the customer's review on the storefront.

## Writing a reply

- Open the review from the **Reviews** page in your admin
- Find the **Merchant reply** field on the review detail page
- Write your response and save

The reply appears immediately on the storefront under the customer's review, styled as a "Store response" box.

## Updating or removing a reply

- To update, just edit the **Merchant reply** field and save again
- To remove, clear the field entirely and save

## What makes a good reply

- **Personal, not templated** — "Thanks Sarah!" beats "Thanks for your review!"
- **Address specifics from the review** — shows you actually read it
- **For negative reviews:** acknowledge the issue, apologize where appropriate, explain what you've done or will do, and offer to make it right offline. Don't argue publicly.
- **For positive reviews:** brief, warm, and grateful. A one-liner is fine.

## When to reply

- **Always** for negative reviews — these are the highest-impact replies
- **Often** for positive photo reviews — encourages more photo reviews
- **Occasionally** for plain positive reviews — too many "thanks!" replies can feel performative

## Visibility

Replies are public. Customers can't reply back through the widget, so this is a one-way "store response." Keep that in mind when handling sensitive situations — for back-and-forth, follow up by email.

---

# Reviewer country flags

> Show a small country flag next to each reviewer's name as social proof

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/country-flags
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Moderation and Display
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A small country flag next to each reviewer's name is gentle social proof: it shows shoppers that real people from many places bought the product. The app can capture and display this automatically. No customer addresses are ever stored — only the 2-letter ISO country code.

## Turning it on

In the app, go to **Settings > Reviews** and toggle **Show reviewer country flag** on. The flag appears next to the author name in the review widget and the review carousel.

## Where the country comes from

The country is captured at the moment the review is submitted, using one of two sources:

- **Verified purchase reviews** — country comes from the order's shipping address (most accurate). Falls back to billing address or the customer's default address.
- **Storefront-only reviews (guest submissions)** — country comes from the visitor's IP via Cloudflare. Falls back to nothing if the IP can't be resolved.

The order-address source is always preferred when available, because it represents where the product actually shipped (not where the customer was browsing from).

## Privacy

- The app stores only the 2-letter country code (for example, `US`, `GB`, `JP`)
- Full addresses, IP addresses, and city-level data are **never stored**
- Customers can't tell which source produced the code — to them, it's just a flag

This is enough for Shopify's standard customer data tier — you don't need to request access to "addresses" or other protected fields just to show country flags.

## Disabling

If you turn the setting off, no flag appears. The country codes that were already captured stay in the database; they just stop being shown. Turning the setting back on shows them again.

---

# Sorting, filtering, and pagination

> Control how reviews are listed in the widget

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/sorting-and-pagination
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Moderation and Display
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The review widget paginates so the product page stays fast even when a product has hundreds of reviews. You control how many show per page and what order they appear in.

## Reviews per page

In the theme editor on the **Product Reviews** block, set **Reviews per page** between 3 and 25. Most stores use the default of **10** — long enough to feel substantial, short enough not to slow the page.

If you bump this above 15, consider keeping photos on so the longer list stays visually engaging.

## Default sort order

Pick the order new shoppers see first:

- **Newest first** (default) — shows the most recent reviews on top. Best for stores where review freshness matters (fashion, beauty, anything seasonal).
- **Highest rated** — leads with 5-star reviews. Best when you want to lean into social proof, especially early on when you have few reviews.
- **Lowest rated** — useful for transparency-first brands. Rarely the right choice for conversions.

The default sort applies to the first page load. Customer-facing sort controls (so shoppers can re-sort the list themselves) are on the roadmap.

## Pagination behavior

The widget uses numbered page buttons at the bottom of the list. Clicking a page number:

- Loads that page's reviews via AJAX (no full page reload)
- Smoothly scrolls back to the top of the widget so shoppers can see the new reviews

This pattern works well on both desktop and mobile and avoids the "infinite scroll on a product page" anti-pattern that hurts page performance.

---

# Helpful voting

> Let shoppers upvote the reviews that helped them decide

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/helpful-voting
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Moderation and Display
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Helpful voting lets shoppers upvote the reviews that actually helped them decide. Over time, the most useful reviews bubble to the top — without you having to curate anything. The app tracks votes per visitor so the same person can't stuff the count.

## What customers see

Under every review in the widget, there's a small **Was this helpful?** prompt with a thumbs-up button. Clicking it increments the helpful count for that review. The count shows next to the button (for example, "5 found this helpful").

## How votes are tracked

Each visitor can vote once per review. The app tracks votes with a browser-side fingerprint, not a Shopify login — so guest shoppers and logged-in customers both can vote. Voting again on the same review from the same browser is a no-op.

## What this changes on the storefront

- The helpful count is purely informational right now — it shows under each review but doesn't re-order the list
- A future setting will let merchants sort by "most helpful" by default
- Votes are also visible in the admin so you can see which reviews resonate most

## Why helpful voting matters

- **Quality discovery** — the reviews that explain *why* someone loved a product tend to outrank the "love it!" reviews over time
- **Engagement signal** — shoppers who vote spend more time on the page, which Google notices
- **Free moderation** — if a review consistently gets downvoted (when down-voting is enabled), it's a signal to look at it again

## Privacy

- Votes are anonymous — no customer identity is attached
- The fingerprint is browser-only and not synced across devices
- You can clear all votes on a single review from the admin if needed

---

# Star ratings in Google Shopping

> Submit your product review feed to Google Merchant Center

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/google-shopping
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Moderation and Display
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Google can show your reviews as star ratings on Shopping ads and free product listings. It reads them from a **product review feed**: a file of all your reviews that Google fetches on a schedule. The app builds and updates this feed for you. The feed is on paid plans.

## Find your feed URL

In the app, go to **Settings > Google Shopping**. The page shows your feed's URL, a **Copy URL** button, and how many reviews are in the feed. The URL is private to your store; anyone with it can read the same reviews your storefront shows, so share it only with Google.

## Before you start

- You need a **Google Merchant Center** account with your products in it.
- Google shows product ratings once a store has at least **50 reviews** in its feed. You can submit the feed earlier; ratings appear when you reach 50.
- Join Google's **Product Ratings** program with its interest form (linked from Google's instructions on the settings page).

## Submit the feed

1. In Merchant Center, go to **Products & store**, then **Reviews**, then the **Product reviews** tab.
2. Choose **Manage product review sources**, **Add product reviews**, then **Add product reviews from a file**.
3. Pick **Scheduled fetch** and paste your feed URL.
4. Set it to fetch **daily**.

Google checks the feed, usually within a few days. Its status shows on the same page in Merchant Center.

## What the feed contains

- Every approved, published product review, including low ratings (Google requires all of them).
- Not included: store-wide reviews, reviews with no text, and reviews imported from Google, Trustpilot, Facebook, Yelp, Etsy or Amazon (Google does not accept reviews collected on other sites). Reviews you moved from another review app are included.
- Reviews that earned the photo or video reward are marked as incentivized.
- Each product carries its brand, SKU and barcode (GTIN) from Shopify. Google matches reviews to your products mostly by barcode, so add barcodes to your products for the best match rate.

## Seller ratings

Seller (store) ratings in Google Ads are a different program. They come from Google Customer Reviews and a few approved review partners, not from a feed an app can send. To collect store ratings, sign up for **Google Customer Reviews** in Merchant Center.

---

# Rich snippets and SEO

> Make star ratings appear in Google search results

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/seo-structured-data
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Moderation and Display
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Star ratings in Google search results — the gold stars under your product titles — come from a small piece of code called JSON-LD structured data. The review widget outputs this automatically for every product that has at least one approved review. Done right, it's free organic traffic and click-through lift.

## What it looks like in Google

When Google picks up the structured data, your product listing in search shows:

- A row of gold stars
- The average rating (for example, "4.8")
- The total review count (for example, "Based on 137 reviews")

This appears in both organic search results and Google Shopping ads. Stores with rich snippets typically see 15–30% higher click-through rates than stores without.

## Turning it on

It's on by default. On the **Product Reviews** block in the theme editor, check that **Include SEO structured data** is enabled. Turn it off only if you have another app (or a theme feature) outputting Product/AggregateRating schema for the same products — duplicate markup confuses Google.

## How long until it appears in search

Google needs to:

- Crawl the updated product page (typically a few days for active stores, longer for new ones)
- Decide the structured data is trustworthy (this gets faster as your store ages and your reviews are clearly real)
- Choose to show rich snippets (Google decides per query — they don't always show even when valid)

Most stores see rich snippets appear within 2–4 weeks of getting their first reviews. If it's been longer, see Troubleshooting → "Star ratings not showing in Google search results yet."

## What's in the structured data

For each product with reviews, the widget emits:

- **Product** schema (title, image, description, SKU, brand, price, availability)
- **AggregateRating** schema (average rating, review count, scale)

Google reads this on top of your normal product page content. No theme edits are required.

---

# Sending from your own address or domain

> Verify your email address (or whole domain) so requests come from your store

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/branded-sender
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Customizing Emails
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

By default, review request emails come from our shared sending address. That works, but customers respond better to emails that look like they're from your store directly. Verifying your own sender address (or your whole domain) keeps emails out of spam folders and builds trust.

## Why verification matters

Without verification, emails go out from a shared address with your store name as the display name. Gmail, Outlook, and Apple Mail show a small warning ("via pasilobus.com") that suggests the email might not really be from you. Verified senders show clean — just your store name and address.

Verified senders also have better inbox placement, fewer trips to spam, and higher open rates across the board.

## Verifying a single email address

Fastest option, no DNS access required.

- In the app, go to **Settings > Sender Email**
- Enter the address you want emails to come from (for example, `hello@yourstore.com`)
- Click **Verify**
- Check that inbox — you'll get a confirmation email with a single link to click

Once you click the link, the address is verified and immediately becomes the sender for all review request and reminder emails. You can re-verify if you ever want to change the address.

## Verifying a whole domain

Better long-term option — you can send from any address at your domain, plus deliverability is stronger.

- In the app, go to **Settings > Sender Domain**
- Enter your domain (for example, `yourstore.com`)
- The app generates three DNS records to add (typically CNAMEs for DKIM)
- Add them through your DNS provider (Cloudflare, GoDaddy, Namecheap, etc.)
- Click **Verify domain** — the app checks the records and confirms

Once a domain is verified, any sender at that domain (`hello@`, `support@`, `reviews@`) works without extra steps.

## What happens if you don't verify

The app falls back to a shared sender address. Emails still go out, but with the "via" notice. You can leave it on the default forever — verification is optional but recommended.

---

# Editing email subject and body

> Customize the wording of review request and reminder emails

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/email-templates
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Customizing Emails
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every email the app sends — request, reminder, merchant notifications — has a template you can edit. Tweak the wording, add your brand voice, and use placeholders that auto-fill with each customer's details.

## Where templates live

In the app, go to **Settings > Email Templates**. You'll see a list of all editable emails:

- **Review request** — the initial post-purchase ask
- **Review reminder** — the follow-up nudge
- **Photo review thank-you** — sent after a photo review with the discount code (when enabled)
- **New review notification** — internal alert to you when a review arrives
- **Negative review alert** — internal alert when a review is at or below your threshold

Click any template to open the editor.

## Editing a template

For each template you can edit:

- **Subject line** — what shows in the inbox
- **Heading** — large text at the top of the email
- **Message body** — the main content
- **Button text** — what's on the call-to-action button (where applicable)

Save and the changes apply to every email sent from that point on. To revert, click **Reset to default**.

## Placeholders

You can insert dynamic values that auto-fill per customer. Available placeholders depend on the template:

- `{{customer_first_name}}` — first name (falls back to "there" if unknown)
- `{{product_name}}` — the product they ordered (first product if multiple)
- `{{order_number}}` — the order number with prefix (`#1234`)
- `{{shop_name}}` — your store name
- `{{review_link}}` — the secure one-click review link (request and reminder emails only)

Just type the placeholder inline — `Hi {{customer_first_name}}, how was your {{product_name}}?` — and it gets replaced when the email is sent.

## Preview

Each template editor includes a live preview with sample values so you can see the formatting before saving.

## Keep it short

The highest-converting review request emails are 2–3 sentences plus a button. Long, formal emails get skipped. Lead with "how was the product?" and end with one clear call to action.

---

# Merchant notifications

> Get an email when a new review is submitted or a low-rating review comes in

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/merchant-notifications
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Customizing Emails
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The app can send you (the merchant) an email whenever a new review is submitted, or when a review's rating falls below a threshold you set. Useful for staying on top of moderation without manually refreshing the Reviews page.

## Where to set this up

In the app, go to **Settings > Emails**. The merchant notification options are in the Email Notifications section.

## New review notifications

Toggle **New review notifications** on to get an email whenever a review arrives. The email includes:

- The customer's name and email
- The product they reviewed
- Their star rating
- The review title and body (if any)
- A link to open the review in your admin

Best for stores doing manual moderation. If you have **Auto-publish** on for most reviews, you may want this notification only for ones that didn't auto-publish — coming in a future release.

## Negative review alerts

Toggle **Negative review alerts** on and set the **Negative review threshold** (1, 2, or 3 stars). You'll get a separate, more urgent-looking email for any review at or below that rating.

Use this to:

- Reply quickly before the review goes live (if auto-publish is off)
- Reach out privately to make the customer's experience right
- Spot product quality issues before they show up in more reviews

Most stores set the threshold to **3 stars** — anything below "neutral" gets the alert.

## Where notifications are sent

By default, notifications go to your store's owner email (the one on file in Shopify Admin > Settings > General). You can also change the destination address in **Settings > Account**.

## Turning notifications off

Both toggles can be turned off independently. If you're getting too many emails, turning off new-review notifications and keeping only negative-review alerts is a common compromise.

---

# AI review summaries

> Show a paragraph summarizing what customers commonly say about each product

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/ai-summaries
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: AI Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Once a product has a handful of reviews, the app can automatically generate a short paragraph summarizing what customers commonly say about it. This shows at the top of the reviews widget so shoppers get the gist without reading every review.

## What the summary looks like

The summary is a 2–3 sentence paragraph that reads naturally — for example:

> "Most customers love the fit and the bold colors, though several mention the sizing runs small. Returning buyers consistently praise the quality and recommend ordering one size up."

It's drawn from the actual review content, so it stays accurate to what customers wrote. Sentiment, common themes, and recurring praise or complaints all show through.

## When summaries appear

A summary is generated only when a product has enough reviews to summarize meaningfully — typically **at least 5 approved reviews**. Below that, the widget doesn't show a summary at all (no point summarizing 1 review).

## Refresh schedule

Summaries refresh:

- The first time a product crosses the minimum review threshold
- Whenever a new approved review comes in (with throttling so it doesn't refresh on every single review)
- On demand from the product detail page in your admin

You don't need to do anything to trigger them.

## What gets summarized

Only **approved, published** reviews count. Pending and rejected reviews are ignored — you won't accidentally surface content from reviews you chose to hide.

## When summaries are hidden

The summary won't show if:

- Fewer than 5 approved reviews exist
- All approved reviews are too short to summarize (one-word reviews)
- The summary couldn't be generated for any reason (silent fallback — the widget just skips the summary section)

---

# Shopify Flow triggers

> Use Flow to send your own email, SMS, or Slack alert when a review event happens

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/shopify-flow
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Integrations
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Shopify Flow lets you build custom automations triggered by store events. The app sends review events to Flow as triggers, so you can do things like "post to Slack when a 1-star review comes in" or "send an SMS when a review request is due" without writing any code. Flow triggers are part of the Premium plan.

## Turning Flow triggers on

In the app, go to **Settings > Email requests** and tick **Send Shopify Flow triggers** under **Shopify Flow**, then save. On the Free plan the option is shown locked with an **Upgrade** link.

## Available triggers

- **Review submitted** - fires when a shopper submits a review, before moderation. Carries the rating, title, text, author, product and whether it is a verified purchase or has photos. Add a Flow condition on the rating to react only to low ratings.
- **Review request due** - fires when a customer is due their review request. Use it to send an SMS through Postscript, Klaviyo SMS or Attentive instead of, or as well as, the email.
- **Review reminder due** - fires when the follow-up reminder is due. Same use as above.

## Building a Flow workflow

In Shopify Admin:

- Go to **Apps > Shopify Flow**
- Click **Create workflow**
- Pick a trigger from the list: they are listed under **Product Reviews**
- Add an action: send an email, post to Slack, send an SMS through an SMS app you've installed, create a task, and so on
- Turn the workflow on

The app fires the trigger; Flow runs the action.

## Common patterns

- **Negative review alarm** - `Review submitted` with the condition rating at most 2 → post to a Slack `#alerts` channel with the review details
- **SMS review requests** - `Review request due` → send an SMS with the review link through your SMS app
- **Celebrate 5-star reviews** - `Review submitted` with the condition rating equals 5 → notify your team

---

# Importing reviews from another app

> Bring existing reviews from Judge.me, Loox, or any source via CSV

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/csv-import
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Integrations
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Switching from another review app? You don't have to start from zero. The app accepts a CSV import of existing reviews — Judge.me, Loox, Yotpo, Stamped, or any other source you can export from. Imported reviews are auto-approved and published immediately.

## Where to import

In the app, go to the **Reviews** page and click **Import**. You'll be prompted to upload a CSV file.

## CSV format

The CSV must have a header row. These columns are required:

- `product_id` — the Shopify product ID the review is for
- `rating` — integer 1 through 5
- `author` — reviewer name (a "name" column also works)
- `email` — reviewer email (used for verified purchase matching)
- `body` — the review text (a "review" column also works)

Optional columns:

- `title` — review title
- `date` — submission date (any standard format; defaults to today if missing)

Extra columns are ignored, so you can keep them in your source export.

## Getting your product IDs

Shopify product IDs are the long numeric ID, not the handle. To get them:

- In Shopify Admin, open a product
- Look at the URL — the ID is the long number (for example, `/admin/products/7654321098765`)

If your source export uses product handles instead of IDs, you'll need to map them. The easiest way is to export your Shopify products list, look up each handle, and add the matching ID to your review CSV before uploading.

## What happens after upload

The import runs in the background:

- Each row becomes a review on the matching product
- All imported reviews are marked **approved** and **published** (visible on the storefront immediately)
- The source is marked as **import** so you can identify them later in admin filters
- Average ratings on each product are recalculated and synced to Shopify metafields

The Reviews page refreshes when the import completes. Larger imports (1000+ rows) may take a couple of minutes.

## Re-running an import safely

If you re-upload the same CSV, duplicate detection prevents the same review (same product + same email) from being added twice. So it's safe to re-run after fixing a column.

---

# Exporting your reviews

> Download all your reviews as a CSV — useful for backups or moving to another app

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/csv-export
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Integrations
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

You own your reviews. The app makes it easy to export every review as a CSV — useful for backups, data analysis, or moving to another platform.

## Exporting

In the app, go to the **Reviews** page and click **Export**. The CSV downloads immediately to your browser.

## What's in the CSV

Every approved, pending, and rejected review is included with these columns:

- `product_id` — Shopify product ID
- `product_title` — product name at time of export
- `rating` — 1 through 5
- `title` — review title (may be empty)
- `body` — review text
- `author` — reviewer name
- `email` — reviewer email
- `status` — pending / approved / rejected
- `verified_purchase` — true or false
- `date` — submission date in ISO format
- `source` — app / import / storefront (where the review came from)

The CSV is UTF-8 encoded so non-Latin characters and emojis stay intact in Excel, Google Sheets, and Numbers.

## Common uses

- **Backups** — export monthly and keep a copy. Useful if you ever change apps.
- **Analytics** — pivot in a spreadsheet to spot trends (rating distribution by product, reviewer volume by month)
- **Migration** — the export format is compatible with the import format, so you can move reviews between stores

## What's NOT in the export

For privacy and file-size reasons, the CSV excludes:

- Photo URLs and binary photo data
- Helpful vote counts
- Merchant replies
- Country codes

If you need any of these, let support know — a richer export format is on the roadmap.

---

# The Reviews page

> Find, edit, reply to, and bulk-manage every review

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/manage-reviews
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Managing Reviews from Your Admin
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The Reviews page is the day-to-day hub for everything review-related. Find any review fast, moderate it, reply to it, or update its rating from one place.

## The reviews index

Open the **Reviews** page from the app's main nav. You'll see every review in a sortable, filterable table with:

- Product name
- Star rating
- Author name
- Review title (truncated)
- Status (pending / approved / rejected / unpublished)
- Submission date
- Verified-purchase badge
- Photo indicator (camera icon if the review has photos)

## Filters

Filter the list using the controls above the table:

- **Status** — pending, approved, rejected, unpublished
- **Rating** — 1 through 5 stars
- **Verified only** — show only reviews tied to a matched order
- **With photos** — show only reviews that include photos
- **Source** — app submission, CSV import, or storefront form

Combine filters to find specific reviews fast — "pending + 1-star + with photos" surfaces the most urgent moderation items.

## Search

Use the search bar to find reviews by:

- Author name
- Reviewer email
- Review title
- Review body text

Searches are case-insensitive and match partial words.

## The review detail page

Click any row in the table to open the review detail page. From here you can:

- **Approve / reject / publish / unpublish** the review
- **Edit** the title, body, or rating (use sparingly — only for typos or removing personal info)
- **Reply** publicly to the review (see [Replying to reviews](../moderation-and-display/merchant-replies))
- **Delete** the review entirely (permanent — can't be undone)
- See the review's full metadata: submission date, source, verified status, country code, helpful count

## Bulk actions

Tick the reviews you want in the leftmost column, pick an action in **Bulk action** above the table, and click **Apply**:

- **Approve selected** — publish all selected at once
- **Reject selected** — hide all selected

To delete a review, open it and use **Delete** in the title bar.

## Pagination

The table paginates server-side, so even with tens of thousands of reviews the page loads instantly. Adjust your filters to narrow the list before paging through.

---

# The Products page

> See each product's average rating and review count at a glance

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/products-overview
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Managing Reviews from Your Admin
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The Products page shows every product on your store with its review count, average rating, and recent activity. It's the fastest way to spot which products need attention and which are quietly racking up praise.

## Where to find it

Open the **Products** page from the app's main nav.

## What you see

Each row in the table shows:

- Product image and title
- Average star rating (with stars displayed)
- Total review count
- Date of the most recent review

The table is sortable — click any column header to sort by that field. Most stores sort by **review count** to find their most-reviewed products, or by **average rating** to spot underperformers.

## Opening a product's reviews

Click any product row to jump to the Reviews page pre-filtered for that product. You'll see only that product's reviews, with the same moderation and reply tools as the main Reviews page.

## Search

Use the search bar at the top to find products by name. Useful when you have hundreds of products and need to check a specific one.

## What the app maintains in Shopify

For every product, the app keeps two **standard Shopify metafields** up to date:

- `reviews.rating` — the average rating (1.0 to 5.0)
- `reviews.rating_count` — the total approved review count

These are the standard metafields Shopify themes and other apps know how to read. That's how the star rating badges show up on collection pages, how Google rich snippets work, and how any future Shopify app can use your review data without integration work.

These metafields update automatically whenever a review is approved, edited, unpublished, or deleted. You don't need to do anything to keep them in sync.

---

# Common issues

> The widget isn't showing, reviews aren't appearing, or emails aren't sending

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews/common-issues
App: Product Reviews (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Product Reviews")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/product-reviews-2
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/product-reviews
Section: Troubleshooting
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Most setup issues come from one of a few common causes. Run through the checks below before contacting support — most of these resolve in under a minute.

## The review widget isn't appearing on the product page

The widget is a theme block, not automatic. Check:

- Open the theme editor (**Online Store > Themes > Customize**)
- Open a **Product** template
- Confirm the **Product Reviews** block is added to the product section. If not, click **Add block** and choose it from the Apps list.
- Save and reload the storefront

If the block is there but the storefront still shows nothing, the app embed may not be enabled. See the next item.

## Star badges aren't showing on the collection page

Stars on product cards (collection, search and home pages) come from your theme: the app keeps every product's average rating and review count in Shopify's standard rating fields, and the theme shows them on its cards.

- In the theme editor, open a collection page and select the product grid section
- Turn on **Show product rating** (the name can differ slightly between themes)
- Save

The app's **Settings > Storefront widgets** page has an **Open theme editor** button for this. If your theme has no such setting, its product cards don't read ratings; reach out to support if your theme needs a small edit.

Also: badges only show for products with at least one approved, published review. A product with zero reviews intentionally shows no badge (so your store doesn't display empty stars everywhere).

## A submitted review doesn't appear on the storefront

The review is probably in the moderation queue:

- Open the **Reviews** page in the admin
- Filter by **Status: pending**
- If you see the review there, click **Approve** to publish it

If you have **Auto-publish** on but the review still went to pending, check the rating against your threshold. Reviews below the minimum auto-publish rating always go to the queue.

## Review request emails aren't sending

A few things to check in **Settings > Emails**:

- Confirm **Send review request emails** is on
- Check the delay days — if you set it to 30 days, you won't see emails go out for orders less than 30 days old
- Confirm the order's customer has an email on the order (orders without an email can't receive review requests)
- If you verified a sender email or domain, confirm verification is still complete in **Settings > Sender Email**

The email is queued at order payment time, so for already-placed orders, the request goes out N days after that payment date — not from when you turned the setting on.

## Star ratings not showing in Google search results yet

Rich snippets take time:

- Google needs to crawl your updated product pages (a few days for active stores)
- Google decides per query whether to show rich snippets — they don't always show
- Most stores see rich snippets appear within 2–4 weeks of getting their first reviews

Use Google's **Rich Results Test** (search for it) to confirm your structured data is valid. Paste a product page URL and Google will tell you if the AggregateRating data is being detected correctly. If it is, you're set — just wait for Google to surface it.

## Photos aren't uploading

Check:

- The file is under 10 MB
- The format is JPEG, PNG, WebP, or HEIC (videos aren't supported yet)
- The customer is using a modern browser (Chrome, Safari, Firefox, Edge — current versions)

Very large or very high-resolution photos sometimes time out on slow connections. Re-trying usually works.

## Still stuck?

If none of these resolve the issue, contact support with:

- Your store URL
- The specific product or review that's affected
- What you expected to happen
- What's happening instead

---

# Installation

> Install Restock Alerts and add the signup button to your storefront

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock/installation
App: Restock Alerts
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/back-in-stock-reminders
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Restock Alerts adds a "Notify me when available" button to your out-of-stock product pages. When you restock a product, your customers get an email automatically. Here's how to get it set up.

## Install the App

If you haven't already, install Restock Alerts from the Shopify App Store. Once installed, you'll land on the app dashboard where a short setup guide walks you through getting the widget onto your storefront.

## Add the Widget to Your Product Pages

The signup widget is a theme app block that lives on your product pages. The setup guide takes you directly to the right place:

- **Choose your theme** — Select the theme your customers currently see. If you're testing, you can pick an unpublished theme first.
- **Add the widget** — Click **Add product widget**. Your theme editor opens on a product template with the **Restock Alerts** block added at the bottom of the product section. Click **Save**. You can drag it right under the **Buy buttons** block so the editor preview matches your store.

Placement: when a variant is sold out, your theme's buy button stays where it is and reads **Sold out**, and the notify button appears right under it. On your live store, a block that sits anywhere below the buy buttons (even at the bottom of the section, below the description or accordions, as Shopify adds it in Horizon and Dwell) moves up to sit directly under them. If you place the block above the buy buttons, it stays there. The theme editor always shows the block where you put it.

That's it — there is no separate confirmation step. The app detects the widget on your published theme and the setup guide checks itself off. If you placed it on an unpublished theme, the guide finds it there too (it checks your three most recently edited draft themes). Remove the block from every theme and the step unticks.

The widget only appears when the selected variant is sold out, so it's safe to have on every product page. In the theme editor, the block's **Button alignment** setting controls whether the notify-me button sits left, centered, or right within its section.

## Design Your Widget

The theme editor only places the widget. How it looks — popup, slide-over or inline style, colors, and the privacy note — is customized in the app on the **Design** page. The restock email is edited in **Settings > Customer emails**. The setup guide's second step takes you straight there, and changes apply to your storefront instantly.

## Speed and your theme

A slow store loses sales, so Restock Alerts keeps its storefront part small. Here is exactly what it adds, so you can judge the performance cost yourself. It adds nothing to your theme's code and has no app embed: the whole storefront part is the **Restock Alerts** block, which Shopify only allows on product pages. Your home page, collections and cart load nothing from the app.

- On a product page with the block, Shopify loads the block's script (under 4 KB compressed) and a small stylesheet from its own CDN, without holding up the rest of the page.
- The form's wording and the product's variants arrive with the page itself, and the block checks stock with your store's own product data. It contacts our servers only when a shopper submits the form, so the page never waits on us to load.

## Verify It's Working

To check the widget is live:

- Go to your storefront and open a product where at least one variant (size, colour, etc.) is sold out.
- You should see your theme's **Sold out** button with a "Notify me when available" button right under it.
- Click it — a form should appear asking for the customer's email address.

If the button isn't showing, see [The Notify Me Button Is Not Showing](https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock/button-not-showing).

---

# How Restock Alerts Works

> Understand the customer journey from signup to purchase

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock/how-it-works
App: Restock Alerts
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/back-in-stock-reminders
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-09-01
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Restock Alerts handles the full process of collecting customer interest and sending restock emails — so you don't have to do it manually.

## The Customer Journey

- A customer visits a product page and finds their preferred size or variant is sold out.
- They click "Notify me when available" and enter their email address.
- The form only lists variants that are sold out, so nobody signs up for something they can already buy.
- Guests receive a quick confirmation email and must click its link (within 24 hours) before an alert can reach them. Shoppers logged in to your store are confirmed automatically. The confirmation email carries your Brand logo and colours and names the product. This keeps your list to real, willing shoppers and protects your sending reputation.
- Their signup joins the variant's waitlist in **Campaigns**. The home page shows how many shoppers are waiting and how many have confirmed.

## When a Product Restocks

- When a variant can be bought online again, the app sends the alerts. That's when you add stock at a location that sells online, or when you turn on **Continue selling when out of stock**.
- Stock added only at a location that doesn't sell online keeps the alerts waiting, because shoppers still couldn't buy it.
- The app also re-checks waiting products every few hours, so a restock is never missed.
- Every shopper who signed up and confirmed their email gets an email letting them know it's available again.
- The email includes a direct link back to the product so they can buy straight away.
- If you've set up an **Alert Offer**, a discount code is included in the email to give customers an extra nudge to purchase.

## Who the Email Comes From

- No setup is needed. Alert emails send from our authenticated domain with your store's name as the sender, and replies go to your store's contact email.
- To fully white-label the From line, open **Settings > Emails** and verify your own address. You confirm the inbox with a link we send, and add three DNS records so the emails authenticate from your domain.
- Until both checks pass, emails keep sending from our domain so nothing is delayed.

## After the Notification

- Once a shopper is notified, the campaign shows them as *Sent*, then *Delivered* (or *Bounced*), and the campaigns list shows how many alerts went out.
- If a shopper no longer wants to be notified, they can unsubscribe at any time using the link in the email.

## Email Only

Restock alerts are sent by email. Text message (SMS) and push alerts are not available.

## Restock Alerts and Wishlists

Restock Alerts is for any shopper who lands on a sold-out variant: they leave their email right on the product page, with no account or wishlist needed. Our Wishlists app also sends back-in-stock emails (on its Pro plan and higher), but only to shoppers who saved the product to a wishlist and whose email it has. The two apps don't share signups, so a shopper who uses both gets an email from each.

---

# Plans and Limits

> The four plans, what counts as a restock alert, and what happens at the monthly limit

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock/plans-and-limits
App: Restock Alerts
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/back-in-stock-reminders
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Restock Alerts has four flat plans. Every plan includes every feature; plans differ only in how many restock alerts can go out each month. Nothing is ever billed per alert.

## Plans

| Plan | Price | Restock alerts a month |
|---|---|---|
| **Free** | $0 | 50 |
| **Pro** | $9.99/month | 1,000 |
| **Max** | $24.99/month | 10,000 |
| **Ultra** | $49.99/month | Unlimited |

A restock alert is one email sent to one shopper when the variant they asked about is back in stock. Signups don't count, only alerts sent. Alerts are email only: text message (SMS) alerts are not available on any plan.

If your store is on an older plan (Starter, Growth or Plus), it keeps working at the nearest current plan's limit: Starter as Pro, Growth as Max, Plus as Ultra.

## Following your usage

The **Your plan** card on the app's home page shows your plan and this month's count, for example **"320 of 1,000 restock alerts sent this month"**. The bar turns amber at 80%, and a banner appears when you're close to the limit.

## When you reach the limit

- New alerts **wait** instead of sending. They're kept, not lost, and nothing extra is charged.
- When you upgrade, waiting alerts go out right away.
- Otherwise they go out when your next month starts and the count resets.

To change plans, click **Upgrade** on the **Your plan** card, or open **Settings > Plan**.

---

# Campaigns

> See demand per product — who's waiting for a restock, and who was notified once it happened

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock/campaigns
App: Restock Alerts
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/back-in-stock-reminders
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Campaigns are how Restock Alerts organizes demand. Every customer who signs up for a restock alert on the same product variant joins that variant's campaign, so instead of a flat list of individual requests you see demand per product — how many people are waiting, and once you restock, how many were notified.

## How a Campaign Works

- **A campaign starts automatically** the first time a customer signs up for a product that's out of stock. Every later signup for the same variant joins the same campaign.
- **When you restock the product**, the alerts go out to everyone waiting and the campaign completes. Nothing to trigger manually — the app watches your inventory.
- **The next signup after a restock starts a fresh campaign**, so each campaign represents one restock cycle and its results stay intact.

## The Campaigns Page

Open **Campaigns** from the app navigation. Each row shows:

- **Product** — the product and variant the campaign is for
- **Status** — *Collecting* (gathering signups), *Sending* (restock detected, alerts going out), or *Completed* (alerts sent)
- **Waiting / Notified** — how many customers are waiting, or, once the campaign completed, how many alerts were actually sent (guests who never confirmed their email aren't counted)
- **Started and Restocked** — when the first customer signed up and when the restock happened

Use the filter buttons at the top to see only collecting or completed campaigns.

## Campaign Details

Click a campaign to see everyone on it:

- **Subscribers** — each customer's email, signup date, and current status: *Waiting*, *Sent*, *Delivered*, *Bounced*, or *Unsubscribed*
- **Unverified** — customers who signed up as guests but haven't confirmed their email yet. Unverified customers are not emailed; they receive a verification email at signup and join the waitlist the moment they click it. Customers who are logged in to your store when they sign up are verified automatically.
- **Offer attached** — if an offer matched this campaign's product, it's shown here and included in the alert email

- **Place** — while a campaign is collecting, each waiting shopper's place on the list. Alerts go out in this order, earliest signup first. Shoppers see their place when they sign up ("You're #3 in line"), in their storefront language.
- **Clicked** — how many shoppers clicked the button in their alert email, and what share of the alerts sent that is. The button takes them to the product page, tagged `utm_source=restock-alerts` so the visits show in your analytics. See **Alert Clicks and Click Rate** for how clicks are counted.

## Send Alerts Now

On a collecting campaign with confirmed shoppers waiting, **Send alerts now** emails all of them at once, as if the variant had just come back in stock. Use it when you know the variant can be bought but the app can't see it, for example a pre-order. Shoppers who haven't confirmed their email stay on the list. The alerts count toward your plan like any other.

You can do the same from Shopify Flow with the **Send restock alerts now** action (see below).

## Export the Waitlists

**Export CSV** on the Campaigns page downloads every signup (filtered like the list): email, name, product, variant, store, status, whether the shopper confirmed their email, their language, and when they signed up, were emailed and clicked.

## Sending Rules

In **Settings > Customer emails**, **Sending rules** decide when a restock sends and to how many shoppers:

- **Minimum restock** — alerts go out only when at least this many units are back at a location. 1 (the default) sends on any restock.
- **Alerts per unit** — email at most this many shoppers for each unit restocked, earliest signups first. The rest move to the variant's next campaign and keep their place for the next restock. 0 (the default) emails everyone.

Both rules apply to restocks the app sees through your inventory. **Send alerts now**, the Flow action and variants that become buyable through "Continue selling when out of stock" email every confirmed shopper.

## Shopify Flow, Klaviyo and Omnisend

Restock Alerts sends three Flow triggers: **Shopper joined restock waitlist**, **Restock alert sent** and **Restock alert clicked**. Each includes the product, variant, shopper email, product link, product and variant IDs, and the shopper's language. To sync waitlist shoppers to Klaviyo or Omnisend, build a workflow that starts with one of these triggers and adds the Klaviyo or Omnisend action that adds or updates a profile (install their Flow connector first).

The **Send restock alerts now** action takes a variant ID and emails everyone waiting for it. In a workflow that starts with a Restock Alerts trigger, pass the trigger's `{{variantId}}`.

**Ready-made templates:** in Shopify Flow, open **Templates** and search for "restock". *Text shoppers when a waitlisted item is back in stock* sends an SMS through Shopify Messaging to waitlisted shoppers who are subscribed to SMS marketing (install Shopify Messaging and create the message first). There are also templates to tag waitlist customers and to email your team when a waitlist reaches 10, 25, 50 or 100 shoppers.

## On the Product Page in Shopify

The **Restock waitlist** card on a product's page in your Shopify admin shows how many shoppers are waiting for each sold-out variant, how many confirmed their email, and how many alerts the last restock sent. If you don't see it, click **Add block** at the bottom of the product page and choose **Restock waitlist**.

## Reading the Results

- A completed campaign with a high notified count tells you which restocks converted the most waiting demand.
- A collecting campaign with many waiting customers is a restock signal — those are sales waiting on inventory.
- Bounced entries usually mean a mistyped email address; the customer can simply sign up again with the correct one.

---

# Alert Clicks and Click Rate

> See how many shoppers click the button in their restock alert, and what the click rate means

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock/alert-clicks
App: Restock Alerts
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/back-in-stock-reminders
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Restock Alerts counts how many shoppers click the button in their alert email, so you can see whether your alerts bring people back to the product.

## What counts as a click

- Every alert email has a **Shop now** button. It goes through a short Restock Alerts link and then on to the product page, with the restocked variant already selected.
- The app records the **first click** from each alert. A shopper who clicks the same email three times counts once.
- A click is a visit to the product page, not an order. Restock Alerts doesn't know whether the shopper went on to buy.

## Where to see clicks

- **Home page: Alert clicks (30 days).** How many alerts sent in the last 30 days were clicked, and the click rate under it ("20% of alerts sent").
- **Campaign page: Clicked.** On a completed campaign, how many shoppers clicked their alert and what share of the alerts sent that is.
- **Export CSV** on the Campaigns page has a `clicked_at` column with the time of each shopper's first click.

## How the click rate is worked out

The click rate is clicks divided by alerts sent, as a percentage. Only alerts that actually went out count: shoppers who never confirmed their email weren't emailed, so they aren't in the rate. On the home page both numbers cover alerts sent in the last 30 days, so a click on an older alert doesn't count there.

## Clicks in your analytics

The product link is tagged `utm_source=restock-alerts`, `utm_medium=email` and `utm_campaign=back-in-stock`. In Shopify Analytics, or any analytics tool that reads UTM tags, these visits show up as their own source, and you can follow them through to orders there.

## Act on clicks with Shopify Flow

The **Restock alert clicked** Flow trigger runs on each first click. It includes the product, variant, shopper email, product link, product and variant IDs, and the shopper's language. Use it, for example, to tag the customer or add them to a Klaviyo or Omnisend list for a follow-up.

## Ask Sidekick

Shopify Sidekick can read the same numbers: ask "How many people clicked my restock alerts this month?" or "What's my restock alert click rate?".

## Reading the click rate

- A high rate with few sales usually points at the product page: price, stock left or shipping.
- A low rate can mean the restock came long after the signup. An alert offer (a discount code in the email) can help.
- Alerts that land in spam aren't clicked. If the rate drops suddenly, check **Customers Are Not Receiving Notifications**.

---

# Alert Offers

> Add a discount code to your back-in-stock emails to encourage customers to buy

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock/alert-offers
App: Restock Alerts
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/back-in-stock-reminders
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-29
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Alert Offers let you include a discount code in your back-in-stock emails. When a product restocks and a customer gets notified, they'll also see an exclusive offer — giving them a strong reason to buy straight away instead of waiting.

## Creating an Offer

Go to **Alert Offers** in the app menu and click **Create offer**. Fill in:

- **Title** — an internal name for the offer, so you can identify it later (customers don't see this).
- **Description** — a short line explaining the offer, shown in the email (e.g. "Welcome back — here's 10% off your order").
- **Discount code** — enter an existing discount code from your Shopify store, spelled exactly as it is there. The app doesn't create codes and can't check that a code exists, so set it up in Shopify first under **Discounts** (the **Open Discounts** link under the field takes you there), then paste it here.
- **Start date** — when the offer becomes active. Leave blank to make it available immediately.
- **Expiry date** — when the offer expires. Add a deadline to create urgency (e.g. "Offer expires in 48 hours").

## Linking an Offer to Products

Once you've created an offer, you can attach it to specific products. When a customer signs up for any of those products and gets notified, they'll receive the offer in their email.

To link products to an offer, open the offer and use the **Add products** option to select which items it applies to.

## Tips for Getting the Best Results

- **Use a real discount code** — always create the code in Shopify first and test it before attaching it to an offer.
- **Set an expiry date** — limited-time offers convert better than open-ended ones.
- **Keep the description short** — one sentence is enough. The customer is already motivated; you just need to seal the deal.

---

# Translations

> Customise the text customers see in any language

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock/translations
App: Restock Alerts
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/back-in-stock-reminders
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The text shoppers see — the signup button, the popup or inline form, the confirmation message and the restock email — can be changed to fit your brand, in your store's language.

## Your Shoppers' Language

Restock Alerts follows the language each shopper browses your store in:

- **The signup form** shows in the shopper's storefront language for every language your store publishes (Settings > Languages in Shopify). The app ships its text in 49 languages; a language it doesn't ship shows your store's own language.
- **The confirmation and restock emails** go out in the language the shopper signed up in, subject line included.
- **Your edits win in your store's language.** Text you change in **Settings > Customer emails** is what shoppers in your store's language see. Shoppers in other languages see the app's wording in their language.
- The **Privacy policy** link and the per-store lines shown with our Nearby Stock app follow the shopper's language too.

## What Can Be Changed

- **Signup button** — the label on the "Notify me when available" button on product pages
- **Signup form** — the heading, description, placeholder text and submit button
- **Confirmation message** — what shoppers see after they submit the form
- **Restock email** — the subject line, heading, message and button, edited in **Settings > Customer emails**

## How to Edit the Text

- Email wording: open **Settings > Customer emails** and edit the fields next to the live preview.
- Form wording: open **Settings > Customer emails > Advanced editor (HTML)** and follow the link to the translations page, where each text field can be edited.

## Tips

- **Keep button text short** — "Notify me" or "Alert me" works better on mobile than longer phrases.
- **Match your brand voice** — the default text is neutral, so feel free to make it your own.

---

# Per-Store Alerts with Nearby Stock

> Let shoppers ask to hear when an item is back at their own store

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock/per-store-alerts
App: Restock Alerts
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/back-in-stock-reminders
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If you also use our Nearby Stock app, Restock Alerts can alert shoppers when an item is back at the store they chose, not just when it is back somewhere. It turns on by itself: there is nothing to connect or configure.

## What shoppers see

- Nearby Stock lets shoppers pick their store. When they have picked one, the signup form on your product page reads "Notify me when it's back at Pearl District" instead of the usual wording.
- A link under the form lets them switch to **Any store instead**, and back to **Only at Pearl District**.
- If they change their store in Nearby Stock, the form follows straight away.
- Shoppers who have not picked a store, and stores without Nearby Stock, see the form exactly as before.

## How the alerts are sent

- A shopper who asked for one store is emailed only when that store's stock for the variant goes above zero. Stock arriving at another location does not trigger their alert.
- Shoppers who chose any store are emailed as soon as the variant is back at any location, as always.
- Store alerts say where the item is: the subject reads "Back in stock at Pearl District", and the email names the store.

## Per-store waitlists in Campaigns

- Signups for the same variant and the same store are grouped into one campaign, so each store has its own waitlist.
- In **Campaigns**, a store badge shows which store a campaign is for. Campaigns without a badge are for any store.
- The store also appears on the campaign page, and in customer data exports.

## Custom subjects and templates

- If you write your own email subject, you can include the store name with `{location_name}`.
- In custom email templates, use `{{location_name}}`.
- For alerts without a store, both are left empty.

## Plans

- Per-store alerts are included on every Restock Alerts plan and every Nearby Stock plan.
- Each email counts toward your monthly alert allowance, the same as any other alert.

---

# The Notify Me Button Is Not Showing

> Steps to take if customers cannot see the signup button on out-of-stock products

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock/button-not-showing
App: Restock Alerts
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/back-in-stock-reminders
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If customers can't see the "Notify me when available" button on out-of-stock products, there are a few things to check.

## 1. Check That the Widget Is Added to Your Theme

The most common reason the button doesn't appear is that the product widget hasn't been added to your theme.

- In the app, go to **Settings** and look at the installation status.
- If it shows **Not installed**, click the link to open your Shopify theme editor on a product template.
- Add the **Restock Alerts** product widget block where you want it (under the Add to Cart button works well).
- Click **Save** in the theme editor.

## 2. Check the Product Is Actually Out of Stock

The button only appears when a product variant has zero inventory and your store is set to stop selling when out of stock.

- In Shopify, go to the product and check the inventory for the variant in question.
- Make sure **"Continue selling when out of stock"** is **not** ticked — if it is, Shopify keeps showing the Add to Cart button and the notify button won't appear.

## 3. Check You're Looking at the Right Theme

If you have multiple themes, make sure the widget was added to the theme that's currently published (live) to your store.

- In Shopify, go to **Online Store → Themes**.
- The published theme has a green **Current theme** badge. Make sure the widget block is on that theme's product template.

## 4. Try a Hard Refresh

If you just made changes, your browser may be showing a cached version of the page. Try opening the product page in a private/incognito window or pressing Ctrl+Shift+R (Cmd+Shift+R on Mac) to force a refresh.

## 5. Test With a Specific Variant

If your product has multiple variants (sizes, colours, etc.), only the variants that are out of stock will show the button. Make sure you're selecting a variant that has no inventory.

---

# Customers Are Not Receiving Notifications

> What to check if back-in-stock emails are not being delivered

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock/notifications-not-sending
App: Restock Alerts
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/back-in-stock-reminders
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/back-in-stock
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-29
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If shoppers are signing up but not receiving their restock emails, work through these checks in order.

## 1. Check the Shopper Confirmed Their Email

Shoppers who sign up as guests get a confirmation email first, and alerts only go to shoppers who clicked the link in it. This is the most common reason an alert didn't arrive.

- Open **Campaigns** and click the product's campaign. Each shopper shows whether they're **Verified**.
- A shopper who hadn't confirmed at the restock gets the alert as soon as they click the link (the link is valid for 24 hours; after that they can sign up again).
- Shoppers who are logged in to your store when they sign up are confirmed automatically.
- The confirmation email comes from your store: your Brand logo and colours, your store name, and the product the shopper asked about, in their language.
- The campaign page and the **Restock waitlist** card on the product page say how many of them have confirmed.

## 2. Check the Variant Can Be Bought Online

Alerts go out when Shopify says the variant can be bought again, not just when a number changes.

- Stock added at a location that doesn't sell online (a warehouse or a store not on your Online Store) leaves the product sold out on your storefront, so no alert is sent yet.
- Turning on **Continue selling when out of stock** makes the variant buyable without any stock, and the waitlist's alerts go out.
- The app also re-checks waiting products every few hours, so a restock it missed is picked up without you doing anything.

## 3. Check the Campaign's Status

Open **Campaigns** and find the product:

- **Collecting** — the app hasn't seen the variant come back yet. See step 2.
- **Sending** or **Completed** — alerts went out. Open it to see each shopper's status: *Sent*, *Delivered*, *Bounced* or *Failed*.
- **Bounced** usually means a mistyped address; the shopper can sign up again with the right one.

## 4. Check You Haven't Reached Your Monthly Limit

Each plan sends a set number of restock alerts a month (Free 50, Pro 1,000, Max 10,000, Ultra unlimited). At the limit, new alerts wait instead of sending.

- On the app's home page, the **Your plan** card shows this month's count, for example **"50 of 50 restock alerts sent this month"**.
- Waiting alerts go out as soon as you upgrade, or when your next month starts. They aren't lost, and nothing extra is charged.

## 5. Ask the Shopper to Check Their Spam Folder

Restock emails can occasionally land in spam, especially with strict email providers. Ask them to check their **Spam** or **Junk** folder and search for your store name. Verifying your own sending address in **Settings > Customer emails** also helps delivery.

Restock alerts are sent by email only. Text message (SMS) alerts are not available.

---

# Installation

> Turn on the SEO Turbo app embed and get your first SEO audit

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/installation
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

SEO Turbo audits every product, collection, page and blog post in your store, writes better search titles and meta descriptions with AI, finds broken links and redirects them, adds structured data (schema) for rich results, and shows you what AI assistants like ChatGPT read about your store. Setup takes a couple of minutes: turn on the app embed, and your first audit runs on its own.

## Install the app

Install SEO Turbo from the Shopify App Store and open it from your Shopify admin. As soon as the app is installed, it starts your first **content audit** in the background. You don't need to click anything. Results usually appear within a minute or two.

## Turn on the app embed

The setup guide on the home page walks you through the storefront part. The **SEO Turbo** app embed adds structured data to your pages and reports the pages visitors can't find. The app needs it for everything that happens on your storefront.

1. In the setup guide, pick the theme to install on. Your live theme is selected by default.
2. Click **Activate app on theme**. The theme editor opens with **SEO Turbo** under **App embeds**.
3. Make sure the toggle is on, then click **Save** in the theme editor.

The app embed has no settings of its own. Everything is configured in the app, and your changes reach the storefront automatically. If you later switch to a different theme, turn the app embed on in that theme too.

## Add the FAQ block (optional)

The next step adds the **FAQ (SEO Turbo)** block, a visible list of questions and answers with matching FAQ structured data. It's optional and part of the Max plan and up. See [FAQ Block](../features/faq-block.md).

## Review your first SEO audit

The last step, **Review your first SEO audit**, takes you to **SEO content**. There you'll see a score for every item, the pages that need the most work, and **Write with AI** to get a new title and description for any of them.

After that, it's worth taking a look at:

- **Broken links** - run **Scan for broken links** to find links that lead nowhere
- **Schema** - check which structured data types are on and fill in your business details
- **AI discovery** - run **Check AI discovery** to see what AI assistants find on your store

## Finding the setup guide later

The setup guide stays on the home page until every step is done. You can open it again at any time from **Settings > Installation**, for example after switching themes.

---

# Dashboard Overview

> What the numbers on the home page mean and where each one leads

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/dashboard-overview
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The SEO Turbo home page tells you whether your store's SEO is in good shape and what to fix next. It fills in after your first content audit. Every number links straight to the list behind it.

## The four numbers

- **Average SEO score** - the average score of every item audited, out of 100. Click it to open **SEO content**.
- **Need attention** - how many items score below 70, out of the total audited. Click it to see the lowest scores first.
- **Open broken links** - broken links that haven't been redirected or ignored yet. Click it to open **Broken links**.
- **AI rewrites left this month** - how many AI rewrites your plan still has this month, out of the monthly allowance.

## Banners

- **AI suggestions waiting for review** - AI has written titles and descriptions that you haven't applied yet. Click **Review suggestions** to go through them.
- **Visitors hit missing pages** - real shoppers landed on pages that don't exist. Click **Fix broken links** to redirect them before you lose more traffic.

## Most common issues

This list shows the five issues found most often across your store, with how many items have each one. Fixing one of them usually lifts many scores at once. **Fix the lowest scores first** opens the items that need the most work. [SEO Scores and Issues](../features/seo-scores.md) explains every issue.

## Audits

This list shows each of the four audits and when it last ran:

- **Content audit** - scores your products, collections, pages and blog posts
- **Broken link scan** - checks the links on your store
- **Theme review** - checks your theme's code and pages (Pro and up)
- **AI discovery check** - checks what AI assistants and crawlers can read

Click an audit to open its page and run it again. Your current plan is shown below the list.

## Finding your way around

The app menu in the Shopify admin has one page for each area: **SEO content**, **Broken links**, **Schema**, **AI discovery**, **Theme review** and **Settings**.

---

# Plans and Pricing

> What Starter, Pro, Max and Ultra include and their limits

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/plans-and-pricing
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

SEO Turbo has four plans. Every plan includes the content audit, AI rewrites, broken link monitoring with redirects, core schema and the AI discovery check. Higher plans raise the limits and unlock more features. Every plan comes with a 7-day free trial, and development stores use the app for free.

## Plans at a glance

- **Starter** - $4.99/month
- **Pro** - $9.99/month
- **Max** - $24.99/month
- **Ultra** - $49.99/month

## Limits

- **Items audited** - Starter 150, Pro 2,000, Max 20,000, Ultra unlimited
- **AI rewrites per month** - Starter 25, Pro 300, Max 1,500, Ultra 6,000
- **Links checked per scan** - Starter 250, Pro 2,500, Max 20,000, Ultra 50,000
- **Redirects per month** - Starter 25, unlimited on Pro and up

When your store has more items than your plan audits, SEO Turbo audits the most recent ones. The AI rewrite and redirect allowances reset at the start of each calendar month.

## What each plan includes

- **Starter** - content audit and SEO scores, AI rewrites, broken link scan, visitor 404 tracking, redirects, Product, Organization, Breadcrumbs and Website schema, AI discovery check, weekly automatic re-audit
- **Pro** - everything in Starter, plus bulk AI rewrite and apply, Theme review, the llms.txt generator, AI crawler rules for robots.txt, Collection, Blog post and Site search box schema, and a daily automatic re-audit
- **Max** - everything in Pro, plus FAQ, Local business and Return policy schema, the FAQ block, checks for links to other websites and images, and a rescan whenever a product or collection changes
- **Ultra** - everything in Max, plus Custom JSON-LD and unlimited items audited

Every plan gets the app in all its languages.

## Stores on the Free plan

Starter replaced the Free plan on November 9, 2026. Stores that installed SEO Turbo before then and haven't chosen a paid plan keep the Free plan's features, the same as Starter's, at no charge. Free is no longer offered to new installs.

## Locked features

Features that aren't in your plan stay visible in the app. They show a badge with the plan that unlocks them, for example **Pro plan**, and an **Upgrade** button that takes you to Shopify's plan page.

## Changing plans

To upgrade or downgrade, go to **Settings > Billing**. Shopify handles the subscription and the charge appears on your Shopify bill.

After a downgrade, schema types that aren't in your new plan stop appearing on your storefront automatically. You don't need to change your theme. Your choices are kept, so if you upgrade again, those types come back the way you left them.

---

# SEO Scores and Issues

> How each page is scored and what every issue means

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/seo-scores
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The content audit reads every product, collection, page and blog post in your store and scores how each one will look in search results. The **SEO content** page lists them all, lowest score first, so you always know what to fix next.

## What the content audit checks

The first audit runs by itself right after you install SEO Turbo. After that it runs again automatically (see [SEO Settings](settings.md)), or you can click **Run content audit** on the **SEO content** page at any time.

For each item SEO Turbo looks at:

- The SEO title (or the page title Shopify uses when no SEO title is set)
- The meta description
- The amount of text on the page
- Image alt text
- The URL handle
- Whether another item uses the same title or description

## Scores

Every item gets a score out of 100. Each issue found lowers the score, and more serious issues lower it more.

- **Poor** - under 60
- **Fair** - 60 to 84
- **Good** - 85 and above

The **Average score** at the top of the page is the average across everything audited.

## Issues and how to fix them

Each issue has a severity: **High**, **Medium** or **Low**.

- **No SEO title** (Medium) - Shopify falls back to the page title. Write a title that leads with what people search for.
- **Title too short** (Low) - under 30 characters. Aim for 30-60 so it describes the page fully.
- **Title too long** (Medium) - over 60 characters. Google cuts titles at about 60, so the end is hidden.
- **Duplicate title** (High) - another item uses the same title. Make each title unique.
- **No meta description** (High) - Google picks random text from the page instead. Write 120-155 characters that make people click.
- **Description too short** (Medium) or **Description too long** (Medium) - aim for 120-155 characters; Google cuts descriptions at about 155-160.
- **Duplicate description** (High) - make each description specific to its page.
- **No content** (High) - the page has no text, so search engines can't tell what it is about.
- **Thin content** (Medium) - fewer words than pages of that type usually need to rank (about 50 for products, 30 for collections, 150 for pages and 300 for blog posts).
- **Images without alt text** (Medium) - alt text helps image search and screen readers. Add it in the Shopify admin on the product or page.
- **Long URL** (Low) - the URL handle is over 60 characters. Short, readable URLs are easier to share.

## Finding what to fix

On the **SEO content** page you can:

- Filter by **Type** (product, collection, page, blog post)
- Filter by **Score** (Poor, Fair, Good, or **AI suggestion ready**)
- **Search** by title or handle

Click any item to open it. You'll see a **Search result preview** that shows roughly how the listing looks in Google, and a **What to fix** list with every issue on that item.

## Editing a listing yourself

Under **Edit manually** you can type your own **SEO title** and **Meta description** and click **Save to Shopify**. This doesn't use any AI rewrites. The change is written to the product, collection, page or blog post in Shopify and the item is scored again straight away.

If you change your mind, click **Undo** to put back the title and description the item had before the last change.

Prefer to let AI write it? See [AI Rewrites](ai-rewrites.md).

## Plan limit on items audited

Each plan audits up to a set number of items: 150 on Starter, 2,000 on Pro, 20,000 on Max and unlimited on Ultra. If your store has more, SEO Turbo audits the most recently updated items. See [Plans and Pricing](../getting-started/plans-and-pricing.md).

---

# AI Rewrites

> Let AI write your SEO titles and meta descriptions, then review, apply or undo

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/ai-rewrites
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

SEO Turbo can write a new SEO title and meta description for any product, collection, page or blog post. You review the suggestion first, and nothing changes in your store until you apply it.

## Writing a suggestion

1. Open **SEO content** and click the item you want to improve.
2. In the **AI rewrite** section, click **Write with AI**.
3. After a few seconds the suggestion appears: a new **SEO title**, a **Meta description**, the **Focus keyword** it targeted and a short note on what changed and why.

Items with a suggestion waiting show **Suggestion ready** in the list, and the **AI suggestion ready** filter shows only those.

## Reviewing and applying

You can edit the suggested title and description before using them. When you're happy, click **Apply to Shopify**. SEO Turbo writes the new title and description to the item in Shopify and scores it again.

Don't like it? Click **Write another version** for a fresh suggestion.

## Undo

After applying, click **Undo** to restore the title and description the item had before. If the item had no custom SEO title or description before, Undo removes them again so Shopify goes back to its default.

## What the AI writes

- Titles of 30-60 characters that lead with what the page is and the most relevant search phrase
- Descriptions of 120-155 characters that say what the shopper gets, ending with a gentle call to action
- Text in the same language as the page
- Only facts found in your page content. It won't invent prices, discounts, awards, stock levels or shipping promises.

## Brand voice and keywords

In **Settings**, you can describe your **Brand voice for AI rewrites** (for example "Warm, playful, no jargon") and list **Keywords to rank for**. The AI uses your keywords only where they fit the page. See [SEO Settings](settings.md).

## Monthly allowance

Each suggestion uses one AI rewrite from your plan's monthly allowance: 25 on Starter, 300 on Pro, 1,500 on Max and 6,000 on Ultra. **Write another version** uses another one. The count resets at the start of each calendar month. The home page and the **SEO content** page show how many you have left.

If a rewrite fails before it finishes, it doesn't count against your allowance.

To write suggestions for many items at once, see [Bulk Rewrite and Apply](bulk-rewrite.md).

---

# Bulk Rewrite and Apply

> Write and apply AI titles and descriptions for many items at once (Pro and up)

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/bulk-rewrite
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

On the Pro plan and up, you can write and apply AI titles and descriptions for many items at once from the **SEO content** page.

## Writing suggestions in bulk

1. Open **SEO content**.
2. Tick the items you want to improve, or leave everything unticked to use the 25 items with the lowest scores.
3. Under **Bulk AI rewrite and apply**, click **Write with AI**.

SEO Turbo writes the suggestions in the background. The page switches to the **AI suggestion ready** filter, and suggestions appear there as they're ready. You can keep working in the meantime.

Nothing is changed in your store at this point. Each suggestion waits for you to review or apply it.

## Applying suggestions in bulk

1. On **SEO content**, choose the **AI suggestion ready** filter to see everything waiting.
2. Open any item to check or edit its suggestion first, if you like.
3. Tick the items to apply, or leave everything unticked to apply every waiting suggestion.
4. Click **Apply suggestions**.

A message tells you how many were applied and how many Shopify didn't accept. Up to 100 suggestions are applied per click.

## How the monthly allowance limits a bulk run

Each suggestion uses one AI rewrite from your monthly allowance. If you select more items than you have rewrites left, SEO Turbo writes suggestions only for as many as your allowance covers. When the allowance is used up, bulk writing is paused until the next month or until you upgrade.

## Undoing one item

Every item keeps its previous title and description. To reverse one change after a bulk apply, open the item and click **Undo**.

On the Starter plan, **Write with AI** works one item at a time; the bulk actions show a **Pro plan** badge and an **Upgrade** button.

---

# Broken Links and Redirects

> Find links that lead nowhere and redirect them in one click

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/broken-links
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Broken links send shoppers and search engines to pages that don't exist. SEO Turbo finds them two ways and lets you fix most of them with a single redirect.

## How broken links are found

- **The broken link scan** - click **Scan for broken links** on the **Broken links** page. SEO Turbo checks the links inside your products, collections, pages and blog posts, and also loads your home page and your most recently updated pages to catch links in menus, footers and sections. It also runs automatically with your re-audits.
- **Visitor 404 tracking** - when a real visitor lands on a page that doesn't exist, the SEO Turbo app embed reports it. These appear with **Visitor** under **Found by**, along with how many **Hits** they've had.

Links you've already redirected in Shopify count as working. Each plan checks up to a set number of links per scan: 250 on Starter, 2,500 on Pro, 20,000 on Max and 50,000 on Ultra.

## The tabs

- **Open** - broken links that still need attention
- **Redirected** - links you've redirected, with where they now point
- **Ignored** - links you chose to ignore
- **Fixed** - links that work again or that nothing links to any more

When a later scan finds that a scan-found link works again, it moves to **Fixed** by itself. Visitor-reported links stay open until you redirect or ignore them.

## Redirecting a broken link

1. On the **Open** tab, find the link. **Linked from** shows the page it was found on.
2. Under **Fix**, the **Redirect to** field is filled with the closest match SEO Turbo found in your store, for example a product with a similar handle.
3. Change the target if you like. Enter a path on your store (starting with /) or a full https:// address.
4. Click **Redirect**.

SEO Turbo creates the redirect in Shopify (you'll also see it under **Online Store > Navigation > URL redirects**) and moves the link to **Redirected**.

## Ignoring a link

If a link doesn't matter, click **Ignore**. You can bring it back with **Reopen**.

## Redirect allowance

The Starter plan includes 25 redirects a month. Pro and up have unlimited redirects. The **Broken links** page shows how many you have left this month.

## Links to other websites and images

On the Max plan and up, the scan also checks links to other websites and images. These show as **External** or **Image**. Links to other websites can't be redirected from your store, so fix them by editing the page that links there.

## Password-protected stores

If your storefront is password protected, the scan can't load your pages. It checks links against your catalog instead, and visitor 404 tracking starts once your store is open.

For how the visitor reports work, see [Visitor 404 Tracking](../developers/visitor-404-beacon.md). If a redirect won't save, see [Redirect Not Created](../troubleshooting/redirects-not-created.md).

---

# Schema (Structured Data)

> Add JSON-LD structured data for rich results without editing theme code

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/schema
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Structured data (JSON-LD) tells Google exactly what each page is, such as a product with its price and stock, your business, or a blog post, so it can show rich results like prices, availability and breadcrumbs. SEO Turbo adds it through the app embed. You don't edit any theme code.

## Before you start

The **SEO Turbo** app embed must be turned on in your live theme. The setup guide on the home page does this for you; see [Installation](../getting-started/installation.md).

## Structured data types

Turn each type on or off on the **Schema** page, then click **Save**. Your store shows the change within a minute.

- **Product** (all plans) - name, images, brand, SKU, barcode, price and stock for every variant, on product pages
- **Organization** (all plans) - your business name, logo and social profiles, on the home page
- **Breadcrumbs** (all plans) - the page's position in your store, shown in search results instead of the URL
- **Website** (all plans) - your site name on the home page, which Google uses as the site name in results
- **Site search box** (Pro and up) - tells Google how to search your store
- **Collection** (Pro and up) - collection pages as a list of their products
- **Blog post** (Pro and up) - headline, author, dates and image for blog posts
- **FAQ** (Max and up) - questions and answers from the FAQ block; see [FAQ Block](faq-block.md)
- **Local business** (Max and up) - address, phone and opening hours for a physical store, on the home page
- **Return policy** (Max and up) - your return window and fees on every product offer, used by Google Shopping

Types that aren't in your plan show the plan that unlocks them. If you downgrade, those types stop appearing on your storefront automatically, and your choices are kept for when you upgrade again.

## Business details

These fill in your Organization markup. Leave a field empty to use what Shopify already knows about your store.

- **Business name**
- **Logo URL** - a square or wide logo image, at least 112×112 pixels
- **Short description**
- **Customer service email** and **Phone**
- **Social profiles** - one https:// link per line (Instagram, Facebook, TikTok, YouTube and so on)

## Physical store

Fill this in if customers can visit you. It's used when **Local business** is on: **Street address**, **City**, **State or region**, **Postal code**, **Country code**, **Price range** and **Opening hours**. Write one opening-hours range per line, for example `Mo-Fr 09:00-18:00`.

## Returns

Used when **Return policy** is on. Enter your **Return window (days)** and choose **Starter returns** or **Customer pays return shipping**.

## Custom JSON-LD (Ultra)

On the Ultra plan you can paste your own JSON-LD, which is printed on every page. It must be valid JSON; SEO Turbo won't save it otherwise.

## Duplicate schema from your theme or other apps

Many themes already print some structured data, often Product or Organization. If your theme and SEO Turbo print the same type, search engines see it twice. Run [Theme Review](theme-review.md) (Pro and up): it lists the theme files that print their own JSON-LD and flags types that appear more than once on a page. Turn off that type in SEO Turbo, or remove it from the theme, so each type has one source.

For exactly what SEO Turbo prints on each page, see [Structured Data Output](../developers/structured-data-output.md).

---

# FAQ Block

> Add a visible FAQ with matching FAQ structured data (Max and up)

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/faq-block
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The **FAQ (SEO Turbo)** block adds a visible list of questions and answers to any page, with matching FAQ structured data. It's part of the Max plan and up.

## Why the questions must be visible

Google only accepts FAQ structured data when the same questions and answers are visible on the page. That's why SEO Turbo uses a block you place on the page, rather than adding FAQ markup behind the scenes.

## Adding the block

1. Make sure **FAQ** is turned on in the **Schema** page in SEO Turbo.
2. In Shopify, go to **Online Store > Themes** and click **Customize** on your live theme.
3. Open the page template where you want the FAQ, for example a product page or your FAQ page.
4. Click **Add block** or **Add section**, then choose **FAQ (SEO Turbo)** under **Apps**.
5. Enter an optional heading and up to six questions with their answers.
6. Click **Save**.

The setup guide on the SEO Turbo home page also has a step that opens the theme editor for you.

## How it looks

Each question appears as a row that shoppers can click to open the answer. Only questions that have both a question and an answer are shown. The block uses your theme's fonts and colours.

## If the block shows nothing

- Check that **FAQ** is on under **Schema** and click **Save**.
- Check your plan. On plans below Max the block shows nothing on your storefront.
- Make sure at least one question has both a question and an answer.

See [Structured Data Not Showing](../troubleshooting/schema-not-showing.md) for more checks.

---

# AI Discovery (llms.txt, agents.md and robots.txt)

> Control what ChatGPT, Claude, Perplexity and AI shopping agents read about your store

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/ai-discovery
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

AI assistants like ChatGPT, Claude and Perplexity, Google's AI answers and AI shopping agents all read your store. The **AI discovery** page shows what they see and lets you control it.

## What Shopify serves to AI assistants

Shopify publishes these files for every store automatically:

- **/agents.md** - Shopify's main description of your store for AI agents
- **/llms.txt** - a summary of your store for large language models
- **/llms-full.txt** - the longer version of llms.txt
- **/robots.txt** - rules for which crawlers may read your store
- **/sitemap.xml** - the list of pages search engines should index
- **/api/mcp** - Shopify's storefront endpoint that AI shopping agents use to search products and build carts

## The AI discovery check (all plans)

Click **Check AI discovery** to see whether each file is available, what your llms.txt says right now, which AI crawlers your robots.txt allows, and how ready your catalog is for AI shopping. The check also runs with your automatic re-audits.

## Why a theme template is needed

Shopify only lets you customise llms.txt, agents.md and robots.txt through templates in your published theme. SEO Turbo writes the template for you. You paste it into your theme once, and SEO Turbo checks that it's still there and up to date.

## Writing your llms.txt (Pro and up)

Under **Your llms.txt**, describe your store in your own words:

- **One-paragraph summary** - who you are and what you sell. Leave it empty to use your store description.
- **Who you serve**
- **Why shop with you** - one point per line, for example free returns or handmade in Portugal
- **Shipping and returns in a sentence**
- **Anything else AI assistants should know**
- **Collections to list** and **Products to list**, and whether to **List your pages** (About, Contact, FAQ and so on)

Click **Save and regenerate**. SEO Turbo combines your text with your chosen collections, products and policies into an llms.txt template.

## Installing the template

1. Click **Copy llms.txt template**.
2. In Shopify, go to **Online Store > Themes**, open the **⋯** menu on your live theme and choose **Edit code**.
3. In the **templates** folder, add a new file named `llms.txt.liquid`, paste and save. To replace both llms.txt and agents.md with your version, name it `agents.md.liquid` instead.
4. Come back and click **Check AI discovery** to confirm it's live.

## Template statuses

- **Up to date** - your theme has SEO Turbo's latest template
- **Out of date - paste the new version** - you've changed your llms.txt or your catalog since you pasted it. Copy the template again and replace the file.
- **Custom (not from SEO Turbo)** - the file exists but wasn't made by SEO Turbo
- **Not installed** - Shopify's default is used

## AI crawler rules (Pro and up)

The **AI crawlers** table lists the main AI crawlers, the company behind each and what it's used for:

- **AI answers and search** crawlers (for example OAI-SearchBot, ChatGPT-User, Claude-SearchBot, PerplexityBot) decide whether your store can be cited in AI answers. Blocking them keeps you out of those answers.
- **Model training** crawlers (for example GPTBot, ClaudeBot, Google-Extended, CCBot) only collect training data. Blocking them doesn't affect AI answers.

Under **AI crawler rules**, choose **Allow** or **Block** for each, save, then click **Copy robots.txt template** and add it as `templates/robots.txt.liquid` the same way. It keeps Shopify's default rules and adds your choices.

## Catalog readiness for AI shopping

AI assistants recommend products they can understand. This section shows how many products have a real description (50 words or more), a meta description, and alt text on all images. Click **Improve the weakest products** to go straight to them.

If your store still shows Shopify's default llms.txt, see [llms.txt or agents.md Not Changing](../troubleshooting/llms-txt-not-changing.md).

---

# Theme Review

> Check your live theme's code and pages the way a search engine sees them (Pro and up)

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/theme-review
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Theme review checks your live theme's code and one page of each type the way a search engine sees them. It's part of the Pro plan and up.

## Running a theme review

Open **Theme review** and click **Review theme**. It takes a minute or two. The review looks at your published theme only.

## Theme code checks

- **Page title tag** - the layout prints the title with `page_title`
- **Meta description tag** - the theme prints a meta description from `page_description`
- **Canonical URL** - a canonical link in the head
- **Social sharing tags (Open Graph)** - without og tags, shared links show no image or title
- **X (Twitter) card tags** - for rich previews on X
- **Mobile viewport** - required for mobile-friendly pages
- **Page language** - the html tag declares the language
- **No stray noindex** - flags "noindex" in the theme head so you can make sure it only applies to pages you want hidden
- **H1 headings** - product, collection, page and blog post templates each have an H1 heading

## Page checks

SEO Turbo loads your home page and one product, collection, page and blog post (the lowest-scoring of each) and checks:

- The page loads
- **Title** length (aim for 20-65 characters) and **Meta description** length (aim for 70-160)
- Exactly **one H1 heading**
- A **canonical URL**
- A **social sharing image** (og:image)
- The page **can be indexed**
- **Images have alt text**
- **Structured data is valid JSON**
- **No duplicate structured data** - the same type printed more than once
- The expected structured data is present: Product on product pages, Blog post on blog posts, Organization on the home page

## Pass, Check and Fix

Each check shows **Pass**, **Check** or **Fix**. The theme score is the share of checks that pass, with **Check** counting as half.

## Theme files that print their own structured data

If any theme files contain JSON-LD, they're listed under **Your theme prints structured data too**. That's only a problem when they print the same types as SEO Turbo. If they do, turn that type off under **Schema** or remove it from the theme. See [Schema (Structured Data)](schema.md).

## Password-protected stores

If your storefront is password protected, only the theme code is checked. Page checks run once your store is open.

---

# SEO Settings

> 404 tracking, automatic re-audits and AI writing preferences

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/settings
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

SEO Turbo's own settings are in the **SEO Turbo** section of the app's **Settings** page.

## Track pages visitors cannot find

When this is on, the app embed reports pages visitors land on that don't exist (404s), so you can redirect them from **Broken links**. Only the missing address is stored, never anything about the visitor. It's on by default. See [Visitor 404 Tracking](../developers/visitor-404-beacon.md).

## Re-audit automatically

When this is on, SEO Turbo runs the content audit, the broken link scan and the AI discovery check again on its own:

- **Weekly** on the Starter plan (and Free)
- **Daily** on Pro and up

## Rescan when a product or collection changes (Max and up)

On the Max plan and up, SEO Turbo also re-scores a product or collection as soon as you edit it in Shopify, so scores stay current between audits. This happens automatically; there's nothing to switch on.

## Brand voice for AI rewrites

A few words on how your store sounds, for example "Warm, playful, no jargon". The AI uses this tone when it writes titles and descriptions.

## Keywords to rank for

A comma-separated list of search terms, for example "organic cotton, baby clothes". The AI uses them only where they fit the page, so you won't get keyword-stuffed titles.

Click **Save** when you're done. Your current plan is shown at the bottom of the section.

---

# Structured Data Output

> Exactly which JSON-LD the SEO Turbo app embed prints on each template

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/structured-data-output
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: For Developers
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

This article lists exactly which JSON-LD the **SEO Turbo** app embed prints, so you can check it against your theme's own markup or link your own markup to it.

## Where it prints

The app embed prints into the page `<head>` of your published theme, as one `<script type="application/ld+json">` per type. It prints only the types that are turned on under **Schema** and included in your plan. Nothing is printed when the app embed is off.

## Home page

- **Organization** (or **Store** when Local business is on) with `@id` `{shop.url}/#organization`: name, url, logo, description, social profiles (`sameAs`) and a customer service `contactPoint`. With Local business on, it also has `address`, `telephone`, `priceRange` and `openingHours`.
- **WebSite** with `@id` `{shop.url}/#website`: name and url. With Site search box on, it includes a `SearchAction` pointing to your store's search page with `?q={search_term_string}`.

## Product pages

- **Product** with `@id` `{canonical_url}#product`: name, description, images, `brand` (the product vendor), SKU and barcode.
- One **Offer** per variant, with price, currency, `availability` (InStock or OutOfStock), `itemCondition` NewCondition and `seller` linked to `{shop.url}/#organization`.
- With Return policy on, each offer has a `MerchantReturnPolicy` with your return window and whether returns are free.

## Collection pages

- **CollectionPage** with name, url and description, and an `ItemList` of the first 20 products in the collection.

## Blog posts

- **BlogPosting** with headline, description, image, `mainEntityOfPage`, `datePublished`, `dateModified`, `author` (a Person) and `publisher` (your business name and logo).

## Breadcrumbs

- **BreadcrumbList** on every page except the home page: your store, then the collection (on a product reached through a collection) or the blog (on a blog post), then the current page.

## FAQ block

- **FAQPage** is printed by the **FAQ (SEO Turbo)** block itself, next to the visible questions, with one `Question` and `acceptedAnswer` per filled-in pair. See [FAQ Block](../features/faq-block.md).

## Custom JSON-LD (Ultra)

Your custom JSON-LD is printed as-is on every page, in its own script tag.

## Linking your own markup

The `@id` values above are stable, so your own markup can refer to them, for example `"publisher": {"@id": "https://your-store.com/#organization"}`.

## Testing

Paste a page URL into Google's [Rich Results Test](https://search.google.com/test/rich-results) or the [Schema Markup Validator](https://validator.schema.org/). SEO Turbo's [Theme Review](../features/theme-review.md) also checks that the markup is valid and not duplicated.

---

# Visitor 404 Tracking

> How the app embed reports storefront 404s through /apps/seo-turbo/404

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/visitor-404-beacon
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: For Developers
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

When visitor 404 tracking is on, the **SEO Turbo** app embed tells SEO Turbo about pages visitors can't find, so they appear under **Broken links**.

## When it fires

A small script runs only when:

- the **SEO Turbo** app embed is on in your published theme,
- **Track pages visitors cannot find** is on in **Settings**, and
- Shopify is showing its 404 template.

It sends one request per missing page view, using `navigator.sendBeacon` where available so it never slows the page down.

## What is sent

Only two values:

- **path** - the missing page's path, for example `/products/old-name`
- **referrer** - the page the visitor came from: the path if it was on your store, or just the domain if it was another website

No cookies, IP addresses, customer details or query strings are stored.

## Where it's sent

The request goes to `/apps/seo-turbo/404` on your own store domain. That's a Shopify app proxy: Shopify signs the request and forwards it to SEO Turbo, which checks the signature before saving anything. It only works from your storefront with the app embed installed.

## Paths that are ignored

Some requests are never stored:

- Bot probes, such as `/wp-admin`, `/xmlrpc`, `/cgi-bin` or files ending in `.php`, `.env` or `.sql`
- Shopify system paths such as `/apps/`, `/cdn/` and `/.well-known/`
- Customer-specific paths such as `/account` and order status pages, since those can contain private tokens

To protect your list from abuse, SEO Turbo also limits how many reports it accepts per store per minute and caps the number of open visitor-reported links.

## Privacy

SEO Turbo stores only the missing address, where it was linked from and how many times it was hit. Nothing identifies the visitor.

To turn tracking off, switch off **Track pages visitors cannot find** in **Settings**.

---

# Structured Data Not Showing

> What to check when Google or a testing tool does not see SEO Turbo's schema

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/schema-not-showing
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Troubleshooting
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If Google or a testing tool doesn't see SEO Turbo's structured data, work through these checks.

## The app embed is off, or on a different theme

SEO Turbo prints structured data through the **SEO Turbo** app embed. In Shopify, go to **Online Store > Themes**, click **Customize** on your live theme, open **App embeds** and make sure **SEO Turbo** is on, then **Save**. If you've switched themes, turn it on in the new theme too. You can also open the setup guide again from **Settings > Installation**.

## The type is off or not in your plan

On the **Schema** page, check that the type is switched on and click **Save**. Types that show a plan badge aren't included in your current plan, and SEO Turbo won't print them on your storefront. See [Schema (Structured Data)](../features/schema.md).

## You just saved

Changes reach your storefront within about a minute. Reload the page, or run the test again after a minute.

## Testing the wrong page

Each type appears on specific pages: Product on product pages, Organization and Website on the home page, Blog post on blog posts, Collection on collection pages. Breadcrumbs appear on every page except the home page. See [Structured Data Output](../developers/structured-data-output.md).

## The FAQ block shows nothing

- **FAQ** must be on under **Schema**, and your plan must be Max or higher.
- The **FAQ (SEO Turbo)** block must be added to the page in the theme editor.
- At least one question needs both a question and an answer.

## The same type appears twice

If your theme prints its own structured data, testing tools may show the type twice or report conflicts. Run [Theme Review](../features/theme-review.md) to see which theme files print JSON-LD, then turn off either SEO Turbo's type or the theme's.

## Google hasn't updated yet

Testing tools read the live page straight away, but Google Search can take days or weeks to recrawl a page and show rich results. Rich results are never guaranteed, even with valid markup.

---

# Audit Stuck or Failed

> What to do when an audit keeps running or shows Failed

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/audit-stuck
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Troubleshooting
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Audits usually finish within a few minutes. Here's what to do if one seems stuck or shows **Failed**.

## A running audit refreshes the page by itself

While an audit runs, its page shows **Running… this page refreshes by itself.** You don't need to reload. A large store can take several minutes for the content audit, and longer for a broken link scan.

## One audit of each kind at a time

If you click the button again while an audit is running, you'll see **This audit is already running.** You can run different audits (for example the content audit and the broken link scan) at the same time.

## An audit that never finishes

If an audit has been running for more than two hours, it's treated as stuck. Click the button again and a new audit starts in its place.

## Failed audits

If an audit shows **Failed**, wait a minute and try again. Audits can fail when Shopify is briefly unavailable, or when the app has lost access to your store (for example right after reinstalling). If it keeps failing, contact support.

## Fewer items than expected

Each plan audits up to a set number of items: 150 on Starter, 2,000 on Pro, 20,000 on Max and unlimited on Ultra. If your store has more, SEO Turbo audits the most recently updated items. The **SEO content** page shows your plan limit. See [Plans and Pricing](../getting-started/plans-and-pricing.md).

Items that are unpublished are still audited, and show **Hidden**.

---

# AI Rewrite Not Working

> Why Write with AI shows an error or is locked

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/ai-rewrite-unavailable
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Troubleshooting
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If **Write with AI** shows an error or is locked, the message tells you which of these it is.

## "You have used this month's AI rewrites"

Every plan includes a monthly number of AI rewrites: 25 on Starter, 300 on Pro, 1,500 on Max and 6,000 on Ultra. **Write another version** uses one too. The allowance resets at the start of each calendar month. Upgrade from **Settings > Billing** for more. You can still edit titles and descriptions yourself under **Edit manually** at any time.

## "AI rewriting is temporarily unavailable"

The AI service can't be reached right now. Try again later. This doesn't use your allowance.

## "The AI rewrite did not finish"

The request started but didn't complete. Try again. Rewrites that fail before a suggestion is written don't count against your allowance.

## Bulk actions are locked

Writing and applying suggestions for many items at once is part of the Pro plan and up. On Starter, the bulk buttons show a **Pro plan** badge and an **Upgrade** button. See [Bulk Rewrite and Apply](../features/bulk-rewrite.md).

## "Shopify did not accept the change"

The suggestion was written, but Shopify rejected it when you clicked **Apply to Shopify**. The message includes Shopify's reason. Common causes are an item that was deleted in Shopify since the last audit, or the app having lost access to your store. Run the content audit again and retry.

---

# llms.txt or agents.md Not Changing

> Why your store still shows Shopify's default llms.txt

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/llms-txt-not-changing
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Troubleshooting
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If your store still serves Shopify's default llms.txt or agents.md after you've set yours up in SEO Turbo, check the following.

## The template isn't in your published theme

Shopify only uses templates from your **published** theme. Make sure you pasted the template into the live theme, not a draft or duplicate. Run **Check AI discovery**: under **Your theme templates**, each file shows whether it's installed.

## Wrong file name or folder

The file must be in the **templates** folder, not **snippets** or **sections**, and named exactly:

- `llms.txt.liquid` for /llms.txt
- `agents.md.liquid` for /agents.md (Shopify also uses it for llms.txt and llms-full.txt when those templates don't exist)
- `llms-full.txt.liquid` for /llms-full.txt
- `robots.txt.liquid` for /robots.txt

## You switched themes

Templates belong to a theme. After publishing a different theme, paste the template into the new theme too.

## The template is out of date

When the status says **Out of date - paste the new version**, your llms.txt text or your catalog has changed since you pasted it. Click **Copy llms.txt template** again and replace the file's contents.

## Your store is password protected

While your storefront is behind a password, AI crawlers (and SEO Turbo's check) can't read these files. The status shows **Password protected** until the store is open.

## Shopify is still caching

After saving the template, give it a minute and run **Check AI discovery** again. The **What your llms.txt says now** preview shows what visitors actually get.

See [AI Discovery](../features/ai-discovery.md) for the full setup.

---

# Redirect Not Created

> Why the Redirect button is disabled or Shopify rejected a redirect

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo/redirects-not-created
App: SEO Turbo
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-turbo
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/turbo
Section: Troubleshooting
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If the **Redirect** button doesn't work or Shopify rejects a redirect, here's why.

## You've used this month's redirects

The Starter plan includes 25 redirects a month; Pro and up have unlimited redirects. When the allowance is used up you'll see **You have used this month's redirects.** It resets at the start of each calendar month, or you can upgrade from **Settings > Billing**.

## The link points to another website

Only paths on your own store can be redirected. Links to other websites show **External**; fix them by editing the page that links there and removing or updating the link.

## The target isn't valid

**Redirect to** must be a path on your store starting with `/` (for example `/collections/sale`) or a full `https://` address.

## Shopify rejected the redirect

If you see **Shopify did not create the redirect**, the message includes Shopify's reason. The most common one is that a redirect for that path already exists. Check **Online Store > Navigation > URL redirects** in Shopify, where you can edit or delete it.

## Visitor 404s aren't appearing

- The **SEO Turbo** app embed must be on in your live theme.
- **Track pages visitors cannot find** must be on in **Settings**.
- Your store must be open. Password-protected stores don't report visitor 404s.
- Some paths are never recorded, such as bot probes and customer account or order pages. See [Visitor 404 Tracking](../developers/visitor-404-beacon.md).

---

# Installation

> Install the app and activate it on your store

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/installation
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Short Links turns long store URLs into clean links on your own domain, so a campaign link reads as `yourstore.com/summer` instead of a long collection URL with tracking parameters trailing behind it. There is nothing to add to your theme and no code to paste — installing the app is the whole setup.

## Installing from the Shopify App Store

1. Visit the [Short Links app listing](https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener) on the Shopify App Store
2. Click **Add app**
3. Click **Install app** to finish

The app opens straight to its own page in your Shopify admin, and you can start creating links right away.

## Creating your first link

The quickest way to confirm everything works is to make a link and follow it:

1. Open Short Links from your Shopify admin
2. Click **Create Short Link**
3. Paste any address into **Destination URL**
4. Click **Generate Short Link**

You land on the new link's page, which shows the short URL with a copy button, its QR code, and buttons to save that code as a PNG or an SVG. Open the short URL in a new browser tab and confirm it takes you to the destination. If it does, the app is working.

## Finding your way around

The app adds four items to the navigation in your Shopify admin:

- **Home** - Your links, the metrics along the top, and the create button
- **Analytics** - Click charts, top links, traffic sources and device breakdowns
- **Settings** - UTM passthrough, integrations, and your plan
- **Support** - Help articles and announcements

## Store requirements

- **Development stores work too** - On a development store (an agency or partner building a client's store) every paid feature is unlocked free, so you can try the whole app before the store goes live.
- **Any Shopify domain works** - Links use whichever domain is primary in your store, including a `.myshopify.com` domain. A custom domain is not required, though it makes for better-looking links.

## Next Steps

- Learn [How Short Links Work](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/how-short-links-work) to understand the system
- Explore the [Dashboard Overview](https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/dashboard-overview) to navigate the app
- Start [Creating Short Links](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/creating-links) for your marketing campaigns

---

# How Short Links Work

> Understand the key components of your link shortener

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/how-short-links-work
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Short Links turns long, awkward store URLs into clean links that live on your own domain — the kind you can print on packaging, put in an Instagram bio, or read out loud. Knowing what happens between the click and the destination makes it easier to decide how to use them.

## What a short link is

When you create a link, the app reserves a short key on your store's domain and points it at your destination. Anyone who visits the short URL is sent on to that destination, and the app records the click on the way through.

For example:

- **Destination** - `https://yourstore.com/collections/winter-sale?utm_source=email&utm_medium=newsletter&utm_campaign=winter2026`
- **Short link** - `https://yourstore.com/winter`

The short link is cleaner and easier to share, and it still gets your customers to exactly the same place.

## URL structure

Your short links follow this structure:

```
https://yourstore.com/{key}
```

- **`yourstore.com`** - Whichever domain is primary in your Shopify store
- **`{key}`** - The short key, either one you chose or a five-character key the app generated

Examples:

- `yourstore.com/sale` for a sale collection
- `yourstore.com/new` for new arrivals
- `yourstore.com/k4m2p` for a generated key

Choosing your own key is a paid-plan feature. On the free plan every link gets a generated one.

Links created before 29 July 2024 use the older `yourstore.com/a/s/{key}` form and keep working exactly as they always did. Every link's page, and the copy button in the links table, always show the right URL for that particular link — so copy from there rather than typing one out.

## What happens when someone clicks

1. The visitor opens your short link, for example `yourstore.com/winter`
2. Your store recognises the short key and hands the request to Short Links
3. The app looks up the destination and records the click
4. The visitor is redirected to the destination

This takes milliseconds, so the redirect is invisible to the visitor.

## UTM parameter passthrough

Short Links can forward UTM parameters from the incoming link on to the destination, which lets a single short link serve several channels.

You share on Facebook: `yourstore.com/sale?utm_source=facebook&utm_medium=social`

The visitor lands on: `yourstore.com/collections/sale?utm_source=facebook&utm_medium=social`

Google Analytics then attributes the session to your Facebook campaign even though the visitor followed a short link. UTM passthrough is a paid-plan feature and is switched on by default; you can turn it off under **Settings**.

## Click tracking and analytics

Every click is recorded automatically. For each one the app stores:

- **When** - The date and time of the click
- **Where from** - The referring site, or nothing at all for direct traffic
- **Device and platform** - Worked out from the browser, so clicks can be split into mobile, tablet and desktop, and into iOS, Android, Windows, Mac and the rest

That data drives the **Analytics** page: clicks over time, your top links, the sites sending you traffic, the device and platform split, and a per-link report with its own chart, referrers and devices.

Analytics is a paid-plan feature. On the free plan you can create and share links and still see each link's total click count, but the charts and breakdowns are replaced by an upgrade prompt.

## Next Steps

- Review the [Dashboard Overview](https://help.pasilobus.com/product-options/dashboard-overview) to navigate the app
- Learn about [Creating Short Links](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/creating-links)
- Explore [UTM Parameters](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-parameters) for campaign tracking

---

# Dashboard Overview

> Understand your link metrics and navigation

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/dashboard-overview
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The app's home page is an overview: headline numbers along the top, then your five most recent links. The full list, with search, filters and sorting, lives on its own **Links** page. Everything else hangs off five navigation items.

## Metrics along the top

Once you have created at least one link, four figures appear at the top of the home page. Two of them are clickable shortcuts.

- **Total Links** - Every link in your account, active and expired
- **Clicks Today** - Today's clicks with a percentage badge comparing them to yesterday. When there were no clicks today or yesterday it switches to **Clicks (7 days)** and compares against the previous seven days instead. Click it to open **Analytics**. On the free plan this tile is **Total clicks**, the lifetime total across all your links, and opens **Links** sorted by clicks.
- **Active Links** - Links that still redirect, meaning they have no expiry date or one in the future. Click it to open **Links** filtered down to those.
- **Created This Week** - Links made since Monday, with a percentage badge comparing the count to last week

## Recent links

Below the metrics, the home page lists your five newest links with their names, short URLs and click counts. **View all** opens the full **Links** page. If you only have a handful of links this card is your whole list, and there is no need to go further.

## The Links page

**Links** in the navigation opens every link you have made. Each row shows:

- **Link Details** - The link's name, or its destination URL when it has no name. A chain icon reveals the destination on hover, and a note icon appears when the link has a private note.
- **Short URL** - The link's short key
- **Copy** - Copies the full short URL to your clipboard, ready to paste
- **Clicks** - The link's lifetime click count
- **Status** - **Active** when there is no expiry date, **Expires on** with the date when one is set, and **Expired** once that date has passed

Click a link's name or its short key to open its own page.

## Filtering, searching and sorting

Four filters sit above the table, with a search box and a sort menu beside them. All three work together, so you can sort inside a filtered search and page through the result without losing your place.

- **All Links** - Everything, whatever its status
- **Active** - No expiry date, or an expiry date still in the future
- **No Expiry** - Only links that never expire
- **Expired** - Links whose expiry date has passed

Search looks at names, destination URLs and private notes.

**Sort by** offers:

- **Newest first** - The default
- **Oldest first**
- **Most clicks** - Your best performers at the top, whatever their age
- **Name (A-Z)**
- **Expiring soon** - Links closest to lapsing first, useful before a campaign ends

## A link's own page

Opening a link shows everything about it in one place:

- **Original URL** and **Shortened URL** - Both with a **Copy** button
- **QR Code** - The code for that link, with **Download PNG** and **Download SVG** buttons
- **Expiry Date** - A banner appears only when the link has an expiry date, telling you when it lapses or that it already has
- **Clicks** - The last seven days as a chart, with a **View full analytics** link through to the link's detailed report. On the free plan this shows the link's lifetime click count instead of the chart.
- **Notes** - Your private note, when you added one

The actions at the top of the page are **Create New Link**, **Edit** and **Delete**. Editing covers the destination, the name and the private note; the short key is fixed once a link exists. **Delete** asks for confirmation first.

## Creating a link

**Create Short Link** sits at the top right of both the home page and the **Links** page, and in the middle of the screen before you have made your first link. It opens the form where you paste a destination and press **Generate Short Link**.

## Navigation

- **Home** - This page: metrics and your five most recent links
- **Links** - Every link, with search, filters and sorting
- **Analytics** - Click charts, top links, referrers and device breakdowns. Requires a paid plan.
- **Settings** - UTM passthrough, integrations, and your plan
- **Support** - Help articles and announcements

Inside **Settings** there are two pages worth knowing about:

- **Integrations** - Lists the four events this app can send to Shopify Flow, so you can see what an automation could start from
- **Sidekick** - Example phrasings for asking Shopify Sidekick about your links. A callout on the home page links here too, until you dismiss it.

## Next Steps

- Start [Creating Short Links](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/creating-links)
- Learn about [Click Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/analytics)
- Configure [UTM Passthrough](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-passthrough) for campaign tracking

---

# Creating Short Links

> Create and customize your shortened URLs

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/creating-links
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A short link needs one thing to exist: somewhere to send people. Everything else — a name you will recognise later, your own short key, an expiry date, a private note — is optional, and this article covers what each one does and which plan it needs.

## Creating a link

1. Open Short Links and click **Create Short Link**
2. Choose a **Link type**: **Web address** to paste any URL, or **Product**, **Collection**, **Page**, **Blog post** or **Cart with several products** to pick something from your store
3. Paste the address into **Destination URL**, or pick the product, collection, page or post
4. Fill in any of the optional fields below
5. Click **Generate Short Link**

The link works from the moment you create it — there is nothing to publish or activate.

## What you get back

Creating a link takes you to its page, which is also where you come back to later. It shows:

- **The short URL** with a **Copy** button, ready to paste anywhere
- **The QR code** for that link, with **Download PNG** and **Download SVG** buttons
- **Its click chart** for the last seven days, on a paid plan

The QR code encodes the short URL, so a scan travels through the same redirect and counts as a click just like a tap would. Use the SVG for anything printed or resized — packaging, posters, signage — and the PNG for slides, social posts and email.

## Names and notes

Neither of these is ever shown to a customer. Both are optional, and both can be changed later.

- **Link Name** - What you will recognise the link by in the links table, in Analytics, and in any Shopify Flow message. Something like "Spring sale — Instagram bio" is far easier to find later than a URL. Links without a name are listed by their destination instead.
- **Private Note** - Free-form detail for yourself, such as "Sent to VIP customers on 5 Jan". A note icon appears next to the link in the table when there is one.

## Custom short keys

By default the app generates a five-character key, so your link comes out as something like `yourstore.com/k4m2p`. Filling in **Custom URL** replaces it with a key you choose:

- **Up to 20 characters**, using letters, numbers and dashes
- **Unique within your store** — a key already in use is rejected when you save
- **Best kept short and obvious** — `sale`, `vip`, `winter-sale` all read well in print

Custom keys are a paid-plan feature. On the free plan the field is visible but greyed out, alongside a link to upgrade, and your links get generated keys.

## Expiration dates

Ticking **Set expiration date** reveals a date and time picker. Once that moment passes, the link is marked as expired in the app and moves into the **Expired** filter.

Expiry is a paid-plan feature, and it can only be set while you are creating a link — the date is fixed once the link exists. The date and time are in your store's time zone. [Link Expiration](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/link-expiration) covers the details.

## Linking to a product, collection, page or blog article

You do not have to hunt for the URL of something in your own store. Pick the **Link type** on the form, or, on a product, collection, page or blog article in your Shopify admin, use **More actions > Create Short Link**: the app opens with that product, collection, page or article already chosen.

- **Product** - Pick a product, or one of its variants, then choose what the link does. **Product Page** sends visitors to the product, opened on the variant you picked when you picked one. **Add to Cart/Checkout** skips the product page and puts the item straight in the cart, with a quantity, an optional discount code applied automatically, and an option to go directly to checkout with Shop Pay.
- **Collection** - Pick a collection and the link points at that collection's page.
- **Page** and **Blog post** - Choose the page or the post from the list of your store's pages or posts. Hidden ones are marked "hidden": their link will not work until you publish them. When a store has more than eight, a search box above the list narrows it as you type.

- **Cart with several products** - Add products and quantities, plus an optional discount code, Shop Pay and a cart note. The link opens checkout with that cart already filled.

The link's destination is built for you from your store's domain, so it keeps working if you rename things later in the ways Shopify handles itself.

## UTM parameters in the destination

You can put tracking parameters straight into the destination URL, and visitors arrive with them intact:

```
https://yourstore.com/collections/sale?utm_source=instagram&utm_medium=bio&utm_campaign=winter_sale
```

- **`utm_source`** - Where the traffic came from, such as `instagram` or `newsletter`
- **`utm_medium`** - The kind of channel, such as `social`, `email` or `cpc`
- **`utm_campaign`** - The campaign name, such as `winter_sale_2026`
- **`utm_content`** - Which piece of creative, such as `hero_image`
- **`utm_term`** - Paid search keywords

On a paid plan you can skip this entirely and let UTM passthrough add the parameters at share time instead — see [UTM Passthrough](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-passthrough).

## Asking Sidekick to start a link

If you would rather describe the link than fill in the form, ask Shopify's Sidekick assistant for it: "Create a short link for my summer sale collection". It opens this same form with the destination and name already filled in, and you still press **Generate Short Link** yourself. The Shopify Sidekick article covers what else it can do, and **Settings > Sidekick** in the app lists example phrasings.

## Next Steps

- Learn about [Managing Links](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/managing-links) once created
- Understand [UTM Parameters](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-parameters) in depth
- Set up [UTM Passthrough](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-passthrough) for automatic parameter forwarding

---

# Managing Links

> View, edit, and organize your short links

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/managing-links
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Short links accumulate. After a few campaigns you will want to find one quickly, check whether it is still working, grab it again for a new post, or clear out the ones that have served their purpose. All of that happens on the **Links** page and on each link's own page.

## Finding a link

**Links** in the navigation lists every link you have made. The home page shows only your five most recent, with **View all** leading here. Three tools narrow the list down, and they work together:

- **The filters** - **All Links**, **Active**, **No Expiry** and **Expired**
- **The search box** - Matches against the link's name, its destination URL and its private note
- **Sort by** - **Newest first** (the default), **Oldest first**, **Most clicks**, **Name (A-Z)** or **Expiring soon**

**Active** covers links that still redirect: those with no expiry date, plus those whose date is still in the future. **No Expiry** is the narrower view of links that will never lapse.

**Most clicks** is the quickest way to see which link is actually working, and **Expiring soon** surfaces what is about to lapse before a campaign ends.

## Copying a link to share it

There are two places to grab a short URL, and both give you the complete address with your domain on the front:

- **From the Links page** - The **Copy** button in each row copies that link's short URL straight to your clipboard
- **From the link's page** - **Copy** buttons sit beside both the shortened URL and the original URL

Test a link once before you put it in front of a large audience, especially in print where you cannot correct it afterwards.

## Getting a link's QR code

Every link has a QR code, on its own page under **QR Code**. It encodes the short URL, so a scan goes through the same redirect and is counted as a click.

- **Download SVG** - Stays sharp at any size. Use it for print, packaging and posters.
- **Download PNG** - A plain image file, best for slides, social posts and email.

## Editing a link

Open the link and click **Edit**. You can change:

- **Destination URL** - Where the link sends shoppers. Change it when the product behind a printed QR code is gone or a campaign moves: the short URL and every QR code already printed keep working and go to the new address. A product, collection or page link becomes a plain web-address link once you change its destination.
- **Link Name** - The label you recognise it by
- **Private Note** - Your internal detail about the link

Click **Update Link** to save.

The short key itself cannot be changed: it is what is already printed or shared. If you need a different short URL, create a new link.

## Deleting a link

From the link's page, click **Delete**, then **Delete** again in the confirmation window.

Deletion is permanent and takes effect immediately: the short URL stops working, and anyone who follows it lands on your store's own "Page not found" page, in your theme. The page answers with a "not found" status, so search engines and link checkers treat the old URL as gone. The short key becomes available again, so you can reuse it on a new link.

Before deleting, consider whether you still need the link's click history — the record goes away with the link.

## Keeping things tidy

- **Name links consistently** - A pattern like "Campaign — Channel — Month" makes both the search box and **Name (A-Z)** far more useful: "Winter Sale — Instagram Bio — Jan 2026"
- **Group a campaign by name** - "Sale — Hero Banner", "Sale — Email Header", "Sale — Social Post" all surface together from one search
- **Review the Expired filter now and then** - Delete what you are finished with, and leave the ones whose numbers you still want to look at

## Next Steps

- Explore [Click Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/analytics) to track performance
- Learn about [Link Expiration](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/link-expiration) for temporary campaigns
- View [Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/reports) for detailed insights

---

# UTM Parameters

> Track marketing campaigns with UTM parameters

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-parameters
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

UTM parameters are the tags on the end of a URL that tell Google Analytics where a visitor came from. Short Links can carry them in two different ways, and which one you pick decides whether you need a separate link per channel or one link that serves them all.

## What UTM parameters are

They are ordinary query parameters with agreed names, read by analytics tools rather than by your store. Five are standard:

- **`utm_source`** - Where the traffic came from, such as `instagram`, `newsletter` or `google`
- **`utm_medium`** - The kind of channel, such as `social`, `email`, `cpc` or `banner`
- **`utm_campaign`** - The campaign name, such as `winter_sale` or `product_launch`
- **`utm_content`** - Which piece of creative, useful when two links point at the same place, such as `hero_banner` or `sidebar_ad`
- **`utm_term`** - Paid search keywords, such as `running+shoes`

## Putting UTMs in the destination

The simplest approach: build the tagged URL first, then shorten it.

1. Start with the plain address, for example `https://yourstore.com/collections/sale`
2. Add `?` to begin the parameters
3. Add each one as `name=value`
4. Join further parameters with `&`

```
https://yourstore.com/collections/sale?utm_source=instagram&utm_medium=bio&utm_campaign=winter_sale_2026
```

Shorten that and anyone following your short link arrives at the full tagged URL, with the tracking intact. This works on every plan, and it is the right approach when a link only ever lives in one place.

## Letting the short link carry them instead

The alternative is UTM passthrough: leave the destination plain and put the parameters on the short URL at the moment you share it.

1. You share `yourstore.com/sale?utm_source=facebook`
2. The destination is plain `yourstore.com/collections/sale`
3. The visitor lands on `yourstore.com/collections/sale?utm_source=facebook`

Six parameters are forwarded: `utm_source`, `utm_medium`, `utm_campaign`, `utm_term`, `utm_content` and `utm_id`. Anything else on the short URL is dropped, and a parameter already present in the destination is never overwritten.

This means one short link can serve every channel with different tags, which is why it suits an evergreen link like the one in a bio or on packaging. It is a paid-plan feature and is switched on by default — see [UTM Passthrough](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-passthrough) for the setting and more examples.

## Which approach to use

- **Tag the destination** when the link is for one specific placement, when you want the tags fixed to the link forever, or when you are on the free plan
- **Use passthrough** when the same short link goes out across several channels, when it is printed and cannot be changed, or when whoever shares it decides the tagging

Mixing them is fine. Passthrough only fills in parameters the destination does not already carry, so a destination tagged with a default `utm_source` keeps it.

## How the data reaches Google Analytics

1. The visitor follows the short link and is redirected to your store with the UTM parameters attached
2. Google Analytics reads them on the landing page
3. The session is attributed to that source, medium and campaign

In GA4, look under Reports > Acquisition > Traffic Acquisition and break down by session source/medium, or build a campaign report in Explore.

Bear in mind these are two separate counts: Short Links counts the click as it passes through the redirect, and Google Analytics counts the session that follows. They will not match exactly — bots, abandoned loads and ad-blockers all land on one side of that gap and not the other.

## Naming conventions that hold up

- **Stay lowercase** - `instagram` and `Instagram` are two different sources to Google Analytics
- **Pick one word separator and keep it** - `winter_sale` or `winter-sale`, never both
- **Always set source and medium** - They do the most work; campaign groups them, content and term refine them
- **Be descriptive** - `winter_sale_jan_2026_email` tells you something in six months; `campaign1` does not
- **Write your conventions down** - Anyone else tagging links needs to match them, or your reports fragment
- **Keep a record of your links** - Short URL, destination with tags, where it was used, and the dates it ran

## Common examples

Email newsletter:

```
?utm_source=newsletter&utm_medium=email&utm_campaign=weekly_digest
```

Instagram bio:

```
?utm_source=instagram&utm_medium=social&utm_campaign=bio_link
```

Facebook paid ad:

```
?utm_source=facebook&utm_medium=cpc&utm_campaign=winter_sale&utm_content=carousel_ad
```

Printed flyer with a QR code:

```
?utm_source=flyer&utm_medium=print&utm_campaign=store_opening
```

That last one is worth calling out: a QR code encodes the short URL exactly as it is, so tag the destination before you generate the code, or use passthrough and print a tagged short URL. Once the code is printed you cannot change either.

## Next Steps

- Configure [UTM Passthrough](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-passthrough) in settings
- Create your first [Short Link](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/creating-links) with UTMs
- View campaign performance in [Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/reports)

---

# Link Expiration

> Set automatic expiration for temporary links

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/link-expiration
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Most campaign links have a natural end date: the flash sale finishes, the early-access window closes, the contest deadline passes. Giving a link an expiry date records that end date in the app, so a finished campaign stops cluttering your active links and can trigger automation the moment it wraps up.

## Setting an expiry date

While creating a link, tick **Set expiration date**, pick the **Expiry date** from the calendar and the **Expiry time** (on the hour or half hour). The time is your store's time zone, and the form names it underneath, for example *Store time: Eastern Time (US & Canada) (GMT-05:00)*. Change the zone in Shopify's **Settings > General**: 11:30 means 11:30 where your store is.

Two things are worth knowing before you set one:

- **It is a paid-plan feature.** On the free plan the checkbox is visible but greyed out, next to a link to upgrade.
- **It is fixed once the link exists.** Editing a link covers its name and private note only, so there is no way to extend, shorten or clear an expiry date afterwards. Decide the date before you press **Generate Short Link**.

## What happens when the date passes

Inside the app, the link is treated as finished:

- **Its status becomes Expired** - A red **Expired** badge replaces the countdown badge in the links table
- **It leaves the Active view** - It drops out of **Active** and out of the **Active Links** figure at the top of the page, and appears under the **Expired** filter
- **Its page says so** - A banner on the link's own page gives the date it expired
- **Shopify Flow hears about it** - If you have built a workflow on the **Short link expired** trigger, it runs at that moment and carries the link's lifetime click total. The Shopify Flow article covers what you can build on it, and **Settings > Integrations** lists every trigger.
- **Its click history stays** - Everything the link recorded remains in Analytics
- **It stops redirecting** - Visitors following the old URL land on your store's own "Page not found" page, in your theme with its button back to your shop, rather than reaching the destination

## What visitors see afterwards

An expired link stops redirecting. Anyone who still has the URL — from an old email, a screenshot, a printed card — lands on your store's own "Page not found" page, in your theme with a way back to your shop, instead of being sent to the destination. It answers with a real "not found" status, so search engines and link checkers treat the old URL as gone.

That is deliberate: a link you gave an end date to should not keep quietly sending people to a finished sale. If you would rather visitors land somewhere useful after the campaign closes, point the short link at a page you control and change that page's content when the offer ends, instead of setting an expiry date.

Deleting a link is different, and stronger: it frees the short key for reuse and removes the link's click history with it. Expiry keeps the record; deletion removes it. If you only want the URL to stop working, let it expire.

## Good uses for an expiry date

- **Flash sales** - A 24-hour offer, a weekend-only promotion, a holiday special that ends on a set date
- **Early access** - Subscriber or VIP windows, influencer previews, pre-launch access
- **Time-boxed discounts** - Black Friday links, a seven-day welcome offer, a birthday promotion
- **Event links** - Webinar registration up to the event, contest entry up to the deadline, pre-orders up to launch
- **Seasonal campaigns** - Summer collections, back-to-school, a Valentine's gift guide

In each case the value is the same: your **Active** view stays down to links that still matter, and the expiry event can kick off a workflow — emailing yourself the final click count, for instance — without you remembering to check.

## Practical tips

- **Give yourself a buffer** - If a sale closes at midnight, set the expiry an hour later so late clicks are not marked finished before the offer really is
- **Think about your audience's timezone** - The date you pick follows your store's timezone, not the visitor's
- **Say the deadline out loud** - "Offer ends Friday at midnight" in the post itself does more work than the expiry date does
- **Check the numbers before you clean up** - Review a campaign's clicks and referrers in Analytics before deleting the link, because deletion takes the history with it

## Next Steps

- Learn about [Creating Links](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/creating-links) with all options
- Track performance with [Click Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/analytics)
- View historical data in [Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/reports)

---

# Click Analytics

> Track and analyze link performance

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/analytics
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every click on one of your short links is recorded as it passes through. Link previews (when a link is pasted into Slack, WhatsApp, iMessage and similar) and search-engine crawlers still follow the link but are not counted as clicks, with no tags to install and nothing to configure. This article explains what gets collected and where each number shows up; the **Analytics** page itself is covered in its own article.

## What gets recorded

For each click the app stores:

- **The time** - Used for every chart and every date-range total
- **The referrer** - The site the visitor came from, when the browser sends one. Clicks with no referrer — a typed URL, a bookmark, a QR scan, most apps — are simply counted without one.
- **The device type** - Mobile, tablet or desktop, worked out from the browser (iPads and Android tablets count as tablets)
- **The platform** - iOS, Android, Windows, Mac, Linux or Chrome OS

QR-code scans are ordinary clicks: the code encodes the short URL, so a scan goes through the same redirect and lands in the same numbers.

## Where the numbers appear

The same click data surfaces in four places, each answering a different question.

- **The metrics at the top of the home page** - **Clicks Today** against yesterday, or **Clicks (7 days)** against the previous seven days when there has been no activity in the last two days. The percentage badge is the change between those two periods.
- **The links table** - Each row's **Clicks** column is that link's lifetime total, which makes it easy to spot your best performer at a glance.
- **A link's own page** - A chart of the last seven days for that link, with its total for the period and a **View full analytics** link through to its detailed report.
- **The Analytics page** - Everything for a date range you choose: clicks over time, top links, referrers, and the device and platform split.

## Lifetime totals against period totals

These two numbers are easy to confuse, and they rarely match:

- **Lifetime clicks** - Every click the link has ever had. This is the figure in the links table and on the link's page.
- **Clicks in a period** - Only the clicks inside the date range you selected on the **Analytics** page.

A link created last year with 4,000 clicks shows 4,000 in the table and perhaps 12 for "Last 7 Days". Both are right.

## Referrers

A referrer tells you which site the visitor was on before they followed your link — social platforms, webmail, a blog that linked to you, an affiliate. Use it to see which channels are actually delivering, and to spot traffic from somewhere you did not expect.

Not every click has one. Direct traffic, QR scans and many mobile apps send no referrer at all, so referrer totals will normally add up to less than your total clicks. That gap is expected and is not lost data.

## Devices and platforms

The **Analytics** page breaks your clicks down by device type and by platform. This is most useful as a sanity check on where a campaign is landing: a link you only put in a printed catalogue showing up as overwhelmingly mobile tells you the QR code is doing its job.

## Individual link reports

To look at one link in detail:

1. Open the link from the home page
2. Click **View full analytics** in its **Clicks** section

The link's report shows its chart, its total for the period, its top referrers and its device split. You can also reach the same report from the **Top Links** table on the **Analytics** page by clicking **View**.

## Plan requirements

- **Free plan** - Links work normally and every click is still recorded. Lifetime click counts stay visible in the links table, on each link's page and as **Total clicks** on the home page. The **Analytics** page shows an upgrade prompt instead of figures.
- **Paid plans** - The full **Analytics** page, date ranges, charts, top links, referrers, device and platform breakdowns, per-link reports, and the dated click figures with trend badges on the home page.

Because clicks are recorded whatever your plan, nothing is lost while you are on the free plan — upgrade later and the history is there waiting.

## Next Steps

- Access detailed [Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/reports) for deeper analysis
- Set up [UTM Parameters](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-parameters) for campaign tracking
- Compare plans in [Plan Comparison](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/plan-comparison)

---

# Analytics Page

> Walk through the Analytics page and everything it reports

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/reports
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The **Analytics** page is where all of your links are measured together over a period you choose: how many clicks came in, which links earned them, where the traffic came from, and what people were using. Pick a date range once at the top and every section below it follows.

## Opening the page

Click **Analytics** in the app's navigation. You can also get there by clicking the **Clicks** figure at the top of the home page.

Analytics is a paid-plan feature. On the free plan the page opens with an upgrade banner and a **View Plans** button in place of your figures.

## Choosing a date range

Seven buttons run across the top, and the one in use is highlighted. **Last 7 Days** is selected when you arrive.

- **Today** - Midnight until now
- **Yesterday** - The whole of the previous day
- **Last 7 Days** - The last seven days up to now
- **Last 30 Days** - The last thirty days up to now
- **Last 90 Days** - The last ninety days up to now
- **This Month** - The 1st of this month until now
- **Last Month** - The whole of the previous calendar month

Clicking a range reloads every section on the page. Switching between them is the quickest way to compare a campaign week against the one before it.

## Summary

Two figures sit above the chart, both for the range you selected:

- **Total Clicks** - Every click across all of your links in the period
- **Unique Links** - How many different links were clicked at least once. A low number against a high click total means a few links are carrying the whole campaign.

## Clicks over time

The chart plots clicks per day across the range, with dates along the bottom and click counts up the side. Hover any point for that day's exact figure.

- **Spikes** usually line up with a send or a post going out — worth noting the day so you can repeat it
- **A steady climb** suggests something has been picked up and shared beyond where you put it
- **Weekly rhythm** shows which days your audience actually clicks, which is useful for scheduling
- **A sudden drop to nothing** on a link you expected traffic on is a prompt to check the link still works

## Top Links

Below the chart, your ten busiest links for the period:

- **Link Name** - The link's name, or its short key when it has none, with the destination URL underneath
- **Clicks** - Clicks in the selected period, not the link's lifetime total
- **Actions** - **View** opens that link's own report

If nothing was clicked in the period, this section shows an empty state rather than a table.

## Top Referrers

The ten sites sending you the most clicks, each with its count — social platforms, webmail, blogs that linked to you, affiliates.

Clicks that arrive without a referrer are not listed here: direct visits, QR-code scans and most mobile apps send none. These counts will therefore add up to less than **Total Clicks**, which is normal rather than missing data. The section is hidden entirely when no click in the period carried a referrer.

## Devices and platforms

**Device & Platform Analytics** splits the period's clicks two ways: by device type (mobile, tablet, desktop) and by platform (iOS, Android, Windows, Mac and so on). Both are charts, and each appears only when there is data behind it.

## Individual link reports

Clicking **View** on any link in **Top Links** opens that link's own report for the same date range:

- **Total clicks** for the period, alongside the link's lifetime total
- **A clicks-over-time chart** for that link alone
- **Top referrers** for that link
- **Device types** for that link (mobile, tablet, desktop)

You can reach the same report from a link's page in the app by clicking **View full analytics**.

## Plan requirements

- **Free plan** - The page shows an upgrade banner and no figures. Clicks are still recorded in the background, so the history will be waiting when you upgrade. Lifetime click counts stay visible in the links table.
- **Paid plans** - Full access to date ranges, charts, top links, referrers, devices, platforms and per-link reports.

See [Plan Comparison](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/plan-comparison) for the full breakdown.

## Next Steps

- Track campaigns with [UTM Parameters](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-parameters)
- Understand overall [Click Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/analytics)
- [Upgrade your plan](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/upgrading) for full access

---

# Shopify Flow

> Automate your store when links are created, clicked or expire

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/shopify-flow
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Integrations
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Shopify Flow is Shopify's own automation tool. This app sends events to Flow as your short links go through their life, so your store can react without you watching the dashboard — post to Slack when a campaign link gets its first click, email yourself the totals when a promotion ends, or tag something when a link takes off.

Flow is a separate free app from Shopify. Install it, build a workflow, and pick one of the triggers below as its starting point. Nothing needs switching on in Short Links: the app sends the event every time one happens, and Flow discards it if you have no workflow listening. You can see the full list of triggers, with what each one carries, under **Settings > Integrations** in the app.

## Triggers this app sends

- **Short link created** - Runs when you create a new short link. Carries the link's name, short URL, destination and link type (product, collection, page, blog article, cart or custom URL).
- **Short link first clicked** - Runs the first time a customer clicks a link, and only that first time. Carries the link's name, short URL, destination and the referrer — where the click came from, or "Direct" when there was none.
- **Short link reached clicks** - Runs when a link passes 100, 500, 1,000, 5,000, 10,000, 50,000 or 100,000 clicks. Carries the link's name, short URL, its total clicks at that moment and the milestone it just passed. This one does not carry the destination.
- **Short link expired** - Runs at the moment a link's expiry date passes and it stops redirecting. Carries the link's name, short URL, destination and its lifetime click total.

## Why clicks arrive as milestones

There is no "every click" trigger, on purpose. A popular link can be clicked thousands of times an hour, and every Flow event a store receives shares that store's Shopify API budget. A per-click trigger would spend it on notifications and slow down everything else, including the redirects your customers are following.

The first click and the milestone triggers give you the same signal without the flood: you hear when a link starts working, and again each time it reaches a number worth knowing about. If you want a running total, the expiry trigger carries the link's lifetime clicks.

## Example workflows

- Post to Slack the first time someone clicks a campaign link, so the team knows it went out.
- Email yourself the click total when a promotional link expires.
- Send a Slack alert when a link passes 1,000 clicks, so you can put more behind what is working.
- Add a customer tag or internal note when a link built for a specific audience starts getting traffic.

## Things worth knowing

- A workflow only runs if you have built one on that trigger. Events sent to a store with no matching workflow are dropped by Flow and nothing is stored.
- Links without a name are reported by their short key instead, so a workflow always has something readable to put in a message.
- The first click and each milestone fire once per link, ever. A link sitting at 1,200 clicks does not re-announce the 100 and 500 it passed on the way.
- A link's expiry date is set when you create it and cannot be changed afterwards, so the expiry trigger fires once for a link and once only.
- Expiry dates are a paid-plan feature, so the expired trigger only ever fires for links made on a paid plan. The other three fire on any plan.
- Triggers report the link as it was at the moment of the event, so editing the name afterwards does not change what a workflow already received.

---

# Shopify Sidekick

> Ask Shopify's assistant about your short links

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/shopify-sidekick
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Integrations
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Sidekick is the assistant built into your Shopify admin. Short Links is connected to it, so you can ask about your links in plain words from any page — no need to open the app, and nothing to set up in it. The connection ships with the app and works as soon as it is installed.

Look for the assistant icon in your admin and ask for what you want. **Settings > Sidekick** in the app lists example phrasings if you want somewhere to start.

## What you can ask

- **List your links** - "List my short links with their click counts", "How many short links do I have?". Sidekick lists your newest links with each one's short URL, destination and all-time clicks, and says how many you have in total. This works on every plan.
- **Find links** - "Which of my short links have expired?", "Find the link I made for the summer sale", "Show me links pointing at my sale collection". Sidekick returns each link's name, short URL, destination, total clicks and status, and can open any of them in the app.
- **Check performance** - "How did my short links perform last week?", "Which link got the most clicks this month?", "Where is my link traffic coming from?". Sidekick reports total clicks for the period you name, how many links were clicked, the busiest ones and the top referring sites.
- **Start a new link** - "Create a short link for my summer sale collection". Sidekick opens the new-link form in a window, with the destination and name already filled in.
- **Get a link's QR code** - "Show me the QR code for my summer sale link", "Download that one as an SVG". Sidekick opens that link's page with its QR code on screen and can save it for you as a PNG or an SVG.
- **Check your plan** - "Which Short Links plan am I on?", "Is expiry included on my plan?". Sidekick says whether the store is on Free or Pro, why (a paid subscription, or a development store, where the Pro features are included at no charge), and what each plan includes.
- **Ask how something works** - "How do I set an expiry date?", "Why aren't my UTM parameters passing through?", "What do I get on the paid plan?". Sidekick answers questions about the app itself, not just your links, and points you to a full guide when there is more to it. You get the answer where you are, instead of going looking for it.

## Creating a link still ends with you

When you ask Sidekick to create a link, it opens the form pre-filled — it does not create the link itself. Nothing is shortened, and the short URL does not work, until you review the form and press **Generate Short Link**. This is deliberate: a short link is something customers see, and the app never publishes one on your behalf.

While the form is open you can keep talking to Sidekick instead of typing. "Make the short key /spring", "call it Instagram bio instead", "point it at the sale collection" — it edits the fields in front of you, and saving is still your move.

After you press Generate, the window shows the new short URL and its QR code, with a **Done** button underneath. Pressing Done is what hands the link back to Sidekick, so it can tell you the short URL in the conversation and offer to do something else with it — like fetching its QR code. If you close the window instead, the link is still created; Sidekick simply never hears about it and will have to look it up.

## Getting a QR code

Every short link has a QR code that encodes its short URL, so a scan goes through the same redirect and counts as a click. Ask Sidekick for a link's code and it opens that link's page with the code showing, then downloads it on request:

- **SVG** - stays sharp at any size. Use it for print, packaging and posters.
- **PNG** - an image file, best for slides, social posts and email.

The file downloads to your own device. Close the window when you are finished with it. An expired link still has a QR code and it still renders — but scanning it no longer redirects anywhere.

## What Sidekick can see

Only this app's own data: your short links, their click history, and how the app works. It has no view of your orders, products or customers through Short Links, so questions about those are better asked of Sidekick directly, which has its own access to your store.

If you ask something the app does not cover, Sidekick tells you so rather than guessing at a setting name that does not exist.

Click analytics for a period (last week, this month, traffic sources) are part of the Pro plan, the same as the Analytics page in the app. On Free, Sidekick says so rather than reporting figures, and can still tell you each link's all-time click count.

## If Sidekick says it can't access Short Links

Open Sidekick, select **+** and then **Apps**, and make sure **Short Links** is switched on. Shopify says Sidekick "currently supports integrations with up to 20 apps for each user on a store", so each staff member can have up to 20 apps switched on there. If you are at the limit, switch off an app you don't use with Sidekick, then switch on Short Links.

## Things worth knowing

- A link's short key cannot be changed after it is created. Its destination can, on the link's page in the app, and the short URL and printed QR codes keep working.
- Custom short keys are a Pro feature. On a free plan that field is disabled on the form, so a key you ask Sidekick for is not applied and the link keeps its generated one.
- Sidekick reads your links each time you ask, so answers reflect the app as it is at that moment.
- Asking about "clicks last week" and a link's "total clicks" are different numbers: the first covers the period you named, the second the link's whole life.

---

# UTM Passthrough

> Automatically pass UTM parameters to destination URLs

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-passthrough
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Settings
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Normally you decide a link's tracking when you create it, which means one link per channel. UTM passthrough turns that around: leave the destination plain, and any UTM parameters you add to the short URL are carried through to the destination on the way. One short link can then serve every channel with different tracking on each.

## What it does

Your short link: `yourstore.com/sale`

Its destination: `yourstore.com/collections/winter-sale`

You share: `yourstore.com/sale?utm_source=facebook&utm_medium=post`

The visitor lands on: `yourstore.com/collections/winter-sale?utm_source=facebook&utm_medium=post`

The parameters travel through the redirect, so Google Analytics attributes the session to Facebook.

## Which parameters are forwarded

Six, and only these six:

- **`utm_source`**
- **`utm_medium`**
- **`utm_campaign`**
- **`utm_term`**
- **`utm_content`**
- **`utm_id`**

Anything else you put on the short URL is ignored and does not reach the destination. Two more rules are worth knowing:

- **Existing parameters win** - If the destination already carries `utm_source`, the one on the short URL is not applied. Passthrough only fills in what is missing.
- **Encoding is handled for you** - Parameters are rebuilt properly onto the destination, whether or not it already had a query string.

## Turning it on and off

1. Open Short Links and go to **Settings**
2. Open **UTM Passthrough**
3. Use the toggle to switch it on or off

It is on by default, so there is normally nothing to do. Turning it off means UTM parameters on a short URL are ignored and visitors land on the plain destination.

That page also lists the exact parameters that get forwarded, so you can check it rather than guess.

On the free plan the toggle is disabled and the page offers an upgrade link instead — the feature needs a paid plan.

## Where it earns its keep

- **One link across many channels** - Share `yourstore.com/shop?utm_source=instagram` in a bio, `?utm_source=newsletter` in an email and `?utm_source=facebook` in a post, all pointing at the same link
- **Influencer and affiliate tracking** - Give everyone the same short link with their own `utm_source`, and compare them in Google Analytics without creating a link each
- **Ad platforms** - Let the platform append its own tagging to the URL you gave it; whatever it adds is carried through
- **A team sharing one link** - Nobody has to come back to the app to get a new link for a new campaign
- **Print and packaging** - This is the strongest case. A printed short URL cannot be changed, but the tagging on it can be decided per print run rather than being baked into the link forever.

## Practical notes

- **Do not double-tag** - Either keep destinations plain and rely on passthrough, or tag destinations and skip it. Doing both means the destination's tags quietly win and your channel tagging disappears.
- **Keep naming consistent** - Lowercase, one separator, the same vocabulary everywhere, or your reports fragment across near-identical sources
- **Test before a big send** - Create a link with a plain destination, follow it with `?utm_source=test&utm_medium=test` on the end, and check the address bar where you land

## Next Steps

- Learn about [UTM Parameters](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-parameters) in depth
- Start [Creating Links](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/creating-links)
- View campaign data in [Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/reports)

---

# Custom Domain

> Use your own domain for short links

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/custom-domain
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Settings
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Short Links puts your links on your own store domain rather than a shared shortener like bit.ly, so what you share reads as `yourstore.com/summer`. There is nothing to set up for this — the app follows whatever domain is primary in your Shopify settings.

## Why your own domain matters

- **People recognise it** - A link on a domain your customers already know does not look like it might be spam, which matters most in email and in print
- **Nobody else can take it away** - Third-party shorteners can shut down, change terms, add interstitials or end up on a blocklist, and every link you printed goes with them
- **Link equity stays with you** - Anyone linking to your short URL is linking to your domain, not to somebody else's

## URL structure

Your short links look like this:

```
https://[your-domain]/[key]
```

- **`[your-domain]`** - Whichever domain is primary in your Shopify store
- **`[key]`** - The short key, either one you chose on a paid plan or a five-character key the app generated

Examples:

- `https://yourstore.com/sale`
- `https://yourstore.com/new-arrivals`
- `https://yourstore.com/vip-access`

Links created before 29 July 2024 use an older `https://yourstore.com/a/s/[key]` form. Those keep working unchanged — the app just builds new links the shorter way. Each link's page and the copy button in the links table always show the correct URL for that link, so copy from there rather than assembling one by hand.

## Which domain gets used

Short links follow your store's primary domain automatically:

- **A custom domain** - If `yourstore.com` is primary, links are `yourstore.com/sale`
- **A subdomain** - If `shop.yourstore.com` is primary, links are `shop.yourstore.com/sale`
- **A .myshopify.com domain** - Works too. A custom domain is not required, though `yourstore.myshopify.com/sale` is less memorable.

To check which is primary, go to Shopify Admin > Settings > Domains and look for the domain marked **Primary**.

Every domain on Shopify has automatic SSL, so your short links are always served over HTTPS.

## If you change your primary domain

New links pick up the new domain immediately. Links you have already shared are the thing to think about: keep the old domain connected to the store so Shopify can redirect it, or treat the old short URLs as retired and issue new ones. Anything already printed is the reason to decide this carefully rather than quickly.

## Frequently asked questions

- **Can I use a completely separate short domain?** - Not currently. Links live on your Shopify store's own domain, which is what makes them work with no DNS setup on your side.
- **Will links work on my .myshopify.com domain?** - Yes, if that is your primary domain. They will read as `yourstore.myshopify.com/sale`.
- **What if I have several domains?** - Shopify allows many but only one is primary, and short links use that one. Visitors arriving on your other domains are redirected to the primary by Shopify.
- **Can I choose the part after the domain?** - Yes, on a paid plan. Fill in **Custom URL** when creating a link to pick your own key instead of a generated one.

## Next Steps

- Start [Creating Links](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/creating-links) with your domain
- Learn [How Short Links Work](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/how-short-links-work)
- Set up [UTM Parameters](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-parameters) for tracking

---

# Plan Comparison

> Compare features across different plans

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/plan-comparison
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Plans & Billing
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The free plan shortens links and counts clicks; the paid plan adds control over the link itself and everything you can learn from those clicks. Link volume is not the dividing line — both plans allow unlimited links.

## What the free plan includes

- **Unlimited short links** - No cap on how many you create, and no monthly click limit
- **Generated short keys** - Every link gets a five-character key, such as `yourstore.com/k4m2p`
- **Link names and private notes** - Both editable at any time
- **QR codes** - Every link has one, downloadable as PNG or SVG
- **Lifetime click counts** - The total for each link, visible in the links table and on the link's page
- **Home-page metrics** - Total links, active links, lifetime clicks, and links created this week
- **Shopify Flow triggers** - All four events, so you can automate off links being created, first clicked or hitting a click milestone
- **Shopify Sidekick** - Find links and start new ones by asking the assistant

Clicks are recorded on the free plan even though you cannot chart them, so nothing is lost while you wait to upgrade.

## What a paid plan adds

- **Custom short keys** - Choose the part after your domain, up to 20 characters, so a link can read as `yourstore.com/vip`
- **Expiry dates** - Give a link an end date when you create it, and have it drop out of your active links when the campaign closes
- **The Analytics page** - Clicks over time, seven date ranges, your top links, and referrers
- **Device and platform breakdowns** - How your clicks split across mobile, tablet and desktop, and across operating systems
- **Individual link reports** - A per-link chart, its referrers, and its device split
- **Trend comparisons** - The percentage badges on the home page, comparing this period against the last
- **UTM passthrough** - Forward UTM parameters from the short URL to the destination, so one link serves every channel

## Feature comparison

| Feature | Free | Paid |
|---------|------|------|
| Short links | Unlimited | Unlimited |
| Generated short keys | Yes | Yes |
| Custom short keys | No | Yes |
| Expiry dates | No | Yes |
| Link names and notes | Yes | Yes |
| QR codes (PNG and SVG) | Yes | Yes |
| Lifetime click counts | Yes | Yes |
| Analytics page | No | Yes |
| Click charts and date ranges | No | Yes |
| Referrer breakdown | No | Yes |
| Device and platform breakdown | No | Yes |
| Individual link reports | No | Yes |
| Trend comparison badges | No | Yes |
| UTM passthrough | No | Yes |
| Shopify Flow triggers | Yes | Yes |
| Shopify Sidekick lookups | Yes | Click data needs a paid plan |

## How the free plan behaves

Paid features stay visible rather than hidden, so you can see what they do before deciding:

- **On the create form** - **Custom URL** and **Set expiration date** appear greyed out, with a link to upgrade beside them
- **On the Analytics page** - An upgrade banner and a **View Plans** button replace your figures
- **In Settings** - The **UTM Passthrough** toggle is replaced by an upgrade badge
- **Through Sidekick** - Questions about clicks get an answer explaining that click data needs a paid plan, rather than figures

## Choosing

Stay on free if you mainly want tidy links on your own domain and the click count is enough — a handful of campaigns, nothing printed, no reporting to do.

Upgrade when any of these is true:

- You want the short URL itself to be readable, because it is going into print, onto packaging, or into a bio
- Your campaigns have end dates you want reflected in the app
- You need to know which channels actually deliver, not just that clicks happened
- You share one link across several channels and want them told apart
- Somebody expects a report

## Next Steps

- [Upgrade your plan](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/upgrading) to unlock features
- Explore [Click Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/analytics) available on paid plans
- Learn about [UTM Passthrough](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-passthrough)

---

# Upgrading Your Plan

> How to upgrade to a paid plan

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/upgrading
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Plans & Billing
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Upgrading unlocks custom short keys, expiry dates, UTM passthrough and the whole **Analytics** page. Billing runs through Shopify, so there is no separate payment method to set up and no invoice to handle — the charge joins your regular Shopify bill.

## Getting to the plans

Every route lands on the same Shopify-hosted pricing page for this app:

- **From Settings** - Open **Settings**, find the **Billing** section, and click **Change Plan**
- **From the Analytics page** - On a free plan the page shows an upgrade banner with a **View Plans** button
- **From the create form** - **Custom URL** and **Set expiration date** are greyed out under a **Pro** lock badge with an **Upgrade to Pro** link beside it (the badge opens the same page)
- **From Settings > UTM Passthrough** - The checkbox is greyed out, with a **Pro** lock badge and an **Upgrade to Pro to enable** link
- **From the home page** - A dismissible banner appears once you have created links on a free plan

## Choosing and approving

Because pricing is hosted by Shopify, plan selection and approval both happen on Shopify's own page:

1. Pick the plan you want
2. Shopify shows you the charge, the amount and the billing interval
3. Click **Approve**
4. You are returned to the app with the new plan active

The charge starts when you approve, recurs on the interval shown, and appears on your Shopify invoice.

## What changes immediately

- **Analytics opens** - The upgrade banner is replaced by your charts and figures
- **The paid fields come alive** - **Custom URL** and **Set expiration date** are usable on the create form
- **UTM passthrough becomes a toggle** - Already switched on by default, so passthrough starts working straight away
- **Trend badges appear** - The percentage comparisons on the home-page metrics
- **Your history is there** - Clicks were recorded all along, even on the free plan, so the charts have data from before you upgraded rather than starting from zero

Existing links are untouched: same short URLs, same destinations, same click counts. Note that expiry dates can only be set while creating a link, so links you made before upgrading cannot have one added retroactively.

## Managing the subscription afterwards

- **In the app** - **Settings > Billing** shows your **Current Plan** with an **Active** badge, and **Change Plan** to move
- **In Shopify** - Shopify Admin > Settings > Billing > App subscriptions lists every app charge, including this one

## Changing or cancelling

To move between plans, use **Change Plan** and approve the new charge. To cancel, remove the subscription from Shopify Admin > Settings > Billing.

After a cancellation, the app stays installed and drops to the free plan:

- **Your links keep working** - Every short URL continues to redirect
- **Click recording continues** - Nothing stops being counted
- **Paid features close** - Analytics returns to the upgrade banner, and the custom-key and expiry fields grey out again
- **Nothing is deleted** - Your links, their notes and their click history all remain, and upgrading again restores access to the reports

Uninstalling is not the same as cancelling. It also ends the subscription, but it removes the app from your store, so short links stop redirecting immediately. Roughly 48 hours later Shopify sends us a data redaction request, and your short links, click history and language settings are permanently deleted. Reinstalling before that restores everything; after it, nothing comes back.

If you want to stop paying but keep your links working, cancel the subscription rather than uninstalling. The app stays installed on the free plan and every short URL keeps redirecting.

## Common questions

- **Is there a trial?** - Check the pricing page for the current offer; trials are set there rather than in the app
- **Can I get a refund?** - App billing is handled by Shopify, so refunds go through Shopify support
- **Do I lose data if I downgrade?** - No. Clicks keep being recorded and the history stays; you simply cannot open the reports until you upgrade again
- **Will my printed links break?** - No. Plan changes never affect a link's short URL or where it points

## Next Steps

- Compare features in [Plan Comparison](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/plan-comparison)
- Explore [Analytics](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/reports) after upgrading
- Set up [UTM Passthrough](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-passthrough)

---

# Links Not Working

> Fix issues with short links not redirecting

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/links-not-working
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A short link that does not redirect almost always comes down to one of three things: the URL being tried is not quite the one the app issued, the link was deleted, or the destination itself is broken. Work through these in order and you will normally find it in the first two checks.

## Check the URL you are actually using

This catches most reports. Do not retype a short URL — copy it from the app and compare.

- **Open the link in the app** and use the **Copy** button next to **Shortened URL**, or the **Copy** button in that link's row in the table
- **Compare it character for character** with the URL that is failing. A dropped dash or a wrong letter in the key is indistinguishable from a link that does not exist.
- **Check the domain** - Short links use whichever domain is primary in your store. If you have changed your primary domain since creating the link, an older short URL may be on a domain the store no longer answers on.
- **Watch for older links** - Links created before 29 July 2024 use the longer `yourstore.com/a/s/key` form. The app always shows the right form for each link, which is why copying beats typing.

## Check the link still exists

Open the app and search for the link by name or destination.

- **If it is not there**, it was deleted. Deletion is immediate and permanent: the short URL stops resolving and visitors get a "not found" response. The only fix is to create a new link, and you can reuse the same short key on a paid plan since deleting released it.
- **If it is there**, note its status badge. **Expired** means the campaign end date has passed, which is worth knowing but is not itself the reason a redirect would fail — expiry marks the link as finished in the app rather than switching the redirect off.

## Check the destination

The app sends visitors on to whatever destination you gave it, so a broken destination looks like a broken short link.

1. Open the link in the app and copy the **Original URL**
2. Paste it straight into a browser
3. Confirm the page actually loads

Things to look for:

- **A typo** in the address
- **A page that has moved or been deleted** since you created the link, including a product or collection that was unpublished
- **A password-protected or geo-restricted page** that works for you but not for your visitor
- **A missing `https://`** — a destination has to be a full web address

The destination cannot be edited after a link is created, so the fix here is a new link pointing at the corrected address.

## Rule out your own browser

Before assuming the app is at fault, confirm the problem is not local to you:

- **Try a private or incognito window** - This sidesteps cached redirects, which is the single most common cause of "it works for everyone but me"
- **Try a different device or network** - Your phone on mobile data is the quickest test
- **Clear your browser cache** if the link previously pointed somewhere else and your browser remembers the old target

## Rule out recent domain changes

If you have touched domains recently:

- **Check the primary domain** - Shopify Admin > Settings > Domains, and confirm the one you expect is marked **Primary** and shows as connected
- **Allow time for DNS** - A newly connected domain can take up to 48 hours to settle, and links may work intermittently in the meantime
- **Give SSL a day** - Certificates are issued automatically by Shopify; if you see a certificate warning on a new domain, wait and retest before reporting it

## Confirm the app is still installed

Short links are served by your store handing the request to this app, so an uninstalled app means dead links.

1. Go to Shopify Admin > Apps
2. Confirm **Short Links** is listed
3. If it is missing, reinstall it from the App Store

Reinstalling within 48 hours restores everything — your short links, their click history and your settings are all intact.

After that, they are gone. Shopify sends us a data redaction request roughly 48 hours after an uninstall, and we permanently delete the store's short links, click history and language settings when it arrives. A reinstall past that point starts empty, and any short URL you had printed or posted stays dead. If you are troubleshooting an uninstall, reinstall promptly rather than leaving it until later in the week.

## Quick checklist

1. Copied the short URL from the app rather than typing it
2. The link still exists in the app
3. The destination URL loads on its own in a browser
4. Tested in a private window
5. Tested on another device or network
6. No recent domain, DNS or SSL changes
7. The app is still installed on the store

## Next Steps

- Learn about [Link Expiration](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/link-expiration)
- Review [How Short Links Work](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/how-short-links-work)
- Check [Managing Links](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/managing-links) for organization tips

---

# UTM Parameters Not Passing

> Fix UTM parameters not appearing in destination

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-not-passing
App: Short Links (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Short Links")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-link-shortener
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-07-30
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

You added UTM parameters to a short URL, followed it, and the address you landed on does not have them. There are four realistic causes, and they are quick to tell apart: the feature is off or unavailable, the destination already carries that parameter, the parameter is not one of the six that get forwarded, or the parameter itself is malformed.

## Check the setting and your plan

1. Open Short Links and go to **Settings**
2. Find the **UTM Passthrough** section

What you see there tells you where you stand:

- **A toggle switched on** - The feature is working; move on to the next check
- **A toggle switched off** - Switch it on and retest. Passthrough is on by default, so someone has turned it off.
- **A greyed-out checkbox with a Pro badge and "Upgrade to Pro to enable"** - Passthrough needs the Pro plan. Until you upgrade, put the parameters in the destination URL instead, as described at the end of this article.

## Check the destination is not already tagged

This is the most common cause once the setting is confirmed. Passthrough never overwrites a parameter the destination already has — it only fills in the ones that are missing.

- The destination is `yourstore.com/sale?utm_source=website`
- You share `yourstore.com/sale-link?utm_source=facebook`
- The visitor arrives with `utm_source=website`, because the destination's value stands

To check, open the link in the app and look at **Original URL**. If it has UTM parameters on it, that is your answer. Since a destination cannot be edited after a link is created, the fix is a new link with a plain destination.

Note that this is per parameter, not all-or-nothing: a destination carrying only `utm_source` will still accept a `utm_medium` from the short URL.

## Check the parameter is one that gets forwarded

Exactly six parameters are carried through:

- **`utm_source`**
- **`utm_medium`**
- **`utm_campaign`**
- **`utm_term`**
- **`utm_content`**
- **`utm_id`**

Anything else on the short URL is dropped, including custom tracking parameters, platform click IDs and your own naming variants. A misspelling counts as "anything else" — `utm_med` and `utmsource` are silently ignored.

## Check the parameters are well formed

Good:

```
yourstore.com/sale?utm_source=instagram&utm_campaign=winter_sale_2026
```

Problematic:

```
yourstore.com/sale?utm_source=instagram bio&utm_campaign=winter sale!
```

Fixed:

```
yourstore.com/sale?utm_source=instagram_bio&utm_campaign=winter_sale
```

- **Spaces** - Replace them with underscores rather than encoding them; it reads better everywhere
- **Punctuation** - Avoid `#`, `&` and `=` inside a value unless properly encoded, since each one means something structural in a URL
- **Case** - `Facebook` and `facebook` are two separate sources in Google Analytics, so pick lowercase and stay with it
- **Structure** - One `?` to begin, `&` between each parameter after that

## Test it end to end

1. Confirm the toggle in **Settings** is on
2. Create a link whose destination has no UTM parameters at all
3. Copy its short URL from the app and add `?utm_source=test&utm_medium=test`
4. Follow it in a private browsing window
5. Look at the address bar where you land, not the page content

If both parameters are there, passthrough is working and the original problem is one of the specific cases above. If they are not, recheck the plan and the toggle before anything else.

## Working without passthrough

On the free plan, or when you would rather have the tagging fixed to the link, put the parameters in the destination when you create it:

- **Destination** - `yourstore.com/collections/sale?utm_source=facebook&utm_medium=social`
- **Short link** - `yourstore.com/sale-fb`

Then make one link per channel: `sale-fb`, `sale-ig`, `sale-email`. It is more links to manage, and the tagging cannot be changed afterwards, but it works on every plan. A URL builder such as Google's Campaign URL Builder will assemble the tagged address for you and avoid encoding mistakes.

## Quick checklist

1. **UTM Passthrough** is switched on in **Settings**
2. You are on a paid plan
3. The destination URL does not already carry that parameter
4. The parameter is one of the six forwarded names, spelled correctly
5. No spaces or unencoded punctuation in the values
6. Tested in a private window, checking the address bar after the redirect

## Next Steps

- Review [UTM Passthrough](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-passthrough) settings guide
- Learn about [UTM Parameters](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/utm-parameters) best practices
- Compare plans in [Plan Comparison](https://help.pasilobus.com/link-shortener/plan-comparison)

---

# Installation

> Install the app and activate it on your theme

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/installation
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Install Pasilobus Social Proof from the Shopify App Store. Click **Add app**, review the permissions, and click **Install app**.

After installation, the setup guide walks you through enabling the app and adding widgets to your theme.

## Enable the App Embed

Visits are tracked by the app's web pixel as soon as you choose a plan, with or without the embed. The **Social Proof** app embed marks the products a shopper has already viewed; the **Recent Purchases Popup** is a second, optional embed. To enable them:

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes** in your Shopify admin
2. Click **Customize** on your theme
3. Click **App embeds** in the left sidebar
4. Find **Social Proof** and toggle it **ON**
5. Click **Save**

## Add Social Proof Blocks

Add any combination of these blocks to your product page template:

- **Live Visitor Count** — shows how many people are viewing the product
- **Cart Activity** — shows how many people added it to their cart
- **Sales Count Badge** — shows how many were sold recently
- **Recently Viewed Products** — shows products the customer browsed before

To add a block:

1. In the theme editor, navigate to a product page
2. Click **Add block** in the section where you want the widget
3. Select the block from the app section
4. Adjust styling in the block settings
5. Click **Save**

The **Recent Purchases Popup** is optional and enabled separately as an app embed (same panel as above); it appears on all pages automatically.

## Customer Account Page (Optional)

If you use Shopify's new customer accounts, a Recently Viewed page is added automatically where customers can see their browsing history across devices.

## Verify Installation

1. Open your store in an incognito browser window
2. Browse a few products
3. Check that the widgets appear on product pages
4. The recently viewed widget should show the products you just browsed

## Plans

Pasilobus Social Proof offers plans based on unique visitors tracked per month:

| Plan | Price | Visitors/Month |
|------|-------|----------------|
| **Free** | Free | 1,000 |
| **Pro** | $9.99/month | 5,000 |
| **Max** | $19.99/month | 10,000 |
| **Ultra** | $49.99/month | 35,000, then $0.003 per additional visitor |

On Free, Pro and Max, tracking pauses when the month's visitors are used up and starts again with the next billing cycle. Ultra never pauses: visitors past 35,000 are billed at the per-visitor rate. Stores on an older plan keep it, with its features and price, until they choose another.

Every plan includes all social proof widgets. Pro and up add the full analytics dashboard, cross-device sync, longer count windows and the live sales globe.

You can change your plan anytime from the app settings.

---

# Dashboard Overview

> Understand your analytics and navigation

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/dashboard-overview
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The dashboard gives you a quick snapshot of how customers are interacting with your store — who is on it now, cart adds, orders and product views.

## While Data Is Collecting

Until about ten shoppers have browsed your store, the dashboard shows **Collecting visitor data** with whether tracking is on and how many visitors it has recorded so far. If it says tracking is not on yet, open **Review setup status**: choosing a plan turns tracking on.

## Today at a Glance

The metrics row shows **Visitors right now** (shoppers with a product page open), **Cart adds today**, **Orders today** and **Views today**, each against yesterday. These figures are part of the paid plans; on Free they are shown locked.

**Views today** counts product page views: one customer viewing three products counts as three views. Click it to open the Top Products report for today.

## Hot Right Now and Trending Products

**Hot right now** lists the products with visitors on them at this moment. **Trending Products** shows your top 5 most viewed products over the last 30 days, with how often shoppers clicked them in the recently viewed widget.

## Plan Usage

Usage is on **Settings > Billing & usage**: how many unique visitors were tracked this billing cycle against your plan's limit. Each visitor counts once per billing cycle, however many times they visit. Every store is on a plan with a limit, Free included: a store that has not chosen a plan is on Free.

When you approach your limit, consider upgrading to a higher plan. On plans with a per-visitor rate, visitors past the limit are billed at that rate; on the others, tracking pauses until the next cycle.

## Social Proof Settings

The **Settings** page includes controls for all social proof widgets:

- **Live visitor count** — active window, fallback behavior, threshold
- **Cart activity** — fallback behavior, threshold
- **Sales count badge** — count window (7, 30, or 90 days)
- **Recent purchase popup** — name display, history window, page targeting

Each widget can be enabled or disabled independently. All settings are under **Settings > Social proof widgets**.

---

# Live Visitor Count

> Show how many people are viewing a product

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/live-visitor-count
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The live visitor count badge shows customers how many people are viewing a product right now. Every number comes from actual visitors tracked by the app — no fake or random numbers.

## How Visitor Counting Works

When a customer opens a product page, the app's web pixel records their visit. The badge counts how many unique visitors are currently on that page and updates while the page is open. When visitors leave or close the page, the count adjusts automatically. The shopper looking at the badge is never counted in it, so nobody is told about their own visit.

The count is based on the **active window** — a configurable time period that determines how long a visitor counts as "viewing." A shorter window shows strict real-time data, while a longer window naturally shows higher numbers because visitors stay counted for longer.

## Adding the Block

1. Open the **Theme Editor** for your product page template
2. Click **Add block** in the section where you want the badge
3. Select **Live Visitor Count** from the app blocks
4. Adjust the icon, colors, font size, and padding
5. Click **Save**

## Settings

Configure the live visitor count from **Settings > Social proof widgets** in the app.

- **Active window** — How long a visitor counts as "viewing" after loading the page. Options range from 1 minute (strict real-time) to 30 minutes. All data is real — the window just controls how long each visit is counted. Longer windows are available on higher plans. With a window over 5 minutes the badge uses the "viewed this recently" wording instead of "viewing right now".

- **Fallback** — What to show when the real-time count is low. Options: real-time only (hide if zero), fall back to today's views, fall back to recent views (last 7 days), or the last 30 days on the top plans. The widget label adjusts automatically to match the data source.

- **Fallback threshold** — The real-time count below which the fallback activates. For example, set to 3 means the widget shows real-time data when 3+ people are on the page, and uses fallback data when fewer are present.

- **Auto-extend search** — When your selected fallback has no data, the app checks the longer periods your plan allows (today, then the last 7 days, then the last 30 days) before hiding the widget. It never applies to "real-time only". Enabled by default.

## Icons

Choose from six icon styles in the theme editor block settings:

- **Pulsing dot** — dot that pulses while the badge shows a live count, and stays still on today's or recent figures (default)
- **Flame** — solid flame icon
- **Eye** — outline eye
- **Trending** — upward trend arrow
- **People** — two figures
- **No icon** — text only

## Customizing the Text

The widget text is managed through **Settings > Translations**. You can customize the label for each data source separately:

- **Real-time** — e.g., "{count} people are viewing this right now"
- **Today fallback** — e.g., "{count} people viewed this today"
- **Recent fallback** — e.g., "{count} people viewed this recently"

Use `{count}` as a placeholder for the number. Singular versions are shown when the count is 1.

## In the Theme Editor

While you edit your theme, the block shows a fixed sample figure with a **Sample** tag so you can see the design. Shoppers always see the real count, or nothing when there is none to show.

---

# Cart Activity

> Show how many people added a product to their cart

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/cart-activity
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The cart activity badge shows customers how many people added a product to their cart recently. This creates urgency by showing real demand — every number comes from actual add-to-cart events on your store.

## How Cart Tracking Works

When a customer adds a product to their cart, the app's web pixel sends the event to your app. The badge counts unique add-to-cart events within a 30-minute window by default. Each customer is counted once per product, even if they add multiple quantities, and a shopper's own add-to-cart is never counted in the badge they see.

## Adding the Block

1. Open the **Theme Editor** for your product page template
2. Click **Add block** in the section where you want the badge
3. Select **Cart Activity** from the app blocks
4. Choose an icon, adjust colors and styling
5. Click **Save**

The badge is typically placed near the add-to-cart button where it has the most impact.

## Settings

Configure cart activity from **Settings > Social proof widgets** in the app.

- **Fallback** — What to show when real-time cart adds are low. Options: real-time only, fall back to today's cart adds, or fall back to recent cart adds (last 7 days).

- **Fallback threshold** — The count below which fallback activates. Default is 2.

- **Auto-extend search** — When your selected fallback has no data, check today and then the last 7 days before hiding the badge. It never applies to "real-time only".

## Icons

Choose from several icon styles in the theme editor:

- **Shopping cart** — cart icon (default)
- **Shopping bag** — bag icon
- **Flame** — urgency flame
- **Trending** — upward arrow
- **People** — two figures
- **Dot** — simple dot
- **No icon** — text only

## Customizing the Text

The badge text is managed through **Settings > Translations**. Labels are available for each data source (real-time, today, recent). Use `{count}` as a placeholder for the number.

---

# Sales Count Badge

> Show how many units were sold recently

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/sales-count-badge
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The sales count badge shows how many units of a product were sold recently. It builds trust by showing real purchase data from your store's order history.

## How Sales Counting Works

When an order is placed on your store, the app receives the order via webhook and records each line item. The badge sums up the quantity sold within your configured time window and displays it on the product page. The count is cached for 5 minutes to keep your store fast.

## Adding the Block

1. Open the **Theme Editor** for your product page template
2. Click **Add block** in the section where you want the badge
3. Select **Sales Count Badge** from the app blocks
4. Choose an icon, set the minimum count to display, and adjust styling
5. Click **Save**

## Settings

Configure the sales count from **Settings > Social proof widgets** in the app.

- **Count window** — How far back to count sales. Available options depend on your plan:

| Plan | Maximum Window |
|------|---------------|
| Free | 7 days |
| Pro | 30 days |
| Max | 30 days |
| Ultra | 90 days |

A longer window shows higher numbers. "47 sold this week" vs "892 sold recently" — both are real, just different time ranges.

- **Minimum count** — The badge is hidden when the count is below this number. Default is 5. Set higher to only show the badge on popular products.

## Icons

Choose from several icon styles in the theme editor:

- **Bar chart** — chart icon (default)
- **Trending** — upward arrow
- **Shopping bag** — bag icon
- **Checkmark** — verified check
- **Flame** — flame icon
- **Dot** — simple dot
- **No icon** — text only

## Customizing the Text

The badge text is managed through **Settings > Translations**. Use `{count}` as a placeholder. For example: "{count} sold recently" or "{count} purchased this month."

---

# Live Sales Globe

> A turning globe that lights up with your real recent orders

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/live-sales-globe
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The live sales globe is a slowly turning globe on your storefront that lights up where your recent orders came from. Each order is a dot, newer orders glow brighter, and an arc travels from your store's location to each order like a flight path, with a pulse where it lands. It shows shoppers your store is busy with real orders happening around the world, which is perfect for Black Friday and Cyber Monday. The globe is included in the paid plans, from Pro up.

## Add the globe to your store

Open **Live sales globe** from the app menu. Under **Select Theme**, choose the theme to add it to. Each theme is listed with its role (Live, Draft or Development) and the date it was last edited, so themes with the same name are easy to tell apart. Your live theme is selected; pick a draft theme to try it first. There are two ways to show it:

- **Block** - Click **Add to home page**. The theme editor opens with the **Live sales globe** block added; move it where you want it and click **Save**. You can add it to any other page from **Add block** in the theme editor.
- **Floating globe** - Click **Turn on the floating globe**. The theme editor opens the app embeds with **Live sales globe (floating)**; switch it on and click **Save**. A small globe then sits in a bottom corner of every page.

In the theme editor the globe shows sample orders, tagged **Sample**, so you can place it. Shoppers only ever see your real orders.

Block settings: a heading, the order counter, slow turning on or off, and the height (240 to 720 pixels).

Floating globe settings: bottom right or bottom left, size, the order counter, show on desktop, show on mobile, and whether shoppers can minimise it. A minimised globe stays minimised on that shopper's device. Clicking the floating globe opens it full screen, with a large globe and the same counter; the close button, Esc or a click outside closes it. On phones the floating globe is smaller and steps aside while a form field, such as a newsletter signup, is under it. On any screen, when a bar is fixed to the bottom of the page under the globe's corner, such as a sticky add-to-cart bar, a cart summary bar or a cookie banner, the globe moves up above it so the bar's buttons stay reachable, and moves back down when the bar goes away. A light placeholder globe shows straight away. The live globe loads once the page is idle (at most a few seconds after the page appears; the block loads as it scrolls into view), so it never slows the page down or moves its content. The order counter covers all orders Social Proof has recorded for your store, including those from before the globe was turned on.

Shoppers can explore the globe. Dragging spins it (on phones only a sideways drag, so the page still scrolls), and hovering or tapping an order dot shows the country and its number of orders. The expand button in the corner of the block and the floating globe opens the full-screen view, where shoppers can also zoom: scroll or pinch to zoom, and double-click or double-tap to reset. With reduced motion turned on in the shopper's device settings, the globe stays still but can still be dragged.

## Choose a style

On the **Live sales globe** page every style is shown with sample orders:

- **Night** - Dark, with glowing order dots
- **Classic** - Ocean blue
- **Dotted** - Dot-matrix continents
- **Minimal** - Outlines only
- **Brand** - Your store's brand colours from **Settings > Brand** in Shopify

Pick one under **Style** and click **Save**. The storefront changes within a minute.

**Accent colour** is optional. It recolours the order dots, arcs, pulses and glow in whichever style you pick, and the previews follow it as you choose. Leave it empty to keep the style's own colours. The **Brand** style still takes its other colours from **Settings > Brand** in Shopify.

## BFCM mode

**BFCM mode** is a switch on the **Live sales globe** page, on by default. During the BFCM weekend (Friday 27 to Monday 30 November, midnight to midnight in your store's time zone), the block, the floating globe and the full-screen view show the headline **Watch BFCM live on our store** with a **Live** badge, and the counter shows your real orders since BFCM began, for example "1,234 BFCM orders so far". Below your **Show the counter from this many orders** minimum it stays hidden. The dots and how often the globe updates don't change, and nothing turns on outside the weekend.

BFCM is mainly a US event, so a store selling to other markets can switch it off. **Preview BFCM mode** shows how it looks in your chosen style, with sample numbers. While the BFCM weekend is on, the theme editor shows it too. Shoppers who ask their device for reduced motion get a badge that doesn't pulse.

## Show sales amounts

**Show sales amounts** is off by default, because many stores keep their revenue private. When you switch it on:

- the counter also shows your total sales in its time window, in your store currency, for example "$12,340 in sales in the last 24 hours" (during BFCM, "$98,765 in BFCM sales so far");
- each new order's amount appears briefly beside the pulse where its arc lands, on the block and in the full-screen view (the small floating globe shows only the totals).

Amounts are in your store currency. An order paid in another currency counts at Shopify's converted amount for your store. Amounts only count orders placed after you switch it on.

## Quiet days: only real orders, always

The globe never invents orders and never rounds a number up. Instead, you choose how it presents the orders you really have.

The page recommends a preset from your real orders, checked each time you open it, and marks it **Recommended for your store** with the reason, for example "You had 38 orders in the last 24 hours". It recommends **Busy store** from 10 orders in the last hour, **Growing store** from 5 in the last 24 hours, and **Just starting** otherwise. Until you save a choice, the globe uses the recommended preset. Once you save, your choice stays, even if the recommendation changes.

Under **Your store** pick one of:

- **Busy store** - Live orders, starting with the last hour. The counter shows from 10 orders.
- **Growing store** - The last 24 hours, replayed calmly. The counter shows from 5 orders.
- **Just starting** - The last 7 days, replayed calmly. The counter shows from 3 orders.
- **Custom** - Your own choice in **Advanced settings**. The advanced settings can only be changed with **Custom**; with a preset they show the preset's values.

What these do:

- **Widen the time window** - If there are too few orders, the globe looks further back: the last hour, then 24 hours, then 7 days, then 30 days. The counter always names the window it shows, for example "12 orders in the last 7 days".
- **Show the counter from this many orders** - Below this number the counter hides and the globe shows only the dots.
- **Replay** - The real recent orders are animated one after another on a loop. Without replay, the globe animates orders as they arrive. Either way the globe carries a **Live** badge, because it checks for new orders every minute while the page is open; the counter always names the window it shows, for example "12 orders in the last 7 days". Below the counter threshold only the number hides, the badge stays.
- **With no orders yet** - Show just the turning globe, or hide it.
- **Spin** - Slow and calm, or normal.

Shoppers who ask their device for reduced motion see a still globe.

## Shopify Flow

The **Sales milestone reached** trigger starts a workflow when your orders in the last 24 hours reach a milestone: 10, 25, 50, 100, 250, 500, 1,000, 2,500 and so on. Each milestone starts a workflow once a day. The trigger gives your workflow **Milestone**, **Order count** and **Time window**. For example, post "We just hit 100 orders today!" in Slack. You can see it in the app under **Settings > Integrations**.

## Privacy

The globe never shows who ordered or what they bought. For each order the app keeps only its country, a location rounded to about 11 km and the time, and deletes it after 8 days. For the 30-day window it keeps only daily order counts per country. With **Show sales amounts** on, it also keeps each order's total in your store currency for the same 8 days, and daily totals for 30 days. While it is off, no amounts are kept or shown. Shoppers see dots, arcs and a count, nothing else.

## Orders shown at country level

Some orders arrive without an exact location, for example while Shopify's approval for the app to read order addresses is pending. They are included in the counter, and an order whose country is known lights up that country's centre instead of its town. The **Orders on the globe** card on the app's **Live sales globe** page says when this is happening. An order with no address at all (no shipping or billing address) is counted but not drawn.

---

# Recent Purchase Popup

> Show a popup when someone buys a product

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/recent-purchase-popup
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The recent purchase popup shows a small notification when someone buys a product on your store. It displays the buyer's anonymized name, their city, the product they purchased, and how long ago. All data comes from real orders.

## How Purchase Popups Work

When a customer completes a purchase, the app receives the order via webhook and records each product line once, however many times Shopify delivers the order. The record holds the buyer's name as your **Customer name** setting shows it, their city, and the product details, including a link to the product. The popup appears on your storefront and rotates through recent purchases, showing one at a time with a fade-in animation. Each purchase is shown to a shopper once per visit; when all have been shown, the popup waits for a new order.

Purchases from the last hour read "just bought", with the minutes since the order ("1 minute ago" for the first two minutes, then "2 minutes ago" and so on); older ones read "bought", with how long ago.

The popup is an app embed — once enabled, it appears on every page without needing to add it to individual sections.

## Adding the Popup

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes** in your Shopify admin
2. Click **Customize** on your theme
3. Click **App embeds** in the left sidebar
4. Find **Recent Purchases Popup** and toggle it **ON**
5. Adjust position and styling
6. Click **Save**

## Settings

Configure the popup from **Settings > Social proof widgets** in the app.

- **Customer name** — How to display the buyer's name:
  - **First name + initial** — "Sarah M."
  - **First name only** — "Sarah"
  - **Anonymous** — "Someone" (default for stores installing from November 2026)

  The setting applies to purchases recorded after you change it.

- **On product pages show** — Whether to show only purchases of the current product, or purchases of any product. Showing only the current product is more relevant but may have fewer entries.

- **On other pages show** — Whether to show purchase popups on non-product pages (home, collection, etc.). When enabled, shows purchases from any product. Set to "Off" to limit popups to product pages only.

- **Purchase history window** — How far back to look for purchases to display:
  - **Last 24 hours** — only very recent purchases
  - **Last 7 days** — a week of purchase history (default)
  - **Last 30 days** — a full month

- **Time label** — How to show the purchase time for orders older than 24 hours:
  - **Show "recently"** — displays "recently" for anything over 24 hours (default)
  - **Show exact time** — displays the age in hours up to two days, then in days ("3 days ago")

## Theme Editor Settings

In the theme editor, you can configure:

- **Position** — bottom-left, bottom-right, top-left, or top-right
- **Display duration** — how long each popup stays visible (3-15 seconds)
- **Time between popups** — gap between popup rotations (5-60 seconds)
- **Show product image** — toggle the product thumbnail on or off
- **Colors** — text, secondary text, background, shadow, border radius

While you edit your theme, the popup shows sample purchases with a **Sample** tag. Shoppers only ever see real orders. The sample shows a product photo with its name: on a product page that product, elsewhere your store's first product (or a placeholder image if you have none). Real popups show the photo of the product that was bought.

---

# Recently Viewed Widget

> Display recently viewed products to customers

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/recently-viewed-widget
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The Recently Viewed Products widget shows customers the products they've browsed before, making it easy to return to items they're interested in.

## Adding the Widget

1. Go to **Online Store** > **Themes** > **Customize**
2. Navigate to the page where you want the widget
3. Click **Add section** and select **Recently Viewed Products** from the app section
4. Adjust the position by dragging the section
5. Click **Save**

You can add the widget to product pages, your homepage, collection pages, or any other page template.

## Layout Options

- **Products to show** — How many products appear in the widget. Most stores show between 4 and 8 products.
- **Grid columns** — How many columns the products display in. 4 columns works well for desktop. You can set a different number for mobile.
- **Image ratio** — Square, portrait, or adapt to each product's original aspect ratio.

## Carousel Mode

Enable carousel mode to let customers scroll through products horizontally instead of a grid.

- **Show arrows** — display navigation arrows on the sides
- **Auto-rotate** — automatically cycle through products
- **Loop** — continue from the beginning when reaching the end

On mobile, customers can swipe through products whether carousel mode is on or off.

## Styling

- **Heading text** — The title above the widget. Default is "Recently Viewed" but you can use "You've Been Browsing" or "Pick Up Where You Left Off".
- **Colors** — Background, text, and button colors to match your theme.
- **Product info** — Toggle price, vendor name, and sale badge visibility.

## Mobile Settings

- **Columns on mobile** — One or two columns works best for phones.
- **Touch swiping** — Swipe gestures for browsing products on mobile.

---

# Previously Viewed Badges

> Show badges on products customers have viewed before

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/previously-viewed-badges
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

When enabled, products that a customer has already looked at display a small badge on collection pages, search results, and other product grids. This helps customers quickly find products they're interested in without having to remember which ones they've seen.

The badge appears on product cards throughout your store, not just in the Recently Viewed Products widget.

## Enabling the Badge

1. Go to **Online Store** > **Themes** > **Customize**
2. Click **App embeds** in the left sidebar
3. Click **Social Proof** to expand its settings
4. Check **Show 'Previously Viewed' badge on product cards**
5. Click **Save**

## Customizing the Badge

- **Badge text** — Change what the badge says. The default is "Previously Viewed" but you can use something shorter like "Viewed" or friendlier like "You looked at this".
- **Position** — Choose where the badge appears on the product image: top left, top right, bottom left, or bottom right.
- **Colors** — Set the background color and text color to match your store's design.
- **Size and styling** — Adjust the font size, padding, and text case (uppercase, lowercase, capitalize).

## Handling Conflicts

If your theme already shows badges on products (like "Sale" or "New Arrival"), enable **Hide if product already has a badge** to only show the Previously Viewed badge on products that don't have another badge displayed.

---

# Product Analytics

> Track which products customers are viewing

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/product-analytics
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Click **Product Analytics** in the app sidebar to see detailed performance data for all tracked products. This page shows you exactly which products customers are viewing and engaging with.

## Date Range

Select a date range from the dropdown to filter your data: Today, Yesterday, Last 7 days, Last 30 days, This month, or Last month.

## Understanding the Metrics

- **Views** — How many times the product was viewed across all customers. A high view count means many customers are browsing this product.
- **Clicks** — How many times customers clicked on the product from the Recently Viewed Products widget to view it again. Clicks indicate strong interest.
- **Click Rate** — The percentage of views that resulted in clicks. A higher click rate suggests the product is particularly appealing to returning customers.

## Using Analytics Data

Products with high views but low click rates may need better images or pricing. Products with high click rates are good candidates for promotions or featured placement.

Analytics data is available from the time you installed the app. Historical data from before installation is not available.

---

# Visitor Tracking

> Understand how visitors are tracked

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/visitor-tracking
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Pasilobus Social Proof uses fair, visitor-based billing. You pay for unique people who browse products, not page views or sessions. A visitor can return to your store as many times as they want within a billing cycle and still only count once.

## Unlimited Return Visits

Once a visitor is counted, all their subsequent visits are free for the rest of your billing cycle. Whether they come back 2 times or 200 times, you're never charged extra.

## Smart Cross-Device Tracking

When visitors are logged in to their account, the app automatically recognizes them across all their devices. Someone browsing on their phone, tablet, and laptop counts as just one visitor — saving you money while providing a seamless experience.

## Session Merging

When a guest visitor later logs in, the app automatically merges their sessions and credits your visitor count. You're never double-charged for the same customer.

## Guest Visitor Tracking

For visitors who aren't logged in, tracking is per browser session. This is the standard approach across the industry, and plan limits are designed to accommodate typical browsing patterns.

## Billing Cycles

Your billing cycle runs for 30 days. At the start of each new cycle, your visitor count resets to zero, giving you a fresh allowance.

## Why Our Counts Are Lower Than Shopify

Our visitor counts are typically much lower than Shopify Analytics because:

- **We only count product browsers.** Visitors who land on your homepage or blog but never view a product aren't counted.
- **We count people, not sessions.** If one person visits your store 10 times in a month, we count them as 1 visitor.
- **Repeat visits are free.** Your most engaged customers don't increase your bill.

## Plans

| Plan | Price | Visitors/Month |
|------|-------|----------------|
| **Free** | Free | 1,000 |
| **Pro** | $9.99/month | 5,000 |
| **Max** | $19.99/month | 10,000 |
| **Ultra** | $49.99/month | 35,000, then $0.003 per additional visitor |

On Free, Pro and Max, tracking pauses when the month's visitors are used up and starts again with the next billing cycle. Ultra never pauses: visitors past 35,000 are billed at the per-visitor rate. Stores on an older plan keep it, with its features and price, until they choose another.

Check your current usage anytime on your dashboard under "Active Visitors (Last 30 Days)".

---

# Translations

> Customize text and support multiple languages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/translations
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Customize all text displayed by the app's widgets through **Settings > Translations**. This lets you match your store's voice and support multiple languages.

## What Can Be Translated

All social proof widget labels are translatable:

- **Live visitor count** — real-time label ("X people are viewing this right now"), today fallback, recent fallback, and singular versions of each
- **Cart activity** — real-time, today, and recent labels
- **Sales count badge** — plural and singular labels
- **Recent purchase popup** — purchase text with city and without city, both for the last hour ("just bought") and for older purchases ("bought"), and the time labels
- **Recently Viewed Products widget** — heading text, button labels

## Editing Translations

1. Go to **Settings > Translations** in the app
2. Click on the language you want to edit
3. Update the text for each label
4. Click **Save**

Changes are synced to your storefront automatically.

## Placeholders

Use these placeholders in your translation text:

- `{count}` — the number (visitor count, cart count, sales count)
- `{name}` — buyer's name in purchase popups
- `{city}` — buyer's city in purchase popups
- `{product}` — product title in purchase popups
- `{minutes}` — time ago in purchase popups

## Multi-Language Stores

For stores with multiple languages, add a new language in **Settings > Translations** and provide translated text for each label. The app automatically displays the correct language based on the customer's selected locale.

---

# Customer Account Extension

> Add recently viewed to the new customer accounts

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/customer-account-extension
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Add a Recently Viewed Products page to Shopify's new customer accounts, letting logged-in customers see their complete browsing history across all devices.

## What It Does

When enabled, customers see a "Recently Viewed" link in their account navigation. Clicking it shows all the products they've browsed, with the most recent items first.

This gives customers an easy way to find products they looked at previously, even if they were browsing on a different device.

## Enabling the Extension

The customer account extension activates automatically when you install the app. To verify it's working:

1. Go to **Settings** > **Customer accounts** in Shopify admin
2. Make sure you're using the **New customer accounts** (not classic accounts)
3. Under "Customizations", you should see the extension listed

## Cross-Device History

The biggest benefit is synced history. When customers are logged in:

- Products they view on their phone appear on their desktop
- Their complete browsing history follows them across devices
- They never lose track of products they were interested in

## Guest vs Logged-In Customers

| Feature | Guest | Logged In |
|---------|-------|-----------|
| Recently Viewed Products widget | Yes | Yes |
| History saved in browser | Yes | Yes |
| History synced to account | No | Yes |
| Customer account page | No | Yes |
| Cross-device history | No | Yes |

Encouraging customers to create accounts gives them a better experience and provides you with more accurate analytics.

---

# Admin Extension

> View customer browsing history in Shopify admin

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/admin-extension
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

View what products your customers have been browsing directly from the Shopify admin. The admin extension adds a browsing history section to customer profiles, helping you provide better customer service.

## What It Does

When viewing a customer's profile in Shopify admin, you'll see a section showing the products that customer has browsed. This gives your team valuable context for:

- Answering customer questions
- Making personalized recommendations
- Understanding customer interests
- Following up on abandoned browsing sessions

## Enabling the Extension

The admin extension activates automatically when you install the app. To verify it's working:

1. Go to **Customers** in your Shopify admin
2. Click on any customer profile
3. Scroll down to see the browsing history section

If you don't see the section, make sure the customer has browsed products while logged in.

## Viewing Customer History

The section shows:

- **Product images** — thumbnail of each viewed product
- **Product titles** — links to the product in your admin
- **View dates** — when the customer last viewed each product
- **View count** — how many times they've viewed the product

Products are sorted by most recently viewed.

## Privacy Considerations

Customer browsing data is only visible to staff with customer access in your Shopify admin. Customers can clear their browsing history from their account page at any time.

---

# Widget Not Showing

> Fix invisible social proof or recently viewed widgets

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed/widget-not-showing
App: Social Proof Live (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Social Proof Live")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/recently-viewed-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/recently-viewed
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-04-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If a social proof widget or the recently viewed section isn't appearing on your store, follow these steps to diagnose and fix the issue.

## Check the App Embed

The app embed must be enabled for widgets to work.

1. Go to **Online Store** > **Themes** > **Customize**
2. Click **App embeds** in the left sidebar
3. Find **Social Proof** in the list
4. Make sure the toggle is **ON**
5. Click **Save**

> If you don't see the app in the app embeds list, try reinstalling the app.

## Verify Block Placement

Social proof widgets (live visitor count, cart activity, sales count) only appear on pages where you've added them as blocks.

1. In the theme editor, go to a product page
2. Look for the widget block in the sidebar
3. If it's not there, click **Add block** and select the widget from the app section
4. Save your changes

## Check Widget Settings

Widgets may be hidden due to their settings:

- **Enable toggle** — Make sure the widget is enabled in **Settings > Social proof widgets**
- **Minimum count** — The widget hides when the count is below this number. Try setting it to 1 for testing.
- **Hide when empty** — If enabled, the widget hides when there's no data. Disable this temporarily to verify the widget loads.

## Theme Compatibility

The app works with all Shopify 2.0 themes. If you're using an older theme:

- Check if your theme supports app blocks
- Contact the theme developer about app block support
- Consider upgrading to a Shopify 2.0 theme

## Clear Your Cache

Sometimes browser caching causes widgets not to appear:

1. Clear your browser cache
2. Try viewing your store in an incognito/private window
3. Hard refresh the page (Ctrl+Shift+R or Cmd+Shift+R)

## Check for Script Conflicts

Other apps or custom code might conflict with the widgets:

1. Temporarily disable other apps one by one
2. Check your theme's custom JavaScript for errors
3. Look for console errors in browser developer tools (F12)

## The Recently Viewed Widget Is Empty

If the recently viewed widget appears but shows no products:

- The widget only shows products after a customer has viewed them
- Try browsing a few products first, then return to the page with the widget
- Make sure the products you viewed are still published and available

## The live sales globe is not showing, or shows no counter

The live sales globe is included from the Pro plan; on Free it is not shown on the storefront. If the globe shows no dots, check that orders have come in recently and that **With no orders yet** on the app's **Live sales globe** page is not set to hide it. If the counter is missing, your orders are below **Show the counter from this many orders**: the globe never rounds numbers up, so it shows only the dots until there are enough. Orders without an exact location are drawn at their country's centre; only orders with no address at all are counted but not drawn.

## Still Not Working?

Contact support with:

- Your store URL
- Which theme you're using
- Screenshots of your app embed and block settings
- Any error messages you see in the browser console

---

# Getting Started

> Install the app, pick a plan and switch the app embed on in your theme.

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart/installation
App: Sticky Cart (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Sticky Cart")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sticky-cart
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2025-11-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Sticky and Quick Cart adds a sticky add-to-cart bar to your product pages, a cart bar (or floating cart icon) to the rest of your store, and quick add buttons to product cards. Everything runs from one app embed in your theme, so there is no code to paste.

## Install and pick a plan

1. Install the app from the Shopify App Store.
2. Shopify's plan page opens first. Pick **Free**, **Pro** or **Max** (paid plans start with a free trial). You can change plan at any time from **Compare plans** on the app's Home page.
3. You land on the app's **Home** page.

## Switch the app embed on

Click **Turn on Sticky Cart** on the **Home** page (in the setup guide's step **Activate Sticky and Quick Cart in your theme**, or next to **Open settings**).

1. The theme editor opens with the **Sticky and Quick Cart** app embed switched on. In the setup guide you can pick another theme first.
2. Click **Save** in the theme editor. That is all: the defaults (your theme's look, quick add on, your theme's own cart drawer, popup or cart page after an add) work without visiting **Design**.
3. Back in the app, the guide ticks the step once the embed is on in your **published** theme. Only your live theme counts: activating it on a draft theme is fine for testing, but the tick only follows the live theme.

The embed has no settings of its own in the theme editor. Everything is set in the app.

## Make it yours

- **Design** sets the look (accent colour and corners, with a live preview) and quick add; **More options** there holds the sticky bar, button text, theme compatibility and the banner. See **Design and button text**.
- **Settings > Display rules** chooses which pages, products, customers and markets show the bar.
- **Analytics** shows the add-to-carts the bar and quick add brought in.

Open any product page on your store and scroll past the add-to-cart button: the bar slides in. If it does not, see **The sticky bar is not showing**.

---

# Design and button text

> Quick add, the sticky bar, the accent colour, corners and button text on the Design page.

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart/design-and-button-text
App: Sticky Cart (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Sticky Cart")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sticky-cart
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The **Design** page sets what Sticky and Quick Cart does on your storefront. It opens with the two things most stores change: the **Look** and **Quick add on product cards**. Everything else (quick add options, what happens after an add, the sticky bar, the cart bar on other pages and the banner) is under **More options**. There is no visual editor to fiddle with: everything uses your theme's font and page colours, so it looks like part of your store from the start. Changes reach your storefront as soon as you click **Save** in the save bar; the page stays on Design and confirms the save.

You do not need to visit Design before going live: new installs start with your theme's look, quick add on, and your theme's own behaviour after an add (its cart drawer, its cart popup or its cart page).

## Look

- **Button colour** - **Match my theme's add-to-cart button** copies your theme's button colour, or **Use my own colour** applies the **Accent colour** you pick. The button text turns black or white to stay readable.
- **Corners** - match your theme's buttons, or choose square, rounded or pill.

The accent colour is used for the add-to-cart buttons, the quick add buttons, the floating cart icon and the banner. Everything else follows your theme.

Next to these fields, a small **Preview** shows a product card with the quick add button and the floating bar, and follows the colour and corners as you change them. **See it on my store** opens a product page of your store in a new tab.

If you set custom colours before this page was simplified, your old button colour became the accent colour and your old corner setting became the corners, so your storefront looks the same.

## Quick add on product cards

**Show quick add buttons on product cards** works on every plan. On Free the + button adds one-variant products and opens the product page for the rest; Pro adds the option picker, the added-to-cart popup and **More options > Quick add options**. See **Quick add and theme compatibility**.

## Sticky bar

Under **More options**. The sticky bar is always a floating, centred bar with rounded corners at the bottom of the screen, on desktop and on phones. It shows the product image, title and price (or the bundle the shopper picked), and on desktop the options and quantity.

- **Display style** - show the bar once the shopper scrolls past your theme's add-to-cart button, or keep it always visible.
- **When your theme has its own sticky add-to-cart** - see **Quick add and theme compatibility**.

The bar leaves room at the end of the page while it shows, so your footer can always be scrolled clear of it. It also steps aside whenever your theme's cart drawer, a cart popup or a pop-up window is open, so it never covers the drawer's checkout button.

## Button text

- **Add to cart button text** - what the bar's button says, for example **Buy now**.
- **Sold out button text** - shown when the chosen variant is sold out.
- **Quick add button text** (Pro and Max) - the button on product cards.

Leave a field empty to use the default text in your shopper's language.

## After adding to cart

Under **More options**. **Add-to-cart action** applies to the sticky bar and to quick add. **Default** opens your theme's cart drawer when it has one. When it has none, or when **Open the cart drawer after adding** is off, a small popup confirms the add with the product, the cart subtotal, **View cart** and **Checkout**. You can also refresh the page, go to the cart, or go straight to checkout.

## Other pages

Choose a cart summary bar (the same floating bar, with the cart total) or a floating cart icon, which buttons the cart bar shows, and where the icon sits.

## Custom CSS

The app no longer has a Custom CSS field: add CSS in your theme (**Online Store > Themes > Customize > Theme settings > Custom CSS**). CSS you saved in the app before keeps working on the Max plan. Target the bar with `#sqc-bar`, the cart bar with `#sqc-cart-bar`, card buttons with `.sqc-qa-btn` and the added-to-cart popup with `.sqc-qc`.

---

# Quick add and theme compatibility

> How the sticky bar and quick add work alongside your theme

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart/quick-add-and-theme-compatibility
App: Sticky Cart (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Sticky Cart")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sticky-cart
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Sticky and Quick Cart adds two things to your storefront: a sticky add-to-cart bar on product pages, and quick add buttons on product cards. Both are designed to work with your theme rather than against it, so they step aside wherever your theme already does the same job.

## Themes with their own sticky add-to-cart

Some themes, including Horizon, can show their own sticky add-to-cart bar. On the **Design** page, open **More options**, then under **Sticky add-to-cart bar > When your theme has its own sticky add-to-cart** choose:

- **Automatic** - our bar hides whenever the theme's bar is on screen, and shows on pages where the theme's does not. Recommended.
- **Never show ours on themes that have one** - our bar stays off entirely on a theme that ships a sticky bar.
- **Always show ours** - ignore the theme's bar and show both.

On Horizon and the themes built on it, both **Automatic** and **Never show ours** leave the product page to the theme's own sticky bar whenever it is turned on in the theme editor (product information section, **Sticky add to cart bar**). Turn that off and our bar takes over. The Design page reminds you of this next to the setting. Quick add, the cart bar and the banner keep working either way.

## Matching your theme

The bar, the quick add buttons and the popups always use your theme's font and page colours. Under **Look**, the buttons match your theme's add-to-cart button, or use one accent colour you pick, with the corners you choose.

## Quick add on product cards

Turn on **Show quick add buttons on product cards** on the **Design** page to add a round + button to product cards on collection, search and home pages. It works on every plan, and new installs have it on. Stores that installed before quick add came to Free see a **Quick add is now free** card on **Home**: **Turn on** switches it on in one step.

- **When your theme has its own quick add** (every plan, right under the switch) - Horizon and the other new Shopify themes show their own quick add on product cards. **Automatic** leaves those cards to the theme and adds ours everywhere else, so on Horizon you may see no change. **Always add ours** puts ours on every card and hides the theme's quick add button on those cards, so shoppers see one button in your accent colour.
- **On Free** - the + button adds a product that has one variant straight to the cart, and opens the product page (with your theme's own option picker) for products with options. After the add, your theme's cart drawer opens, or a short confirmation shows.
- **On Pro and Max** - the options below, under **More options > Quick add options**:
- **Quick add** opens a compact picker for options and quantity (colour options show as swatches); single-variant products are added in one tap, and the button shows a tick.
- **Quick view** (Max) also shows images and the product description.

Quick add buttons only go on product cards: a product link in your announcement bar or header never gets one. On Dawn and the themes built on it, the button sits in the corner of the product image and stays clickable above the card's link.
- **Open the cart drawer after adding** - opens your theme's cart drawer (or the Kaching Cart drawer). When off, or when the theme has no drawer, shoppers stay on the page and a small popup shows what was added, the cart subtotal, **View cart** and **Checkout**.
- **Product card selector** - leave empty; cards are found automatically. Enter a CSS selector only if buttons appear in the wrong place.

## Plans

- **Free** - sticky add-to-cart bar, theme detection, cart summary bar or floating cart icon, the quick add + button, analytics, all storefront languages.
- **Pro** - adds the quick add picker (swatches, quantity, the added-to-cart popup and the quick add options), a banner message and page display rules.
- **Max** - adds quick view, free shipping progress and countdown banners, and product, collection, customer and market targeting.

---

# Bundle and quantity-break apps

> How the sticky bar works with Kaching Bundles and other bundle or quantity-break apps.

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart/bundle-apps
App: Sticky Cart (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Sticky Cart")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sticky-cart
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Bundle and quantity-break apps, such as Kaching Bundles, add their own choices to your product page ("Buy 1", "Buy 2, save 10%"). Sticky and Quick Cart lets that app stay in charge, so the bundle the shopper picked is exactly what goes into the cart.

## What the bar does

- When a bundle or quantity-break block is on the page, the bar hides its own quantity and variant controls.
- The bar shows the bundle the shopper chose, in that app's own words, in place of the single-item price.
- **Add to cart** on the bar presses your theme's own add-to-cart button, so the bundle app adds the bundle exactly as it would from the page.
- If the shopper has not picked a bundle yet, the bar scrolls the page to the bundle choices.
- Blocks that load late, after the page appears, are picked up as soon as they show.
- With **Kaching Cart** (the cart drawer from the Kaching makers), adds from the bar and from quick add refresh and open that drawer, and the bar steps aside while it is open.

## Tips

- Keep the bundle block inside the product information section, above or near the buy buttons.
- Quick add buttons are never added inside a bundle widget.
- Quick add on product cards adds a single item; the bundle choices live on the product page.
- If the bar adds a single item instead of the bundle, check that the bundle block is on the product template you are testing, and tell us the bundle app's name so we can add it.

---

# Banner

> Show a message, a free shipping progress bar or a countdown above the sticky bar.

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart/banner-messages
App: Sticky Cart (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Sticky Cart")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sticky-cart
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart
Section: Features
Last updated: 2025-11-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The banner is a thin strip above the sticky bar and the cart bar. Use it for a short offer, to show how far a shopper is from free shipping, or to count down to the end of a sale. There is one banner, set on the **Design** page; the old **Banner Messages** pages have been retired.

## Turn the banner on

1. Open **Design** and scroll to **Banner**.
2. Switch on **Show a banner above the bar**.
3. Pick a **Banner type**, fill in its text, and click **Save** in the save bar. The banner uses your accent colour (**Design > Look**).

## Banner types

- **Custom message** (Pro and Max) - any short text, for example a discount code.
- **Free shipping progress** (Max) - set the **Free shipping threshold** in your store currency. The **Progress message** shows while the cart is below it; use `{remaining}` for the amount left. The **Success message** shows once the cart reaches it. Shoppers in other currencies see the threshold converted.
- **Countdown timer** (Max) - set an **End date**. The timer counts down to it and the banner hides itself when it ends.

On the Free plan the banner section is shown locked, with the plan that unlocks each type and an **Upgrade** link.

---

# Analytics

> Add-to-carts, cart value and top products from the sticky bar and quick add.

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart/analytics
App: Sticky Cart (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Sticky Cart")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sticky-cart
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The **Analytics** page shows what the sticky bar, the cart bar and quick add brought in. It is included on every plan. The same 30-day figures head the app's Home page.

## What it shows

- **Add to carts (30 days)** - add-to-carts made through the app in the last 30 days, with the change from the 30 days before.
- **Value added to carts (30 days)** - the value of those items, in the currency most shoppers used. This is cart value, not completed orders.
- **Checkouts from the cart bar (30 days)** - checkouts started from the cart bar or the floating cart icon.
- **Add to Cart Events Over Time** - one point per day.
- **Top 10 Products** - the products shoppers add most through the app.

Only adds made through the app are counted, not every add-to-cart in your store.

## No numbers yet

Figures appear once shoppers use the bar. If they stay at zero for days, check that the app embed is on in your published theme (see **The sticky bar is not showing**). You can also ask Shopify's Sidekick "how is my sticky cart doing?" for the same figures.

---

# Plans

> What Free, Pro and Max include.

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart/plans
App: Sticky Cart (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Sticky Cart")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sticky-cart
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Sticky and Quick Cart has three plans: **Free**, **Pro** and **Max**. Shopify bills them with your store's invoice, and paid plans start with a free trial. Prices are on the plan page: click **Compare plans** on the app's Home page, or **Upgrade to unlock** next to any locked feature.

## What each plan includes

- **Free** - the sticky add-to-cart bar on product pages, theme detection (it steps aside for a theme's own sticky bar), the cart summary bar or floating cart icon, the quick add + button on product cards (adds one-variant products, opens the product page for the rest), button text, the accent colour and corners, analytics and every storefront language.
- **Pro** - everything in Free, plus the quick add picker (options as swatches, quantity, the added-to-cart popup, and the quick add options: button style, text, card selector, theme mode and the cart drawer switch), a custom banner message and page display rules (which page types show the bar).
- **Max** - everything in Pro, plus quick view (images and description), the free shipping progress and countdown banners, and product, collection, customer and market targeting.

## Locked features

Features your plan does not include stay visible in the app with a lock badge naming the plan that unlocks them and an **Upgrade to unlock** link. When you change plan the app updates your storefront straight away: an upgrade unlocks the controls, and a downgrade switches off what the new plan does not include. Your other settings are kept.

---

# The sticky bar is not showing

> Checks to run when the sticky bar or the cart bar does not appear on your store.

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart/bar-not-showing
App: Sticky Cart (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Sticky Cart")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-sticky-cart
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/sticky-cart
Section: Troubleshooting
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Most of the time the bar is hidden on purpose: the embed is off, a display rule excludes the page, or your theme's own sticky bar is on. Work down this list.

## 1. The app embed is on in your published theme

Open **Online Store > Themes > Customize > App embeds** on your **live** theme and check that **Sticky and Quick Cart** is on, then **Save**. The setup guide on the app's Home page shows a tick once it is. Switching it on in a draft theme does not change your live store.

## 2. Display rules allow the page

Open **Settings > Display rules**. Check that the page type (product, collection, home, cart, other) is on, and that product, collection, customer or market targeting does not exclude what you are testing. A rule limited to logged-in customers hides the bar from guests.

## 3. Your theme's own sticky bar

On Horizon and the themes built on it, our bar steps aside whenever the theme's own sticky add-to-cart bar is turned on. To use ours, open the theme editor, select the product information section and turn off **Sticky add to cart bar**, or set **Design > Sticky add-to-cart bar > When your theme has its own sticky add-to-cart** to **Always show ours**. Other themes with a sticky bar: with **Automatic**, ours hides while the theme's is on screen.

## 4. Scroll past the add-to-cart button

By default the bar appears only once your theme's add-to-cart button scrolls out of view. Choose **Always Visible** under **Design > Sticky add-to-cart bar > Display Style** to keep it on screen.

## 5. A drawer or pop-up is open

The bar hides while your theme's cart drawer, a cart popup or another pop-up window is open, and returns when it closes.

## Still not showing

Add `?sqc_debug=1` to the product page's address. A small panel on the page says why each piece is shown or hidden; send us what it says.

---

# How Stock Control Works

> Understand what Stock Control does and why it matters

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/how-stock-control-works
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Stock Control is a full inventory management platform for Shopify. It has two halves: **inventory intelligence** — the dashboards, forecasting, and reports that tell you what to do next — and **operations** — counts, receiving, transfers, and purchase orders, all scan-friendly.

The app extends Shopify's built-in inventory by adding what Shopify doesn't: sales velocity per variant, days of stock remaining, reorder signals, dead stock detection, and a full adjustment audit trail.

## Inventory Intelligence

The dashboard answers the questions you actually care about in the morning: which SKUs need reordering today, what's sitting as dead stock, how many stores are out of something, and what the inventory is worth. Every variant is bucketed as In Stock, Low Stock, Reorder Now, Out of Stock, or Dead Stock, based on its on-hand quantity, 30-day sales velocity, and your forecasting settings.

The Inventory page shows every tracked variant with live KPIs — on-hand, available, committed, velocity per day, days of stock, trend, and inventory value. You can filter, sort, search, and open any variant to edit stock per location or record an adjustment with a reason code.

## Operations

When it's time to act on what the dashboard shows, you use the operational side:

- **Purchase Orders** to reorder from suppliers when a variant hits Reorder Now
- **Scans** for everything you do with a barcode scanner or the phone camera, in one place with a tab each: **Counts** to reconcile what's on the shelf against what Shopify thinks, **Receiving** to check stock in when a delivery arrives, and **Transfers** to move stock between Shopify locations
- **Adjustments** to record ad-hoc changes (damage, shrinkage, corrections) with reasons

The home screen's **Scan** card shows the live picture — open counts and when the last one finished, deliveries expected from purchase orders and transfers, transfers in transit, and how much was scanned each day this week — with Count stock, Receive a delivery and Transfer stock one tap away.

Every operational workflow supports camera scanning and external barcode scanners, and nothing is sent to Shopify until you click **Complete**.

## How Sales Data Powers It

On install, Stock Control pulls 90 days of your Shopify order history. That data becomes the velocity (units sold per day per variant) that drives the Reorder Now and Dead Stock buckets, the days-of-stock column, and the Sales Velocity report. New orders flow in via webhook from that point on.

Without sales data, the dashboard still shows on-hand and out-of-stock counts, but the forecasting-driven buckets stay empty until the backfill completes.

## Multi-Location and Multi-Supplier

Stock Control respects Shopify's locations throughout. Counts, transfers, receiving, and the Inventory page all let you work per-location. Each variant can be linked to one or more suppliers, with a primary supplier used for reorder suggestions and forecasting.

## Shopify Flow

Stock Control sends three events to Shopify Flow, so your store can act on them (email a manager, tag products, post to Slack):

- **Stock count completed** — the count's name, location, how stock was updated, and how many items and units were counted
- **Purchase order received** — when every unit on a purchase order has arrived, with its supplier and destination
- **Low stock after count** — after a **Replace stock** count, when counted products are now low or out of stock

Find them under Stock Control in Flow's trigger list, or from **Settings → Integrations** in the app.

---

# First-Time Setup

> What happens on install and how to verify everything is synced

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/first-time-setup
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

When you install Stock Control, the app immediately starts pulling your Shopify data so the dashboard is useful from day one. Nothing needs to be configured manually — the backfill runs in the background.

## What Gets Synced on Install

Three things are pulled from your Shopify store in order:

- **Products and variants** — every tracked variant becomes a row in Stock Control
- **Inventory levels** — on-hand, available, and committed quantities for each variant at each location
- **Sales (90 days)** — the order history used to calculate velocity, days of stock, and dead stock

Untracked variants (listing-only products with inventory tracking turned off in Shopify) and archived products are excluded from inventory counts and KPIs. That's by design — they would otherwise show as "out of stock" forever.

## How Long It Takes

For small catalogs (a few hundred variants) the initial sync finishes in a couple of minutes. Larger stores with thousands of variants or a full 90 days of high-volume sales can take 15–30 minutes. The dashboard is usable immediately, but some values (velocity, days of stock, dead stock) stay empty until the sales backfill completes.

## Choosing Your Forecasting Mode

Go to **Settings > Forecasting** to pick how reorder points are calculated:

- **Basic mode** — a fixed 7-day reorder threshold for every variant. Simple, no supplier data required.
- **Advanced mode** — reorder point = lead time + safety stock, with a cascade from per-variant supplier overrides down to account defaults. Set account-wide defaults here too.

Start with Basic. Move to Advanced once you've added suppliers and want per-variant accuracy.

## If Something Looks Wrong

While the import is still running the dashboard shows an **Importing your products and stock** banner, and the out-of-stock figure only covers what has arrived so far. If the banner stays for more than half an hour, or numbers ever look stale later, click **Sync now** in that banner (or reopen the app) to re-import products, stock levels and sales from Shopify. Nothing in Shopify changes — the import only reads.

## Verifying the Sync Worked

Once the backfill has run, check the dashboard:

- **Tracked SKUs** should match the number of tracked variants in your Shopify admin
- **Inventory Value** should be non-zero (unless you haven't set costs in Shopify)
- **Sales (30d)** should show a realistic order volume

If any of these look wrong, see the [Dashboard Numbers Look Wrong](../troubleshooting/dashboard-numbers-look-wrong.md) troubleshooting article.

## Ongoing Sync

After the initial backfill, Stock Control stays in sync with your Shopify store automatically via webhooks. New orders, inventory changes, product edits, and new variants are picked up in real time — no manual refresh needed.

---

# The Inventory Page

> Browse, filter, and adjust every tracked variant in one place

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/inventory-page
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The Inventory page is the single source of truth for every tracked variant in your store. It's where you go when you want to see, filter, or change inventory without running a full count or receiving session.

## What You See

Each row shows one variant with:

- **Product and variant title**, image, SKU, and barcode
- **On-hand** — total units physically in stock across all locations
- **Available** — units available for sale (on-hand minus committed)
- **Committed** — units reserved for unfulfilled orders
- **Velocity** — units sold per day, averaged over the last 30 days
- **Trend** — rising, falling, or steady (last 7 days vs the 7 before)
- **Days of stock** — how many days the current on-hand covers at current velocity
- **Status** — the bucket (In Stock, Low Stock, Reorder Now, Out of Stock, Dead Stock)
- **Inventory value** — on-hand × cost

When a variant has units on an open transfer or purchase order, an **incoming** line appears under its on-hand figure so you can see what is already on its way before deciding to reorder.

## Filtering

Use the filter bar to narrow the list:

- **In Stock** — healthy variants with days of stock above the reorder threshold
- **Low Stock** — close to the reorder point
- **Reorder Now** — below the reorder point, needs a PO today
- **Out of Stock** — tracked variants at 0 on-hand
- **Dead Stock** — no units sold in the last 90 days

The dashboard's KPI tiles and Stock Health bars all link here with the correct filter pre-applied.

## Search and Sort

Search by product title, SKU, or barcode using the search box. Sort by any column by clicking its header — title, SKU, on-hand, velocity, days of stock, or inventory value. Both ascending and descending.

## Editing On-Hand Per Location

Click any variant to open its drawer. Inside the drawer:

- Every location is listed with its own on-hand field
- Edit the number and save — Stock Control calls Shopify's inventory mutation for that location only
- Other locations are untouched

This is the fastest way to fix a one-off discrepancy without running a full count. The list's own on-hand box works the same way for the location you're viewing: change the number and Stock Control saves it to Shopify. If Shopify refuses the change, the box shows Shopify's reason and the old number comes back.

## Manual Adjustments

The drawer also has an **Adjust** action for recording changes with a reason. Enter the delta (positive or negative), pick a reason code (damage, shrinkage, correction, etc.), and save. The change posts to Shopify and appears in the Adjustments Audit report. Use this whenever you want to track *why* stock changed, not just *that* it did.

## Exclude from Alerts

Each variant has an **Exclude from alerts** toggle in the drawer. Turn it on for variants you don't want counted in Reorder Now, Low Stock, or the weekly digest — useful for variants you're deliberately running down, seasonal items out of season, or items you don't actively restock.

Excluded variants still appear on the Inventory page so you can toggle them back on later.

---

# Stock Status Buckets

> How Stock Control classifies every variant

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/stock-health-and-status
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Stock Control bucket-classifies every tracked variant into one of five status categories. Understanding how each bucket is calculated helps you act on the right signal at the right time — without second-guessing the dashboard.

## The Five Buckets

- **In Stock** — healthy: on-hand is above the reorder point, or there's no sales velocity yet
- **Low Stock** — getting close: days of stock is below ~2× the reorder point but still above it
- **Reorder Now** — below the reorder point, a PO is needed today
- **Out of Stock** — on-hand is zero
- **Dead Stock** — no units sold in the last 90 days (only when you have sales data loaded)

## How the Bucket Is Calculated

Three inputs drive the calculation:

- **On-hand** — total units across all locations
- **Velocity per day** — units sold per day, averaged over the last 30 days of order history
- **Reorder point (days)** — either a fixed 7 days (Basic mode) or the lead time + safety stock from your forecasting cascade (Advanced mode)

The logic runs in this order:

1. If on-hand is 0 → **Out of Stock**
2. Else if days of stock < reorder point → **Reorder Now**
3. Else if days of stock ≤ 2× reorder point → **Low Stock**
4. Else if no sales in the last 90 days *and* you have sales loaded → **Dead Stock**
5. Else → **In Stock**

**Days of stock** is `on-hand ÷ velocity per day`. If velocity is 0, days of stock is undefined, so those variants fall straight through to Dead Stock or In Stock depending on whether sales data exists for the account.

## Why Dead Stock Only Shows Up Once Sales Are Loaded

"No sales in 90 days" and "no sales data loaded yet" look identical from the app's point of view — both mean the Sales table has zero rows for a variant. To avoid every variant being mis-classified as dead stock on day one, the rule only fires when your account has at least one Sales row.

During the initial install backfill, expect Dead Stock to show 0 until the 90-day sales sync finishes. After that, it populates correctly.

## What's Excluded

Two things deliberately never appear in any bucket:

- **Untracked variants** — listing-only products with Shopify's inventory tracking turned off. Counting them would over-state your catalog and flag every one as out of stock forever.
- **Archived and draft products** — they're no longer sold, so their on-hand doesn't need to be monitored.

If a variant unexpectedly doesn't appear in the Inventory page or KPIs, check its product status and tracking flag in Shopify.

## Using Buckets to Prioritise Your Day

- Start with **Reorder Now** each morning — these are the POs that need to go out today
- Check **Out of Stock** if you run retail or wholesale — you may be losing sales right now
- Review **Dead Stock** monthly — decide whether to discount, transfer, or delist
- Scan **Low Stock** when you've cleared the urgent work — these become Reorder Now if you wait

---

# Forecasting Modes

> Basic vs Advanced forecasting and how lead times cascade

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/forecasting
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Stock Control's forecasting decides when a variant becomes Reorder Now. Out of the box it uses a simple 7-day threshold, but you can switch to Advanced mode for per-variant and per-supplier accuracy driven by real lead times.

## Basic Mode (Default)

Every variant uses a fixed 7-day reorder threshold. If current stock covers fewer than 7 days at the current velocity, it shows up as Reorder Now.

This is simple, predictable, and good enough when you have short, consistent lead times and a small supplier base. No setup required.

## Advanced Mode

Reorder point = **lead time (days) + safety stock (days)**.

- **Lead time** is how long it takes for stock to arrive after you place an order
- **Safety stock** is the buffer you want on top of lead time, to absorb demand spikes or delivery delays

Example: a variant with a 14-day lead time and 7 days of safety stock has a 21-day reorder point. Once days of stock falls below 21, it becomes Reorder Now.

## The Cascade

Advanced mode looks up lead time and safety stock in this order, stopping at the first one that has a value set:

1. **Variant/supplier override** — if a variant is linked to a primary supplier, any per-row overrides set on that link win
2. **Supplier default** — the lead time and safety stock you've set on the supplier itself
3. **Variant manufacturing override** — for variants you manufacture yourself with no supplier, the values set on the variant
4. **Account default** — the store-wide fallback set in Settings

This means you can set sensible defaults once, then only tweak variants that are unusual.

## Where to Configure

**Settings > Forecasting**
- Pick the mode (Basic or Advanced)
- Set account-wide default lead time and safety stock (used as the fallback)

**Suppliers > (pick a supplier)**
- Set a supplier-wide lead time and safety stock (overrides the account default for variants linked to this supplier)

**Suppliers > (pick a supplier) > variants**
- Per-variant overrides on the supplier link (overrides the supplier default for that specific variant)

**Inventory page > variant drawer > manufacturing tab**
- For variants without a supplier, set per-variant lead time and safety stock directly

## When to Switch from Basic to Advanced

Stay on Basic if:
- You replenish everything from one or two suppliers on similar lead times
- Your sales volume is steady enough that 7 days is a reasonable buffer
- You haven't added supplier data yet

Move to Advanced when:
- Different suppliers take very different lead times (2 days vs 6 weeks)
- Some variants need more safety stock than others (e.g. volatile sellers, promo SKUs)
- You're tired of seeing Reorder Now either too early or too late

The switch is non-destructive — you can toggle back to Basic at any time and keep your supplier data.

## Seeing Forecasting in Action

On the Inventory page, the Days of Stock column and the status bucket both respect whichever mode you're in. Open a variant's drawer to see the effective reorder point used for that specific row — useful for sanity-checking the cascade.

---

# Order This Week

> What to order, from whom and how much — and turning it into purchase orders

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/reorder-workflow
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Stock Control's home screen answers one question every time you open it: what should I order this week, from whom, and how much? Every item that won't last until your next delivery is listed under its supplier with a suggested quantity, and one click turns the list into draft purchase orders.

## At a Glance

The strip at the top of the home screen sums the list up: how many items to order and what they will cost, how many are **out now** (losing sales today), how many **won't last until delivery** even if you order today, and how many units are already **on their way** on purchase orders and transfers. Each item's row shows a runway bar — how much of its cover window today's stock still fills — red when out, amber when it will run out before a delivery can arrive.

## Your Order Rhythm

Stock you order today has to last until the order after it arrives, so two numbers decide how much to buy: how often you place orders (weekly, every two weeks or monthly) and your typical supplier lead time. Both start with sensible defaults (weekly, 14 days) and live in **Settings > Forecasting**; set a different lead time per supplier on the **Suppliers** page for more accurate numbers.

## How Each Quantity Is Worked Out

Click **Why?** next to any item to see the arithmetic behind its number:

- **Sales per day** — the last 30 days of orders, with a note on whether the last week is trending up or down
- **Days of cover** — lead time + days until your next order + safety stock
- **Target** — sales per day × days of cover
- **Already covered** — what's on hand, incoming on Shopify transfers, and on open purchase orders in the app is subtracted
- **Rounding** — the result is rounded up to the supplier's pack size and never goes below their minimum per item

Items with no sales in the last 30 days, items you've excluded from alerts, untracked items and archived products are never recommended.

## Creating Purchase Orders

Untick anything you don't want, change any quantity, choose where the stock should be delivered if you have more than one location, then click **Create purchase orders**. You get one draft purchase order per supplier, with your cost price on every line. Items already on an open purchase order count as covered, so they drop off the list straight away. The Purchase orders page then confirms how many drafts were made.

Drafts are not on their way yet. Until you send them, the home screen shows **N drafts not sent yet** with a **Review drafts** link (also when there is nothing else to order), and the **Receive a delivery** card counts only orders marked as ordered and transfers in transit as **expected**.

## Suppliers, Packs and Minimums

Items without a supplier are grouped under **No supplier yet**. Click **Use Shopify vendors as suppliers** to create a supplier for each product vendor and link every unlinked item to it in one step; links you've made yourself are never changed. On each supplier you can set:

- **Lead time** and **Safety stock** — used instead of your account defaults
- **Pack size** — quantities are rounded up to whole packs
- **Minimum per item** — the smallest quantity the supplier accepts for one item

## Sending the Order

Open a draft purchase order and use **Download PDF** or **Download CSV** in the **Send to supplier** section, then email or upload it to your supplier. Mark the order as ordered once it's sent. When the delivery arrives, receive it by scanning — on-hand goes up and the order closes.

## Keeping the Numbers Honest

Recommendations are only as good as your on-hand numbers. Below the list, the app shows how many items with stock or sales haven't been counted in 90 days and offers to count the best sellers among them. One click starts an inventory count of exactly those items at the location you choose.

## Every Monday

The weekly digest email now leads with this week's orders, grouped by supplier, with a link straight back to the list.

---

# Receiving Inventory

> Receive new inventory shipments with barcode scanning

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/receiving
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-03-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Receiving is how you add incoming stock to your Shopify inventory. Use it whenever a delivery arrives — whether from a supplier, a purchase order, or any other source. Scan the products as you unpack them and the quantities are added to your store.

## Starting a Receiving Session

Click **New Stock Scan** from the dashboard, select **Receive**, and choose the location where the stock is being delivered. If you have a purchase order for this delivery, you can also select it here — the app will pre-load the expected items so you can track what's arrived versus what was ordered.

## Scanning Items

Once the session is open, scan each product as you unpack it:

- **Camera** — tap the camera icon and point it at the barcode
- **External scanner** — just scan, the app captures it automatically
- **Search** — type the product name, SKU, or barcode to find it manually

Each scan adds one unit. Scan the same product multiple times to increase the count, or tap the quantity field and type in the number directly.

## Reviewing What You've Scanned

The items table shows everything you've added so far, including the product name, variant, SKU, and quantity. To remove an item added by mistake, tap the trash icon on that row.

## Receiving Against a Purchase Order

If you linked a purchase order when starting the session, the table shows two columns for each item — **Ordered** (what was on the PO) and **Received** (what you've scanned so far). This makes it easy to spot anything that's missing or short.

The summary before you complete shows the value of what you received at the product's price, in your store's currency.

Once you complete it, the purchase order status updates automatically. If all items are received it moves to **Received**; if some are still outstanding it moves to **Receiving**.

## Completing the Receiving

When you've finished scanning:

1. Review the items list and check quantities look right
2. Click **Complete** to push the changes to Shopify
3. The app adds all quantities to the selected location and confirms what was updated

## Tips

- If you're receiving a large delivery, scan all units of one product before moving to the next — it's faster than going back and forth
- An external Bluetooth or USB scanner is much quicker than the camera for high-volume receiving
- Give the session a clear name (e.g. "Supplier X delivery 12 Mar") so you can find it easily later

---

# Inventory Counts

> Perform full or partial inventory counts

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/inventory-counts
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-03-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

An Inventory Count lets you check that what's physically on your shelves matches what Shopify thinks you have. The app loads your expected quantities, you scan what's actually there, and any differences are flagged so you can review them before completing it.

## Starting a Count

Click **New Stock Scan**, select **Count**, and choose the location you're counting. The app loads your current Shopify inventory for that location. You can count everything, or filter to a specific vendor or product tag to do a partial count.

## Scanning Products

Walk your shelves and scan each product:

- First scan sets the product's count to 1
- Scanning again adds one each time — one line per product, never duplicates
- Tap the quantity field to type in a number directly
- Scan something that wasn't in the prepared list and it is added as an extra line, with its current Shopify level as the expected figure

The **Expected** vs **Counted** comparison updates as you go. Several people can count the same session on different devices; each scan is recorded as it happens, so nobody overwrites anyone else's numbers.

## Understanding the Status Column

Each item in the list shows one of these statuses:

- **Not counted** — you haven't scanned this product yet
- **Match** — your count matches what Shopify expects
- **+N (green)** — you have N more than expected (overage)
- **-N (red)** — you have N fewer than expected (shortage)

## Handling Items You Haven't Scanned

Products you don't scan stay in **Not counted** status. Before completing, you need to decide what to do with them:

- If you forgot to scan it, scan it now
- If you genuinely have zero of that product, click the status badge to confirm zero
- If you want to skip it entirely and leave Shopify unchanged, leave it as not counted — uncounted items are not updated when you complete the count

The **Mark all uncounted as zero** button at the top lets you quickly set all unscanned items to zero in one go.

## The Progress Bar

The progress bar at the top shows how many items you've counted out of the total, so you can see at a glance how far through you are.

## Completing the Count

When you're satisfied with your counts:

1. Review any discrepancies and confirm they're accurate (recount anything that looks wrong)
2. Decide what to do with any uncounted items
3. Click **Complete** to update Shopify

Items you counted have their **on-hand** quantity in Shopify set to exactly your counted figure (available stock follows automatically once committed orders are taken into account). Items confirmed as zero are set to zero. Items left as uncounted are not changed.

Items you haven't counted show an empty **Counted** box and read **Not counted** on the scan's page, in its CSV export (with blank Counted and Difference) and in its PDF. Use **Export PDF** or **Export CSV** in the page's actions to save a copy.

If Shopify rejects some items — for example a product that is no longer tracked at that location — the count reopens with a message listing what could not be updated. Items that were already applied are not applied a second time; fix the issue and click **Complete** again to push the rest.

## Starting a Count from Sidekick

Ask Sidekick in the Shopify admin to "start a stock count" and it links you to the new-count page, telling you how many scans your plan has left this month.

## Tips

- Divide your space into sections and count one at a time — it's easier to stay organised
- Use an external scanner for large counts; it's significantly faster than the camera
- Name your count with the date and area (e.g. "Warehouse — March 2026") so you can find it in history
- If something looks wrong, recount before completing — it's much easier than fixing it afterwards

---

# Inventory Transfers

> Transfer inventory between locations

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/transfers
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-03-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Transfers move stock between your Shopify locations — from a warehouse to a store, or to balance stock across sites. Stock Control uses Shopify's own transfers, so a transfer you start here is the same transfer you see in the Shopify admin, and transfers created in the admin appear here too.

## The Transfers Page

**Scans › Transfers** in the sidebar lists every transfer for your store — open ones first — with where it's going, how much has been received, its shipment and tracking, and its status:

- **Draft** — created but not yet ready to ship
- **Ready to ship** — approved; nothing has left the origin yet
- **In progress** — a shipment is on its way (stock has left the origin and shows as incoming at the destination)
- **Completed** — everything received
- **Cancelled**

Filter by status, direction and location, or search by name, reference or location. Open a transfer to see its items (requested, shipped, received, remaining), its shipments with tracking links, and any receiving sessions. Changes made in the Shopify admin appear here within a few seconds. If an open transfer hasn't been checked for a while, opening the list re-reads it from Shopify in the background and the page updates itself a few seconds later; **Refresh from Shopify** forces an update at any time.

## Step 1 — Send Stock (at the origin)

At the location the stock is leaving:

1. Click **New transfer** (or **New Stock Scan → Transfer**), choose **Transfer out** and the destination (it must be a different location from the one you're sending from; the form starts on a different one)
2. Scan each product you're packing; scanning the same product again adds one
3. Click **Complete**, optionally entering the carrier, tracking number and tracking link

Completing creates the transfer in Shopify **and ships it**: a shipment is created and marked in transit, so the stock leaves the origin immediately and the destination sees it as incoming. Tracking details are saved on the shipment in Shopify. The scan's page then reads **Transfer sent: in transit until received**, listing what was available and what was sent for each item, until the destination receives it.

If you'd rather request stock from another location, choose **Transfer in** instead. That creates the transfer as *ready to ship* and leaves it to the origin to ship — from the Transfers page here, or from the Shopify admin.

## Shipping a Transfer That Was Created Elsewhere

A transfer created in the Shopify admin, or requested with **Transfer in**, sits in **Ready to ship** until someone ships it. Open it on the Transfers page and use **Ship this transfer**: enter tracking if you have it and click **Create shipment**. Everything still waiting at the origin is shipped in one go.

## Step 2 — Receive Stock (at the destination)

When the shipment arrives:

1. Open the transfer on the Transfers page and click **Receive** (or use **New Stock Scan → Receive → From Transfer**)
2. The items on the shipment are loaded as the expected list
3. Scan each item as you unpack it
4. Click **Complete**

Received quantities are recorded against the shipment in Shopify, which adds the stock to the destination and completes the transfer once everything has been received. If you leave a receiving session part-way, **Resume receiving** on the transfer takes you back to it.

## Handling Discrepancies

What arrives doesn't always match what was sent:

- **Missing items** — receive only what arrived; the transfer stays in progress with the remainder outstanding, and you can receive the rest later or investigate the shortage
- **Extra items** — check them against the shipment before adding anything that wasn't sent
- **Damaged items** — receive only the undamaged units

The app records exactly what you scan, so inventory at both locations stays accurate whatever happened in transit.

## Cancelling

A transfer that hasn't shipped (draft or ready to ship) can be cancelled from its page. Once a shipment is in transit, cancel it from the Shopify admin so the stock is returned to the origin correctly.

## If the Page Asks for Permissions

Shopify added transfer permissions after some stores installed the app. If yours is one of them, the Transfers page shows a banner with a **Grant permissions** button instead of your transfers. Click it, approve the permissions in the Shopify dialog that opens, and the page reloads and imports every transfer in your store within a minute. Until then Shopify refuses transfer requests, so nothing can be created or received here.

## Tips

- Give transfers a clear name that includes the source, destination and date
- Enter tracking when you ship — the receiving location can follow the parcel from the transfer page
- Receive as soon as the shipment arrives; long-open transfers are harder to reconcile

---

# Purchase Orders

> Create and manage purchase orders for suppliers

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/purchase-orders
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-03-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Purchase Orders let you track what you've ordered from suppliers, how much it costs, and what's actually been received when the shipment arrives. Everything is linked — create the order, mark it as sent, then receive stock against it when the delivery comes in.

## Purchase Order Statuses

A purchase order moves through these stages:

- **Draft** — you're still building the order; everything is editable
- **Ordered** — you've sent it to your supplier; the order is locked
- **Receiving** — the shipment has arrived and you've started receiving items
- **Received** — all items have been received and inventory updated

## Creating a Purchase Order

Go to **Purchase Orders** in the sidebar and click **Create Purchase Order**. Fill in:

- **Reference** — your internal PO number (auto-generated if you leave it blank)
- **Supplier** — select from your supplier list
- **Destination** — the location where the stock will be received
- **Expected Date** — when you expect the delivery to arrive
- **Notes** — anything else relevant (payment terms, special instructions, etc.)

## Adding Items to the Order

There are several ways to add line items:

- **Search** — type a product name or SKU; click to add it with a quantity of 1, then adjust
- **Barcode scan** — scan a product barcode; each scan adds one unit
- **Import from CSV** — upload a spreadsheet of SKUs and quantities (useful for large orders); click **Import items** to get started

For each line item you can set the **quantity**, **cost per unit**, and **tax rate**.

## Marking the Order as Sent

Once you've placed the order with your supplier, open the purchase order and click **Mark as Ordered**. The status changes to Ordered and the order is locked from further edits.

## Receiving Stock Against the Order

When your shipment arrives:

1. Open the purchase order
2. Click **Start Receiving** to begin a new receiving session pre-loaded with your ordered items
3. Scan products as you unpack them — the app shows **Ordered** vs **Received** quantities for each item
4. Click **Complete** when done to update Shopify inventory

If only some items arrive, the PO status moves to **Receiving**, and a part-received line shows how many of its quantity arrived (for example **1/2**). When the rest arrives, click **Start Receiving** again: the new session asks only for what is still to come (**Expected**), and lines already received in full are left out. Once everything is received, the PO moves to **Received**.

**Download PDF** and **Download CSV** save the order as a file for your supplier without leaving the page.

## Purchase Orders Created in Shopify

Orders you create in the Shopify admin appear in this list with a **Shopify** badge, count as stock on the way in the home screen's recommendations, and can be received by scanning like any other order. Shopify does not let apps change them, so they open read-only here with an **Open in Shopify** link. The list refreshes from Shopify every ten minutes while you use it and every night. The first time, a banner says the import is running and the list reloads on its own when it finishes. If the page shows a permissions banner, click **Grant permission** and approve the dialog once.

## Tips

- Create the purchase order before placing the order with your supplier — that way you're tracking costs and quantities from the start
- Include accurate unit costs to help with margin analysis later
- Use the CSV import for orders with many SKUs instead of adding them one by one
- Match your reference numbers to your accounting system's PO numbers to keep records consistent

---

# Suppliers

> Manage suppliers and link them to variants

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/suppliers
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Suppliers is your address book for the vendors you buy from, plus the forecasting defaults that drive Stock Control's Reorder Now signal. Keeping supplier records up to date means better PO workflows *and* more accurate reorder suggestions.

## Adding a Supplier

Go to **Suppliers** in the sidebar and click **Add Supplier**. Fill in:

- **Name** — the company or vendor name (required)
- **Email** — primary contact email
- **Phone** — contact phone number
- **Address** — their business address
- **Lead time (days)** — how long after an order is placed until stock arrives
- **Safety stock (days)** — buffer you want on top of lead time
- **Notes** — anything useful like your account number, payment terms (e.g. Net 30), or preferred contact

Click **Save** to add them to your list.

## Lead Time and Safety Stock

In **Advanced forecasting mode**, every variant's reorder point is calculated as lead time + safety stock. The supplier-level values you set here become the default for every variant linked to this supplier.

If one specific variant from a supplier has a different lead time (e.g. air-freight vs sea-freight), you can override it at the variant level — see [Forecasting](forecasting.md) for how the cascade works.

## Primary Supplier per Variant

Each variant can be linked to one or more suppliers, with one marked as **primary**. The primary supplier is the one Stock Control uses for:

- Reorder suggestions on the Inventory page
- Forecasting lead-time and safety-stock lookups
- Grouping the Reorder Now list when you're drafting POs

Set the primary supplier from the variant drawer on the Inventory page, or link variants in bulk from the supplier's own page.

## Viewing and Editing Suppliers

The Suppliers page lists all your vendors with their name, contact email, phone number, and how many purchase orders are linked to them. Click any supplier to open their details and edit any field.

## Deleting a Supplier

Open the supplier and click **Delete**. You'll be asked to confirm. Note that you can't delete a supplier who is linked to existing purchase orders — remove or reassign those orders first.

## Linking Suppliers to Purchase Orders

When you create a purchase order, you select a supplier from your list. This ties the order to that vendor so you can:

- See all orders from a specific supplier in one place
- Track how often and how much you order from each vendor
- Keep a full history of your supplier relationships

## Tips

- Always fill in the **Notes** field with your account number if you have one — it saves time when placing repeat orders
- Record payment terms (e.g. "Net 30, 2% early payment discount") so you have them without needing to look them up
- Update contact details whenever they change; outdated info causes delays when you need to reach a supplier quickly

---

# Manual Adjustments

> Record ad-hoc stock changes with reason codes

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/adjustments
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Adjustments let you record ad-hoc stock changes with a reason code — damage, shrinkage, found inventory, data correction — without running a full count. Every adjustment is logged with who made it, when, and why.

## When to Use an Adjustment

Use an adjustment when the change is small, targeted, and has a specific cause:

- A unit was damaged in the stockroom
- You found stock that was miscounted
- A customer return was processed outside of Shopify
- You need to correct a typo in on-hand without running a full count
- Shrinkage has been confirmed after a physical check

For anything larger — reconciling a whole section of the store, counting a category after receiving a delivery — use an [Inventory Count](inventory-counts.md) instead.

## Creating an Adjustment

From the Inventory page, click any variant to open its drawer, then click **Adjust**.

- **Delta** — the change in units (positive to add, negative to remove)
- **Location** — which Shopify location the change applies to
- **Reason** — pick from the reason codes (Damage, Shrinkage, Correction, Found, Return, Other)
- **Notes** — optional free-text explanation

Save, and the change posts to Shopify immediately at the chosen location.

## Reason Codes

Reason codes are what make adjustments useful versus just editing on-hand directly. They let you run the Adjustments Audit report and see patterns — e.g. "damage is concentrated in these three SKUs" or "this location has more shrinkage than the others."

## Viewing the Adjustments Audit

Go to **Reports > Adjustments Audit** to see every adjustment across your account, with filters for date range, location, reason, and user. See [Reports](reports.md) for details.

## Adjustment vs Count vs Direct Edit

Three ways to change on-hand, each with a different purpose:

- **Direct edit** (the on-hand field in the drawer) — fast, no reason recorded. Use for quick fixes where you don't need an audit trail.
- **Adjustment** — records a reason and appears in the audit report. Use when the *why* matters.
- **Inventory count** — full session with scanning, expected vs counted reconciliation, and a committed delta per item. Use when you're reconciling many items at once.

When in doubt, prefer an adjustment over a direct edit — the extra reason code makes future analysis much easier.

---

# Reports

> Sales Velocity, Inventory Aging, and Adjustments Audit

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/reports
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Reports give you the historical view that the live dashboard can't. Where the dashboard shows what's true right now, reports show what happened over a range of time — useful for weekly reviews, supplier conversations, and loss-prevention audits.

Stock Control ships with three reports: Sales Velocity, Inventory Aging, and Adjustments Audit. Each is accessible from **Reports** in the sidebar.

## Sales Velocity

Ranks every variant by units sold per day across a selectable date range. Useful for:

- Finding your top movers (to make sure they never go Out of Stock)
- Finding slow movers before they become Dead Stock
- Informing PO quantities — variants trending up deserve bigger orders
- Comparing performance across vendors or product types

Columns: product, variant, SKU, units sold, velocity per day, current on-hand, days of stock. Sort by any column.

## Inventory Aging

Buckets on-hand by how long it's been sitting. Each row shows a variant and what share of its current on-hand is less than 30 days old, 30–60 days, 60–90 days, or over 90 days.

Aging is the report to run when you're deciding what to discount, transfer, or delist. Variants with a heavy tail in the 90+ days bucket are candidates for markdown or clearance before they tie up more working capital.

## Adjustments Audit

Every manual adjustment, across every variant, every location, every user. Each row shows:

- When the adjustment was made
- Who made it: the staff member's name as it appears in Shopify (picked up the first time they open Stock Control after this update)
- Which variant (and location)
- The delta (units added or removed)
- The reason code
- Notes, if any

Filter by date range, location, reason, or user. This is the report to run when you're investigating shrinkage, comparing damage rates across locations, or reviewing adjustment patterns before a stock audit.

## Exporting

Each report has an **Export CSV** action in the top right. CSV exports contain every filtered row (not just what's visible on screen), so they're suitable for deeper analysis in a spreadsheet or BI tool.

## When to Use Each Report

- **Weekly** — Sales Velocity, to re-rank top and slow movers
- **Monthly** — Inventory Aging, to decide on markdowns or transfers for slow categories
- **Quarterly** — Adjustments Audit, to review shrinkage and damage trends per location
- **Ad-hoc** — Adjustments Audit, whenever you're investigating a specific discrepancy

---

# Barcode Scanning

> Use camera or external scanners for fast data entry

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/barcode-scanning
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Barcode scanning is how you add products to any stock take quickly and accurately. You can use your device's built-in camera, connect a Bluetooth or USB scanner, or search manually — whichever works best for your situation.

## Scanning With Your Camera

Tap the camera icon in the scanning bar, point your camera at the barcode, and hold steady. The product appears in your list automatically.

For best results:

- **Lighting** — scan in a well-lit area; shadows make barcodes harder to read
- **Distance** — 6–12 inches away from the label works well for most cameras
- **Steady** — hold still for a moment while the camera focuses
- **Label condition** — torn, faded, or wrinkled barcodes may not scan reliably; type the barcode manually if needed

## Using an External Scanner

Bluetooth and USB barcode scanners connect to Stock Control automatically — no special setup needed in the app. Just pair or plug in your scanner, open a stock take session, and start scanning.

Your scanner needs to be in **Keyboard Wedge** (also called HID) mode, which is the default for most retail scanners. If you're not sure, check the scanner's manual.

External scanners are significantly faster than camera scanning for high-volume work. Popular options include Zebra, Honeywell, and Socket Mobile scanners, but most commercial scanners work fine.

## Supported Barcode Formats

Stock Control reads all standard retail barcodes — UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-13, EAN-8, Code 128, Code 39, and QR codes. If a barcode is a standard format, it will scan.

## How Products Are Matched

When you scan a barcode, the app looks for a matching variant:

- First it checks the **barcode field** on each variant
- If no match is found it checks the **SKU field**
- Leading zeros are handled for you — a 12-digit UPC label matches a 13-digit EAN barcode in Shopify (and the other way round)
- If still nothing, it shows "No product found" and plays the error sound if you have it turned on

Scanning the same product again adds one to its quantity — there is one line per product, never duplicates. You can scan as fast as your scanner allows: scans are queued and applied in order, and a small "waiting" note appears under the scan field if you get ahead of the connection.

If a product isn't found, check that the barcode or SKU is entered correctly in Shopify.

## Selecting Instead of Scanning

If scanning isn't working or you don't have a barcode to hand, click **Select** next to the scan field to open Shopify's product picker. Search by name, SKU or barcode, tick the variants you want, and they are added to the list with a quantity of 1.

---

# Locations

> Work with multiple Shopify locations

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/locations
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Stock Control uses your Shopify locations so inventory changes go exactly where they should. When you start a scan session, you pick a location and every change from that session applies only to that location. The Inventory page also lets you edit on-hand per location directly from a variant's drawer, without starting a full session.

## What Counts as a Location

Your locations come directly from Shopify. They could be retail stores, warehouses, fulfilment centres, or any other place you store stock. If it's active in Shopify, it appears in Stock Control.

## Per-Location On-Hand Editing

Every variant's drawer on the Inventory page lists each location with its own on-hand field. Edit a location's number, save, and the change posts to Shopify at that location only — other locations are untouched. This is the fastest way to fix a single-location discrepancy without running a full count.

You can also record an adjustment (with a reason code) at the location level from the same drawer.

## Choosing a Location

When you click **New Stock Scan**, you're asked to choose a location before starting. Double-check this before you begin — completing a scan at the wrong location means stock goes to the wrong place.

## What Each Scan Type Does to a Location

- **Receiving** — adds the scanned quantities to the chosen location
- **Inventory Count** — adjusts the chosen location's inventory to match your counts
- **Transfer Out** — removes items from the source location
- **Transfer In** — adds items to the destination location

## Plan Limits: Locations and Scans

Your plan sets how many different locations you can scan at and how many scans (counts, receiving sessions and transfers) you can start each month:

- **Free** — 1 location, 10 scans a month
- **Pro** — 3 locations, 100 scans a month
- **Max** — 15 locations, unlimited scans
- **Ultra** — 30 locations, unlimited scans

Stores already on the older **Basic** plan keep its limits (1 location, 10 scans a month). Pro, Max and Ultra were called Grow, Advanced and Enterprise before.

The app counts unique locations you've actually used for scans. Using the same location multiple times doesn't use up your allowance. The monthly scan allowance resets on the 1st of each month.

Both limits are enforced when a scan starts, wherever you start it: the New Stock Scan page, purchase order and transfer receiving, the home screen's suggested count and the POS extension. When a limit is reached, the New Stock Scan page says so and the **Start** button is turned off; upgrade your plan to start more right away.

## Tips for Multi-Location Stores

- Always double-check the location before starting a scan — it's easy to start one session and forget you changed location
- Name your scan sessions to include the location (e.g. "Sydney Store count — March 2026") so the history is easy to read
- Keep transfer sessions up to date — completing both the send and receive steps promptly keeps your location-level stock accurate

---

# Weekly Inventory Digest

> The email you get every week summarizing inventory health

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/weekly-digest
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Stock Control sends a weekly inventory digest email on Monday mornings summarising the state of your inventory. It's designed to be the one email you need to read before planning your week.

## What the Digest Contains

- **Reorder Now count** — variants that need a PO this week
- **Out of Stock count** — tracked variants at zero across all locations
- **Dead Stock count** — variants with no sales in the last 90 days
- **Highlighted SKUs** — the top few in each bucket, with direct links to the Inventory page pre-filtered

The email is intentionally short — it's a nudge to open the app, not a replacement for the dashboard.

## Who Gets It

The digest goes to every user on your account who has email notifications turned on. Users can opt out individually via **Settings > Email Notifications**. Turning off the digest doesn't affect other notifications (e.g. PO receipt confirmations).

## Using It Effectively

- Treat the digest as your Monday-morning trigger to run reorder work
- Click through to the Inventory page instead of trying to act from the email — the in-app view has live filters, trend indicators, and the adjustment drawer
- If you never find the digest useful because your volumes are low, turn it off — there's no penalty

## Variants Excluded from the Digest

Variants with **Exclude from Alerts** turned on won't be counted in the digest's Reorder Now, Out of Stock, or Dead Stock numbers. Use this toggle on variants you're deliberately running down or seasonal SKUs you don't want to see every Monday. Set it from any variant's drawer on the Inventory page.

---

# Shopify POS Extension

> Use Stock Control directly from the Shopify POS app

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/pos-extension
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Stock Control includes a native Shopify POS extension so you can run inventory counts, receive stock, and process transfers directly from the POS app — without switching to a separate screen or the Shopify Admin. Everything stays in POS.

## Opening Stock Control in POS

A **Stock Control** tile appears on your POS home screen. Tap it to open the full inventory management interface. The tile also shows how many items are in any active scan session, so you can pick up where you left off.

## Starting a New Scan

Tap **New Stock Scan** and choose what you want to do:

- **Count** — check that physical stock matches what Shopify expects
- **Receive** — add incoming stock to your inventory
- **Transfer** — move stock to or from another location

## Receiving Stock

When receiving, you can start three ways:

- **Manual** — start with an empty list and scan items one by one
- **From a Purchase Order** — pick an open PO and the expected items are pre-loaded; you scan against them as you unpack
- **From a Transfer** — pick an incoming transfer from another location; the expected items are pre-loaded the same way

## Inventory Counts

You can count everything at your current location, or narrow it down by **collection**, **vendor**, or **product tag** to do a targeted count of just one part of your catalogue.

## Scanning Products

Once a session is open, scan products using:

- **Camera** — tap the scan button and point the device camera at a barcode
- **External scanner** — connect a Bluetooth or USB scanner; the app picks it up automatically
- **Search** — type a product name or SKU to find it manually

For inventory counts, each item shows its **Expected** quantity alongside what you've counted. A **Discrepancies Only** toggle lets you filter to just the items where your count doesn't match, making it faster to spot problems.

For transfers, the app shows the **Available** quantity at the current location so you don't accidentally transfer more than you have.

## Completing a Scan

When you're done, tap **Complete** to choose how the results are applied to Shopify:

- **Replace Stock** — sets inventory to exactly what you counted (full count mode)
- **Add to Stock** — adds your scanned quantities on top of existing inventory (useful for partial counts or receiving)
- **Records Only** — saves the scan for historical reference without changing any inventory in Shopify

Tap **Complete Stock Take** to confirm. The app updates Shopify inventory and shows a success confirmation.

## Languages

The POS extension follows the language your POS device is set to. Screens, buttons and messages are available in English, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, Finnish, French, German, Hindi, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Malay, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese (Brazil and Portugal), Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish and Vietnamese. Any other language falls back to English.

## What's Not Available in POS

A few things are only available from the Shopify Admin version of the app:

- **Creating purchase orders** — POs are created in the admin; POS can receive against them
- **Managing suppliers** — supplier records are managed in the admin
- **Importing items via CSV** — only available in the admin

Everything else — counting, receiving, transfers, and scanning — works fully in POS.

---

# Dashboard Numbers Look Wrong

> Why KPIs may show zero, too high, or stale values

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/dashboard-numbers-look-wrong
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If the dashboard KPIs or Stock Health breakdown look off — too high, too low, or mostly zero — the cause is usually one of four things. Work through them in order.

## Sales Data Still Backfilling

On install, Stock Control pulls 90 days of order history in the background. Velocity, days of stock, Reorder Now, and Dead Stock all depend on that data — so they stay empty until the backfill completes.

Signs: Sales (30d) KPI shows 0; Dead Stock shows 0; Reorder Now and Low Stock are empty even though you know some variants are running low.

**What to do:** wait 15–30 minutes for the backfill to finish, then refresh. If it's been a day and these numbers are still empty, something's gone wrong — contact support.

## Variants Marked Untracked in Shopify

Stock Control excludes any variant with **Track inventory** turned off in Shopify. If you've got listing-only products (e.g. services, custom builds, digital downloads), they won't appear in the Tracked SKUs count, Stock Health breakdown, or Inventory page.

Signs: Tracked SKUs is much lower than your total variant count; specific variants you expect to see are missing from the inventory list.

**What to do:** check the variant in Shopify admin — **Products > (the variant) > Track inventory**. If it's off and should be on, turn it on. The variant will appear in Stock Control within a few minutes once the webhook fires.

## Products Archived or in Draft

Only active products are counted. Archived and draft products are excluded from every KPI and from the Inventory page.

Signs: you know a product has stock, but it's not showing anywhere in Stock Control.

**What to do:** in Shopify admin, check the product's status. Set it to Active if it's being sold.

## Duplicated or Multi-Location Variants

Every KPI sums across all locations. If you have one variant with 10 units at three locations, it shows as 30 on-hand — that's correct, not a bug.

Signs: on-hand per variant looks higher than any single location would explain.

**What to do:** click the variant to open the drawer — it shows a per-location breakdown. If one location is wrong, edit the on-hand there directly or record an adjustment.

## Still Wrong?

If none of the above explains what you're seeing, it may be a genuine sync gap. Try these in order:

- Wait a few minutes — webhook processing can briefly lag during high-volume periods
- Refresh the dashboard
- Open the variant's drawer and confirm the per-location on-hand matches Shopify admin
- If they differ, that's a sync bug worth reporting — contact support with the variant's SKU

---

# Scanning Issues

> Fix barcode scanning problems

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/scanning-issues
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-03-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If barcodes aren't scanning or products aren't being found after a scan, here's how to track down the cause.

## The Camera Won't Activate

The app needs permission to use your camera. If the camera icon doesn't do anything:

- Look for a camera or lock icon in the browser's address bar, click it, and choose **Allow**
- On iPhone/iPad: go to **Settings → Safari → Camera** and set it to Allow
- On Android: go to **Settings → Apps → your browser → Permissions → Camera** and enable it
- Try opening the app in Chrome or Safari — these have the most reliable camera support

After changing permissions, refresh the page and try again.

## The Barcode Won't Scan (Camera)

If the camera is working but barcodes won't read:

- **Lighting** — make sure the label is well lit; shadows and glare both cause problems
- **Distance** — try holding the device 6–12 inches from the label and keep it steady
- **Label condition** — faded, torn, or wrinkled labels often can't be read; type the barcode manually instead
- **Camera permission** — if the camera view shows but doesn't scan anything, try closing and reopening the scan panel

## The Product Is Not Found After Scanning

If the barcode reads but the app says the product wasn't found:

- **Check Shopify** — go to the product in Shopify Admin, open the variant, and confirm the barcode field matches the label
- **Leading zeros** — the app already tries the code with and without a leading zero, so "012345678901" finds "12345678901" and vice versa; other differences (a missing digit, a different code on the label) still need fixing in Shopify
- **SKU labels** — if the label carries the SKU rather than a barcode, that works too: the SKU field is checked when no barcode matches
- **Use Select** — if the code isn't in Shopify at all, click **Select** and pick the product from the picker
- **Location stock** — for inventory counts, the product must have inventory tracked at the selected location in Shopify; if it isn't stocked there, it won't be in the prepared list (scanning it still adds it as an extra line)

## The External Scanner Isn't Working

If a Bluetooth or USB scanner isn't being picked up by the app:

- **Bluetooth** — check the scanner is paired and shows as connected in your device's Bluetooth settings
- **USB** — try a different USB port; some ports don't supply enough power
- **Scanner mode** — the scanner must be in **Keyboard Wedge** (or HID) mode; scan the mode barcode from your scanner's manual if unsure
- **Test it** — open any text field (like the browser address bar or Notes), place your cursor, and scan a barcode; if numbers appear, the scanner works and the issue is with the app connection
- **Restart** — turn the scanner off and back on, or disconnect and reconnect it

## Scanning Feels Slow

If there's a noticeable delay between scanning and the item appearing:

- **Network** — a weak internet connection slows things down; move closer to your WiFi router or switch to a stronger connection. Scans are queued, so keep scanning: a "waiting" note under the scan field shows how many are still being saved
- **Focus** — with an external scanner on a desktop or tablet, the scan field takes the input even if you clicked elsewhere; if a scan seems to go nowhere, tap the field once and scan again
- **Session size** — very large stock takes (thousands of items) are shown 100 rows at a time; scanning jumps to the right page automatically

---

# Inventory Sync Issues

> Fix inventory not updating in Shopify

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control/inventory-sync
App: Stock Control (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Stock Control")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/stock-take-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/stock-control
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-04-22
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If you've committed a stock take but the inventory changes aren't showing up in Shopify, here's what to check.

## 1. Check the Stock Take Status

Open the stock take and look at its status:

- **Open** — you haven't committed yet; click Commit to proceed
- **Processing** — the app is syncing with Shopify; wait a few minutes and refresh
- **Completed** — the update was successful
- **Failed** — something went wrong; check for an error message on the page

If the status shows **Processing** for more than 10 minutes, try refreshing the page. Large stock takes (hundreds of items) can take a little longer.

## 2. Look for Error Banners

After you click **Complete**, the app shows a banner with the result:

- **Green** — everything synced successfully
- **Yellow** — partial success; some items may not have updated
- **Red** — the update failed; the message will explain why

If you see a red or yellow banner, note the error and follow the steps below.

## 3. Check You're Looking at the Right Location in Shopify

The most common reason changes seem missing is checking the wrong location. In Shopify:

1. Open the product you updated
2. Go to the **Inventory** section
3. Select the specific location you used in Stock Control
4. Check the quantity there

Each location tracks its own inventory separately, so the change won't show under "all locations" if that's not what you selected.

## 4. Understand How Quantities Are Applied

Different scan types update inventory in different ways:

- **Receiving** — adds your scanned quantity to whatever was already there
- **Count** — replaces the quantity with exactly what you counted
- **Transfer** — moves quantity from one location to another

If the number in Shopify looks wrong, check which type of scan you committed.

## 5. Check Shopify's Inventory History

Shopify keeps a log of every inventory change. Open the product in Shopify, go to the Inventory section, and look for **View inventory history**. Find the Stock Take entry and check the timestamp and quantity — this confirms whether the update went through and what it changed.

## 6. Retry a Failed Update

If the scan reopens with a red banner, fix what it names and click **Complete** again: lines already applied are not applied twice. If the retry also fails, check whether the products involved have inventory tracking enabled in Shopify — items with tracking disabled can't be updated by Stock Control.

## 7. Check Shopify's Status

On rare occasions, Shopify itself has service issues that prevent inventory updates. Check [shopifystatus.com](https://www.shopifystatus.com/) — if there's an outage, your stock take data is saved and you can click **Complete** again once the issue is resolved.

---

# Installation

> Install Store Locator and complete the initial setup

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/installation
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-02-20
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Installing from the App Store

1. Visit the [Store Locator](https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator) app listing on the Shopify App Store
2. Click **Add app** to begin the installation
3. Review the permissions and click **Install app**

## Adding Store Locator to Your Theme

After installation, add the Store Locator app block to your theme. You can either create a dedicated store locator page or add the block to an existing page.

The quickest way is the app's setup guide. Once your theme has a page template named `store-locator` (steps 1-4 below), **Add block in theme editor** opens that template with the Store Locator block already added in a new Apps section. Check where it sits, then click **Save**.

## Create a Dedicated Page

The recommended approach is a dedicated page with its own template. Your other pages (About, Contact and so on) share the Default page template, so adding the block there would show the locator on all of them.

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes** and click **Customize** on your theme
2. In the template menu at the top of the editor, open **Pages** and click **Create template**
3. Name it `store-locator`, base it on **Default page**, and click **Create template**
4. In your Shopify admin, go to **Online Store > Pages** and click **Add page**
5. Enter a title such as "Store Locator" or "Find a Store", set **Theme template** to `store-locator`, and click **Save**
6. In the app's setup guide, pick the theme and click **Add block in theme editor** (or, in the theme editor, open the `store-locator` template, click **Add section** and select **Store Locator** under **Apps**)
7. Click **Save**

## Add to an Existing Page

You can also add the store locator to any existing page:

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes** and click **Customize**
2. Navigate to the page where you want the store locator (e.g., Contact page)
3. Click **Add section** or **Add block**
4. Under **Apps**, select **Store Locator**
5. Position the block where you want it to appear
6. Click **Save**

## Add to Your Navigation Menu

Make it easy for customers to find your store locator:

1. Go to **Online Store > Navigation**
2. Select the menu to edit (e.g., Main menu or Footer menu)
3. Click **Add menu item**
4. Enter a name like "Locations" or "Find a Store"
5. Link to the store locator page you created
6. Click **Save menu**

## Dashboard Overview

The Store Locator dashboard gives you quick access to everything:

- **Locations** - View, add, and manage your store locations
- **Settings** - Configure map provider, appearance, and behavior
- **Import** - Bulk import locations from CSV files
- **Analytics** - Track how customers interact with your store locator

## Next Steps

Once installed, you're ready to:

1. [Add your first location](https://help.pasilobus.com/getting-started/adding-locations) manually
2. Or [import locations in bulk](https://help.pasilobus.com/getting-started/importing-locations) from a CSV file
3. [Configure map settings](https://help.pasilobus.com/features/map-settings) to customize the display

---

# Adding Locations

> Add store locations with address, contact info, business hours, and more

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/adding-locations
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-02-18
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Creating a New Location

1. From the dashboard, click **Locations** in the navigation
2. Click **Add Location**
3. Fill in the location details
4. Click **Save**

## Address

Enter your location's address in the provided fields:

- **Address Line 1** - Street address (required)
- **Address Line 2** - Suite, unit, or floor number
- **City**
- **State / Province**
- **Postal Code**
- **Country**

The app automatically converts addresses to map coordinates. You can also use the address search box at the top of the form to quickly fill in all fields.

## Business Details

Add contact information so customers can reach the location:

- **Phone number** - Shown as a clickable link on mobile
- **Email** - Opens the customer's email app
- **Website** - Link to a location-specific page
- **Notes** - Internal notes (shown to customers in the store locator)

## Logo

Upload a logo or photo to help customers identify the location.

## Business Hours

Set regular opening and closing times for each day of the week. Check **Closed** for days the location is not open.

> Business hours and special hours are available on Growth plans and above. Social media links are available on Basic plans and above.

## Special Hours

Add modified hours for holidays or special events. These override regular business hours on the specified date.

## Social Media

Add links to the location's social media profiles (Instagram, Facebook, Twitter/X, TikTok, YouTube, LinkedIn).

## Image Gallery

Upload up to 10 photos of the location. Images are displayed when customers view the location details.

> The image gallery is available on the Premium plan.

## Custom Fields

If you've created custom fields, fill in values for each location. Custom fields can include text, links, or toggles that act as filters on the storefront.

## Location Visibility

Control whether a location appears on your store locator:

- **Visible** - Shows on the map and in search results
- **Hidden** - Saved but not displayed to customers

Use hidden status for locations that are temporarily closed or not yet ready to publish.

---

# Importing Locations

> Bulk import locations from CSV files

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/importing-locations
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-01-21
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Import many locations at once from a CSV file: the fastest way to add a chain of stores or a stockist list kept in a spreadsheet. The same file format updates existing locations, and a file exported from the Locations page imports back as it is.

## Get the template

On **Locations › Import**, click **Download sample template** for a ready-made file with every column filled in, and **View CSV format requirements** for the full column list, including your own custom fields.

## Columns

Column order and capitalization don't matter; commas, semicolons and tabs all work as separators.

- **name, address_line1, city, country** - Required. A row missing one of them is not imported, and the result lists it.
- **address_line2, state, postal_code** - Optional address details.
- **latitude, longitude** - Optional. Leave them blank and the address is looked up for you.
- **phone, website, email, notes** - Optional contact details. An invalid email is dropped and the rest of the row still imports.
- **visible** - `yes` or `no` (also `Visible` or `Hidden`). Hidden locations stay off the storefront map.
- **instagram, facebook, twitter, tiktok, youtube, linkedin** - Social link URLs (Basic plan and above).
- **hours** - Opening hours such as `Mon 09:00-17:00; Tue 09:00-17:00; Sat 10:00-14:00`. Days you leave out are marked closed (Growth plan and above).
- **categories** - One or more categories separated by commas or semicolons; new ones are created (Growth plan and above).
- **priority** - A whole number; higher ranks first (Advanced plan and above).
- **Your custom fields** - A column named like the field (Growth plan and above).

Columns your plan doesn't include are skipped, and the import result names them, so an import never adds features your storefront won't show.

## Importing

1. Go to **Locations** and click **Import**
2. Drop your CSV on the upload area, or click it to pick the file
3. Click **Import Locations**
4. Follow the progress on the result page; you also get an email when it finishes

## Plan location limit

Each plan includes a number of locations (100 on Starter, 250 on Basic, 500 on Growth, 2,000 on Advanced, unlimited on Premium). If a file would add more new locations than your plan has room for, the upload is stopped with a message that says how many fit. Rows that match an existing location only update it and don't count. Stores that installed before November 9, 2026 have no import limit and import every column.

## Addresses that can't be found

When a row has no coordinates, its address is looked up. If the match is weak, or lands in a different country than the row names, the location is still imported but set to **Hidden**, so no wrong pin reaches your store, and the result lists the row. Open the location, check the pin and address, and set **Visibility** to **Visible**.

## The import result

The result page shows how many rows were created, updated and not imported. Rows that were not imported are listed under **Rows not imported**, each with the reason. Rows that were imported with something to check (an address saved as Hidden, or columns skipped for your plan) are listed separately under **Notes**. Blank lines in the file are ignored and don't count as rows.

## Updating existing locations

- A row with an **ID** (as in an exported file) updates that location
- Without an ID, a row with the same **name** and **postal code** as an existing location updates it
- Anything else creates a new location

---

# Plans & Features

> Compare Store Locator plans and see which features each one includes

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/plans-and-features
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Store Locator comes in five plans so you only pay for what you need — from a free tier for a handful of stores up to unlimited locations. Every plan includes the core locator (interactive map, address & GPS search, and CSV import/export); higher plans add richer location cards, customization, and insights. You can change plans anytime from the app's Settings; billing is handled by Shopify.

## Plans at a glance

- **Starter (Free)** - Up to 100 locations. Custom map styling, address & GPS search, and import/export.
- **Basic** - Up to 250 locations. Everything in Starter, plus unlimited views & search and Directions & Social Links.
- **Growth** - Up to 500 locations. Everything in Basic, plus Business Hours, Custom Fields & Filters, Categories, and Logo Display.
- **Advanced** - Up to 2,000 locations. Everything in Growth, plus Location Priority & Ranking and Analytics.
- **Premium** - Unlimited locations. Everything in Advanced, plus the Photo Gallery.

## What the paid features do

- **Directions & Social Links** (Basic and up) - Show a "Get directions" button on each location and link out to the store's social profiles (Instagram, Facebook, TikTok, and more).
- **Business Hours** (Growth and up) - Add weekly opening hours plus special/holiday hours per location, so customers see whether a store is open.
- **Custom Fields & Filters** (Growth and up) - Add your own fields to locations (for example "Curbside pickup" or "In-store returns") and let shoppers filter the map by them.
- **Categories** (Growth and up) - Group locations into categories that customers can filter by.
- **Logo Display** (Growth and up) - Show each location's logo on its map card.
- **Location Priority & Ranking** (Advanced and up) - Give locations a priority value to pin featured stores to the top of results, or use it only to break ties between equally close stores.
- **Analytics** (Advanced and up) - See how customers use your locator: views, searches, clicks, and engagement over time. **Interactions** counts searches, location and directions clicks, and map moves, so one visit can add several and the line usually sits above Views. **Top Performing Locations** lists clicks per location; clicks on locations you've since deleted count in the totals and are noted under the table.
- **Photo Gallery** (Premium) - Add a gallery of images to each location for a richer, more visual store page.

## Changing your plan

Upgrade or downgrade anytime from **Settings** in the app. If you move to a lower plan, features above that plan are turned off in the app, on your storefront map and in CSV imports (the storefront updates within a minute of the plan change), but your data (locations, hours, custom fields, and so on) is kept — it becomes available again if you upgrade later. If a plan's location limit is lower than your current number of locations, existing locations stay, but you'll need to be within the limit to add more.

Stores that installed Store Locator before November 9, 2026 keep every storefront feature they had (directions, hours, filters, categories, logos and galleries) and unlimited CSV imports, whatever their plan. The admin features above their plan stay locked as before.

---

# Map Providers

> Choose your map provider and set up your API key

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/map-settings
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-18
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Choosing a Map Provider

Store Locator supports three map providers. Choose the one that works best for your store in **Settings > Map Provider**.

## OpenStreetMap

The default option. No API key required and free to use. Works well for most stores. OpenStreetMap is a community-driven project funded by donations. If you find it useful, consider [supporting them](https://supporting.openstreetmap.org).

## Google Maps

The most recognized mapping platform. Requires a Google Maps API key.

### How to get your API key

1. Go to the [Google Cloud Console](https://console.cloud.google.com)
2. Create a new project or select an existing one
3. Enable the **Maps JavaScript API** and **Geocoding API**
4. Go to **Credentials** and create an API key
5. Copy the key and paste it in **Settings > API Token**

> Restrict your API key to your store's domain for security. In Google Cloud Console, go to **Credentials**, click your key, and add your domain under **Website restrictions**.

## Mapbox

Modern maps with smooth animations. Requires a Mapbox access token.

### How to get your access token

1. Create a free account at [mapbox.com](https://www.mapbox.com)
2. Go to your **Account** page
3. Find your **Default public token**
4. Copy the token and paste it in **Settings > API Token**

Mapbox includes 50,000 free map loads per month.

## Switching Providers

You can switch providers at any time in **Settings > Map Provider**. Your locations and settings are preserved when switching. If you switch to Google Maps or Mapbox, you'll need to enter your API key before the map will display.

---

# Languages & Translations

> Translate the store locator into any language

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/widget-customization
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-18
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Managing Languages

Store Locator supports multiple languages so your store locator displays in your customers' language.

1. Go to **Settings** and scroll to **Languages & Translations**
2. Click **Manage Languages**
3. Add a new language or edit an existing one

## What Can Be Translated

All customer-facing text in the store locator can be customized:

- Search box placeholder text
- Button labels (e.g. "Search", "Get Directions")
- Distance labels and units
- Status messages (e.g. "No locations found")
- Filter labels

## Adding a New Language

1. Click **Add Language**
2. Select the language from the dropdown
3. Fill in translations for each text field
4. Click **Save**

The store locator automatically displays in the customer's browser language if a matching translation exists. Otherwise, it falls back to your default language.

---

# Location Details

> Configure what information displays for each location

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/location-details
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-18
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Contact Information

Each location can include:

- **Phone number** - Displays as a clickable link so customers can tap to call on mobile
- **Email address** - Opens the customer's email app
- **Website** - Links to a location-specific page, opens in a new tab

## Business Hours

Set regular operating hours for each location. Customers will see when the store is open or closed.

1. Open a location and go to the **Business Hours** section
2. Check **Enable business hours**
3. Set opening and closing times for each day of the week
4. Mark days as **Closed** when the location is not open

> Business hours are available on Growth plans and above.

## Special Hours

Override regular hours for holidays or special events. Special hours take priority over regular business hours on the specified date.

1. Scroll to the **Special Hours** section below Business Hours
2. Click **Add Special Hours**
3. Pick a date, set the hours or mark as closed, and add a label (e.g. "Christmas")

## Social Media Links

Add social media profiles for each location. Supported platforms:

- Instagram
- Facebook
- Twitter / X
- TikTok
- YouTube
- LinkedIn

Social media links are shown when customers view the location details.

> Social media links are available on Basic plans and above.

## Location Logo

Upload a logo or photo for each location. The image displays on the location card and helps customers identify the store.

> Location logos are available on Growth plans and above.

## Image Gallery

Upload up to 10 images per location to give customers a better look at your store.

1. Open a location and scroll to **Image Gallery**
2. Upload images using the file picker
3. To remove an image, check the **Remove** box next to it and save

> The image gallery is available on the Premium plan.

## Custom Fields & Filters

Add custom information specific to your business, like amenities, services, or any other details. Custom fields can be text, links, or checkboxes that double as filters on the store locator.

Manage your custom fields in **Custom Fields** from the navigation menu, then fill in values on each location.

> Custom fields are available on Growth plans and above.

## Driving Directions

When enabled, each location popup includes a "Get Directions" link that opens in Google Maps or Apple Maps depending on the customer's device.

Enable or disable this in **Settings > Search & Display Settings**.

> Driving directions are available on Basic plans and above.

---

# Search & Display Settings

> Configure search behavior, map display, and geolocation

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/search-and-filters
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-18
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Distance Units

Choose between **Miles** and **Kilometers** for displaying distances in search results. This applies to both the distance shown next to each location and the search radius dropdown.

## Default Map View

Configure what customers see when they first load the store locator:

- **Empty map** - Customers must search to see locations
- **Geolocate nearby stores** - Automatically detect the customer's location and show nearby stores
- **Display all stores** - Show every location on the map

> When set to **Geolocate**, the browser will ask the customer for permission to access their location. This is a standard browser prompt — the store locator does not control its appearance or wording.
>
> If the customer **allows** location access, the map centers on their position and shows nearby stores. If the customer **denies** permission or their browser does not support geolocation, the map falls back to showing all locations.

## Geolocation Display Mode

When using the **Geolocate** option, you can choose how many stores to show:

- **Automatic** - Adjusts based on store density in the customer's area
- **5, 10, 20, or 50 closest stores** - Shows a fixed number of nearest locations

## Default Search Radius

Set the starting search radius when customers search for locations. Options range from 5 to 1000, or **Unlimited** to show all locations regardless of distance.

A larger radius works better if your locations are spread far apart. A smaller radius is better for dense coverage areas.

When a search finds a place but no store is within the radius, shoppers see "Sorry, we didn't find any stores nearby." with the nearest store underneath, labelled **Nearest store** and its distance. When the search text isn't a place at all, they see "We couldn't find that place. Check the spelling, or try a city or postal code." You can change both messages, and the **Nearest store** label, in your translations.

## Map Marker Clustering

When customers zoom out on the map, nearby markers can be grouped into clusters to keep the view clean:

- **Cluster nearby markers** (recommended) - Groups overlapping markers with a count badge
- **Always show individual markers** - Every location pin is always visible

## Location Priority

Give locations a priority value (set per location, or in bulk via CSV import) to control their order in search results:

- **By distance** - Priority only breaks ties between locations that are equally close (the default)
- **Featured first** - Higher-priority locations are pinned to the top of results, ahead of closer ones

> Location priority is available on Advanced plans and above.

## Driving Directions

When enabled, each location popup includes a "Get Directions" link. Customers are taken to Google Maps or Apple Maps depending on their device.

> Driving directions are available on Basic plans and above.

---

# Theme Integration

> Add Store Locator to your theme using the app block

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/theme-integration
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-20
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Store Locator uses a **theme app block** to display on your storefront. You can add it to a dedicated page or embed it alongside other content on any page.

## Creating a Dedicated Store Locator Page

This is the most common setup — a full page dedicated to your store locator.

## Step 1: Create a Page Template

Your standard pages (About, Contact and so on) share the Default page template, so a block added there shows on all of them. Give the locator its own template:

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes** and click **Customize** on your theme
2. In the template menu at the top of the editor, open **Pages** and click **Create template**
3. Name it `store-locator`, base it on **Default page**, and click **Create template**

## Step 2: Create the Page

1. In your Shopify admin, go to **Online Store > Pages**
2. Click **Add page**
3. Enter a title like "Store Locator", "Find a Store", or "Our Locations"
4. You can leave the page body empty — the app block will provide all the content
5. Set **Theme template** to `store-locator`
6. Click **Save**

## Step 3: Add the App Block

The app's setup guide does this for you: **Add block in theme editor** opens the `store-locator` template with the block added. To do it by hand:

1. In the theme editor, open the `store-locator` page template from the template menu
2. Click **Add section**
3. Under **Apps**, select **Store Locator**
4. Click **Save**

Your store locator page is now live. Visit the page URL to see it in action.

## Adding to an Existing Page

You can embed the store locator on any page that supports sections, such as your Contact page or homepage.

## On a Page Template

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes** and click **Customize**
2. Navigate to the page where you want the store locator
3. Click **Add section**
4. Under **Apps**, select **Store Locator**
5. Drag the section to position it where you want
6. Click **Save**

> The app block works on any page template that supports sections. This includes the default page template, custom templates, and the homepage.

## App Block Settings

After adding the Store Locator block, you can configure it directly in the theme editor:

- **Search bar** - Show or hide the search input
- **List position** - Place the location list on the left or right side of the map
- **Map height** - Adjust the height of the map display

These settings are per-block, so you can have different configurations on different pages.

## Adding a Navigation Link

Make your store locator easy to find by adding it to your navigation menu:

1. Go to **Online Store > Navigation**
2. Select the menu to edit (e.g., **Main menu** or **Footer menu**)
3. Click **Add menu item**
4. Enter a name like "Locations" or "Find a Store"
5. In the link field, search for and select the store locator page
6. Click **Save menu**

## Mobile Responsiveness

The store locator automatically adjusts for mobile devices:

- Map and location list stack vertically on small screens
- Touch-friendly controls and gestures
- Optimized for mobile performance
- "Get Directions" links open native map apps on mobile

Test the store locator on various devices to ensure a good experience for all customers.

---

# Map Not Showing

> Fix issues with the map not displaying

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/map-not-showing
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-02-20
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Check the App Block is Added

The most common cause is the Store Locator app block not being added to your page:

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes** in Shopify admin
2. Click **Customize** on your active theme
3. Navigate to the page where you expect the store locator
4. Check that a **Store Locator** section exists under **Apps**
5. If not, click **Add section** and select **Store Locator** from the Apps list
6. Click **Save**

After adding the block, refresh your store locator page.

## Verify API Key Configuration

If you're using Google Maps or Mapbox, a valid API key is required. OpenStreetMap works without a key.

### For Mapbox
1. Go to **Settings > Map Provider** in Store Locator
2. Check that a Mapbox Access Token is entered
3. Verify the token at [mapbox.com/account](https://account.mapbox.com)
4. Ensure the token hasn't expired or been revoked

### For Google Maps
1. Go to **Settings > Map Provider** in Store Locator
2. Check that a Google Maps API Key is entered
3. In Google Cloud Console, verify:
   - Maps JavaScript API is enabled
   - Geocoding API is enabled
   - API key restrictions allow your domain

### For OpenStreetMap
No API key is needed. If the map still doesn't show, the issue is likely theme-related.

## Check Theme Compatibility

Some themes may conflict with the store locator:

1. Try the store locator on a default Shopify theme (Dawn)
2. If it works on Dawn, the issue is theme-specific
3. Check for JavaScript errors in browser console (F12 > Console)
4. Look for CSS conflicts that may be hiding the map container

## Browser Console Errors

Check the browser console for specific error messages:

1. Open your store locator page
2. Press F12 to open Developer Tools
3. Click the Console tab
4. Look for red error messages

Common errors:
- "API key invalid" - Check your API key in Settings
- "Refused to load script" - Content Security Policy issue with your theme
- "mapboxgl is not defined" - Mapbox script failed to load

## Geolocation Not Working

If the map is set to **Geolocate nearby stores** but isn't detecting your customer's location:

1. **Browser permission** — The customer must allow the location permission prompt. If they previously denied it, they need to reset the permission in their browser's site settings (click the lock icon in the address bar).
2. **HTTPS required** — Geolocation only works on secure (HTTPS) connections. Shopify stores always use HTTPS, but if you're testing on a custom domain, make sure SSL is active.
3. **Incognito/private mode** — Some browsers block geolocation by default in private browsing. Test in a regular browser window.
4. **VPN or network restrictions** — Corporate networks and VPNs can block or interfere with browser geolocation.

If geolocation fails, the store locator automatically falls back to showing all locations on the map.

## Clear Cache

Sometimes cached data causes display issues:

1. Clear your browser cache and cookies
2. Try viewing in an incognito/private window
3. If using a CDN or caching app, purge the cache

---

# Locations Not Appearing

> Fix invisible store locations

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/locations-not-appearing
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-01-21
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## Storefront Out of Date

Every change you save is sent to your storefront within a few seconds. If Shopify refuses an update, your store locator keeps showing the locations and settings from the last update that went through, and your dashboard shows a **Your storefront is out of date** banner with the reason Shopify gave.

1. Open the Store Locator dashboard
2. Click **Resync storefront** in the banner
3. The banner goes away once Shopify accepts the update

If the banner comes back after a resync, contact us with the message it shows.

## Check Location Visibility

Locations can be hidden from customers:

1. Go to **Locations** in Store Locator
2. Find the location that's not appearing
3. Check if it shows a "Hidden" badge
4. Edit the location and set **Visibility** to **Visible**
5. Save the changes

Hidden locations are saved but don't appear in the store locator.

## Verify Coordinates Exist

Locations need latitude and longitude to appear on the map:

1. Edit the location in Store Locator
2. Scroll to the coordinates section
3. Check that latitude and longitude have values

If coordinates are missing:
- Re-enter the address and save to trigger geocoding
- Or enter coordinates manually if you have them

When pins are missing, impossible or outside the country in their address, the **Locations** page shows a banner with a **Fix coordinates** button. It looks those addresses up again; any match the map service isn't sure of is left for you to fix in the location.

## Search Radius Too Small

Customers might be searching with too small a radius:

1. Check your default search radius in **Settings**
2. If locations are spread out, increase the default radius
3. Add larger radius options to the dropdown

Customers can only find locations within their selected search radius.

## Geocoding Failures

Some addresses fail to geocode (convert to coordinates):

Reasons addresses might fail:
- New addresses not yet in mapping databases
- PO Box addresses (not physical locations)
- Incomplete or misspelled addresses
- Rural addresses with limited mapping data

Solutions:
- Enter the full, complete street address
- Add city, state, and postal code
- Manually enter coordinates from Google Maps

## Check for Duplicate Locations

Duplicate entries might cause confusion:

1. Go to **Locations** and look for similar entries
2. Remove any duplicates
3. Keep the location with complete information

## No Locations in Region

If searching returns no results:

- Verify you have locations in that geographic area
- Check the search radius covers the distance to nearest location
- When nothing is within the radius, the locator shows the nearest store with its distance under the "no stores nearby" message

---

# Import Errors

> Fix CSV import problems

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator/import-errors
App: Store Locator (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Store Locator")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/pasilobus-store-locator
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/store-locator
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-01-21
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

## CSV Format Issues

The CSV must be properly formatted:

### Correct Format
- First row must be column headers
- One location per row
- Comma-separated values
- Text with commas should be quoted

### Example of Correct Format
```
name,address_line1,city,state
"Joe's Coffee, Inc.",123 Main St,New York,NY
Downtown Store,456 Oak Ave,Chicago,IL
```

### Common Mistakes
- Missing header row
- Rows that are only commas or spaces are skipped automatically, so they don't cause errors
- Inconsistent quoting

## Missing Required Fields

Every location needs at minimum:
- **name** - A name for the location
- **address_line1** - The street address
- **city** - The city
- **country** - The country name or code

Check your CSV has these columns and every row has values.

## Invalid Data Formats

Ensure data is in the correct format:

### Coordinates
- Latitude: decimal number between -90 and 90 (e.g., 40.7128)
- Longitude: decimal number between -180 and 180 (e.g., -74.0060)
- Don't include degree symbols or N/S/E/W

### Visibility
- Use: yes, no, true, false, 1, 0, Visible or Hidden

### Phone Numbers
- Any format is accepted
- Include country code if international

## Encoding Problems

CSV files must use UTF-8 encoding for special characters:

### Symptoms
- Accented characters appear garbled (é becomes é)
- Import fails with encoding errors
- Some rows import incorrectly

### Solutions
1. Open the CSV in a text editor (not Excel)
2. Save As with UTF-8 encoding
3. Or in Excel: Save As > CSV UTF-8 (Comma delimited)

## Rows Not Imported Because of the Plan Limit

If the file would add more new locations than your plan has room for, the upload is stopped and the message says how many fit. Upgrade your plan, remove locations you no longer need, or import fewer rows. Rows that update an existing location don't count.

## Columns Skipped for Your Plan

Hours, categories and custom fields (Growth and above), social links (Basic and above) and priority (Advanced and above) are only imported on plans that include them. The import result names each skipped column.

## Locations Imported as Hidden

A row whose address can't be found reliably, or is found in a different country than the row names, is imported as **Hidden** so no wrong pin appears on your store. Open the location, check the address and the pin, then set **Visibility** to **Visible**.

## Large File Issues

Very large files might timeout:

- Split into smaller files (500-1000 locations each)
- Import in batches
- Ensure stable internet connection during import

## Re-importing Updated Data

To update existing locations:

- Use the same location name to match existing entries
- Changed data will overwrite the existing location
- New names create new locations

If you're seeing duplicates, check that names match exactly (including spacing and capitalization).

---

# Installing and setting up

> Add the app to your store and show subscription options on your product pages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/installation
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Getting subscriptions live takes three steps: install the app, add the subscription widget to your theme, and create your first purchase option. Most stores are selling subscriptions within a few minutes, starting from one of the ready-made templates.

## Install the app

Add the app from the Shopify App Store. Once it's installed, it opens inside your Shopify admin alongside your other apps — there's nothing to configure on your server and no code to add by hand.

## Choose a plan

After installing, Shopify shows the app's plans on its own pricing page: **Free** (up to 100 live subscriptions), **Pro** (1,000), **Pro 5x** (5,000), **Max** (10,000), **Max 5x** (50,000), **Max 20x** (200,000) and **Ultra** (unlimited). Every feature is on every plan; the plan only sets how many active or paused subscriptions you can carry. Over the limit nothing stops: renewals keep going out and the app asks you to move up a plan. The **Your plan** card on the app's home page shows the plan you're on and how many of its live subscriptions you're using, with a **Change plan** link to Shopify's pricing page. Change plans any time from there or from **Settings > Billing**.

## Add the widget to your theme

The subscription widget is what shoppers see on a product page to choose "subscribe" instead of (or as well as) a one-time purchase. Add it from the theme editor:

- Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**
- Open a **Product** template from the page dropdown
- Click **Add block** in the product section and choose the subscription widget from the Apps list
- Save

You only need to do this once — the widget then appears on every product that has a subscription option.

## Create your first option

A **purchase option** is the offer customers subscribe to (for example, "Subscribe & Save 10%, delivered monthly"). The fastest way to start is from a template:

- Open the app and choose **Create from a template**
- Pick the model that fits — Subscribe & Save, Subscription Only, Prepaid, or Commit & Save
- Add the products it applies to
- Save

## Confirm it's working

Visit one of the products you added on your storefront. You should see the subscribe option on the product page with the frequency and savings. If it doesn't appear, see the Troubleshooting article.

---

# How subscriptions work

> Purchase options and subscription contracts explained in plain terms

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/how-subscriptions-work
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Subscriptions add a recurring way to buy your products. Instead of a single checkout, a customer agrees to receive a product on a repeating schedule and be charged each time. Understanding two ideas — the purchase option and the subscription contract — makes everything else in the app easier to follow.

## Purchase options

A **purchase option** is the offer a customer subscribes to. It defines how often the product is delivered, any discount, and the rules around it (whether they can pause, how long they're committed, and so on). You attach a purchase option to one or more products, and it shows up on those product pages as a "subscribe" choice.

A single option can offer several **frequencies** — for example "every month" or "every 2 weeks" — and the customer picks one when they subscribe.

## Subscribing at checkout

When a shopper chooses the subscribe option and checks out, two things happen: they pay for the first order, and a recurring agreement is created for future orders. From then on, the app places each renewal order automatically on schedule.

## The subscription contract

Once a customer subscribes, their ongoing agreement is called a **subscription contract**. It holds the products, the frequency, the price, and the next order date. A contract moves through a few states over its life:

- **Active** - Orders are being placed on schedule.
- **Paused** - Temporarily on hold; nothing is charged until it resumes.
- **Cancelled** - Ended by the customer or you; no more orders.
- **Expired** - Reached the end of a fixed-length plan and won't renew.

Both you (from your admin) and the customer (from their account) can manage a contract — pausing, skipping a delivery, changing frequency, swapping a product, or cancelling.

## Billing vs. delivery

It helps to separate two schedules that are usually the same but don't have to be:

- **Delivery** is how often the customer receives the product.
- **Billing** is how often they're charged.

For most plans these match (charged monthly, delivered monthly). Some models — like Prepaid — deliberately bill less often than they deliver.

---

# Choosing a template

> The ready-made subscription models and when to use each

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/choosing-a-template
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Subscription Templates
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Templates are pre-built purchase options that give you a working subscription in one click. Each one is a proven model with sensible defaults already filled in — you pick the closest fit, add your products, and adjust anything you like. Starting from a template is faster than building from scratch and helps you avoid missing a setting.

## The four templates

- **Subscribe & Save** - The classic subscription: recurring deliveries with an ongoing discount. Best for everyday consumables customers reorder (coffee, supplements, pet food).
- **Subscription Only** - The same recurring model, but the product is offered *only* as a subscription — the one-time purchase option is hidden. Use it for products you don't want sold as a single purchase.
- **Prepaid** - The customer pays once up front to cover several deliveries. Good when you want commitment and cash flow, or for gift-style runs ("3 months of coffee").
- **Commit & Save** - A larger discount in exchange for a minimum number of orders. Use it when a deeper discount is worth locking in a commitment.

## You can change anything afterward

A template is only a starting point. After you create one, you can change the discount, add or remove delivery frequencies, adjust the commitment length, turn the discount off entirely, or add an intro price for the first orders. Nothing about a template is fixed.

## Not sure which to pick?

Start with **Subscribe & Save** — it's the model shoppers expect and it covers most stores. You can always create additional options later for products that need a different approach.

---

# Subscribe & Save

> Recurring deliveries with an ongoing discount — the classic subscription

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/subscribe-and-save
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Subscription Templates
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Subscribe & Save is the model most shoppers recognize: they get a product delivered on a repeating schedule and save a little on every order in exchange for the commitment. It's the best starting point for anything customers buy again and again, because it rewards them for not having to think about reordering.

## When to use it

Reach for Subscribe & Save for everyday consumables — coffee, vitamins, skincare, pet food, household refills. Any product with a predictable "I'll run out and reorder" rhythm is a natural fit. The recurring discount is the incentive that turns a repeat buyer into a subscriber.

## How the discount works

The discount applies to every order for as long as the subscription is active. You can set it as:

- **A percentage** off each order (for example, 10% off).
- **A fixed amount** off each order.
- **A fixed price** the customer pays each time.

The savings are shown on the product page so shoppers can see the benefit of subscribing before they commit.

## Example setups

- **Monthly refill** - Delivered every month, 10% off every order.
- **Every two weeks** - A shorter cadence for fast-moving products, with a smaller discount.
- **Choice of cadence** - Offer both "every month" and "every 2 weeks" on the same option and let the customer pick.

## Going further

You can add a bigger discount on the first order to attract new subscribers (see "Charging a different price for the first orders"), offer several delivery frequencies, or set a minimum commitment if you want subscribers to stay for a few orders.

---

# Subscription Only

> Offer a product only as a subscription by hiding one-time purchase

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/subscription-only
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Subscription Templates
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Subscription Only is the recurring model with one difference: the product can be bought *only* as a subscription. The usual one-time purchase choice is hidden, so every customer who buys the product becomes a subscriber. Use it for products where a subscription is the whole point of the offer.

## What it changes on the product page

On a normal subscription product, shoppers see a choice between buying once and subscribing. With Subscription Only, that choice is removed — the product page presents the subscription as the only way to buy. There's no one-time option to select.

## When to use it

- **Membership-style products** - Where the value is the ongoing relationship, not a single purchase.
- **Curated or replenishment boxes** - That don't make sense as a one-off.
- **Exclusive or members-only items** - You only want to sell on a recurring basis.

## How it differs from Subscribe & Save

The two are the same recurring model with the same discount and frequency settings. The only difference is that Subscribe & Save *adds* a subscribe option next to one-time purchase, while Subscription Only *replaces* one-time purchase entirely. If you want both audiences, use Subscribe & Save; if you only want subscribers, use Subscription Only.

You can switch this behavior on or off at any time in the option's settings.

---

# Prepaid subscriptions

> Charge once up front for several deliveries

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/prepaid
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Subscription Templates
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A prepaid subscription charges the customer once, up front, to cover a set run of deliveries. Instead of paying each time a box ships, they pay for the whole period at checkout and then receive their deliveries on schedule. It's a great fit when you want commitment and predictable cash flow, or when the subscription is really a gift.

## How prepaid differs from pay-as-you-go

This is the clearest example of billing and delivery being on different schedules:

- **Pay-as-you-go (Subscribe & Save)** - Charged each time a delivery ships. Bill monthly, deliver monthly.
- **Prepaid** - Charged once to cover several deliveries. Bill once, deliver monthly for the length of the term.

The customer still receives their product on the normal cadence — only the charging is bundled into a single up-front payment.

## When prepaid is a good fit

- **Gifts** - "3 months of coffee" as a single purchase the buyer pays for once.
- **Commitment and cash flow** - You collect the full term's revenue at the start.
- **Seasonal or fixed-length runs** - Where a defined number of deliveries makes sense.

## What the customer experiences

At checkout the customer pays the full prepaid amount. Their deliveries then arrive on the regular schedule until the term is complete. When the prepaid term ends, the subscription renews for another term unless it was set up as a fixed-length plan.

## Paying once, with no renewal

To sell a single prepaid batch that never renews, turn on **Limit subscription length** and set **Maximum cycles** to **1**. A cycle is a payment, so 1 means one charge at checkout; the deliveries inside that term still ship on schedule, and the subscription ends when the next payment would have been due.

## What customers can change on a prepaid plan

By default the deliveries in a prepaid term belong to the order the customer already paid for, so they can't be edited one by one. Per-order changes (customizing a single upcoming delivery) are not available on that kind of prepaid subscription, and the customer portal doesn't offer them.

## One order per prepaid delivery

Turn on **One order per prepaid delivery** (under the plan's options) to keep the single upfront payment but let customers manage each delivery. The customer still pays the whole term at checkout; each later delivery is then created as its own order at €0 on the delivery date. Because every delivery is its own order, customers can **customize a single delivery** (with per-order changes on), and skip or reschedule one, while the rest stay as they are. A customized delivery keeps the same number of items, since it was already paid for.

Two rules apply:

- **Every product in the plan must have the same price.** The upfront charge is one price for the whole plan, computed as the number of deliveries × the discounted product price.
- **The plan ends after the paid deliveries.** It does not renew automatically; a customer who wants another term buys again. Leave **Maximum cycles** blank for these options, the app sets it to the number of deliveries.

Example: deliver every month, bill every 3 months, 10% off, on a €24.95 product. The customer pays €67.37 at checkout, receives three monthly deliveries (the second and third as €0 orders), and can swap the product in delivery 2 or 3 from their account.

---

# Commit & Save

> A bigger discount in exchange for a minimum commitment

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/commit-and-save
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Subscription Templates
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Commit & Save offers a deeper discount in return for the customer staying subscribed for a minimum number of orders. It's a fair trade: the shopper gets a better price, and you get a guaranteed run of orders before they can cancel. Use it when a larger discount is worth locking in commitment.

## How the commitment works

You set a **minimum number of billing cycles** — the number of orders that must complete before the customer can cancel. Until they reach that number, the subscription can't be cancelled from the customer portal, which protects the discount you've given.

For example, a six-order commitment with 20% off means the customer saves on every order but agrees to receive at least six before they can end the plan.

## What the customer can and can't do

- **Can** - Pause, skip a delivery, change frequency, or swap products (if you allow those), just like any subscription.
- **Can't** - Cancel before the minimum number of orders is reached.

The commitment only restricts cancelling — it doesn't lock the customer out of managing their subscription in other ways.

## When a commitment plan fits

- **Higher-value or discounted products** - Where a single order wouldn't cover your costs but a run of orders does.
- **Loss-leader intro pricing** - When you give a strong discount and need a few orders to make it worthwhile.
- **Predictable revenue** - When you want a guaranteed number of orders per subscriber.

You can also pair a commitment with a maximum number of cycles to create a fixed-length plan that ends automatically.

---

# Discounts on subscriptions

> Add an ongoing discount, or run a plain full-price subscription

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/discounts
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Pricing and Discounts
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A discount is the most common reason a shopper subscribes — it rewards them for committing to repeat orders. But not every subscription needs one. The app lets you offer an ongoing discount on each option, or turn the discount off entirely for a plain, full-price subscription.

## Turning the discount on or off

Each purchase option has an **Offer a discount** switch. Leave it off and the subscription is simply a recurring full-price order — useful for memberships, replenishment, or products where convenience is the draw rather than savings. Turn it on to reveal the discount settings.

## Types of discount

When the discount is on, choose how it's applied:

- **Percentage** - A percent off each order, like 10% off. The most common choice.
- **Fixed amount** - A set amount off each order, like $5 off.
- **Fixed price** - A flat price the customer pays each time, regardless of the product's normal price.

## What the customer sees

The savings appear on the product page next to the subscribe option, so shoppers can compare subscribing against a one-time purchase before they decide. A clear discount is one of the strongest nudges toward subscribing.

## Going further

If you want to attract new subscribers with a stronger first-time offer — a bigger discount on the first order, or full price after an intro period — see "Charging a different price for the first orders."

---

# Charging a different price for the first orders

> Intro offers — a bigger discount (or full price) on the first N orders, then your standing price

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/first-order-pricing
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Pricing and Discounts
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

An intro offer charges a different price for a customer's first order — or first few orders — than for the orders that follow. It's one of the most effective ways to win new subscribers: a strong "first box" deal lowers the barrier to starting, while your normal price protects your margins over the life of the subscription. This is built into each purchase option, so the right price is applied automatically at every renewal.

## Why this is different from a discount code

A one-time discount code only affects the first checkout and then disappears, which is hard to manage and easy for customers to abuse. Intro pricing is part of the subscription itself: the app knows it's the customer's first order versus their fifth, and charges the correct price each time — no codes, no manual steps, and it can't be reused.

## How it works

Inside a purchase option, turn on **Offer a different discount on the first orders**. You then set two things:

- **The intro price** - The discount applied to the early orders (a percentage, a fixed amount, or a fixed price).
- **How many orders get it** - The number of initial orders the intro price applies to, before your standing price takes over.

The standing discount you've already set becomes the price for every order after the intro period.

## Common setups

- **Strong first box** - 30% off the first order, then your usual 10% off. Great for converting first-time shoppers.
- **First order only** - 50% off the first order, then full price. Set the standing discount to none so later orders are charged normally.
- **Intro run** - 20% off the first three orders, then 10%. Rewards customers through the early period when most cancellations happen.

## What the customer is charged

The intro price applies to the first order (or first few, if you chose more than one). Starting with the next order after the intro period, the customer is charged your standing price automatically. They'll see the difference reflected in their renewals, and the confirmation makes the first-order saving clear at checkout.

## A note on margins

Because the intro price is locked to the first orders only, a deep "first box" discount won't keep applying forever — your standing price protects profitability on the long tail of renewals. Pair a strong intro with a minimum commitment (Commit & Save) if you want to ensure enough orders to make the intro worthwhile.

---

# Create a purchase option

> Set up a subscription offer and apply it to products

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/create-purchase-option
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Configuring Your Plans
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A purchase option is the subscription offer customers see and subscribe to. Creating one takes just a few fields: a name, the products it applies to, and at least one delivery frequency. You can start from a template to save time, or build one from scratch for full control.

## Start from a template or from scratch

- **From a template** - Pick Subscribe & Save, Subscription Only, Prepaid, or Commit & Save to begin with sensible defaults already filled in, then adjust.
- **From scratch** - Begin with a blank option when you want to set everything yourself.

Either way you land on the same editor, so you can change anything a template pre-filled.

## Name the option and add products

Give the option a clear internal name (for example, "Coffee — Subscribe & Save"). Then add the products it should apply to. The subscribe choice will appear on those product pages once the widget is added to your theme.

## Add frequency options

Every option needs at least one **delivery frequency** — how often the order repeats, like every month or every 2 weeks. You can add several so customers choose the cadence that suits them. See "Delivery frequency options" for details.

## Set pricing and terms

From the same editor you can:

- Turn a **discount** on or off and choose its type and amount.
- Add an **intro price** for the first orders.
- Set **subscription terms** — minimum or maximum cycles, what customers can self-manage, and shipping lead time.

## Save and see it live

Save the option, then open one of its products on your storefront to confirm the subscribe choice appears with the right frequency and savings. Edits you make later take effect on new subscriptions and, where relevant, on existing ones.

## Turn an option off

Set **Status** to **Inactive** to stop selling an option without deleting it. Its products stop offering the subscription on your storefront right away: the app takes the option off every product and variant in Shopify and remembers which ones they were. Set it back to **Active** and it returns to the same products. Customers already subscribed keep their subscriptions, and their renewals carry on as before.

While an option is inactive you can still change its products in the app; they are used when you turn it on again. If the option is **Subscription only**, its products can be bought once again while it is off.

---

# Delivery frequency options

> Give customers a choice of how often they receive orders

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/delivery-frequency
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Configuring Your Plans
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The delivery frequency is how often a subscription repeats — every month, every two weeks, every 90 days, and so on. You can offer a single frequency or several on the same purchase option, letting each customer pick the cadence that matches how they use the product.

## Offering more than one frequency

Add multiple frequencies to one option and the customer chooses at checkout. Giving a choice tends to lift subscriptions because shoppers can match the cadence to their real usage — a heavy user might pick every two weeks, a lighter user every month.

Each frequency can have its own settings, so you can, for example, offer a slightly larger discount on a more frequent cadence.

## Billing on a different schedule

By default, customers are billed each time an order is delivered. You can also bill on a different cadence than you deliver — for example, charging once per quarter while shipping monthly. This is the basis of prepaid plans. See "Billing on a different schedule" for the full explanation.

## What the customer sees

On the product page, the available frequencies appear as choices within the subscribe option. After subscribing, customers can change their frequency from their account if you've allowed it (see "Managing a subscription"). When they switch, the new cadence applies to upcoming orders.

---

# Billing on a different schedule

> Charge at a different cadence than you deliver — the basis of prepaid plans

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/billing-schedule
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Configuring Your Plans
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Normally a subscription charges the customer each time it delivers — bill monthly, deliver monthly. The **Bill on a different schedule** setting lets you break that link, so you can charge at one cadence and deliver at another. It's an advanced option most plans don't need, but it's what makes prepaid and "pay quarterly, ship monthly" style subscriptions possible.

## What the setting does

Each delivery frequency has a **Bill on a different schedule** toggle. Leave it off and billing follows delivery exactly — the simplest and most common setup. Turn it on and you can set the billing cadence separately from the delivery cadence.

The key rule: you bill *less often* than you deliver, collecting one payment that covers several deliveries.

## A typical example

- **Deliver monthly, bill every 3 months** - The customer receives a box each month but is charged once per quarter for three boxes at a time.

This is exactly how the Prepaid template works under the hood. If prepaid is all you need, start from that template — this setting is for when you want to build a custom billing-vs-delivery cadence yourself.

## When to use it

- **Prepaid or "pay ahead" plans** - Collect several deliveries' worth of revenue in one charge.
- **Reducing transaction frequency** - Fewer charges can mean fewer failed-payment moments.
- **Gift-style runs** - One payment up front for a set period of deliveries.

Leave it off for everyday Subscribe & Save plans, where customers expect to pay for each delivery as it ships.

## How it looks to the customer

At checkout and in their account, the customer sees how often they'll be charged and how often they'll receive the product. Being clear that one payment covers multiple deliveries avoids confusion when their next charge is further out than their next box.

---

# Subscription terms and lead time

> Commitment length, what customers can self-manage, and shipping lead time

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/subscription-terms
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Configuring Your Plans
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Subscription terms are the rules around an option: how long a customer is committed, what they're allowed to do on their own, and when their orders are processed. These settings let you balance flexibility for the customer with protection for your business.

## Minimum and maximum cycles

A cycle is a **payment**, not a delivery. The checkout order counts as the first cycle.

- **Minimum cycles** - The number of payments that must complete before a customer can cancel. Use it to protect a discount or guarantee a run of orders.
- **Maximum cycles** - Automatically ends the subscription after a set number of payments, creating a fixed-length plan that won't renew forever. When the next payment would fall past the limit, the subscription ends instead of charging.

Leave either blank for no limit.

**Prepaid plans:** because one payment covers several deliveries, count payments, not deliveries. A "3 deliveries, paid once" plan is *bill every 3 months, deliver every month, maximum cycles 1*. Setting maximum cycles to 3 there would charge the customer three times for nine deliveries.

Changing these limits applies to subscriptions started after the change. Existing subscriptions keep the terms they were bought with.

## What customers can manage themselves

Decide which actions customers can take from their account, each with its own switch:

- **Pause** - Put the subscription on hold and resume later.
- **Skip** - Skip an upcoming delivery without cancelling.
- **Cancel** - End the subscription (subject to any minimum commitment).
- **Change frequency** - Switch how often they receive orders.
- **Swap products** - Change to another allowed product in the plan.

Turning an action off simply hides it from the customer portal — you can still do it for them from your admin.

## Processing orders early for shipping

Fulfillment lead time lets you create each order a few days before its scheduled date, so shipping has time to arrive on cadence. This is useful for products customers can't run out of, where a late box is a problem.

Keep in mind that processing an order early also charges the customer a few days earlier — the app notes this so the timing is clear. Leave lead time off (the default) to bill and ship exactly on schedule.

---

# Product swaps and build-a-box

> Let customers swap products, customize a single order, or build their own box

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/product-changes
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Configuring Your Plans
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Beyond a fixed subscription, you can let customers change what's in their orders — swap one product for another, customize a single upcoming order, or build their own box from a set of products. These options reduce cancellations (a customer who's bored can change things up instead of quitting) and suit recipe boxes, variety packs, and curated bundles. You control exactly what's allowed on each plan.

## Allowing product changes

Turn on **Allow product changes** in a plan's settings to let subscribers swap, add, or remove products. With it off, the subscription stays fixed to the products you set. One setting shapes what's possible:

- **Swap type** - Choose **Variants of the same product** (switch size or flavor) or **Any product in this plan** (switch to a different product entirely).
- The choices a customer can switch to come from the products attached to the plan.

## Per-order changes

By default a product change applies to the whole subscription — every future order. Turn on **Allow per-order changes** to also let customers customize a single upcoming order without touching their recurring selection. A customer might add an extra item to next week's box as a one-off, while the box after that goes back to normal.

- Each upcoming order gets its own **Customize** option in the customer's account.
- A customized order is clearly marked, so both the customer and you can tell it apart from a regular order.

## Build-a-box

Turn on **Build-a-box** to let customers compose each order themselves from the plan's products — pick this one, two of that, swap something out. This is the model used by recipe kits and variety boxes.

- **Min and max items** - Set how many items a box must contain. Leave them equal for an exact count (exactly 5), set a range (3–5), or leave blank for no limit.
- **Count items by** - Count toward the limit by total quantity (two of one product counts as two) or by distinct products (variety only).

Customers see a running total and can't save a box that breaks your limits.

## Locking changes before billing

To avoid last-minute edits after you've planned fulfillment, set **Lock changes before billing** to a number of hours. Inside that window before an order's billing time, customers can no longer customize that order — it shows as closed for changes. Leave it at 0 to allow edits right up to billing.

## How pricing works

When a customer switches to a product that costs more or less, the order price updates to match. A plan's ongoing discount applies to the new products too, and adding items raises the recurring total. Changing the delivery frequency resets any per-order customizations back to the regular box — the customer is warned before that happens.

---

# The storefront subscription widget

> How the subscribe option appears on your product pages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/storefront-widget
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: The Customer Experience
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The widget is what turns a regular product page into a subscription offer. It shows shoppers that they can subscribe, lets them pick a frequency, and highlights the savings — all without leaving the product page. Getting it placed well is one of the biggest factors in how many visitors choose to subscribe.

## What the widget shows

On a product with a subscription option, the widget presents:

- **The choice to subscribe or buy once** - Side by side, so shoppers can compare.
- **The available frequencies** - Like "every month" or "every 2 weeks," when you offer more than one.
- **The savings** - The discount for subscribing, shown next to the price.

For products set to Subscription Only, the one-time choice is hidden and the page presents the subscription as the only way to buy.

## Placing the widget

Add and position the widget from the theme editor:

- Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**
- Open a **Product** template
- Use **Add block** in the product section to insert the subscription widget
- Drag it to where shoppers will see it — near the Add to Cart button works best

You only need to add it once; it then appears on every product that has a subscription option.

## Styling

The widget follows your theme's fonts and colors so it looks native to your store. Placement near the buy button, where customers already look for purchase choices, consistently performs best. If the widget doesn't appear on a product, check that the product has a purchase option assigned and that the block is added to the template (see Troubleshooting).

---

# Managing a subscription (customer portal)

> How customers pause, skip, swap, reschedule, and update payment

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/customer-portal
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: The Customer Experience
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Customers manage their own subscriptions from their account on your store, in a self-service portal. Letting them make changes themselves cuts down on support requests and, importantly, gives them an alternative to cancelling — a customer who can pause or change frequency is far more likely to stay than one whose only option is to quit.

## Where customers find it

Subscribers manage everything from the account area on your store — the same place they view their orders. There's nothing for them to install, and they sign in the normal way.

## What customers can do

Depending on which actions you've allowed in the option's settings, a customer can:

- **Pause and resume** - Put the subscription on hold and restart it when ready.
- **Skip a delivery** - Skip the next order without cancelling the subscription.
- **Cancel** - End the subscription, subject to any minimum commitment you've set.
- **Change delivery frequency** - Switch how often they receive orders; they see the new price before confirming, and the new cadence applies going forward.
- **Swap products** - Change to another product allowed in the plan.
- **Customize a single order** - When per-order changes are on, edit the products in one upcoming order without changing the rest. A customized order is marked, and you can lock edits a set time before billing. Not available on prepaid plans, where the deliveries in a paid term belong to an order that already exists.
- **Build their box** - On build-a-box plans, choose which products make up each order, within the item limits you set.
- **Update payment** - Replace an expired or failed card.

Changing the delivery frequency resets any per-order customizations back to the regular box; the customer is warned first. See "Product swaps and build-a-box" for how you control these options.

## Reducing cancellations

The portal is your best retention tool. If a customer is getting too much product, they can stretch the frequency or skip a delivery instead of cancelling. If money is tight, they can pause. Offering these options — and a small save offer at cancellation — keeps subscribers who would otherwise leave.

## Keeping customers informed

Changes a customer makes are confirmed by email, so they always know their subscription's status. See "Email notifications" for the full list of messages and how to edit them.

---

# How billing and renewals work

> When customers are charged and how the next order is scheduled

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/how-billing-works
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Billing and Notifications
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Once a customer subscribes, the app handles every renewal for you — charging the card and creating the order on schedule, with no action needed on your part. Knowing when those charges happen helps you set expectations and answer customer questions.

## The first charge

The first charge happens at checkout, just like any order. If the option has an intro price for the first orders, that's the price the customer pays now. This first order also creates the ongoing subscription.

## Recurring charges

After that, each renewal is charged automatically on the subscription's schedule. The customer is charged, the order is created, and you fulfill it like a normal order. The price follows the option's settings — your standing discount, or the intro price if they're still within the intro period.

## When the next order is scheduled

Each subscription tracks its **next order date**, based on the frequency the customer chose. After every successful charge, the date advances to the next cycle. Customers can see their next order date in their account, and you can see it on the subscription in your admin.

## Processing orders early (lead time)

If you've turned on fulfillment lead time for an option, the order is created a few days before its scheduled date so it has time to ship and arrive on cadence. This also means the charge lands a few days earlier. With lead time off (the default), billing happens exactly on the scheduled date.

## If a charge fails

If a renewal charge doesn't go through, the app retries it automatically and asks the customer to update their card. See "Failed payments and retries" for what happens next.

---

# Failed payments and retries

> What happens when a renewal charge fails

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/failed-payments
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Billing and Notifications
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Cards expire, get replaced, and occasionally get declined — so some renewal charges will fail. When that happens the app doesn't quietly drop the subscription. It retries the charge and prompts the customer to fix their payment method, recovering revenue that would otherwise be lost.

## Automatic retries

When a renewal charge fails, the app automatically tries again a few times over the following period rather than giving up after one attempt. Many failures are temporary — a momentary decline or a hold — and clear on a later try without anyone doing anything.

## Asking the customer to update their card

Alongside the retries, the customer is emailed and asked to update their payment method. The most common cause of a failed renewal is an expired or replaced card, and the customer is the only one who can fix that. They update it from their account, and the next retry uses the new card.

## If all retries fail

If the charge still can't be collected after the final retry, the customer receives a last-attempt notice making clear the subscription is at risk. You can see subscriptions with payment problems in your admin and follow up if it's a valuable customer.

## Keeping failures low

- **Encourage customers to keep their card current** - The update link in the emails makes this easy.
- **Use renewal reminders** - A heads-up before each charge gives customers time to fix a card before it fails.
- **Watch for repeat failures** - A subscription that keeps failing usually means a card that needs replacing.

---

# Email notifications

> The emails subscribers receive and how to edit them

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/email-notifications
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Billing and Notifications
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Subscription emails keep customers informed at every step — when they sign up, before each renewal, and whenever something changes. Good notifications reduce confusion, prevent chargebacks ("I didn't know I'd be charged"), and give customers a reason to come back to their account. Every email is editable, so they match your brand and voice.

## Which emails are sent

The app sends an email for each meaningful moment in a subscription:

- **Subscription confirmed** - Welcomes a new subscriber and sets expectations.
- **Renewal reminder** - A heads-up before the next charge.
- **Paused / Resumed** - Confirms when a subscription is put on hold or restarted.
- **Skipped** - Confirms a skipped delivery and the new next date.
- **Cancelled** - Confirms the subscription has ended.
- **Frequency changed** - Confirms a new delivery cadence.
- **Product changed** - Confirms a swap to a different product.
- **Price changed** - Sent when you adjust the price on a subscription, only when you choose to notify the customer.
- **Payment issues** - Failed charge, retry notices, and a final last-attempt warning.

## Turning emails on or off

Each email has its own on/off switch, so you can send only the ones you want. For example, you might keep confirmations and payment emails on while turning off renewal reminders. Switching one off stops it from sending without affecting the others.

## Editing the wording and branding

Open any email and use the **Content** tab to edit the wording in plain fields — the subject line, heading, greeting, message, button label, and sign-off — then preview it before saving. Leave a field blank to fall back to the default text. The **Preview** tab shows the finished email with sample data, and the **HTML** tab lets you change the layout if you want full control. The emails use your store name plus the logo and accent color you set once in **Settings > Brand**, so they look like they came from you rather than a generic app.

## Sending a test

**Send test email** at the bottom of the editor sends the email, with the preview's sample data, to your own address. If you are signed in as Shopify staff (a relay address no one reads), it goes to your sender address or the store's contact email instead; the address is shown next to the button.

---

# Manage subscriptions from your admin

> Find a subscription and pause, cancel, swap, adjust, or bill it now

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/manage-from-admin
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Managing Subscriptions from Your Admin
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Most subscription changes are made by customers in their own account, but you can also manage any subscription directly from your admin. This is how you help a customer over chat or email, fix a one-off problem, or take an action the customer can't — and you're not limited by the permissions that apply to the customer portal.

## Finding a subscription

Open the app and go to the subscriptions list to see every active and past subscription. Open one to view its details — the products, frequency, price, next order date, and a history of everything that's happened to it.

## Actions you can take

From a subscription you can:

- **Pause and resume** - Put it on hold and restart it.
- **Reactivate** - Restore a subscription that was cancelled.
- **Cancel** - End it on the customer's behalf. If the subscription is still inside a Commit & Save commitment, the confirmation says how many committed orders are left before you cancel anyway.
- **Change frequency** - Switch how often the subscription is delivered.
- **Add, remove, or swap products** - Change what the subscription ships.
- **Adjust the price** - Set a custom discount or price on a single subscription's product, and optionally email the customer about it.
- **Skip a cycle** - Skip an upcoming delivery.
- **Bill now** - Charge the next order immediately instead of waiting for its scheduled date. The confirmation shows the amount and the date of the order being charged, and the next order date moves on in both the app and the customer's page in Shopify. Bill now checks with Shopify first: an order that has already been charged or is skipped is not charged again, and a second click is ignored.

## Viewing upcoming orders

A subscription's page lists its upcoming orders, and the **Upcoming orders** page shows them across all subscriptions. Click any order to see exactly what it contains — useful for confirming a customer's per-order change before it ships. Orders a customer has customized are flagged, and product thumbnails link straight to the product.

## Finding subscriptions for a plan

From the selling plans list, the **Subscriptions** count next to a plan opens the list of subscribers on that plan. You can also use **View subscriptions** on a plan's page. This makes it easy to see who's on a given offer.

## Admin vs. customer actions

You're not bound by the customer-portal permissions. Even if customers can't cancel or swap on their own, you can still do those things for them from your admin. That makes the admin your tool for handling exceptions and support requests.

## Keeping the customer informed

Status changes you make — pausing, cancelling, resuming — send the customer the matching email automatically, so they always know where their subscription stands.

---

# Automations: sold-out pause, vacation skip and order tags

> Pause subscriptions when a product sells out, skip deliveries for customers on vacation, and tag subscription orders

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/automations
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Managing Subscriptions from Your Admin
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Automations handle three jobs you'd otherwise do by hand. Subscriptions pause when a product runs out, deliveries are skipped while a customer is away, and subscription orders get tagged for your packing team. Open **Settings > Automations** to turn them on. Every pause, resume and skip they make shows on the subscription's timeline with its reason, so your support team can see why it happened.

## Plans

Automations are included on the **Max** plan and above (Max, Max 5x, Max 20x and Ultra). On a lower plan the page shows each setting locked, with an **Upgrade plan** link. If you move to a lower plan, your settings are kept but stop running. They start again when you upgrade.

One thing keeps working after a downgrade. Subscriptions the sold-out automation already paused still resume on restock, so nobody is left paused for good.

## Pause subscriptions when a product sells out

Turn on **When a subscribed variant sells out, pause its subscriptions**. When a variant's inventory reaches zero, every active subscription whose next order contains it is paused, so no one is charged for something you can't ship.

- **Reason shown everywhere** - The subscription page says, for example, "Paused because a product sold out: Lavender soap sold out on November 10, 2026". The timeline reads "Paused: Lavender soap sold out on Nov 10", and your customer sees the same reason in their account.
- **Resume on restock** - Also turn on **and resume them when it's back in stock**. Only subscriptions this automation paused are resumed. Subscriptions that you or the customer paused are never touched.
- **The next order after a restock** - A resumed subscription bills on its next regular date after the restock. Dates that passed while it was paused aren't charged.
- **Subscriptions with several products** - The whole subscription is paused, and the note says how many other items are also held. Removing just the sold-out item would change the price, a box's minimum items or a commitment, so the subscription waits until everything can ship.
- **Two items sold out** - The subscription resumes only once every item that paused it is back in stock.
- **Stock blips are ignored** - Sell-outs and restocks are acted on after 15 minutes. Stock that drops to zero and comes back within that time changes nothing.
- **Never mid-charge** - A subscription whose renewal is being charged at that moment isn't paused. It's checked again a few minutes later. A subscription in failed-payment recovery is left to the recovery.
- **Continue selling when out of stock** - A variant you sell at zero inventory isn't treated as sold out.
- **Your own edits win** - If a customer has changed their next order so it no longer includes the sold-out item, that subscription keeps going.

## Skip deliveries for customers on vacation

Turn on **Skip the next delivery for customers tagged** and set the tag (default `vacation`). Then add the tag to a customer in **Shopify admin > Customers**, or have a Shopify Flow workflow add it. Their active subscriptions skip their next order, and the timeline reads "Skipped: customer tagged vacation".

- **Skip only the next delivery** - One order is skipped each time the tag is added.
- **Skip every delivery while the tag is on** - Every scheduled order is skipped, and no order is charged until the tag is removed.
- **Removing the tag** - Skipping stops. Orders the automation skipped that haven't happened yet are restored, logged as "Unskipped: vacation tag removed". Skips the customer or your staff made are left as they are.
- **Tags are not case-sensitive** - `Vacation` and `vacation` both count.

## Tag subscription orders

- **Tag a subscription's first order** (default tag `first-subscription-order`) - Added to the checkout order that started the subscription, so your packing team can add a welcome insert.
- **Tag every renewal order** (default tag `subscription-renewal`) - Added to each order a subscription renews.

Both tags can be changed. Filter **Orders** in your Shopify admin by tag to find them. The order's other tags are kept.

---

# Common issues

> The subscribe option isn't showing, a discount looks wrong, or a renewal didn't run

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/troubleshooting
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-05-31
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Most subscription issues come down to a setting that's missing or a product that isn't linked to an option. This article walks through the problems merchants hit most often and how to resolve them.

## The subscribe option isn't showing on a product

If a product page doesn't show the subscribe choice, check these in order:

- **The widget is added to the theme** - In the theme editor, confirm the subscription widget block is on your product template.
- **The product is assigned to an option** - The product must be added to a purchase option. Open the option and check the product is in its list.
- **The option is active** - A paused or draft option won't appear on the storefront.

## A discount or intro price looks incorrect

- **Check which price applies** - The intro price applies only to the first orders you specified; later orders use the standing discount. A renewal showing the standing price is working as intended.
- **Confirm the discount is on** - If an option shows full price, make sure the "Offer a discount" switch is on and a value is set.
- **Fixed price vs. amount off** - Double-check whether you chose a percentage, an amount off, or a fixed price — they read very differently to the customer.

## A renewal didn't create an order

- **Check the subscription's status** - Paused, cancelled, and expired subscriptions don't renew.
- **Look for a payment problem** - A failed charge stops the order; the customer may need to update their card.
- **Check the next order date** - The order is created on the subscription's schedule; confirm the date has actually arrived.

## A customer can't manage their subscription

- **Check the option's permissions** - Pause, skip, cancel, frequency change, and swap each have a switch. If an action is turned off, customers won't see it in their account.
- **Minimum commitment** - A customer can't cancel before reaching the minimum number of orders. You can still cancel for them from your admin.

If something still isn't right after these checks, reach out and we'll help you track it down.

---

# Automate with Shopify Flow

> Start workflows when subscriptions are created, paused, cancelled or fail to renew, and pause or skip from a workflow

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions/shopify-flow
App: Subscriptions (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Subscriptions")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/chargematic
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/subscriptions
Section: Integrations
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Shopify Flow lets you automate what happens around your subscriptions: tag a customer when they subscribe, alert your team when a renewal payment fails, or send a win-back offer when someone cancels. Subscriptions adds its own triggers and actions to Flow, so you can build these workflows without code.

## Triggers

Start a workflow when something happens to a subscription:

- **Subscription created** - A customer started a subscription at checkout.
- **Subscription paused** - A subscription was paused by the customer, by you, or by your failed-payment settings.
- **Subscription cancelled** - A subscription was cancelled. Includes the reason the customer picked, when they gave one.
- **Subscription payment failed** - A renewal charge failed. Includes the reason Shopify reported, such as insufficient funds.

Every trigger gives your workflow the customer (so Flow's customer conditions and actions work), plus the subscription ID, the customer's email, the subscribed products, the recurring total and currency, the billing frequency and the next billing date.

## Actions

Change a subscription from a workflow:

- **Pause subscription** - Pauses it: nothing is charged or sent until it is resumed, and the customer gets the paused email.
- **Skip next subscription order** - Skips the next upcoming order. Later orders keep their dates.

Both take a **Subscription ID**. Use the **Subscription ID** from one of the triggers above, or a subscription's ID from the app.

## Example workflows

- When **Subscription payment failed**, send your team an internal email and tag the customer "payment-issue".
- When **Subscription cancelled**, wait 14 days, then send the customer a discount code to come back.
- When **Subscription created**, add the customer tag "subscriber" so you can segment them in marketing.

## Ready-made templates

In Shopify Flow, open **Templates** and search for "subscription" to start from a ready-made workflow (shown once the app is installed):

- **Send a win-back event to Klaviyo when a subscription is cancelled** - starts your Klaviyo win-back flow. Needs the Klaviyo app connected in Flow.
- **Post to Slack when a subscription payment fails** - your team sees the customer, amount and reason. Needs the Slack app connected in Flow.
- **Add new subscribers to a Google Sheet when a subscription starts** - one row per new subscriber. Needs Google Sheets connected in Flow.

Each template explains the one field you fill in (your Klaviyo key, Slack channel or spreadsheet) before you turn it on.

---

# Installation

> Install the app and add the theme block to your store

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/installation
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-09-07
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Swatches & Listings displays product options on your storefront through a Shopify theme block. Installation takes a couple of minutes: install the app and add the block to your product page template. There is no app embed to switch on.

## Install from Shopify App Store

1. Find [Swatches & Listings](https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus) on the Shopify App Store
2. Click **Add app**
3. Click **Install app** to confirm

After installation, the app opens and shows your dashboard.

## Add the Theme Block

The app uses a theme block, **Swatch Options**, to display listing options on product pages. Without it, customers will not see any option selectors.

The quickest way is the setup guide on the app's home page: choose your theme under **Add the app block to your product pages** and click **Add product widget**. The theme editor opens with the block added at the end of the product section. Drag it up under the variant picker or the price so it sits next to the buy button, then click **Save**.

To add it by hand:

1. Go to **Shopify Admin > Online Store > Themes**
2. Click **Customize** on your active theme
3. Navigate to a **Product page** template
4. In the product section, click **Add block**
5. Find **Swatch Options** under the Apps section
6. Drag it under the variant picker or the price
7. Click **Save**

## Verify It Works

1. Create a listing in the app with at least two products
2. Set the listing to **Active**
3. Visit one of the listing's product pages on your storefront -- you should see the option selectors

If your listing does not appear, see Listings Not Showing.

---

# Swatches or Listings: Which Do You Need?

> One product in many colors needs swatches; a separate product per color needs a listing

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/swatches-or-listings
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The app does two jobs, and which one you need depends on how your colors are set up in Shopify. The first screen asks: **do you sell one product in many colors, or separate products per color?** Pick the answer that matches your store and the app takes you to the right place.

## One product in many colors: use swatches

Your colors are variants of a single product, for example one "Summer Tee" with Red, Blue and Green. You don't need a listing. Swatches turn the color choice on that product page into color dots.

- Click **Find my colors** on the first screen. The app scans your catalog, finds your color options and matches them to colors. Nothing on your store changes until you approve it.
- Or open **Swatches** and set each color yourself.
- Shopify only shows swatches on products that have a product category. The app tells you how many products are missing one.

## A separate product for each color: use a listing

Each color is its own product with its own page and stock, for example "Summer Tee - Red" and "Summer Tee - Blue". A listing shows them as one product page with swatches, so shoppers switch colors without leaving the page.

- Click **Group my products** on the first screen to let the app find products that belong together. You can group by a separator in the title ("Summer Tee - Red"), by the first words of the title ("Classic Hoodie Navy" and "Classic Hoodie Grey"), or by a tag such as "group:summer-tee".
- You review every suggested group before anything is created. Products already in a listing are skipped.
- Turn on **Keep adding new matching products automatically** and new products that match a listing join it on their own.
- Or click **Make a listing myself** and pick the products by hand.

## Not sure?

Click **Scan my catalog**. The scan looks for both: color options that can show as swatches, and separate products that could become one listing. The results appear on the app's home page.

## Shopify Plus and Shopify's Combined Listings app

Shopify has its own Combined Listings app, and it works only on Shopify Plus. Listings in this app work on every Shopify plan through the **Swatch Options** theme block. If your store is on Plus, the first screen says so: you can use either, and this app adds swatches and automatic grouping.

## Finishing setup

The setup guide's last step is done once you have set up swatches **or** made a listing. You don't need both.

---

# Creating Your First Listing

> Create a combined listing with options and products step by step

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/creating-a-listing
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A listing groups related products together and lets customers switch between them using options like Color, Size, or Material. Each product in the listing is a separate Shopify product, but they appear connected on the storefront through shared option selectors.

## Step 1: Start a New Listing

From the dashboard, click **Create listing**. This opens the listing form.

## Step 2: Name the Listing

Enter a name in the **Listing name** field. This is for your reference in the dashboard and does not appear on the storefront. Choose something descriptive, like "Classic T-Shirt" or "Leather Wallet Collection".

## Step 3: Add Options

Options define how customers choose between products. For example, a Color option lets them pick Red, Blue, or Green.

1. Click **Add option** in the Options section
2. Enter an option name (e.g. "Color")
3. Select a **Display type** to control how it appears on the storefront:
   - **Dropdown** -- a select menu with product previews
   - **Radio Buttons** -- clickable list items
   - **Text Swatch** -- pill-shaped buttons showing the value text
   - **Color Swatch** -- small color squares
   - **Image Swatch** -- product image thumbnails
4. Optionally select a different **Mobile display type** for small screens

For a single differentiator (just Color, or just Size), one option is enough.

## Step 4: Add Products

1. Click **Add products** in the Products section
2. The Shopify product picker opens -- search and select the products you want to combine
3. Each selected product appears in the form with fields for its option values

## Step 5: Assign Option Values

For each product, fill in the value for every option. For example, if your option is "Color":

- Product A: Red
- Product B: Blue
- Product C: Green

Each product must have a unique combination of values across all options. If you have two options (Color and Size), no two products can share the same Color + Size pair.

For **Color Swatch** display types, you can also set a hex color code using the color picker next to the value field.

## Step 6: Save and Activate

Click **Save** to create the listing. New listings start **Active**: the app syncs the listing to Shopify and it shows on your storefront within a moment. To keep it hidden while you work on it, set its status to **Draft** on the listing's page.

Products keep the order you add them in. Visit any of the listing's product pages to see the swatches in action.

> **Tips:**
>
> - Start with two or three products to get familiar with the flow before building larger listings.
> - If you are unsure which display type to choose, Dropdown works well as a starting point for any option.
> - You can always edit a listing later to add more products or change display types.

---

# Plans and What's Included

> Which features come with which plan, and what happens when you change

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/plans
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-09-07
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Everything in the app works the same way on every plan. What changes is how many listings you can have, and which of the extra tools are switched on.

You will see every feature in the app whichever plan you are on. The ones your plan does not include are greyed out and name the plan that includes them (for example "available on the Pro plan and higher"), so nothing is hidden from you — you can always see what is there before deciding whether it is worth upgrading for.

## What each plan includes

**Free**
- Up to 10 swatch groups and listings
- Swatches on product pages and collection pages
- Grouping suggestions from a scan of your catalog
- Bulk swatch upload and import: a folder of swatch images in one go, and listings by CSV

**Pro** ($9.99 every 30 days) — everything in Free, plus
- Up to 100 swatch groups and listings
- **Auto-sorted swatches**: put an option's values in a set order — A to Z, by price, or in stock first
- Hiding sold-out swatches and showing a sale badge

**Max** ($39.99 every 30 days) — everything in Pro, plus
- Unlimited swatch groups and listings
- **Badges**: mark a value as Most popular, New or Limited, and the automatic Most popular badge, which follows what your customers actually look at
- **Split variants**: turn one product's variants into separate products, each with its own page and web address

If you are on a plan we no longer offer, such as Starter, it keeps working exactly as before.

## On every plan

These are not tied to a plan at all:

- Creating listings and grouping products
- Choosing how each option looks — color swatches, image swatches, text buttons or a dropdown
- **Swatch order**, which sets the order products appear in within a listing
- Grouping products in bulk by their names
- Scanning your catalog for products that could be grouped
- Translations

## Changing plan

Open **Settings**, then **Billing**. Changes take effect straight away.

If you drop to a lower plan, nothing you have set up is deleted. Badges and value orders you chose are kept and simply stop being used, and they come back exactly as they were if you move back up.

## Listing limits

The listing count is the number of listings you have, not the number of products in them. A listing holding forty products counts as one.

If you reach your limit, existing listings keep working — you just cannot create another until you remove one or move up a plan.

---

# Options and Display Types

> Choose how customers pick between products in a listing

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/options-and-display-types
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Options define how customers choose between products in a listing. Each option has a name (like "Color" or "Size") and a display type that controls how the choices appear on the storefront.

## What Are Options?

An option represents a single attribute that varies across the products in a listing. Common examples:

- **Color** -- Red, Blue, Green
- **Size** -- Small, Medium, Large
- **Material** -- Cotton, Polyester, Silk

When a listing has multiple options, customers see a separate selector for each one. The combination of selected values determines which product is shown.

## Display Types

Each option has a display type that controls how values appear on the storefront. You can choose a different display type for desktop and mobile.

### Dropdown

A select menu that opens when clicked. Each item shows the product image alongside the value text. Best for options with many values or when product previews are helpful.

### Radio Buttons

A vertical list of clickable items. Each value is displayed as a selectable row. Best for a small number of text-based options where all choices should be visible at once.

### Text Swatch

Pill-shaped buttons displayed inline. Each button shows the value text. Best for short text values like sizes (S, M, L, XL) or simple labels.

### Color Swatch

Small square color tiles. Each swatch displays a solid color based on the hex code assigned to the value. Best for color options where a visual preview is more useful than text.

### Image Swatch

Small image thumbnails arranged inline. Each swatch shows the product's image. Best for options where the visual difference between products is the main differentiator, like patterns or styles.

## Mobile Display Type

Each option can use a different display type on mobile devices. This is useful when a display type that works well on desktop takes up too much space on a small screen. For example, you might use Image Swatch on desktop but switch to Dropdown on mobile.

If no mobile display type is set, the option uses the same display type on all screen sizes.

## Managing Options

Options are shared across your account. When you create an option in one listing, it becomes available for other listings too.

### Viewing All Options

Go to the **Options** page from the navigation menu to see all options across your store. Each option shows its display type, number of values, and how many listings use it.

### Editing an Option

You can edit an option's name, display type, and mobile display type. Changes to display type affect all listings that use the option.

### Option Values

Each option has a list of values. Values can include:

- **Text** -- the label shown to customers (required)
- **Color** -- a hex color code for Color Swatch display (e.g. #FF0000)
- **Image** -- an image URL for Image Swatch display

You can add and edit values from the option detail page. Values that are in use by products cannot be deleted.

> **Tips:**
>
> - Use Color Swatch for color options and Text Swatch for size options as a starting point.
> - If an option has more than 6-8 values, Dropdown keeps the page clean on both desktop and mobile.
> - Option names appear as labels above the selector on the storefront, so keep them short and clear.

---

# Managing Products in a Listing

> Add, remove, and reorder products within a combined listing

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/managing-products
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Products are the individual Shopify products that make up a combined listing. Each product is assigned a unique set of option values so customers can switch between them on the storefront.

## Adding Products

1. Open a listing and click **Edit** (or create a new listing)
2. Click **Add products** in the Products section
3. The Shopify product picker opens -- search for and select the products you want to include
4. Each selected product appears in the form with fields for its option values

You can add as many products as your plan allows. Each product must already exist in your Shopify catalog.

## Assigning Option Values

Every product in a listing must have a value for every option. When you add a product, you will see input fields for each option the listing uses.

For example, if the listing has a "Color" option and a "Size" option, each product needs both a Color value and a Size value:

- **Product A**: Color = Red, Size = Large
- **Product B**: Color = Red, Size = Small
- **Product C**: Color = Blue, Size = Large

### Unique Combinations

Each product must have a unique combination of option values. No two products can share the exact same values across all options. If you try to save a listing where two products have identical combinations, you will see an error message identifying the conflict.

When a listing has only one option, every product must have a different value for that option.

## Reordering Products

The order of products in a listing determines the display order on the storefront. To change the order:

1. Open the listing detail page
2. Drag a product row using the handle on the left side
3. Drop it in the new position

The new order saves automatically and syncs to the storefront.

## Editing Products

To change the option values assigned to a product:

1. Open the listing and click **Edit**
2. Find the product in the list
3. Update its option value fields
4. Click **Save**

When editing a large listing, you can use the search field to find specific products by name.

## Removing Products

To remove a product from a listing:

1. Open the listing and click **Edit**
2. Click the **Remove** button on the product you want to remove
3. Click **Save**

Removing a product from a listing does not delete the product from your Shopify catalog. It only removes the association between the product and the listing.

> **Tips:**
>
> - Put the most important or best-selling product first. It will be the default selection when a customer visits any product in the listing.
> - For listings with many products, use the search field in the edit form to quickly find the product you need to update.
> - If you need to add a large number of products at once, the app processes them in the background and shows a progress indicator.

---

# Swatches

> Choose how each option looks, fill in colors and photos, and decide which options the app draws

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/swatches
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-09-07
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Swatches is where you decide what each option value looks like — a color, a photo, or its own name — and whether this app draws that option at all. Open **Swatches** and you get one row per option in your store, whether it came from a listing you built or from a catalog scan.

## What each row tells you

- **Option** — its name, and a link into its values
- **Values** — how many there are
- **Shows as** — color swatch, variant image, text buttons or dropdown
- **Shown by** — whether this app draws it, or your theme does

**Shown by** is the one worth reading first. *This app* means we replace your theme's control for that option. *Your theme* means you switched the app off for it. *Not set up* means a scan found the option but nobody has configured it, so your theme keeps it.

## Choosing how an option looks

Open an option and pick from **How this option shows**:

- **Color swatch** — each value shows the color you give it
- **Variant image** — each value shows the photo of the product or variant it belongs to, so there is nothing to upload
- **Text buttons** — each value shows its name, which is what sizes usually want
- **Dropdown** — your theme's own control, left alone

The choice decides what is drawn, not what data happens to exist. An option set to Color swatch shows colors even where photos are available.

## Filling in the values

Each value has a photo and a color. Click the photo to choose or replace one; the bin removes it. Set the color in the field beside it. Everything saves as you change it — there is no Save button.

Values are shown fifty at a time, and the search box at the top finds an option by name.

## Color groups

A color option also has a **Color group** column, holding Shopify's own list of nineteen standard colors. This is what makes a shopper filtering a collection by "Blue" find your Ice, Cornflower and Lapis. The app guesses from the value's name and often cannot — "Ice" matches none of the nineteen — so setting it yourself is worth the minute it takes.

It does not change what the swatch looks like. The swatch is the color or photo beside it.

## Value order

By default your values appear in whatever order Shopify has them, which is usually the order you built your variants in. **Value order** changes that per option: A to Z, Z to A, price low to high, price high to low, or in stock first.

Price and stock are worked out per product, not across your store. "Price, low to high" on a Color option means cheapest of *that* product's colors — a value that costs less on one product and more on another sorts correctly on both. Values a product cannot actually sell appear last whichever direction you pick.

Value order is part of the Pro plan. On the Free plan the setting is greyed out, with a line under it saying it is available on the Pro plan and higher.

## Badges

A badge is the shelf label you put on one value — **Most popular**, **New** or **Limited**. Open the **⋯** menu at the end of a value's row and pick one, and it appears as a small pill above that swatch on the product page. The value's row shows the badge next to its name, so you can see at a glance which one carries it.

Most values never need a badge, which is why it lives in that menu rather than a box on every row. A row where every swatch is labelled tells a shopper nothing.

It is worth reserving for the value you actually want chosen. "Most popular" on your best seller does the same job as the sticker on a shelf — it answers the question a shopper is already asking.

A "Most popular" badge can also be applied for you. Turn on **Show a "Most popular" badge automatically** in Settings → Swatches and the app marks the most-viewed product in each listing, so the badge moves as your customers' taste does instead of staying wherever you last put it.

That setting is the default, not the decision. Each listing has its own **"Most popular" badge** choice — use your shop default, always show it, or never show it — so a listing you keep for spares stays quiet while the ones you compete on do not.

It holds back rather than guess: a listing needs a real number of views before anything is badged, and two products tied for first get no badge at all. A product on sale shows its sale badge instead — two pills on one swatch is neither.

Badges are part of the Max plan. On a lower plan the menu entry is greyed out and tells you so when you hover it. Any badges you set before are kept — they stop showing in your store, and come back if you upgrade again.

## Turning the app off for one option

**Let the app show this option** hands that option back to your theme without affecting the others. Useful when your theme already does something you like for sizes, but you want the app's color swatches.

## The order options appear in

Drag the handle at the left of each row. The order you set is the order options appear on your product pages, so a shop that leads with size can put size first.

---

# Swatches on Collection Pages

> Show swatches under each product in a collection grid

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/collection-swatches
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-09-07
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Swatches on collection pages let a shopper see that a product comes in other colors without opening it, and switch to one directly from the grid. It is a separate theme block from the product page one, so it has to be added to your collection template.

## Adding it

The block goes inside the **product card** of your collection grid, so it can only be added on themes whose product cards accept app blocks, such as Horizon and other recent Shopify themes.

1. From the app's home page, open the setup guide step **Show swatches on your collection pages** and click **Open the collection page in the theme editor** (or go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize** and open a collection page).
2. In the left sidebar, select a **Product card** inside the product grid.
3. Click **Add block**, open the **Apps** tab and choose **Collection Swatches**.
4. Drag it to where you want it on the card (for example under the price), then click **Save**.

Add it to the card, not as a section of its own: a block added at the bottom of the page draws nothing on the cards.

> **Dawn and older themes:** their product cards don't accept app blocks, so the collection swatches can't be added there. The product page swatches still work on every theme.

## What it shows

For a product in a combined listing, it shows the other products in that listing — their colors, or their photos where you have chosen variant images. For a plain product with variants, it shows those variants.

Hovering a swatch swaps the card's image to that color, so a shopper sees the change without leaving the page. Clicking takes them to that product, or to that variant.

## Settings

- **Maximum swatches visible** — how many fit before a `+N` badge takes over. Five suits most grids at the default size; more than that tends to wrap onto a second line and push the card's text down.
- **Swatch size**, **shape** and **alignment** — match these to your theme's cards. Alignment matters most: themes that centre their card text usually want centred swatches.

The card's own product always appears first and is never pushed out by the limit, so the swatch matching the photo is always on screen.

## When nothing appears

The block draws nothing when there is nothing to draw: the product is not in a listing, has no variants worth showing, and has no swatch data. In the theme editor you will see a placeholder saying so; on the live storefront the space is simply empty.

An option set to **Dropdown** cannot render as a control on a card, so it falls back to showing the products' photos, or their names where there are no photos.

---

# Bulk Upload Swatch Images

> Attach a folder of swatch images in one go, matched by filename

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/bulk-swatch-upload
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-23
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If you already have swatch images in a folder, you do not have to attach them one at a time. Zip the folder, drop it in, and each image is matched to the value its filename names.

## How to upload

1. Open **Swatches** and choose the option the images belong to
2. Choose **Bulk upload swatch images**
3. Drop the .zip in, and upload

The page shows how many images matched when it finishes, and lists any that matched nothing.

## How filenames are matched

Name each file after the value it belongs to. Capitals, spaces, dashes and underscores are ignored, so `Sea Foam.jpg`, `sea-foam.JPG` and `SEA_FOAM.png` all match a value called **Sea Foam**.

Anything that is not an image is skipped, so a folder with a stray notes file or a `.DS_Store` is fine. Files that match no value are listed back to you rather than dropped silently — usually a spelling difference between the filename and the value.

## What happens next

Matched images are attached to their values and become swatches on your storefront. On a large upload they are sent to Shopify a few at a time rather than all at once, so a folder of five hundred images takes a few minutes to appear everywhere.

## Limits

A zip can hold up to 2,000 images, and each image up to 20 MB. Uploading again replaces the images for the values that match; values you did not include are left alone.

---

# Swatch Order

> Order swatches by name, price, stock or popularity

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/swatch-order
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-09-07
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The order swatches appear in is a setting on each listing, and for everything except Manual it is worked out again each time the listing publishes. A color that sells out or changes price moves on its own, without anyone opening the listing.

Swatch order is on every plan.

## Choosing an order

Open a listing and set **Swatch order**:

- **Manual** — the order you arranged the products in
- **Name A–Z** or **Z–A**
- **Oldest** or **Newest first** — by when the product joined the listing
- **Price, low to high** or **high to low**
- **In stock first** — sold-out colors drop to the end
- **Most viewed first** — from this app's own view records

## What each one is good for

**In stock first** is the one most shops want. A grid of swatches where the first three are sold out reads as a shop with nothing in it, and moving them to the end fixes that without hiding them.

**Most viewed first** puts your popular colors where a shopper looks first. It uses views recorded by this app, so a newly installed store needs a little traffic before the order means anything.

**Price, low to high** suits ranges where colors genuinely differ in price, and puts the entry price in front.

## Details worth knowing

Products that tie keep the manual order you set, so an alphabetical list of two identical names never shuffles between publishes. A product with no price sorts last under either price order rather than appearing to be free. A product nobody has viewed sorts last under Most viewed, rather than tying at the front with everything else at zero.

---

# Split Products

> Give a variant its own product page, web address and place in collections

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/split-products
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-09-07
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Split takes one product that has many variants and turns each one into its own product, then groups them back together so shoppers can still switch between them from any of the pages. It is how a color or a style gets its own product page, its own web address, its own photos, and a place in your collections.

**Split is part of the Max plan.** You will see the button on the Listings page on every plan, but it only opens on Max.

## When to split

- You want a variant to have its own page and its own web address
- You want to put a variant into a collection on its own
- A product is close to Shopify's limit of 100 variants
- A color needs its own photos, its own price, or its own stock

## How to split

1. Open **Listings**
2. Choose **Split a product**
3. Pick the product you want to split
4. Choose which option to split by — Color, Size, Material, whichever that product uses
5. Check the preview. It shows every product that will be created, its price, and how many variants sit behind it
6. Press the button to create them

Nothing is added to your store until that last step, so you can look at the preview and back out.

## What you get

Say you sell a jacket in 5 colors and 4 sizes. That is 20 variants on one product today.

Split it by **Color** and you get 5 products, one per color. Each one keeps its 4 sizes. They are grouped together, so a shopper on the red page still sees swatches for the other four colors and can move between them.

Each new product has its own web address and can go into any collection you like.

## Splitting only one variant

Split works on a whole option at once — pick Color and you get a product for every color, not just the one. There is no way to peel off a single variant and leave the rest behind.

If you only want one variant separated, do it the other way round:

1. In Shopify, create the product you want on its own page, and remove that variant from the original product
2. In the app, open **Listings** and create a listing
3. Add the original product and the new one to it

You end up in the same place — two product pages, shoppers moving between them with swatches — without disturbing the rest of your catalog.

## What comes across, and what does not

**Comes across** — the description, vendor, product type and tags from the original product, the price, and the barcode. A SKU comes across when exactly one variant became that product; when several did, there is no single SKU to copy.

**Does not come across** — stock. New products start with none, so set your quantities before you publish.

When several variants sit behind one new product, the lowest price comes across. In the jacket example, each color arrives priced at its cheapest size, and you set the rest in Shopify.

## Everything arrives as a draft

The new products are drafts, and so is the listing that groups them. Nothing appears in your store until you publish it. That is deliberate — it gives you room to set stock, check prices and add photos first.

## Before you split

Splitting creates real products in your store and there is no undo. Removing them again means deleting each one in Shopify by hand. That is what the preview is for: check the number of products and their names before you press the button.

A product with 100 or more variants is read up to that limit.

---

# Listing Status

> Control whether a listing is visible on your storefront

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/listing-status
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every listing has a status that controls whether it is visible on your storefront. You can toggle a listing between Active and Draft at any time from the dashboard.

## Active

An Active listing is live on your storefront. When a listing is activated:

- The app syncs the listing data (options, products, and values) to Shopify as metafields
- The theme block reads this data and displays the option selectors on each product page
- Customers can browse and switch between the listing's products

## Draft

A Draft listing is not visible on your storefront. When a listing is set to Draft:

- The app removes all listing metafields from Shopify
- The theme block has no data to display, so no option selectors appear
- The listing still exists in the app and can be edited

New listings start **Active**, so they appear on your storefront as soon as you save them. Set a listing to Draft first if you want to finish it before shoppers see it.

## Toggling Status

To change a listing's status:

1. Go to the dashboard
2. Find the listing in the table
3. Click the status badge (Active or Draft) to toggle it

The app runs a background sync to update metafields in Shopify. For listings with many products, this may take a few moments.

## Syncing

When you activate a listing or save changes to an active listing, the app syncs the data to Shopify. During sync:

- A "Syncing" indicator appears on the listing
- The page auto-refreshes until the sync completes
- Once finished, the listing shows as Active

If a sync takes longer than expected, try refreshing the page. For very large listings (30+ products), background processing handles the sync automatically.

---

# Translations

> Display option names and values in multiple languages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/translations
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-09-07
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If your store serves customers in multiple languages, the app can display option names and values in the visitor's language. Translations work with Shopify's multi-language markets to show the right text automatically.

## How It Works

When the theme block loads on the storefront, it checks the current Shopify market language. If a translation exists for that language, the option labels and values display in the translated text. If no translation is available, the default text is shown.

Translations cover two things:

- **Option names** -- the labels above each selector (e.g. "Color" becomes "Couleur" in French)
- **Option values** -- the individual choices (e.g. "Red" becomes "Rouge" in French)

## Supported Languages

The app supports over 50 languages, including English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Dutch, Japanese, Korean, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Arabic, and many more.

## Setting Up Translations

Translations are managed through the app and synced to the storefront as part of the listing data. The available languages depend on the languages you have configured in your Shopify markets.

When you add a language to your Shopify markets, it becomes available for translation in the app.

## How the Storefront Selects a Language

The theme block determines which language to use based on the Shopify market context:

1. It checks the current market's language setting
2. If a translation exists for that language, it uses the translated text
3. If no translation exists, it falls back to the default text

This means translations appear automatically when customers browse your store in a different language -- no manual switching is needed.

> **Tips:**
>
> - Make sure the languages in the app match the languages configured in your Shopify markets.
> - Test translations by switching your storefront language to confirm the correct text appears for each option.
> - Translations do not affect the product page content itself (title, description, etc.) -- those are managed through Shopify's native translation features.

---

# Listings Not Showing

> Fix listings that are not visible on your storefront

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/listings-not-showing
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If a listing's option selectors are not appearing on your storefront, work through these checks in order.

## 1. Check the Theme Block

The app displays listings through a theme block on your product page template. If the block is not added, nothing will appear.

1. Go to **Shopify Admin > Online Store > Themes**
2. Click **Customize** on your active theme
3. Navigate to a **Product page** template
4. Look for the **Swatch Options** block in the template sections
5. If it is missing, click **Add block** and select it from the Apps section
6. Click **Save**

## 2. Verify the Listing Is Active

Only Active listings display on the storefront. Draft listings are hidden.

1. Open the app dashboard
2. Find the listing in the table
3. Check the status badge -- it should say **Active**
4. If it says **Draft**, click the badge to activate it

## 3. Check the Sync Status

After activating a listing, the app needs to sync data to Shopify. If the sync has not completed:

1. Look for a "Syncing" indicator on the listing
2. Wait a few moments and refresh the page
3. Once the status shows **Active** without a syncing indicator, the data is ready

## 4. Verify Product Availability

The products in the listing must be active and available in your Shopify store.

1. Go to **Shopify Admin > Products**
2. Check that each product in the listing has an **Active** status
3. Make sure the products are available on your Online Store sales channel

## 5. Clear Cache

Your browser or Shopify's CDN may be serving a cached version of the page.

1. Clear your browser cache or open the page in a private/incognito window
2. If your store uses a third-party caching service, purge the product page cache

## 6. Theme Compatibility

The theme block works with most Shopify themes. If none of the above steps resolve the issue:

1. Test with a default Shopify theme (like Dawn) to rule out theme conflicts
2. Check that your theme supports app blocks on product pages
3. Older "vintage" themes that do not support Online Store 2.0 may not support app blocks

If the listing still does not appear after checking all of these, contact support at support@pasilobus.com.

---

# Common Issues

> Solutions for frequently encountered problems

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings/common-issues
App: Swatches & Listings (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Swatches & Listings")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/combined-listings-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/combined-listings
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-02-16
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Solutions for frequently encountered problems when using Swatches & Listings.

## Duplicate Option Value Error

**Problem:** When saving a listing, you see an error about duplicate option value combinations.

**Cause:** Two or more products in the listing have the same values for all options. Each product must have a unique combination.

**Fix:** Review the option values assigned to each product and change one so that every product has a distinct combination. For example, if two products both have Color = Red and Size = Large, change one of them.

## Missing Option Values

**Problem:** You see an error that a product is missing a value for one of the listing's options.

**Cause:** Every product in a listing must have a value for every option. If the listing has Color and Size options, each product needs both a Color value and a Size value.

**Fix:** Open the listing editor and fill in the missing option values for the flagged products.

## Products Not Appearing in the Picker

**Problem:** When clicking Add Products, some products do not appear in the search results.

**Cause:** The product picker searches your Shopify catalog. Products may not appear if they are in Draft status or not available on the Online Store sales channel.

**Fix:** Go to **Shopify Admin > Products**, ensure the product is Active and available on the Online Store channel, then try the picker again.

## Sync Status Stuck

**Problem:** A listing shows a "Syncing" status that does not complete.

**Cause:** Background sync jobs occasionally stall, especially for listings with many products.

**Fix:**
1. Refresh the page after a minute
2. If the status is still stuck, toggle the listing to Draft, save, then set it back to Active
3. This triggers a fresh sync

## Plan Limit Reached

**Problem:** You cannot create new listings and see a message about reaching your plan limit.

**Cause:** Each plan has a maximum number of listings. When you reach the limit, the Create button is disabled.

**Fix:** Either upgrade to a plan with a higher listing limit, or delete listings you no longer need to free up space. Draft listings count toward the limit.

A CSV import follows the same limit: rows that would create a listing past it are reported as failed on the import results page, while rows that update listings you already have still go through.

## Analytics Shows 0 Views

**Problem:** The **Analytics** page stays at 0 views although shoppers are visiting your product pages.

**Cause:** Views are counted on every plan, Free included, by the app's web pixel. The pixel is set up when you first open the app's home page, and it only counts a visit when the shopper's privacy choices allow analytics (a shopper who declines in your cookie banner is not counted).

**Fix:**
1. Open the app's home page once, so the pixel is set up
2. In Shopify, go to **Settings > Customer events > App pixels** and check that the Swatches & Listings pixel shows **Connected**
3. Visit a product page in a normal browser window, accept analytics in the cookie banner if your store shows one, then reload **Analytics**

The same views drive **Most viewed first** swatch order and the **Most popular** badge.

**Top Products** lists your most-viewed products whether or not they are in a listing, and shows under each one the listing it belongs to (or **Not in a listing**). Both **Top Products** and **Top Listings** count the date range you pick, the same as the views total beside them, and so does **Unique Visitors**. A product you have since deleted in Shopify shows as **Deleted product**, with its views kept.

## Option Values Not Showing Colors

**Problem:** Color Swatch display shows plain squares without color.

**Cause:** The option values do not have hex color codes assigned.

**Fix:** Go to the **Options** page, open the option, and edit each value to add a hex color code (e.g. #FF0000 for red). Save the changes and the swatches will display the assigned colors.

## A Product Shows Text Instead of Swatches

**Problem:** A product's colors appear as a list or as text buttons, even though the app shows its colors as set up.

**Cause:** Shopify only draws color swatches for products that have a **product category**. The scan skips products without one, and the swatches page warns about them after you match colors.

**Fix:** In Shopify, open the product and set its **Category** (for example Apparel & Accessories > Clothing > Shirts & Tops). Then run **Scan my catalog** again from the app's home page. The number of products still missing a category is also shown under **Settings > Swatches**.

## Hiding Sold-Out Products

**Problem:** You don't want shoppers to see swatches for products that are out of stock.

**Fix:** Turn on **Hide out-of-stock products by default** under **Settings > Swatches**. Every listing follows it unless you change **Hide out of stock** on that listing's own page.

---

# Installation

> Install the app and activate it on your theme

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/installation
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-09-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every shopper who leaves your store without buying is a sale you may never recover. Wishlist gives them a reason to come back — and gives you data on what they actually wanted. You can finish the setup in a few minutes.

## Install from the App Store

Open the [Wishlist](https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list) listing on the Shopify App Store and click **Add app**. Approve the install when Shopify prompts you.

Wishlist opens to a setup wizard as soon as the install finishes.

## Run the setup wizard

The wizard walks you through four steps. Each step has a button that drops you in the right spot in your Shopify admin.

**Step 1: Turn on the app embed** — The app embed runs the wishlist across your whole store: collection page icons, the floating widget, confirmation messages, and the count badge. Click the wizard button to open the theme editor, switch the **Wishlist** embed on, and click **Save**.

**Step 2: Add the wishlist button block** — This puts the wishlist button (a heart and "Add to List", unless you change them) on your product pages. Click the wizard button to open your product template in the theme editor. The block is added for you — drag it where you want it (most stores place it just under the **Add to Cart** button) and click **Save**.

**Step 3: Add wishlist to customer accounts** — Logged-in customers get a Wishlist link inside their account portal. Click the wizard button to open **Settings > Customer accounts** and turn on the Wishlist extension.

**Step 4: Finish** — Click **Complete** so the wizard can verify all three pieces are active.

If the wizard says it **couldn't check** rather than telling you something is missing, that's a temporary problem reaching Shopify, not a problem with your setup. Click **Retry** — it usually clears on the second attempt. Nothing you've already enabled is lost.

## Add the header icon (optional)

You can add a wishlist heart to your store header so customers can reach their saved items from anywhere. This is a separate theme block, so you add it by hand:

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**
2. Open your **Header** section
3. Click **Add block** and pick **Wishlist Icon**
4. Drag it next to your cart icon
5. Adjust the size and color in the block settings, then click **Save**

## Speed and your theme

A slow store loses sales, so here is exactly what Wishlists adds to your storefront and how it loads, so you can judge the performance cost yourself. Nothing is added to your theme's code: everything runs from the app embed and the blocks, and all of it is served from Shopify's own CDN.

- **The app embed** runs on every page, because the hearts go on product cards wherever your theme shows them. It starts with a loader of under 1 KB, which then adds the main wishlist script (about 18 KB compressed) in the background. Your products, prices and Add to cart button don't wait for it; the hearts appear as soon as it's ready.
- **The Wishlist Button and Wishlist Icon** blocks add no scripts of their own. Shopify only allows the button on product pages and the icon in your header. The optional **Wishlist Products** block loads its own small script only on pages where you add it.
- **Saved items** are kept in the shopper's browser for a few minutes, so moving from page to page doesn't wait on our servers each time.

## Check that it works

Open your storefront in a new tab and run through this checklist:

1. Visit any product page — the wishlist button should be visible
2. Click it to save the product
3. Watch for the confirmation message
4. Browse a collection page — heart icons should appear on each product card
5. If you added the header icon, confirm it shows the saved count

If the button doesn't appear, see [Button Not Showing](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/button-not-showing).

---

# Plans and limits

> What the Free, Pro, Max and Ultra plans include, and how to change plan

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/plans-and-limits
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Getting Started
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Wishlists has four plans: **Free**, **Pro**, **Max** and **Ultra**. The storefront wishlist itself works on every plan, Free included. The paid plans add the emails, reports and wholesale tools built on top of it. Each plan includes everything in the plans below it.

## What each plan includes

- **Free** - The full storefront wishlist: the **Wishlist Button** on product pages, hearts on collection pages, the floating heart and the **Wishlist Icon** for your header, and the wishlist page. Guest wishlists, multiple lists, sharing, add to cart from a list, and **Export CSV** of every wishlist.
- **Pro** - Everything in Free, plus customer emails for back in stock, low stock and wishlist follow-ups (reminders), and **Reports** (wishlist events and top products).
- **Max** - Everything in Pro, plus price drop emails, gift registries and Google Analytics.
- **Ultra** - Everything in Max, plus the B2B tools: order forms and CSV import for your buyers.

No plan limits how many shoppers, lists or saved items your store can have.

## Prices

Paid plans start at $7.99 a month and are billed through Shopify. For each plan's current price, see the [Wishlists listing on the Shopify App Store](https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list). Shopify's plan page also shows the price, and any free trial, before you approve a plan.

## Features your plan doesn't include

A setting your plan doesn't include tells you which plan it needs, with an **Upgrade** link to Shopify's plan page. For example, **Settings > B2B** shows "Available on the Ultra plan and higher." on Free, Pro and Max, and its switches can't be turned on.

Customer emails follow the same rule. An email type your plan doesn't include is not sent, even if it was switched on before. Any that come due appear in **Customer notifications** as **Throttled**, with the reason. See **Customer Notifications**.

## Changing plan

Go to **Settings > Billing**, or click **Upgrade** on any setting your plan doesn't include. Both open Shopify's plan page for the app, where you pick and approve the new plan.

If you move to a lower plan, your settings are kept. Features the new plan doesn't include stop working until you upgrade again: their emails stop, and **Reports** asks you to upgrade. Gift registries are the exception: a store that had registries turned on before keeps them.

---

# How Wishlist Works

> Understand the key components of your wishlist system

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/how-wishlist-works
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Wishlist adds a few touchpoints across your store that work together to let shoppers save products, come back to them, and eventually buy. Once you understand how the pieces connect, it's easier to decide what to turn on and where to put each one.

## The four key pieces

**Product page button** — This is where most saves happen. When a shopper finds something they're interested in but isn't ready to check out, they click this button to save it. Place it near the **Add to Cart** button so shoppers see it at decision time.

**Collection page icons** — Small heart icons on product cards in collections, search results, and featured sections. Shoppers can save items while browsing without ever opening the product page.

**Quick access widget** — A persistent way to reach the wishlist from anywhere on your store. It can show as a floating icon in the corner of the screen or as an icon in your header navigation.

**Wishlist page** — Where shoppers review everything they've saved. They can compare items, remove what they no longer want, add to cart, and share the list.

## How they work together

Each piece reinforces the next:

1. **Discovery** — Shoppers browse and spot products they like
2. **Saving** — They tap the product page button or a collection icon
3. **Reminder** — The quick access widget keeps the wishlist visible
4. **Review** — They open the wishlist page and decide what to buy
5. **Purchase** — They add to cart and check out

## A real example

Here's how a typical visit plays out:

1. Sarah lands on your store and opens a collection page
2. She taps the heart icons on three products she likes
3. She opens one product to read more and taps the wishlist button there too
4. Later, she notices the floating wishlist icon showing "4 items"
5. She clicks it for a quick preview, then opens the full wishlist page
6. She compares two products side by side, adds both to cart, and checks out

Every touchpoint played a role in moving Sarah from browsing to buying.

## Customize each piece

- [Product page button](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/product-page-button) — Saved indicator and click-when-saved behavior
- [Collection page icons](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/collection-page-icons) — Position, style, and first-click behavior
- [Quick access widget](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/quick-access-widget) — Floating icon position and style
- [Wishlist page](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/wishlist-page) — Layout, price, SKU

---

# Product Page Button

> Configure the wishlist button on product pages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/product-page-button
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Most wishlist saves happen on the product page. A shopper has already clicked through from a collection, search, or ad — they're interested. The button gives them a way to hold onto the product when they're not ready to buy, and gives you a way to bring them back later.

## Add the button to your theme

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**
2. Pick **Products > Default product** from the page dropdown
3. In the product section, click **Add block**
4. Pick **Wishlist Button** from the **Apps** list
5. Drag it where you want it — directly under the **Add to Cart** button works best
6. Click **Save**

## Set the saved indicator

When a product is already saved, the button should show it. Go to **Wishlist > Storefront** and pick a style:

- **Filled icon** — The icon fills in (outline heart becomes solid). Most recognizable, and the default.
- **Text** — The button label changes (for example, "Add to Wishlist" becomes "Saved").
- **None** — No change. Use only if you handle the saved state with custom CSS.

## Decide what happens when shoppers click an already-saved product

In **Wishlist > Storefront**, pick how the button reacts when a shopper clicks a product that's already in their wishlist:

- **Toggle** — Removes the item. Quick and intuitive, but accidental clicks can lose saves.
- **Show message** — Confirms the item is already saved and offers a link to the wishlist. Safer when accidental removals are a concern.
- **Open dropdown** — Opens the list selector so the shopper can move the item to another list. Best when you've turned on multiple lists.

---

# Collection Page Icons

> Add wishlist icons to collection and search pages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/collection-page-icons
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-09-14
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Shoppers scanning a collection often spot several products they like at once. Without an icon on the card, they have to click into each product, save it, then back out — that's four clicks per save. With heart icons on the cards, it's one tap. You'll see more saves and get a clearer picture of what's catching shoppers' eyes.

## Turn the icons on

The icons live inside the app embed and are on by default.

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**
2. Open **App embeds** in the left sidebar
3. Click **Wishlist**
4. Make sure **Show wishlist icon on product cards** is checked
5. Click **Save**

## Pick where the icon sits on the card

In the same Wishlist app embed settings, pick a position:

- **Top right** — Default. Visible without covering the product image.
- **Top left** — Use this if your sale or "new" badges sit in the top right.
- **Bottom right** — Sits near quick-add buttons if your theme has them.
- **Bottom left** — Lowest visual interference.

## Adjust the look

In the same panel you can change:

- **Icon style** — Heart, star, bookmark, or plus
- **Icon size** — Separate ranges for desktop and mobile
- **Padding and stroke width** — Fine-tune spacing and outline weight
- **Fill style** — Outline + filled, filled only, or outline only
- **Background** — None, circle, or rounded square behind the icon
- **Colors** — Default, hover, and saved colors

## Decide what the first click does

Go to **Wishlist > Storefront** to pick how the icon reacts when a shopper saves a product:

- **Add to default list** — The product saves to the default wishlist instantly. Fast and frictionless.
- **Ask which list** — A small picker appears so the shopper can choose a list. Use this if you've turned on multiple lists.

## Decide what happens with variants

A product card doesn't say which size or colour the shopper wants. Under **Products with several variants**, pick what the icon does when a product has more than one:

- **Ask which variant** — Default. A small picker appears with the product's variants, and the shopper's choice is what gets saved. Use this when the variant matters, so the wishlist can add exactly that item to the cart later.
- **Save the first variant without asking** — The product saves in one click with its first variant. Use this when the wishlist is a list of *products* to come back to, and the shopper picks size or colour on the product page — for example wholesale buyers saving models to order from later.

Products with a single variant always save in one click, whichever option you choose.

## Decide what clicking an already-saved icon does

Same screen, second option:

- **Toggle** — Removes the product from the wishlist.
- **Show message** — Confirms the product is already saved with a link to view the wishlist. Safer against accidental removals.
- **Open dropdown** — Lets shoppers move the item between lists.

---

# Quick Access Widget

> Give customers quick access to their wishlist from anywhere

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/quick-access-widget
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Customers save items, leave your store, and often forget what they liked. Keeping a wishlist shortcut visible on every page reminds them to come back and finish the purchase. Wishlist gives you two ways to show that shortcut: a **floating icon** in the corner of the page, and a **header icon** alongside your cart. You can use one, both, or neither — whichever fits your storefront best.

## Floating icon

The floating icon is the round button that sits in the bottom corner of every page. You manage it from your theme editor.

To turn it on or off, go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize > App embeds > Wishlist**, then check or uncheck **Enable floating icon**. Save the theme to apply.

While you're there, you can also customize:

- **Position** — Bottom right or bottom left
- **Icon style** — Heart, Star, Bookmark, or Gift
- **Size and padding** — Separate sliders for desktop and mobile
- **Colors** — Default, hover, saved state, and the badge background
- **Stroke width** — For a thicker or thinner outline

Clicking the floating icon opens a slide-in drawer with the customer's saved items, so they can peek at their wishlist without losing their place on the page. The drawer is titled with the list's name when the shopper has one list (or picks one from the list menu).

## Saved-item counter

Both icons can show a small badge with the number of items the shopper has saved, like a cart count. It updates as soon as something is saved or removed, and disappears when the wishlist is empty.

- **Floating icon (and the legacy header icon)** — In the app embed, check or uncheck **Show the number of saved items on wishlist icons**. It is on by default.
- **Wishlist Icon block** — Each block has its own **Show the number of saved items** setting, on by default.

The badge takes the icon's **Icon Success color** from the app embed.

## Header icon

The header icon sits next to your cart and account icons. It's a separate block called **Wishlist Icon**, so you add it directly to your header instead of toggling it on in the embed.

To add it:

1. In the theme editor, click your header section
2. Click **Add block** and choose **Wishlist Icon** from the Apps section
3. Drag it into place next to your cart icon

Each block has its own icon style, size, stroke width, color, and spacing settings — handy if you want it to feel different from the floating icon. Clicking it takes the customer to their full wishlist page.

To remove it later, open the header section, select the **Wishlist Icon** block, and click **Remove block**.

## Which one should you use?

It depends on what feels right for your storefront:

- **Floating icon only** — The quickest setup. Visible everywhere without editing your header. Great when you don't want to fiddle with the header layout.
- **Header icon only** — A cleaner, more native look that matches your other navigation icons. Great if a floating button would compete with a chat widget or promo bar.
- **Both** — Maximum visibility. The header icon takes shoppers to the full wishlist page; the floating icon gives a quick peek via the drawer.
- **Neither** — Skip both if you'd rather keep wishlist access only on the product page button. Customers can still reach their list from their customer account.

---

# Wishlist Page

> Configure the full wishlist page

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/wishlist-page
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-09-14
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The wishlist page is where shoppers actually convert — it's the moment they review what they've saved and decide what to buy. A clear, well-designed page keeps that decision easy and brings them back when they're ready.

## How shoppers reach the page

The page lives at **yourstore.com/a/wishlist**. Shoppers can get there from:

- The floating wishlist icon or header icon
- A **View wishlist** link in any confirmation message
- A direct link you share in email or marketing

## Pick a layout

Go to **Wishlist > Wishlist Portal** to choose how saved items are displayed:

- **Cards** — A grid of product cards with image, name, price, and **Add to cart**. Best for visual browsing and stores with strong product photography.
- **List** — Compact rows with a thumbnail, product details, and quick actions. Best for long wishlists and mobile shoppers.

Shoppers can also flip between layouts using the view switcher on the page.

## Show price and SKU

In the same **Wishlist > Wishlist Portal** screen:

- **Show price** — Display the current product price. Helps shoppers decide.
- **Show SKU** — Display the product SKU. Useful for B2B stores or shoppers who reorder.

## Add to cart options

Shoppers can move items from the wishlist into the cart one at a time, or tap **Add all to cart** above the list to add one of every available item at once. Sold-out items are marked **Sold out** and are left out of the batch. When nothing in the list is available, the add-to-cart buttons are turned off and the list says "Nothing in this list is available right now." Variant selection is handled inline for products with multiple options.

Add to cart from the list is on every plan, Free included. Turn it on under **Settings > Wishlist Portal > Add to cart**, where you also choose what happens after adding: stay on the page, go to the cart, or go to checkout.

## Save products instead of variants

By default a save is the exact variant the shopper picked — size M in blue — and *Add to cart* adds that variant. Some stores, wholesale in particular, want the wishlist to be a list of *products* the buyer comes back to, choosing sizes and colours at the moment of ordering.

Under **Wishlist > Settings > Wishlist actions > What a save is**, choose **Save the product, choose the variant later**. Then:

- The collection-page icon and the product-page button save the product in one click, without asking for a variant
- The wishlist page, the drawer and the theme block show the product without a variant line
- *Add to cart* becomes **Choose options** on products with more than one variant: a small picker opens, the shopper picks, and it goes straight into the cart. Products with a single variant still add in one click
- If a product is ordered and you've turned on *Ordered products* below, every variant of it counts as purchased

The default stays *Save the exact variant they picked*; nothing changes for stores that don't turn this on.

## When a saved product is ordered

Under **Wishlist > Settings > Wishlist page > Ordered products**, choose what happens to a product on a customer's wishlist once they order it:

- **Keep it on their wishlist** — Default. Nothing changes.
- **Keep it, marked as purchased** — The product stays but is greyed out with a *Purchased* label, on the wishlist page, in the drawer and in the theme block. Saving it again clears the mark.
- **Remove it from their wishlist** — The product disappears from all of that customer's wishlists.

This runs when the order is placed, not when it's paid, so it works for orders on payment terms. It applies to signed-in customers only — guest lists can't be matched to an order — and never to gift registries, which track purchases per gift.

## Sharing

If you've turned on sharing in **Wishlist > Lists & Guests**, shoppers can tap **Share** on the page to copy a public link. See [Sharing](https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/sharing) for the full options.

---

# Customer Account Extension

> Add wishlist to the new customer accounts

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/customer-account-extension
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Shopify's new customer accounts are where logged-in shoppers already manage their orders, addresses, and profile. Adding the wishlist right alongside those tabs makes it part of the home base they already know — no separate page to remember, no extra link to find.

## Turn the extension on

You can do this from Wishlist or from Shopify's checkout editor.

**From Wishlist:**

1. Go to **Wishlist > Settings > Installation**
2. Click **Add to Customer Accounts**

**From Shopify:**

1. Open the **Checkout editor** in your Shopify admin
2. Click **Apps** in the left sidebar
3. Find **Wishlist** and turn it on
4. Drag it into the customer account navigation
5. Click **Save**

The wishlist now appears as a section inside your customers' account pages.

## What customers see

A **Wishlist** link appears in their account navigation. Clicking it shows:

- Every saved product with its image and title
- Current price and availability
- Add to cart on each product (when **Add to cart** is on in **Settings > Wishlist Portal**), and **Add all to cart** for a list with more than one product. Sold-out products are marked **Sold out** and left out of **Add all to cart**. When nothing in the list is available, Add to Cart is turned off and the page says "Nothing in this list is available right now.", as the storefront wishlist page does
- A remove option

The extension picks up your storefront styling automatically, so it matches the rest of the account portal.

## Should you use this or the standalone wishlist page?

Most stores use both — the extension for logged-in shoppers and the standalone page for guests and shareable links.

| Feature | Customer account extension | Wishlist page |
|---|---|---|
| Requires login | Yes | Optional |
| Guest access | No | Yes (if turned on) |
| Custom URL | No (lives in the account portal) | Yes |
| Sharing | Through the account | Direct link sharing |

## Requirements

- Shopify's **new customer accounts** (not the classic version)
- **Pro plan** or higher

---

# Customer Page Block in Shopify Admin

> See a customer's wishlists on their customer page in Shopify admin

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/admin-block
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The Wishlists block shows a customer's wishlists and gift registries right on their customer page in Shopify admin, so you can see what someone has saved while you answer their email or prepare an order, without opening the app.

## Add the block

The block comes with the app. Add it once and it shows on every customer:

1. In Shopify admin, open **Customers** and select any customer
2. Scroll to the **Blocks** section at the bottom of the page and click **+ Block**
3. Choose **Pasilobus Wishlists**
4. Click **Save**

You can find the same steps in **Wishlist > Settings > Extensions**.

## What it shows

- Every list the customer has, with the number of products on it
- A link on each list name that opens the customer's page in Wishlist, with every list and its products

A customer with no lists shows a short "no wishlists" message.

## View Customer's Lists

On any customer page, **More actions > View Customer's Lists** opens that customer's page in Wishlist directly.

## Things to know

- The block shows lists of signed-in customers. A guest's list is tied to a browser, not a customer record, so it appears only after the guest signs in and their list is merged into their account.
- The block is available on every plan.

---

# Confirmation Messages

> What customers see when adding items

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/confirmation-messages
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

When a shopper saves an item, they need to know it worked — otherwise they'll click again, or worse, assume nothing happened and move on. The right confirmation style strikes a balance between clear feedback and uninterrupted browsing.

## Pick the confirmation style

1. Go to **Wishlist > Storefront**
2. In the **Confirmation** section, pick a style:
   - **Modal** — A centered popup the shopper has to dismiss. Best when you want to draw attention or surface follow-up actions.
   - **Toast** — A small notification that appears briefly in the corner. Best for stores where shoppers save items often.
3. Click **Save**

## Customize the wording

Want to say "Saved to your favorites!" instead of "Added to your wishlist!"? You can edit every text string used in the storefront.

1. Go to **Wishlist > Translations**
2. Pick your storefront language
3. Find the confirmation message keys (search for "added" or "saved")
4. Edit the text
5. Click **Save**

Some wording ideas:

- "Nice choice! We'll keep this saved for you."
- "Added to your favorites!"
- "Saved! Don't let this one get away."

You can also rewrite the button labels ("View wishlist", "Keep shopping"), empty state copy, and error messages from the same screen.

Translations are available on the Max plan and above.

---

# Multiple Lists

> Let customers organize items into multiple wishlists

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/multiple-lists
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A single wishlist works fine until shoppers start saving for different occasions — birthday gifts, holiday shopping, a home renovation project. When everything piles into one list, shoppers can't find anything and stop coming back. Multiple lists let them keep things organized by occasion, room, recipient, or whatever makes sense to them.

## Turn multiple lists on

1. Go to **Wishlist > Lists & Guests**
2. Turn on **Allow multiple lists**
3. Click **Save**

This setting is available on every plan, Free included.

## What shoppers can do

- **Create a list** — Click **Create new list** on the wishlist page and give it a name (for example, "Birthday ideas"). The new list becomes active.
- **Rename or delete** — Click the list name to rename it, or remove lists they no longer need.
- **Move items between lists** — Select items, click **Move to list**, and pick the destination.

## Decide where new saves go

When shoppers tap the wishlist button or icon, you can pick which list the item lands in. Go to **Wishlist > Storefront**, find the **First click** option:

- **Add to default list** — Items go to the default wishlist instantly. Simple and fast.
- **Ask which list** — A picker opens so the shopper picks the list. Best when shoppers actively use multiple lists.

---

# Guest Wishlists

> Allow visitors to save items without an account

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/guest-wishlists
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Forcing first-time visitors to sign up before saving anything is the fastest way to lose them. Guest wishlists let shoppers start saving right away, and when they log in or check out later, their saved items move into their account — no lost work, no extra steps.

## How guest wishlists work

Guest wishlist data is stored in the shopper's browser. As soon as a visitor adds their first item, a wishlist exists for them — no signup, no email required. When they log in or create an account, the guest wishlist merges with their account wishlist automatically and duplicates are handled cleanly.

This is on by default and runs as part of the app embed.

## Capture guest emails

You can also ask guests for an email so you can reach them later — for back-in-stock alerts, price drops and wishlist reminders.

1. Go to **Wishlist > Lists & Guests**
2. Turn on **Capture guest emails**
3. Click **Save**

Guests are prompted for their email at the right moment in the save flow. With customer sync on, each address you collect is added to your Shopify customer list — so the shoppers who save items end up somewhere you can see them. The form asks for the address for wishlist emails only, so it is not a marketing opt-in: new contacts are added without email marketing consent.

Shoppers who are already customers of your store are matched by email and left exactly as they are. Their marketing preferences came from whatever they did before — a checkout, a newsletter signup, a conversation with your staff — and saving a wishlist doesn't override that in either direction.

This needs permission to write customers, so Shopify will ask you to re-approve the app once before it takes effect.

## Privacy

- **Data stays local** for guests until they share an email or log in
- **No personal data** is stored without the shopper's input
- **Browser clearing** removes the guest wishlist — log-in is the way to make it permanent
- **The date of consent is recorded** against every contact, and set once — saving a second wishlist doesn't move it
- **Existing customers are never modified.** Their marketing state is left exactly as your store already had it
- Captured emails can be deleted on request to keep you GDPR-aligned

---

# Wishlist Sharing

> Let customers share wishlists with others

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/sharing
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

When a shopper shares their wishlist with a friend or family member, you get a warm introduction to a brand-new potential buyer — for free. Shared wishlists pay off the most around birthdays, holidays, and gift-giving occasions, when shoppers are already thinking about what to ask for or what to buy for someone else.

## Turn sharing on

1. Go to **Wishlist > Lists & Guests**
2. Turn on **Public sharing**
3. Click **Save**

Shoppers can now generate a shareable link from their wishlist page.

## How share links work

When a shopper taps **Share** on their wishlist:

1. They confirm they want the list shared — a list is never made public just because the page was opened
2. A unique public link is generated
3. They copy and send it however they want — text, email, social
4. Whoever opens the link sees the wishlist without needing to log in or create an account
5. The viewer sees each item's current price (in their own currency and market), and items that are sold out are marked **Sold out**
6. The viewer can add items to their own cart one by one, or tap **Add all to cart** to add every available item at once (Add to cart from the list must be on under **Wishlist Portal**)

Shared links stay live as long as the wishlist exists and update automatically when items are added or removed.

---

# Gift Registries

> Let customers create shareable registries for weddings, birthdays and baby showers

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/gift-registries
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A wishlist is a shopper keeping track of what they want. A gift registry is that same list pointed outward — built for an occasion, shared with guests, and designed so two people never buy the same thing. Registries are where wishlists start bringing you buyers who have never visited your store before, because every guest who opens the link arrives already intending to purchase.

## Turn registries on

1. Go to **Wishlist > Lists & Guests**
2. Turn on **Gift registry**
3. Click **Save**

Registries are on the Max plan and higher; on a lower plan the setting says so and links to the plan page. A store that turned registries on before keeps them.

Once it is on, shoppers get a **Create Registry** option alongside their ordinary lists. Existing wishlists are untouched; a registry is a separate kind of list.

## What the shopper sets up

When a shopper creates a registry they fill in:

- **Registry Name** — for example "John & Jane's Wedding Registry"
- **Event Type** — Wedding, Baby Shower, Birthday, Housewarming, or Other
- **Names** — who the registry is for, shown to guests
- **Event Date** — optional, and shown to guests so they know the deadline
- **Greeting Message** — a short note that appears above the items

If public sharing is enabled on your store, the shopper also gets a **Generate a public link for sharing** option. That link is what they send to guests, and it opens without anyone needing an account.

## Quantities and purchase tracking

This is what separates a registry from a shared wishlist. Each item carries a quantity the shopper wants, and Wishlist keeps count of how many have already been bought.

- Items requesting more than one show a progress bar — **"2 of 6 purchased"**, **"4 remaining"**
- An item that has been fully bought is marked as such, so guests stop buying it
- The registrant sees the same progress on their own registry

Counting happens automatically when an order is **paid** in your store. Wishlist records the buyer's name, email and quantity against the item, and the same order can never be counted twice.

## What does and does not get counted

A purchase is matched to a registry item by the guest going through the registry. If a guest opens the registry link and adds an item from there, it counts.

It does not count when:

- Someone buys the same product from your ordinary product page, without going through the registry
- The gift is bought somewhere other than your store
- The order is placed but never paid — counting happens on payment, not at checkout

This means a registry's progress reflects what was bought *through the registry*, which is usually what the registrant wants. It also means the count can understate reality if a guest goes off-script, so treat it as a guide rather than a guarantee.

## What registries do not do

Items are never reserved or held. Marking an item as purchased is a record of what already happened, not a lock — two guests who check out at the same moment can both buy the last one. Wishlist does not touch your inventory, and it does not stop a sale.

---

# B2B Features

> Wholesale and business features

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/b2b-features
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

B2B buyers shop differently from retail shoppers. They reorder the same products on a schedule, add dozens of items in one session, and often need a manager to sign off before placing the order. These features turn the wishlist into a wholesale-ready tool so your buyers spend less time clicking and more time ordering.

Order forms and CSV import are on the **Ultra** plan. On Free, Pro and Max, the B2B settings page says "Available on the Ultra plan and higher." with an **Upgrade** link, and its switches can't be changed. See **Plans and limits**.

## Turn on order forms

Order forms let buyers add many products in one go with quantity inputs and a running total.

1. Go to **Wishlist > B2B**
2. Turn on **Order forms**
3. Click **Save**

Once on, the order form shows the product name and SKU, variant options, a quantity input per row, a running total, and a single bulk **Add to cart** button. Each row starts at the quantity saved with the item, or 1. Sold-out products are marked **Sold out** and left out of the bulk add, and if Shopify refuses a line (for example, not enough stock), the rest of the list is still added and the buyer is told which lines weren't.

## Turn on CSV import

CSV import lets buyers upload a spreadsheet of SKUs and have those products land in their wishlist.

1. Go to **Wishlist > B2B**
2. Turn on **CSV import**
3. Click **Save**

Buyers will see an **Import** button on their wishlist page. They upload a CSV like this:

```
sku,quantity
ABC-123,1
DEF-456,5
```

Wishlist matches the SKUs against your catalog and adds the products to the active list.

## Common B2B uses

- **Reorder lists** — Buyers keep a list of products they order regularly and refresh their cart from it.
- **Project lists** — Construction or design teams group products by project.
- **Approval flow** — Junior buyers build a list and pass it to a manager to review before ordering.
- **Quote requests** — Buyers assemble a list and request wholesale pricing.
- **Team collaboration** — Multiple buyers contribute to a shared list for the company.

---

# Customer Notifications

> Back-in-stock, price drop, low stock and reminder emails

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/customer-notifications
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Wishlist emails your customers when something changes about an item they saved — it comes back in stock, drops in price, runs low, or has been sitting in their list for a while. These are the emails that bring shoppers back, so the app keeps a full record of every one: what was sent, to whom, and when something wasn't sent, why.

## The notification types

- **Back in stock** (Pro plan and higher) — Sent when a saved item that was sold out becomes available again. Customers opt into this themselves when they save an out-of-stock product, and anyone with the item on a list is signed up when it sells out.
- **Price drop** (Max plan and higher) — Sent when a saved item's price falls below what it was when the customer added it. The email shows the price they saved it at, struck through, next to the new price.
- **Low stock** (Pro plan and higher) — Sent when a saved item is still available but running low. Set the threshold in units; the email goes once when stock falls to it, and again only after stock has gone back above it.
- **Reminder** (Pro plan and higher) — Sent when items have been sitting in a customer's list without action.

Guests who gave their email on the storefront get these emails too.

Each type is switched on separately in **Wishlist > Settings > Customer notifications & reminders** (it is also linked from the top of the **Customer notifications** activity list and from **Settings > Customer emails**). A type your plan does not include shows which plan does, with a link to upgrade. The wording of each email is yours to edit under **Settings > Customer emails**.

Back in stock, price drop and low stock also reach **Shopify Flow** as triggers, one run per shopper, with the shopper's email. Use them to send the same moments to Klaviyo or another email tool — see **Klaviyo** in Integrations.

## Wishlists or Restock Alerts for back-in-stock emails

The back-in-stock email in Wishlists only goes to shoppers who saved the product to a wishlist and whose email the app has: a logged-in customer, or a guest who gave their email. Restock Alerts, our separate app, doesn't need a wishlist: it puts a **Notify me when available** button on sold-out product pages, and any visitor can leave their email for that variant. The two apps don't share signups, so a shopper who saved a product and also signed up through Restock Alerts gets an email from each.

## The activity list

**Wishlist > Customer notifications** is the record of everything the app has sent and everything it is about to send. Each row shows the date, the customer, the type, and a status:

- **Scheduled** — Waiting for its trigger. A back-in-stock row sits here until the product is restocked.
- **Sent** — Delivered to the customer.
- **Throttled** — Held back deliberately. Usually the weekly limit, sometimes a notification type that is switched off.
- **Opted out** — The customer has unsubscribed from wishlist emails.
- **Failed** — Something went wrong sending it.

Search by customer email to find every notification for one shopper.

## Why an email wasn't sent

Click any sent, throttled, opted-out or failed row to open it. The detail page tells you in a sentence what the status means for that specific customer:

- They had already received the maximum number of emails allowed for one week
- They have unsubscribed from wishlist emails
- The notification type is switched off, or your plan doesn't include it

It also shows the products the email was about and a preview of the email itself. The preview is built from your current template, so if you have edited the wording since, it shows today's version rather than the exact copy that was delivered.

Scheduled rows have no detail page — nothing has been sent yet.

## The weekly limit

To keep the app from over-emailing, each customer has a cap on how many wishlist emails they can receive in a rolling seven days. You set it in **Settings > Customer notifications & reminders**.

Back-in-stock is exempt. A customer explicitly asked to hear when that product returned, and the message is useless once it sells out again — so it always goes out.

---

# Reports

> Analyze wishlist performance

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/reports
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Reports show you what shoppers actually want — before they buy. Use them to spot the products you should be promoting, the inventory you need to keep in stock, and the campaigns most likely to convert.

## Open your reports

1. Go to **Wishlist > Reports**
2. Browse the events summary
3. Click any metric to see the detailed data

You'll see total wishlist events over time, conversion funnel metrics, top-performing products, and engagement trends.

## Filter by date and event type

Narrow the view with date range filters (**Today**, **Last 7 days**, **Last 30 days**, or a custom range) and event type filters (**Added**, **Removed**, **Viewed**, **Shared**, **Purchased**). Combine them to dig into specific behaviors.

## Product performance

Four product views show you what's working:

- **Most wishlisted** — Products added to wishlists most often. Highest signal of desire.
- **Highest conversion** — Products most likely to be purchased after being saved. Strong promotion candidates.
- **Longest saved** — Products that sit in wishlists for a long time before buying. May point to price sensitivity or seasonal demand.
- **Recently trending** — Products gaining wishlist activity in the past week.

Click any product to see its full wishlist history.

## Export your data

Reports themselves are on-screen only. To get the underlying data out, use **Wishlist > Wishlists > Export CSV** — that gives you one row per saved product with the customer attached, which is what you need for analytics dashboards, email campaigns, restock planning, or customer segmentation.

---

# Exporting wishlists

> Download wishlist data as a CSV

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/exporting-wishlists
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-09-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Wishlist data is most useful outside the app — in a spreadsheet you sort by demand, an email tool you segment with, or the system you plan restocks in. The export gives you every saved product with the customer who saved it, as a CSV.

## Export your wishlists

1. Go to **Wishlist > Wishlists**
2. Click **Export CSV** at the top of the page
3. Tick **Wishlists**, **Gift registries**, or both
4. Click **Download CSV**

**Wishlists** are the lists shoppers save for themselves. **Gift registries** are lists built for an occasion and shared with guests — if you haven't turned registries on, that box is greyed out and every list you have is a wishlist.

## Large exports arrive by email

Up to 50,000 rows the file downloads straight away. Above that the page offers **Email me the export** instead: enter the address the link should go to, and we build the file in the background and email you when it's done — usually within a few minutes.

- The link in the email works for **seven days**, then the file is deleted. Request a new export if you need it again after that
- Anyone with the link can download the file, so forward it with the same care as the data itself
- Only one export builds at a time. If you request another while one is in progress, you'll be told the first is still on its way
- If the build fails you get an email saying so; request it again from the same page

## What's in the file

One row per saved product, not per list, so a customer with eight items appears eight times. Each row carries:

- **Customer email, name, ID** - who saved it
- **Customer type** - **Customer** if they were signed in, **Guest** if not. Guests have no Shopify customer record, so this tells you which rows you can match against your customer list
- **List name, type, event type, event date** - which list it came from, and for registries what the occasion is
- **Product, SKU, variant, handle** - what was saved
- **Quantity** and **Purchased quantity** - how many they want, and for registries how many guests have already bought
- **Price when added** - what it cost at the moment they saved it, which is what price-drop alerts compare against
- **Added at** - when it was saved

## What you can do with it

- **Restock planning** - sort by product to see what's wanted most, including items that are out of stock
- **Email segmentation** - filter to one product and upload those addresses as an audience
- **Registry fulfilment** - compare quantity against purchased quantity to see what's still needed
- **Price-drop campaigns** - compare price when added against today's price

## Notes

- Deleted lists aren't included
- There is no row limit. Files over 50,000 rows are emailed rather than downloaded (see above)
- Customers can also export their own single list from their wishlist page, which is a shorter file with just product, SKU and quantity

---

# Translations

> Customize text and support multiple languages

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/translations
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-09-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Every store has its own voice. Maybe "Favorites" fits your brand better than "Wishlist," or maybe you sell to shoppers in three languages and need the same care taken with the wishlist as with the rest of your storefront. Translations let you edit every text string Wishlist shows on the storefront.

## Edit your storefront text

1. Go to **Wishlist > Translations**
2. Pick your storefront language from the dropdown
3. Edit any text string you want to change
4. Click **Save**

Some common edits:

- "Wishlist" becomes "Favorites"
- "Add to Wishlist" becomes "Save for later"
- "My Wishlist" becomes "Saved items"

## Add another language

Your store's primary language is detected from Shopify automatically. To translate the wishlist into additional languages your store sells in, add the language in **Wishlist > Translations** and edit each string.

Wishlist includes ready-made translations for English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Portuguese, Dutch, Japanese, Korean, Simplified and Traditional Chinese, and more — you can use them as a starting point and tweak the wording to your brand.

Translations are available on the Max plan and above.

---

# Google Analytics

> Track wishlist events in GA4

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/google-analytics
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Integrations
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Connecting Wishlist to Google Analytics 4 puts wishlist behavior right next to the rest of your store analytics. You'll see which products get saved, how often saves turn into purchases, and you can build remarketing audiences from people who saved without buying.

## Connect Google Analytics

1. Go to **Wishlist > Integrations**
2. In the **Google Analytics** section, enter your **Measurement ID**
3. Enter your **API Secret**
4. Click **Save**

Wishlist events show up in your GA4 dashboard within a few minutes.

## Find your Measurement ID

1. Open [analytics.google.com](https://analytics.google.com)
2. Click **Admin** (the gear icon)
3. Pick your property
4. Click **Data Streams** and pick your web stream
5. Copy the **Measurement ID** — it starts with `G-` (for example, `G-ABC123DEF4`)

## Create an API Secret

1. In the same web stream in Google Analytics, click **Measurement Protocol API secrets**
2. Click **Create**
3. Copy the secret value

Treat the secret like a password — anyone with it can send events to your GA4 property.

## Which events get sent

Wishlist sends three events to GA4:

- **add_to_wishlist** — Fires when a shopper saves a product. Includes currency, value, and the item details (id, name, price, quantity).
- **remove_from_wishlist** — Fires when a shopper removes a product.
- **view_wishlist** — Fires when a shopper opens their wishlist page.

Google Analytics is available on the Max plan and above.

---

# Shopify Flow

> Automate your store when a shopper creates a list

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/shopify-flow
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Integrations
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Shopify Flow is Shopify's own automation tool. Wishlist sends an event to it when a shopper creates a list or saves a product, and when something changes about a saved product — back in stock, a price drop, low stock — so your store can react automatically: tag the customer, add them to a segment, post to Slack, or send the moment to Klaviyo. There's nothing to switch on: the connection ships with the app and is live as soon as Wishlist is installed.

## What Wishlist sends to Flow

- **New list created** - Runs when a shopper creates a wishlist or gift registry. Passes the list name and the customer it belongs to.
- **Product added to a list** - Runs when a signed-in customer saves a product to a wishlist or gift registry. Passes the customer, the product, the list name and the variant ID. Guests' saves don't run it, because Flow needs a Shopify customer.
- **Wishlisted product back in stock** - Runs once for each shopper who has the product on a list when it is available again. Passes the product, the **Shopper Email**, the **Customer ID** ("guest" for a guest who left an email), the variant ID and the list name.
- **Wishlisted product price dropped** - Runs once for each shopper whose saved product is now cheaper than when they saved it (and by at least the minimum drop you set in Customer notifications). Passes the same fields plus **Old Price** and **New Price**.
- **Wishlisted product low stock** - Runs once for each shopper when a saved product falls to your low-stock threshold. Passes the same fields plus **Quantity Left**. Low stock is watched while **Low stock** is switched on in Customer notifications & reminders, since that is where the threshold is set.

The last three run whether or not Wishlist's own email for that moment is switched on, so you can send it from another tool instead. Shoppers who unsubscribed from wishlist emails are left out.

You'll find them in Flow's trigger list under **Wishlists**.

## Build your first workflow

1. Install [Shopify Flow](https://apps.shopify.com/flow) if you don't have it — it's free from Shopify
2. Go to **Wishlist > Settings > Integrations** and click **Open Shopify Flow**
3. Click **Create workflow**
4. Choose **New list created** or **Product added to a list** as the trigger
5. Add the actions you want — the customer, the list name and (for a saved product) the product are available as variables in every step that follows

## Things worth automating

- **Tag the customer** so you can segment shoppers who use wishlists and market to them differently
- **Notify your team** in Slack or by email when a gift registry is created, so you can offer help with a big order
- **Add to a customer segment** for a follow-up campaign in Shopify Email
- **Tag the product** when customers save it, to see demand in your product list
- **Send wishlist moments to Klaviyo** with Klaviyo's **Track an event** action — see the **Klaviyo** article for the step-by-step recipe
- **Build an audience** of wishlist shoppers by tagging them, then use the tag in a customer segment for ads or Shopify Email

## Why a workflow might not run

- **Flow isn't installed.** The trigger only appears once Shopify Flow is on the store.
- **The workflow is turned off.** New workflows are drafts until you click **Turn on workflow**.
- **The shopper was a guest.** Product added to a list runs for signed-in customers only. The back in stock, price drop and low stock triggers do include guests who left their email.
- **The shopper unsubscribed.** Back in stock, price drop and low stock skip shoppers who unsubscribed from wishlist emails.
- **The list was created before you built the workflow.** Flow only reacts to events that happen after the workflow goes live — it doesn't backfill.

---

# Klaviyo

> Send wishlist back-in-stock, price-drop and low-stock moments to Klaviyo through Shopify Flow

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/klaviyo
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Integrations
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Klaviyo can email shoppers about their wishlists — a saved product back in stock, cheaper, or nearly gone — from your own Klaviyo flows and templates. Wishlist sends those moments to **Shopify Flow**, and Klaviyo's Flow connector passes them on to Klaviyo as events. There is nothing to connect inside Wishlist: you need Shopify Flow and Klaviyo installed on your store.

## What reaches Klaviyo

Each of these Wishlist triggers carries the shopper's email, which is what Klaviyo needs to find the profile:

- **Wishlisted product back in stock** — product, Shopper Email, Customer ID, Variant ID, List Name
- **Wishlisted product price dropped** — the same, plus Old Price and New Price
- **Wishlisted product low stock** — the same, plus Quantity Left
- **Product added to a list** — the customer (use the customer's email), the product, List Name and Variant ID. Signed-in customers only.

The first three include guests who left their email on your storefront. Shoppers who unsubscribed from wishlist emails are never passed on.

## Send a price drop to Klaviyo

1. In Shopify, open **Flow** (or **Wishlist > Settings > Integrations > Open Shopify Flow**) and click **Create workflow**
2. Choose the trigger **Wishlisted product price dropped** (listed under **Wishlists**)
3. Add the action **Track an event** from **Klaviyo**
4. Fill it in:
   - **Klaviyo public API key** — from Klaviyo, **Settings > API keys**
   - **Event name** — for example `Wishlist Price Drop`
   - **Customer email** — `{{shopperEmail}}`
   - **Event properties** — valid JSON, for example:

```
{
  "ProductName": "{{product.title}}",
  "ProductURL": "https://your-store.com/products/{{product.handle}}",
  "OldPrice": {{oldPrice}},
  "NewPrice": {{newPrice}},
  "ListName": "{{listName}}"
}
```

5. Click **Turn on workflow**

In Klaviyo, create a flow with the trigger **Metric > Wishlist Price Drop** and use the properties in the email, for example `{{ event.ProductName }}` and `{{ event.NewPrice }}`.

The same recipe works for **back in stock** (event name `Wishlist Back In Stock`) and **low stock** (`{{quantityLeft}}` instead of the prices). For **Product added to a list**, use `{{customer.email}}` as the customer email.

## Avoid sending two emails

If Klaviyo sends a moment, switch off Wishlist's own email for it in **Wishlist > Settings > Customer notifications & reminders**. The Flow triggers keep running with the email off. Low stock is the exception: keep **Low stock** on, because that switch also sets the threshold the trigger watches.

## Things to check when an event doesn't arrive

- **The workflow is off.** New workflows are drafts until you click **Turn on workflow**.
- **The event properties are not valid JSON.** Klaviyo drops the properties when the JSON is broken; a missing comma or quote is enough.
- **The shopper has no email.** A guest who never left an email cannot be passed on.
- **The shopper unsubscribed** from wishlist emails.
- **Flow only reacts to new events.** Price drops that happened before the workflow was turned on are not sent.

---

# Shopify Sidekick

> Ask Sidekick how-to questions about Wishlist

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/shopify-sidekick
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Integrations
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Sidekick is the assistant built into your Shopify admin. Wishlist connects to it, so you can ask questions about the app in your own words and get an answer drawn from these help articles — without leaving whatever page you're on or hunting through the docs yourself. There's nothing to set up: the connection ships with the app and works as soon as Wishlist is installed.

## Try asking Sidekick

Open Sidekick from anywhere in your Shopify admin and ask for what you want in plain language:

- "How do I add the wishlist button to my product pages?"
- "Why aren't back-in-stock emails going out?"
- "How do gift registries work in this app?"
- "What's included in my plan?"

Sidekick answers from the article that matches and links to it, so you can read the full version if you need more detail.

## What it can and can't do

- **It reads documentation.** Setup steps, how features behave, plan limits, billing, and common problems.
- **It doesn't read your store's data.** It won't tell you how many lists you have or which products are saved most — those live on the Wishlist dashboard and reports.
- **It doesn't change settings.** Anything you want configured, you do in the app.

## When it doesn't have an answer

If nothing in the docs covers your question, Sidekick says so and points you at the topics that are documented rather than guessing. When that happens, reply to any Wishlist email or contact support — a gap in the docs is useful for us to know about.

---

# Theme Integration

> How Wishlist integrates with your Shopify theme

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/theme-integration
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: For Developers
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Wishlist integrates with your Shopify theme through Shopify's theme app extension system. There's no manual code to paste — every component is added in the theme editor. This guide explains what each piece does and how they fit together, for developers who want to understand the integration.

## App embed

The app embed is a global script that loads on every page of the store. It powers:

- **Collection page icons** — Heart icons on product cards for quick saving
- **Quick access widget** — The floating wishlist icon in the corner of the screen
- **Confirmation messages** — Toast or modal popups when items are saved
- **Wishlist count badge** — Updates the count on the header icon

Turn it on in **Theme Editor > App embeds > Wishlist**. The embed adds a single script tag to your theme layout, reads its configuration from app metafields, and renders the wishlist UI from there.

## Product page button (theme block)

The wishlist button on product pages is a theme app block. It renders an "Add to Wishlist" button that reads the current product and variant from the page context.

Add it in **Theme Editor > Product page > Add block > Apps > Wishlist Button**. Drop it wherever you want — typically just below the Add to Cart button. The block detects the product ID and selected variant automatically.

## Header icon (theme block)

An optional theme block that adds a wishlist icon to the store header. It shows a heart with the saved item count.

Add it in **Theme Editor > Header > Add block > Wishlist Icon**. This is separate from the floating quick access widget — it lives inside the header section alongside the cart icon.

## Customer account extension

Wishlist also adds a section to Shopify's new customer account portal so logged-in shoppers can view and manage their wishlists from their account. This is a Shopify customer account UI extension, not a theme component.

Turn it on in **Settings > Customer accounts > Extensions**. Once it's on, shoppers see a **Wishlist** link in their account navigation.

## How the pieces talk to each other

The app embed script is the core. It tracks wishlist state, calls the wishlist API, and coordinates the other components. The product page button and collection icons send add and remove actions to the embed; the header icon reads the count from the same shared state.

Every storefront component depends on the app embed. Without it, the product page button still renders but the collection icons, floating widget, and confirmation messages won't appear.

---

# Button Not Showing

> Fix invisible wishlist buttons

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/button-not-showing
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-09-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Is the wishlist heart missing, or has the **Add to List** button disappeared? It's usually one of two things: the app embed is off, or the Wishlist block isn't on the page, most often after a theme change. Both are quick to fix.

## After a theme update or a new theme

Updating your theme to a new version, or publishing a different theme, is the most common reason the button disappears. The app embed and the Wishlist blocks belong to each theme, so the newly published theme may not have them yet. Your wishlists and saved items are not affected.

Make sure you work on the theme marked **Current theme** in **Online Store > Themes**, then follow the two checks below: turn the app embed on, and add the **Wishlist Button** and **Wishlist Icon** blocks back.

## Check the app embed

The app embed runs every wishlist feature on your store. If it's off, the hearts on product cards and the floating heart are gone, and the product page button can't save anything. If you haven't changed themes, check that it's still on:

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes**
2. Click **Customize** on the theme marked **Current theme**
3. Click **App embeds** in the left sidebar
4. Find **Wishlist** and make sure the toggle is on
5. Click **Save**

If **Wishlist** isn't listed under **App embeds** at all, contact us before you reinstall the app: uninstalling can delete your customers' saved wishlists.

## Check the block is on the page

The embed runs the hearts on product cards, the floating heart and the confirmation messages, but the product page button and the header icon are separate blocks you add by hand.

**Product page button:** In the theme editor, switch to **Products > Default product**. Look for **Wishlist Button** in the section list. If it's missing, click **Add block > Apps > Wishlist Button**, then click **Save**.

**Header icon:** Open your **Header** section. Look for **Wishlist Icon** in the block list. If it's missing, click **Add block > Apps > Wishlist Icon**, then click **Save**.

## Check for theme issues

A handful of theme situations need a bit more work:

- **Old themes** — May not support app blocks, so the **Wishlist Button** can't be added. Update the theme to its latest version, or contact us.
- **Custom themes** — The product template needs to accept app blocks (Online Store 2.0). If **Add block** shows no **Apps** option there, ask your theme developer or contact us.
- **Third-party themes** — Check the theme's docs for app compatibility, ask the theme developer, or reach out to us for CSS fixes.

## See the latest version of your page

If the button is added but you still don't see it, you may be looking at an older copy of the page that your browser saved.

- **Private window** — Open your store in a private or incognito window.
- **Another device** — Check the page on your phone, or on someone else's computer.
- **On a computer** — Hard-refresh the page with Ctrl+Shift+R (Windows) or Cmd+Shift+R (Mac).
- **CDN** — If you run a CDN in front of Shopify, purge the cache for your domain.

## Still stuck?

1. Check the page in a private window and on another device
2. Note where the heart is missing: product pages, collection pages, the floating heart or the header
3. Turn off other apps' embeds in **App embeds** one at a time to rule out a conflict, then turn them back on
4. Reach out to support with your store URL and what you noted

---

# Items Not Saving

> Fix wishlist items not persisting

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/items-not-saving
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If a shopper says their saved items keep disappearing, the cause is almost always browser storage or a script conflict. Guest wishlists live in the browser, while logged-in shoppers' wishlists sync to your account in Wishlist.

## Browser storage blocked?

For guests, wishlist data is kept in the browser. If the browser blocks storage, nothing saves.

To check, open the browser's developer tools (F12), go to **Application > Local Storage**, and look for wishlist entries. If it's empty, storage is being blocked.

To unblock:

- Open browser privacy settings
- Turn off "Block all cookies" if it's on
- Add your store to the allowed sites list
- Pause any privacy extensions temporarily

In private or incognito mode, wishlists work during the session but clear when the window closes. That's how those modes are supposed to work.

## Guest vs logged-in shoppers

- **Guest** — Data lives in the browser, sticks around until the browser is cleared, and merges into the account wishlist the moment the shopper logs in.
- **Logged-in** — Data syncs to your account in Wishlist, so it's available from any device and survives a browser wipe.

If a logged-in shopper's items aren't saving, confirm they're actually logged in, log out and back in, and check their customer account is in good standing in Shopify.

## Another app conflicting?

Other storefront apps can interfere with the wishlist. To find the culprit, turn off your other storefront apps one at a time and test the wishlist after each one.

Common offenders:

- Cookie consent banners (block storage)
- Analytics tools (throw JavaScript errors)
- Page speed optimizers (break the script)
- Cart drawers (clash on selectors)

Reach out to us with the conflicting app's name and we can ship a compatibility fix.

## Network problems

Open the browser developer tools (F12), switch to the **Network** tab, click the wishlist button, and watch for failed requests (red rows).

- **CORS errors** — Contact us, we'll check your domain config
- **Timeout errors** — Check the shopper's internet connection
- **403 errors** — App permissions may need refreshing — try reinstalling
- **500 errors** — Temporary server issue, try again

## Still stuck?

1. Try a different browser
2. Clear all browser data for your storefront
3. Reinstall the Wishlist app
4. Reach out to support with details

---

# Styling Issues

> Fix appearance problems

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist/styling-issues
App: Wishlists (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus Wishlists")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/wishlist-supply-list
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/wishlist
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-24
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If the wishlist looks off — wrong color, wrong size, partly hidden — your theme's CSS is usually fighting the wishlist's. A few lines of custom CSS in your theme settings will fix it without editing theme files.

## Find the conflict

1. Open your storefront and right-click the wishlist element
2. Pick **Inspect** to open the browser developer tools
3. In the **Styles** panel, look for crossed-out rules — those are styles your theme is overriding

Common culprits: theme sets `display: none` on app elements, theme button styles override the wishlist, icon fonts conflict with the SVG icons, or `z-index` issues hide elements behind other parts of the page.

## Where to put fixes

Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize > Theme settings > Custom CSS** and paste the snippets you need. The CSS applies across the storefront.

## Quick fixes

**Force the button to show:**

```css
.wishlist-button {
  display: inline-flex !important;
  z-index: 100 !important;
  position: relative !important;
}
```

**Reset icon size:**

```css
.wishlist-button svg { width: 20px !important; height: 20px !important; }
```

**Match the theme's icon size:**

```css
.wishlist-button svg {
  width: var(--icon-size, 20px);
  height: var(--icon-size, 20px);
}
```

**Match theme colors:**

```css
.wishlist-button svg { fill: var(--color-foreground, #333); }
.wishlist-button.is-saved svg { fill: var(--color-accent, #ff0000); }
```

**Hover effect:**

```css
.wishlist-button:hover svg {
  fill: #ff4444;
  transform: scale(1.1);
}
```

**Button alignment:**

```css
.wishlist-button { vertical-align: middle; margin: 10px 0; }
```

**Collection icon position:**

```css
.wishlist-icon {
  position: absolute;
  top: 10px;
  right: 10px;
}
```

## Theme-specific tweaks

**Dawn:**

```css
.product-form .wishlist-button { margin-top: 1rem; }
```

**Debut:**

```css
.product-single__meta .wishlist-button { display: block; margin: 10px 0; }
```

**Impulse:**

```css
.product__block .wishlist-button { padding: 0; }
```

---

# Installation

> Install the app and display videos on your store

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery/installation
App: YouTube Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus YouTube Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/youtube-gallery-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery
Section: Getting Started
Last updated: 2026-08-11
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

YouTube Video Gallery lets you display your YouTube videos directly on your Shopify store. Setup takes about 5 minutes: connect your YouTube account, create a gallery, and add it to your theme.

## Install the App

1. Find **YouTube Video Gallery** in the Shopify App Store and click **Add app**
2. Review the permissions and click **Install app**
3. You'll land on the app dashboard

## Connect Your YouTube Account

1. On the dashboard, click **Connect Channel**
2. Sign in with your Google account and allow access
3. You'll see a list of your YouTube channels — select the one you want to use and click **Add Channel**
4. The app imports your videos automatically

If you manage a business channel (Brand Account), make sure you select that channel rather than your personal one.

## Create a Gallery

A gallery is a collection of videos you want to display on a specific page of your store.

1. Go to **Galleries** and click **Create Gallery**
2. Give it a name (e.g., "Homepage Videos" or "Tutorials")
3. Choose how to populate it:
   - **All Videos** — automatically includes every video from your channel
   - **Specific Playlist** — pulls videos from one YouTube playlist
   - **Manual Selection** — you pick exactly which videos to include
4. Click **Create Gallery**

## Add Videos to Your Theme

The fastest way is the **Add to theme** button on the gallery's installation page — it opens your theme editor with the Video Gallery block ready to place. Otherwise:

1. Copy the **Gallery ID** shown on your gallery page
2. Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**
3. Navigate to the page where you want videos to appear
4. Click **Add section** or **Add block**, then select **Video Gallery** from the Apps list
5. Paste the Gallery ID into the block settings
6. Click **Save**

Once the block is placed, come back to the app and click **Complete Setup** to mark installation as done. Your videos are now live on your store. You can add the Video Gallery block to any page — homepage, product pages, a dedicated videos page, etc.

---

# Video Sources

> Connect YouTube channels and playlists

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery/video-sources
App: YouTube Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus YouTube Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/youtube-gallery-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-03-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

A channel is the YouTube channel (or playlist) the app pulls videos from. Once connected, videos sync automatically based on your gallery settings.

## Adding a Channel

Channels are added through Google sign-in, so the app can read your videos with YouTube's permission.

1. Go to **Channels** and click **Add Channel**
2. Click **Connect YouTube** and sign in with the Google account that owns the channel
3. Pick the channel from the list

The app starts importing the channel's public videos straight away. Signing in needs owner access to the channel; manager access to a Brand Account isn't enough for YouTube's API. Pasting a channel ID or someone else's public channel isn't supported.

## Channels and Playlists

- **Channel** — Gives the app access to all uploaded videos from that YouTube channel. Best when you want everything available to use in galleries.
- **Playlist** — A gallery can show one playlist from a connected channel (Pro and up). Pick it when you create the gallery. The number after each playlist is how many videos YouTube lists in it; the gallery shows fewer when some are private, unlisted (unless **Include unlisted videos** is on) or past your plan's video limit.

You can connect more than one channel on the paid plans: 2 on Pro, 5 on Max, any number on Ultra.

## Syncing Videos

When you upload a new video to YouTube, the app picks it up during the next sync cycle. Sync frequency is configured per gallery (see [Auto-Sync Settings](https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery/auto-sync)).

To sync immediately, go to **Channels**, click the channel and click **Sync Videos**, or click **Sync Videos** on the app's home page. A message confirms the sync started.

## Renaming a Channel

Click the channel, then **Edit**, to change the name the app shows for it. This works even when you're at your plan's channel limit.

## Removing a Channel

1. Go to **Channels**
2. Click the channel you want to remove
3. Click **Delete Channel** and confirm

Deleting a channel also removes all videos that were imported from it and the galleries built on it.

---

# Creating Galleries

> Create video galleries for your store

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery/creating-galleries
App: YouTube Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus YouTube Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/youtube-gallery-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-08-11
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Galleries are collections of videos that you display on your store. You can create multiple galleries with different videos for different pages — for example, a "Product Demos" gallery on your product page and a "Latest Videos" gallery on your homepage.

## Gallery Types

- **All Videos (Auto-sync)** — Automatically includes every video from a connected YouTube channel. New uploads appear automatically until your plan's video limit is reached (Free keeps your first 50 videos; uploads after that need Pro).
- **Specific Playlist** — Pulls videos from one YouTube playlist. The gallery stays in sync with that playlist.
- **Manual Selection** — You hand-pick exactly which videos to include. Nothing changes unless you edit the gallery.

## Creating a Gallery

A gallery needs a connected YouTube channel. Without one, **Create Gallery** takes you to **Channels**, which says to connect a channel first.

1. Go to **Galleries** and click **Create Gallery**
2. Enter a name for the gallery
3. Select your YouTube channel
4. Choose a type: All Videos, Specific Playlist, or Manual Selection
5. For playlist galleries, select which playlist to use. The number after each playlist is YouTube's count; private videos, unlisted ones (unless **Include unlisted videos** is on) and videos past your plan's limit don't show. If a gallery ends up empty, its page says why
6. For manual galleries, check the videos you want to include
7. Click **Create Gallery**

## Gallery ID

Every gallery has a unique **Gallery ID** (shown on the gallery page). You'll need this ID when adding the Video Gallery block to your theme. Click **Copy** next to the ID to copy it to your clipboard.

## Filter by Video Type

Channel galleries (All Videos or Specific Playlist) have a **Video Type** dropdown that controls whether YouTube Shorts are included. Manual selection galleries don't use this setting since you pick videos individually.

- **All videos** — show both regular videos and Shorts (default)
- **Exclude Shorts** — show only full-length videos, hide Shorts
- **Only Shorts** — show only Shorts, hide full-length videos

Edit a gallery and change **Video Type** to match what you want on the storefront. The change applies on the next page render — no re-sync needed.

## Sorting Videos

On the gallery page, use the **Sort** dropdown to change the display order:

- **Manually** — drag and drop videos into your preferred order
- **Newest first** / **Oldest first** — sort by publish date
- **Title A-Z** / **Title Z-A** — sort alphabetically

The sort order is reflected on your storefront.

## Adding a Gallery to Your Theme

1. Copy the **Gallery ID** from the gallery page
2. Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**
3. Navigate to the page you want
4. Click **Add section** or **Add block** and select **Video Gallery** from Apps
5. Paste the Gallery ID
6. Click **Save**

You can add the same gallery to multiple pages, or use different galleries on different pages.

## Editing and Deleting

- **Edit** — Click a gallery, make changes, and save
- **Delete** — Click a gallery, then **Delete**. If this gallery was used in your theme, the block will show nothing until you remove it or assign a different Gallery ID.

---

# Auto-Sync Settings

> Configure automatic video syncing

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery/auto-sync
App: YouTube Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus YouTube Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/youtube-gallery-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-03-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Auto-sync checks YouTube for new videos on a schedule and adds them to your galleries automatically, up to your plan's video limit (Free 50, Pro 500; see **Video Limits**). Each gallery has its own sync settings, so you can sync your homepage gallery every 6 hours while a less active gallery syncs daily.

## Setting Up Auto-Sync

1. Go to **Galleries** and click on a gallery
2. Click **Edit**
3. Under **Auto-Sync Settings**, toggle **Enable automatic syncing** on
4. Select a **Sync Frequency**
5. Click **Save**

Auto-sync only works for galleries connected to a YouTube channel (all videos or a playlist). Manual galleries don't have sync settings since you control the videos yourself.

## Available Sync Frequencies

| Plan | Frequencies |
|------|-------------|
| Free | Every 24 hours |
| Pro | Every 12 or 24 hours |
| Max | Every 6, 12, or 24 hours |
| Ultra | Every 1, 6, 12, or 24 hours |

## Preferred Sync Time

On the **Ultra** plan, you can choose a specific hour of the day for syncing. This is helpful if you publish videos at a predictable time and want the gallery to update shortly after.

If no time is set, syncs run at regular intervals based on the chosen frequency.

## Include Unlisted Videos

By default, only **public** YouTube videos are synced. If you have unlisted videos you want to display:

1. Edit the gallery
2. In the **Videos** card, check **Include unlisted videos**
3. Save

The setting belongs to the gallery: it works for channel and playlist galleries alike, and other galleries keep showing public videos only. Private videos are never synced regardless of this setting.

## Manual Sync

To pull new videos immediately without waiting for the next auto-sync:

1. Go to **Channels**
2. Click the channel
3. Click **Sync Videos**

This updates all galleries connected to that channel. **Sync Videos** on the app's home page syncs every channel at once.

## Disabling Auto-Sync

Edit the gallery and toggle **Enable automatic syncing** off. Existing videos stay in the gallery — only future automatic syncing stops.

---

# Display Settings

> Customize gallery appearance

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery/display-settings
App: YouTube Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus YouTube Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/youtube-gallery-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery
Section: Features
Last updated: 2026-03-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

All visual customization happens in the Shopify theme editor. Click on your **Video Gallery** block to access the settings below.

## Layout

- **Grid** — Videos display in rows and columns. Best for gallery pages or sections with many videos.
- **Carousel** — Videos display in a horizontal slider with navigation arrows. Best for homepage sections or featured video highlights.

## Section Header

- **Section Title** — Add a heading above the gallery (e.g., "Our Videos", "Tutorials")
- **Button Text** and **Button URL** — Add a call-to-action button next to the title (e.g., "View All" linking to your YouTube channel)
- **Open in new tab** — Whether the button link opens in a new browser tab
- **Align title and button inline** — Places the heading and button on the same line

## Videos Per Row

Control how many video thumbnails appear per row at each screen size:

- **Desktop** — 1 to 6 videos per row (default: 3)
- **Tablet** — 1 to 4 videos per row (default: 2)
- **Mobile** — 1 or 2 videos per row (default: 1)

## Pagination

For grid layout, choose how many videos to show per page:

- **6, 12, 18, or 24** videos per page (default: 12)

Visitors click through pages to see more videos.

## Text Alignment

Controls how video titles appear below thumbnails: **Left**, **Center**, or **Right**.

## Arrow Style (Carousel)

Choose between **Arrow** or **Chevron** style for carousel navigation.

## Colors

Match the gallery to your store's branding:

- **Play Button Color** — The play button overlay on video thumbnails
- **Button Background** — Background color of the section header button
- **Button Text** — Text color of the section header button
- **Button Border** — Border color of the section header button
- **Subscribe Color** — Color of the subscribe/channel link element
- **Thumbnail Text** — Color of video titles under thumbnails
- **Arrow Color** — Color of carousel navigation arrows

---

# Shopify Flow Automations

> Run a workflow when videos sync, or sync videos from a workflow

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery/shopify-flow
App: YouTube Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus YouTube Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/youtube-gallery-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery
Section: Features
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Shopify Flow is Shopify's own automation tool: it makes your store do something automatically when an event happens, such as posting to Slack, emailing your team or adding a tag, without any code. Flow is a free app from Shopify; install it from the Shopify App Store if you don't have it yet.

YouTube Gallery adds two triggers and one action to Flow. There is nothing to switch on: they ship with the app, and **Settings > Integrations** has a button that opens Flow.

## Triggers

- **Video gallery sync completed** — Runs each time a gallery that syncs automatically finishes syncing from YouTube. It carries **Gallery name**, **Videos added** (how many this sync added) and **Videos total** (how many the gallery holds now).
- **New video published** — Runs when a new YouTube video is synced into a gallery. It carries **Video title**, **YouTube URL** and **Gallery name**. It doesn't run for the videos imported when you first connect a channel, and runs at most 20 times per sync.

Both run on every plan. Unlisted and private videos follow the same rules as the gallery: a video the gallery can't show doesn't start the workflow.

## Action

- **Sync YouTube videos** — Pulls new videos from YouTube straight away, the same as **Sync Videos** in the app. Leave **Gallery** empty to sync every connected channel, or enter a gallery's ID (it starts with `gal_`) or exact name to sync only that gallery's channel. A manual gallery has no channel, so the step fails with a message saying so. The step also fails, with the reason, while YouTube is refusing your syncs (its daily limit is reached, or the channel needs reconnecting); the sync stays queued and runs once YouTube answers again.

## Example

Trigger **New video published**, then a Slack or email action with the message `New video on the store: {{ videoTitle }} in {{ galleryName }}` (pick the URL from the variables list to add a link).

---

# Video Limits

> Video storage limits by plan

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery/video-limits
App: YouTube Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus YouTube Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/youtube-gallery-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery
Section: Plans & Limits
Last updated: 2026-08-11
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Each plan has a cap on how many videos your account can store. This applies to the total number of videos across all channels and galleries.

## Limits by Plan

| | Free | Pro | Max | Ultra |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Videos | 50 | 500 | Unlimited | Unlimited |
| Galleries | 3 | 10 | Unlimited | Unlimited |
| Channels | 1 | 2 | 5 | Unlimited |
| Sync every | 24 hours | 12 or 24 hours | 6, 12 or 24 hours | 1, 6, 12 or 24 hours |
| Playlist and manual galleries | No | Yes | Yes | Yes |
| Analytics (impressions, clicks, plays) | No | Yes | Yes | Yes |
| Custom CSS | No | No | Yes | Yes |
| Preferred sync time | No | No | No | Yes |

The gallery and channel limits are about adding new ones: galleries and channels you already have stay editable when you're at the limit, and a downgrade never deletes them.

After a downgrade, videos you synced on the higher plan stay in the app, but each gallery displays only as many as the new plan allows. The banner and the dashboard's **Videos** figure count what your storefront displays: with 52 videos synced, 72 on your channel and a 50-video plan, they show `50 / 72` and 22 not displayed.

## What Happens When You Reach the Limit

- **Importing stops at the cap** — If your channel has 500 videos and your plan allows 50, the sync imports 50 and stops there. The remaining 450 stay on YouTube and never enter the app, so they can't appear in a gallery
- **Free keeps your first 50** — The first sync imports your 50 most recent videos (YouTube returns uploads newest-first). Once the account holds 50, videos you upload after that don't sync and don't appear in your galleries until you upgrade to Pro. Pro does the same at 500; Max and Ultra have no video limit
- **Existing videos stay put** — Nothing gets removed, and a new upload never pushes an older video out, so an **All videos** gallery does not keep showing your latest uploads once you're at the cap. Your storefront stays stable instead of silently reshuffling when you post
- **Titles and thumbnails still update** — Videos already imported keep syncing their details from YouTube, even while the account is at its cap
- **The app tells you** — A banner on your dashboard, galleries, and videos pages names how many videos aren't being displayed, the sync screen shows the same while it's running, and the **Videos** figure on your dashboard switches to your synced count over your channel's real total (for example, `50 / 500`)
- **You get a monthly email** — While your account sits at its cap with videos still on YouTube, we email you once every 30 days with the numbers. It stops when you upgrade or the extra videos are no longer there

## Freeing Up Space

- **Upgrade your plan** — Go to **Settings** and select a higher plan. Syncing resumes immediately.
- **Delete videos you don't need** — Go to **Videos**, select the ones to remove, and delete them
- **Remove a channel** — Deleting a channel removes all its videos, freeing up your quota

## Checking Your Usage

The **Videos** figure on your dashboard shows where you stand. Under your limit it reads as your count over your plan's cap — `42 / 50` — with a badge once you pass 80%. Once the cap is holding videos back, it switches to your synced count over the number of videos actually on your channel — `50 / 500` — so you can see what upgrading would add. Your plan details in **Settings** show the same limit.

---

# Videos Not Displaying

> Fix invisible video galleries

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery/videos-not-displaying
App: YouTube Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus YouTube Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/youtube-gallery-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-11
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If your video gallery isn't showing up on your storefront, work through these checks in order. The most common cause is a missing or misconfigured theme block.

## Video Gallery Block Not Added

The gallery needs a **Video Gallery** block in your theme to display.

1. Go to **Online Store > Themes > Customize**
2. Navigate to the page where you expect videos
3. Look for a **Video Gallery** block in the sidebar
4. If it's missing, click **Add section** or **Add block** and select **Video Gallery** from Apps
5. Save

## Gallery ID Not Entered

Each Video Gallery block needs a Gallery ID to know which gallery to show.

1. In the theme editor, click on the Video Gallery block
2. Check the **Gallery ID** field — if it's empty, that's why nothing displays
3. Copy the Gallery ID from your gallery page in the app and paste it in
4. Save

## Only Shorts (or Only Full Videos) Showing

Each gallery has a **Video Type** filter that decides whether YouTube Shorts are included alongside full-length videos:

- **All videos** — both Shorts and full videos appear (default)
- **Exclude Shorts** — full-length videos only
- **Only Shorts** — Shorts only

If your storefront only shows Shorts when you expected full videos (or the reverse), edit the gallery and switch **Video Type** to the option you actually want. The change is instant — no re-sync needed.

## Gallery Has No Videos, or Was Deleted

A block whose gallery has no videos, or whose Gallery ID belongs to a gallery you deleted, shows nothing on your storefront: shoppers never see an empty box. Open the page in the theme editor to see why. The block says **Gallery not found** when the ID no longer matches a gallery (copy a current ID from the app), or **No Videos in Gallery** when the gallery is empty.

If the Gallery ID is correct but the gallery itself is empty:

- **Auto-sync galleries** — Check that the source has videos and run a manual sync from **Channels**
- **Manual galleries** — Edit the gallery and select videos to include
- **Video Type filter** — If you set **Exclude Shorts** but your channel only uploads Shorts (or vice versa), the gallery filters everything out. Switch the filter to **All videos** to confirm.

## YouTube Account Disconnected

Videos can't sync without a connected YouTube account. Check **Settings > Connected Accounts** to verify your YouTube channel is connected. If it shows as disconnected, click **Connect** to reconnect.

## Theme Not Published

If videos appear in the theme preview but not on your live store, make sure you've published your theme changes. Click **Save** in the theme editor, then verify you're editing the live (published) theme.

## Browser Cache

Try viewing your store in an incognito/private window. If videos appear there, clear your browser cache.

---

# YouTube Connection Issues

> Fix YouTube connection problems

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery/connection-issues
App: YouTube Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus YouTube Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/youtube-gallery-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-03-12
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If you're having trouble connecting your YouTube account or your connection stopped working, here are the most common causes and fixes.

## No YouTube Channel Found

Your Google account needs a YouTube channel. If you've never created one:

1. Go to [YouTube Studio](https://studio.youtube.com)
2. Follow the prompts to create a channel
3. Come back to the app and try connecting again

## Wrong Google Account Selected

If you manage multiple Google accounts, you may have connected with the wrong one.

1. Sign out of all Google accounts in your browser
2. Sign into only the Google account that owns your YouTube channel
3. In the app, go to **Settings > Connected Accounts**, disconnect the current account, and reconnect

## Brand Account Not Showing

Business YouTube channels are often under a Brand Account, which is separate from your personal Google account. When connecting, look for a screen that lets you choose which channel to use. Select your business channel, not your personal one.

If you missed it, disconnect and reconnect — the channel selection screen appears during the connection process.

## Permission Errors

If the app can't access your videos, you may not have granted the required permissions.

1. Go to [Google Account Permissions](https://myaccount.google.com/permissions)
2. Find **YouTube Video Gallery** and remove it
3. Reconnect in the app — this time, make sure to allow all requested permissions

## Connection Stopped Working

YouTube connections can break after a password change or Google security review. Go to **Settings > Connected Accounts** and click **Connect** to re-authorize.

---

# Video Sync Issues

> Fix video syncing problems

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery/sync-issues
App: YouTube Gallery (on the Shopify App Store as "Pasilobus YouTube Gallery")
Shopify App Store: https://apps.shopify.com/youtube-gallery-pasilobus
App help: https://help.pasilobus.com/youtube-gallery
Section: Troubleshooting
Last updated: 2026-08-11
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

If new videos aren't appearing in your galleries or syncing seems stuck, here's how to diagnose and fix it.

## New Videos Not Appearing

- **Wait for the next sync** — Videos sync on a schedule based on your gallery's sync frequency. For immediate results, go to **Channels**, click the channel, and click **Sync Videos**.
- **Check the video's privacy** — Only **public** videos sync by default. **Private** videos never sync. **Unlisted** videos only sync if you've enabled "Include unlisted videos" in the gallery's auto-sync settings.
- **Read the Videos page** — Once the first sync has finished, the line "Private or unlisted on YouTube, not synced" counts videos your channel has on YouTube that the app skips because of their privacy. "Still syncing" only shows while a channel's first sync is running.
- **Check your video limit** — If you've reached your plan's limit, importing stops there and the rest of your channel stays on YouTube. Your dashboard shows how many aren't being displayed. Upgrade your plan or delete videos you don't need, and the next sync picks up where it stopped.

## "We couldn't reach YouTube" Banner

When YouTube doesn't answer a sync, a red banner on **Home**, **Channels**, **Galleries** and **Videos** says why, and the channel's **Last synced** column shows **Last sync failed**:

- **Syncing is paused until YouTube's daily limit resets** — YouTube limits how many requests apps can make each day. The limit resets at midnight Pacific time and syncing resumes on its own.
- **Reconnect your channel** — Google no longer accepts the app's access to your channel (for example, access was removed from your Google account). Click **Reconnect channel** and sign in with Google again.
- **Your last sync didn't finish** — YouTube didn't answer. The next sync tries again.

While the banner shows, your galleries show only videos YouTube has confirmed are public. A video whose privacy hasn't been confirmed yet is listed on the **Videos** page as **Status unknown** and appears in your galleries once a sync confirms it. If a gallery has "Include unlisted videos" on, it keeps showing public and unlisted videos. Private videos never show.

## Auto-Sync Not Running

Make sure auto-sync is actually enabled for the gallery:

1. Go to **Galleries** and click the gallery
2. Click **Edit**
3. Under **Auto-Sync Settings**, verify the toggle is on and a frequency is selected

Auto-sync is only available for galleries connected to a channel (all videos or a playlist). Manual galleries don't auto-sync.

## Videos Disappeared from a Gallery

This can happen if:

- The video was deleted or made private on YouTube
- The video was removed from the YouTube playlist (for playlist-based galleries)
- The channel was deleted from the app, which also removes its videos

Check your YouTube channel or playlist to confirm the videos still exist there.

## Manual Sync Button Does Nothing

Verify that:

- Your YouTube account is still connected (check **Settings > Connected Accounts**)
- You haven't reached your plan's video limit
- The channel still exists in **Channels**

---

# Signing in to your Pasilobus account

> Sign in with a code we email you, no password, and find your stores, apps and requests

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/account/sign-in
Part of: Pasilobus account (https://help.pasilobus.com/account)
Section: Your account
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Your Pasilobus account at [cloud.pasilobus.com](https://cloud.pasilobus.com) is where you see your stores, the Pasilobus apps on them, Store Care, your Store Check results and the requests you've sent our team. There's no password to remember: you sign in with a code we email you.

## Sign in with an email code

1. Go to [cloud.pasilobus.com/users/sign_in](https://cloud.pasilobus.com/users/sign_in)
2. Enter your email address and click **Continue with email**
3. Check your email for a message with a 6-digit code
4. Enter the code and click **Sign in**

The same email also has a **Sign in** button. It works on any device: open the email on your phone, tap the button, then tap **Sign in** once more on the page that opens.

New here? The same steps create your account. There's no separate sign-up.

## If the code doesn't work

- **It expired** - a code lasts 15 minutes and works once. Click **Resend code** for a new one (you can ask again after 30 seconds)
- **Too many tries** - after 5 wrong codes, that code stops working. Ask for a new one
- **You asked twice** - only the newest code works. Use the code from the latest email
- **No email** - check your spam folder, and that the address is spelled right. **Use a different email** takes you back to the first step

## Two-factor authentication

If you turned on two-factor authentication, Pasilobus asks for the code from your authenticator app after your email code. Enter it and click **Verify**.

## Several accounts

If your email belongs to more than one Pasilobus account (for example your own store and a client's), Pasilobus asks which one to open. You can make one your default so it opens straight away, and switch accounts later from the menu.

## What's in your account

- **Home** - your stores at a glance, with anything that needs you
- **Stores** - each Shopify store on the account. A store appears here once a Pasilobus app is installed on it
- **Store checks** - your Store Check results and weekly monitoring (see [Store Check](https://help.pasilobus.com/account/store-check))
- **Apps** - the Pasilobus apps on your stores, and the rest of our apps
- **Store Care** - your plan, your requests and what our team did on your store (see [Store Care updates](https://help.pasilobus.com/account/store-care-updates))
- **Support** - send our team a request and follow the conversation (see [Contacting the Pasilobus team](https://help.pasilobus.com/account/contact-support))
- **Team** and **Settings** - who else can use the account, and your own preferences

---

# Contacting the Pasilobus team

> Email us or send a request from your account, and what to include so we can help quickly

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/account/contact-support
Part of: Pasilobus account (https://help.pasilobus.com/account)
Section: Your account
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

The people who build Pasilobus apps answer support themselves. There are two ways to reach us, and a person reads every message. We don't offer live chat.

## Email us

Write to [support@pasilobus.com](mailto:support@pasilobus.com) about any Pasilobus app, Store Care or your account. A person replies by email, usually within one business day.

Inside an app, **Start a conversation** on its **Get Support from Pasilobus** page opens an email to the same address, with the app and your store already in the subject.

## Send a request from your account

If you'd rather keep everything in one place, sign in to your Pasilobus account and open **Support**:

1. Go to [cloud.pasilobus.com/support](https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support) and sign in with your email (we email you a code, no password)
2. If you have more than one store, choose **Which store**
3. Fill in **What do you need?** and **Any detail that would help**
4. Click **Send request**

Our team is emailed straight away. You'll see the request on the **Support** page with its number and status (**Open**, **In progress**, **Needs your reply** or **Resolved**), and we reply both there and by email. You don't need a store or a plan to send one.

## What to include

A few details save a round of questions:

- **The app** - its name, for example Pasilobus Wishlists
- **Your store** - its .myshopify.com address
- **What you expected and what happened** - and the page where you saw it
- **What changed recently** - a theme update, a new app, a setting you changed
- **A screenshot or a link** - if you can

## How fast we answer

Questions about our apps, by email or from your account, are answered by a person, usually within one business day.

On Store Care, work on your store has its own commitment: your plan's response time is how soon we come back to a Store Care request with what we'll do and when. It is within 72 hours on Essentials, within 48 hours on Care, and same day, including weekends on Growth (see [Store Care plans and how requests work](https://help.pasilobus.com/account/store-care-plans)).

Questions about our own apps are always free. You never need a plan to get help with an app you use.

---

# Store Care plans and how requests work

> What each plan includes, how fast we answer, and how bigger work is quoted before we start

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/account/store-care-plans
Part of: Pasilobus account (https://help.pasilobus.com/account)
Section: Store Care
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Store Care puts the team that builds your Pasilobus apps on your store, month after month: we watch it, fix what breaks, set up and tune your apps, and take on bigger work as requests. Every plan is monthly, and you can cancel anytime.

## The plans

| | **Essentials** | **Care** | **Growth** |
|---|---|---|---|
| Price | $299/mo | $799/mo | $1,799/mo |
| Response time | Within 72 hours | Within 48 hours | Same day, including weekends |
| Requests | Fixes when something breaks | 1 request at a time | 3 requests at a time |
| Fixes for theme and app issues | Yes | Yes | Yes |
| Weekly Store Check of your store | Yes | Yes | Yes |
| Care log and update emails | Yes | Yes | Yes |
| App setup and tuning | - | Yes | Yes |
| Monthly health report | - | Yes | Yes |
| Paid plans of our apps included | - | - | Yes |
| Monthly conversion work | - | - | Yes |
| Monthly growth review with a named lead | - | - | Yes |
| Seasonal and Black Friday setups | - | - | Yes |
| Bigger work (new section, redesign, move to Shopify) | A request with a fixed quote you approve first | A request with a fixed quote you approve first | A request with a fixed quote you approve first |

- **Essentials** ($299/mo) - A team on call for when something breaks.
- **Care** ($799/mo) - A team that keeps your store healthy every month.
- **Growth** ($1,799/mo) - A team that grows your store through apps and store work.

Every plan: monthly, cancel anytime.

## How requests work

1. **Ask** - tell us what you need in your own words, from **Store Care** or **Support** in your account
2. **We agree it** - we confirm what we'll do and when, within your plan's response time
3. **See it done** - each piece of work lands in your care log: what changed, who did it and when (see [Store Care updates](https://help.pasilobus.com/account/store-care-updates))

You can follow every request, and reply to us, on its own page in your account.

## Bigger work

A new section, a redesign or a new feature is a request inside your plan too. We send you a fixed quote first, and start only when you approve it. Nothing is added to your bill without your yes.

Moving to Shopify needs no plan: get a free quote and one fixed price within 48 hours (see [Moving to Shopify](https://help.pasilobus.com/account/moving-to-shopify)).

## Starting a plan

Open [Store Care](https://cloud.pasilobus.com/store-care) and click **Choose** on the plan you want. After you sign in, your request goes straight to our care team with the plan named. We confirm the plan, the start date and billing with you before anything is charged.

## Billing

We agree how and when Store Care is billed with you when your plan starts, before anything is charged. Your account's **Billing** page shows what you pay Pasilobus each month: Store Care, and your app plans (apps bill through Shopify, on your store's Shopify invoice), with each charge listed.

## Changing, pausing or cancelling

Every plan is monthly and you can cancel anytime. In your account, open **Store Care** and click **Ask about my plan** (under **Change or pause your plan**). Tell us whether you want to change, pause or cancel, and we'll confirm the change and the date it takes effect with you.

---

# Store Care updates

> See what our team did on your store, and choose how you hear about it

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/account/store-care-updates
Part of: Pasilobus account (https://help.pasilobus.com/account)
Section: Store Care
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

On Store Care, the people who build your Pasilobus apps look after your store every month. Everything they do on it is posted to your care log in your account, so you can always see what changed, who did it and when, even in a quiet week when you didn't ask for anything. [Open your care log](https://cloud.pasilobus.com/store_care) (you sign in with an email code).

## Where to find updates

Open **Store Care** in the menu of your Pasilobus account. The **What we did on your store** section lists every update, newest first and grouped by week (**This week**, **Last week**, then **Week of …**). **Home** shows the latest few, with a link to the rest.

Each update shows:

- **Kind** - what sort of work it was (see below)
- **Status** - **Done**, **In progress** or **Scheduled** (planned for the date shown)
- **What we did** - in plain words, often with the result, like how much faster a page got
- **Who did it** - for example "by Sam from the Pasilobus team", and when
- **The request it belongs to** - when the work answers something you asked for, a link to that request and its conversation

If you have more than one store on Store Care, each update also names its store.

## What the kinds mean

- **Fix** - something that was broken now works
- **Check** - we looked something over, such as checkout after a theme update
- **Audit** - a review with findings, such as product SEO or page speed
- **Campaign** - promotion work, such as a sale banner or holiday preparation
- **Update** - anything else we changed or set up

## New updates

When we post something you haven't seen, a small dot appears next to **Store Care** in the menu, and the update is marked **New**. Opening Store Care clears the dot. Everyone on your account has their own dot, so a teammate reading the feed doesn't clear yours.

## Emails and the weekly summary

Everyone on your Pasilobus account gets an email when we post an update, titled "What we did on" and your store's name. If we post several updates within a few minutes, they arrive together as one email. The person who posted an update is never emailed about it.

On Mondays you also get a weekly summary, a short report of the previous week: the updates we posted, the requests we resolved, and this week's Store Check of your store, with its score, how it changed and any problems found or fixed. A week with no update and no finished Store Check sends no summary.

To stop these emails, click **Stop Store Care emails** at the bottom of any of them, then **Stop these emails**. The same page has **Turn them back on** if you change your mind. Your Store Care page keeps showing every update either way, and emails about your requests are not affected.

---

# Moving to Shopify

> Get a free quote with the usual price on the spot, then one fixed price within 48 hours, paid in parts

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/account/moving-to-shopify
Part of: Pasilobus account (https://help.pasilobus.com/account)
Section: Store Care
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Moving your store to Shopify starts with a free quote: no account, no plan to pick first. You tell us where you sell today and what should come with you, see the usual price for a move like yours on the spot, and get one fixed price within 48 hours. Nothing is charged until you accept it.

## Getting a free quote

Open [Moving to Shopify](https://www.pasilobus.com/pages/migration-to-shopify) and choose where you start from:

- **My store's address** - paste your current store's address (WooCommerce, Magento, Wix, Squarespace, BigCommerce or anything else). We read its public pages to see which platform it runs on and how many products it lists
- **My Etsy shop** - paste your shop's link. Etsy doesn't let anyone read shops automatically, so we ask roughly how many products you have
- **Starting from scratch** - no store yet. Tell us roughly how many products you'll sell

Then answer three questions: what should come with you (products, customers, order history), whether to keep your look or start fresh, and when you need it. Add your name and email so we can send the fixed price. If we can't read your store, the range comes from your answers instead; we never guess a number we didn't see.

## The usual price ranges

- **Small store** - up to about 100 products: usually from $2,500
- **Medium store** - up to about 1,000 products, with customers and order history: usually from $5,000
- **Complex move** - B2B or wholesale prices, an ERP or stock system to connect, 5,000 or more products, or anything unusual: no number on the page. We scope it on a short call with the person who would lead your move, and you pay in milestones you sign off

**What raises the price:** years of order history, custom features, and apps to replace. **Not included unless your proposal lists it:** new custom features, and paid theme or app licences. Shopify's own monthly plan is separate and paid to Shopify.

## Your fixed price within 48 hours

Within 48 hours we send one fixed price as a proposal you can read, accept and sign online. It names the person building your move and your launch date. Nothing is charged until you accept it.

## How payments work

You pay $500 to start, then a fixed number of weekly payments, with the last part on launch day. The price and the number of payments are fixed when you sign.

For example, a $5,000 move is $500 to start, 5 weekly payments of $700, and $1,000 on launch day.

## While we move you, and after

- **Your old store stays live** until launch, so you keep selling while we build
- **The first 30 days after launch are covered** - if something from the move needs fixing, we fix it
- **Store Care at launch is optional** - pick a plan with the first month free, or don't. Nothing renews unless you choose it, and the first 30 days of fixes are covered either way (see [Store Care plans](https://help.pasilobus.com/account/store-care-plans))

---

# Store Check

> Check any store's speed, search, selling basics and trust for free, and get an email when it gets worse

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/account/store-check
Part of: Pasilobus account (https://help.pasilobus.com/account)
Section: Store Check
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

Store Check is a free health check for any Shopify store. Paste the store's address and in about half a minute you get a score out of 100 and a short list of what to fix, most important first. You don't need an account, and you can check any store, not only your own.

## Run a check

Go to [pasilobus.com/tools/store-check](https://www.pasilobus.com/tools/store-check), type the store's address (for example **yourstore.com**) and click **Check my store**. The page shows each step while it runs. When it's done you get a result page with its own link, so you can share it or come back to it later.

## What we check

The check loads your home page, a product page, a collection page and a few files Google reads, much like a shopper or a search engine would. It looks at four areas:

- **Speed** - Google's mobile speed test, loading times from real visits when Google has them, how fast your store answers, and the scripts on your home page
- **Search** - page titles and descriptions, headings, image descriptions, product details for Google, robots.txt and your sitemap
- **Selling basics** - sold-out products without a way to get notified, reviews, a free shipping message, and search
- **Trust** - store policies, contact details, broken links in your menu and footer, and how pages work on phones

The **What we saw** panel also lists your theme and the apps that load on these pages. It's there for information and doesn't change the score.

## How the score works

Each area scores the points it earned out of the points possible. A warning counts half, and anything we couldn't check doesn't count either way. Your overall score is the average of the areas.

If Google's speed test didn't run, Speed shows **Basic check only** and is left out of the overall score, because response time and script counts alone can't tell whether a store feels fast.

**What we checked** at the bottom of the result lists every check that passed, anything we couldn't check and why, and every page and file we loaded.

## Fixing what we found

Each problem says why it matters and how to fix it yourself, usually with the place to change it in your Shopify admin. Where one of our apps does exactly that job, it's suggested with its price. If you'd rather have it done for you, **Store Care** members can ask our team to fix it.

## Get the full report by email

Right under the score, type your email and click **Email me the full report**. It's free, and the score itself never needs an email. The report arrives in a few minutes with:

- **Your score** and the problems worth fixing first, with how to fix each
- **A phone screenshot** of your home page from Google's speed test, with boxes around the parts Google measured as a problem (only when the speed test ran)
- **Notes from Pasilo, our assistant**, on what to fix first and why, written only from what the check measured

The email links to a web version of the report you can open again later.

Tick **Also check this store every Monday** if you'd like the weekly check too. Nothing starts until you click **Start the weekly check** in the report email, and after that we email you only when the score drops or a new problem appears.

We use your email only for the report and, if you confirm it, the weekly check. To stop, click **Unsubscribe** at the bottom of the email: no more reports go to that address, and weekly checks started from a report stop emailing you.

## Check a store every week

Click **Monitor weekly, free** on a result and sign in with your email (we send you a code, there's no password). We check the store again every Monday and email you only when the score drops by 3 points or more, or a new problem appears. Quiet weeks send nothing.

Your monitored stores are under **Store checks** in your Pasilobus account, with each store's latest score, how it changed, and its past checks. From there you can **Check again now** or **Stop** monitoring a store. You can monitor up to 10 stores.

Stores on **Store Care** are checked every Monday automatically, and the result is included in your Monday Store Care summary.

To stop the emails without signing in, use the unsubscribe link at the bottom of any Store Check email.

## Stores we can't check

- **Stores that aren't on Shopify**, or Shopify stores with a custom-built storefront, get "doesn't look like a Shopify store"
- **Addresses that point to private or internal networks** are refused
- **Password-protected stores** can only be checked once they're open to visitors

To keep the check fair to the stores being checked, each visitor can run a limited number of checks per hour and per day.

---

# Using Pasilobus with AI assistants and the CLI

> Ask Shopify Sidekick, open any article in Claude or ChatGPT, and run our apps with the Pasilobus CLI

Source: https://help.pasilobus.com/account/ai-and-cli
Part of: Pasilobus account (https://help.pasilobus.com/account)
Section: AI assistants and developers
Support: email support@pasilobus.com or send a request from https://cloud.pasilobus.com/support (no chat)

You can bring these guides, and our apps, into the AI assistant you already use. Store owners need nothing technical: Shopify Sidekick and any chat assistant work with these pages as they are. Developers can also run our apps from the terminal with the Pasilobus CLI.

## Ask Shopify Sidekick

Sidekick is the AI assistant built into your Shopify admin. Many of our apps work with it: ask about the app in your own words, from any page in your admin, and Sidekick looks the answer up in these guides. Some apps also let Sidekick fill in a form in the app for you to check and save. Nothing changes until you save. An app's help page says when it works with Sidekick.

## Use any article with Claude or ChatGPT

Every article has a **Use with AI** menu next to its title:

- **Copy page as Markdown** - copies the article as plain text, ready to paste into any assistant
- **View as Markdown** - opens the plain-text version. You can also add `.md` to the end of any article's address
- **Open in Claude** and **Open in ChatGPT** - start a chat that reads the article, so you can ask about your own store

For an assistant that reads the whole help center, point it at [help.pasilobus.com/llms.txt](https://help.pasilobus.com/llms.txt), a short index of every app and article, or [llms-full.txt](https://help.pasilobus.com/llms-full.txt), every article in one file.

## Run our apps from the terminal

The Pasilobus CLI runs your Pasilobus apps from the command line, for developers and for coding agents such as Claude Code. It needs Node 20 or later.

```
npm install -g pasilobus
pasilobus login
pasilobus use your-store.myshopify.com
pasilobus apps
pasilobus announcer help
```

- **Signing in** - `pasilobus login` prints a link and a code. Open the link in any browser, sign in to your Pasilobus account and approve. This works over ssh and in containers too. `pasilobus logout` signs out
- **Stores** - the CLI works on the stores linked to your Pasilobus account (the ones under **Stores** at cloud.pasilobus.com; a store is linked once a Pasilobus app is installed on it). `pasilobus stores` lists them. Choose one with `pasilobus use`, `--shop` or the `PASILOBUS_SHOP` variable
- **Commands** - `pasilobus apps` lists the apps on the store, and `pasilobus <app>` (or `pasilobus <app> help`) lists what that app can do. Each app brings its own commands, so they are listed by the app rather than in one reference
- **Changes** - the version on npm today, 0.1.0, runs a command that changes your store as soon as you enter it. Start with commands that only read, and try changes on a development store first. The next release adds a preview: a change shows what it would do and asks first, `--dry-run` only shows it, and `--yes` (or `-y`) applies it without asking, for scripts and agents
- **Output** - `--json` prints the result as JSON

For a coding agent such as Claude Code, a line like this in your CLAUDE.md or AGENTS.md keeps you in charge: "Use the Pasilobus CLI to look things up. Ask me before running any command that changes my store."

The [README on npm](https://www.npmjs.com/package/pasilobus) covers installing, signing in, choosing a store and the environment variables ([as Markdown](https://unpkg.com/pasilobus/README.md) for your agent).

## Connect an AI assistant (MCP, early access)

Our MCP server lets Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP clients use your Pasilobus apps directly. It is in early access: any Pasilobus account can connect now with its sign-in, and we're adding to it with developers first. Tools that change your store are marked as changes, so your assistant can ask you before running them.

- **Server address** - `https://cloud.pasilobus.com/mcp`
- **Claude Code** - run `claude mcp add --transport http pasilobus https://cloud.pasilobus.com/mcp`, then `/mcp` in Claude Code to sign in with your Pasilobus account
- **Other clients** - add a remote (HTTP) MCP server with the address above; the client opens a Pasilobus sign-in the first time

To hear about what's new, join the list on our [developers page](https://www.pasilobus.com/pages/agentic#waitlist).